World of OS/2/W_OS_2.BIN/PRCP02.HLP

OS/2 Help File | 1994-02-01 | 492KB | 15,817 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. TCP/IP VERSION 1.2 FOR OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF NOVEMBER 12, 1993.)

IBM announces TCP/IP Version 1.2 for OS/2.  This product provides upgrades to
function previously provided in TCP/IP V1.1 and 1.0 for OS/2 as well as support
of OS/2 Standard Edition V1.3, Extended Edition 1.3, and OS/2 Version 2.0.
Additionally, there are performance enhancements and new functions which
further define IBM business solution for customers in a multivendor
environment.

TCP/IP Version 1.2 for OS/2 interoperates with IBM's TCP/IP products for VM,
MVS, DOS, AS/400, System/88 and the AIX family.

To provide flexibility in ordering to customers with different networking
needs, new packaging options are offered for TCP/IP V1.2 for OS/2: Base kit,
Network File System (NFS), Extended Networking, XWindow System, a Programmers'
Toolkit and a Source kit.

IBM's networking vision is to provide customers the ability to collect, manage,
access and integrate information among departments, locations, and companies,
worldwide....and do it simply and easily.

IBM believes that the customer's environment will be composed of OSI, TCP/IP,
SNA, and other networks coexisting in a heterogeneous state.

IBM must support the customer's freedom of choice, and flexibility required, to
create a network from diverse technologies, with total interoperability and
comprehensive end-to-end management support and functions.

In today's environment, TCP/IP is the most widely accepted product for support
of multivendor networks.  TCP/IP Version 1.2 for OS/2 interoperates with IBM's
TCP/IP products for VM, MVS, DOS, AS/400, System/88 and the AIX family and
products that provide equivalent protocol support.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   XWindow System Server and NFS Server Support
    o   Internet Protocol (IP) over X.25 Support
    o   Network Device Interface Specification (NDIS) Support
    o   Simple Network Management Protocol Enhancements
    o   VT220 Emulation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. IBM OS/2 VERSION 2.0 DEVELOPER'S TOOLKIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

10G2-994   IBM WorkFrame/2 Version 1.0 (3.5-inch)  (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER
AVAILABLE AS OF AUGUST 04, 1993.)

10G4-333   IBM OS/2 Version 2.0 Developer's Workbench (3.5-inch)  (FOR IBM US,
NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF AUGUST 04, 1993.)

10G2-996   IBM C Set/2 Version 1.0 (3.5-inch)  (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE
AS OF AUGUST 04, 1993.)

10G2-995   IBM C Developer's WorkSet/2 (3.5-inch)  (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER
AVAILABLE AS OF AUGUST 04, 1993.)

10G3-356   IBM OS/2 Version 2.0 Technical Library

IBM introduces four new products and two new convenience kits.  The two
convenience kits are described as follows:

IBM OS/2 Version 2.0 Developer's Workbench consists of IBM OS/2 Version 2.0
Developer's Toolkit and IBM WorkFrame/2 Version 1.0 program packages. The IBM
OS/2 Version 2.0 Developer's Workbench convenience kit provides the user with a
flexible, language-independent base for application development.

IBM C Developer's WorkSet/2 adds the IBM C Set/2 Version 1.0 program package to
the above IBM OS/2 Version 2.0 Developer's Workbench.  The IBM C Developer's
WorkSet/2 convenience kit provides the user with a self-contained, 32-bit OS/2
C language application development environment.

The licensed programs which constitute the IBM OS/2 Version 2.0 Developers
Workbench and IBM C Developer's WorkSet/2 products are available separately.
These three program packages as well as the IBM OS/2 Version 2.0 Technical
Library are described as follows:

IBM OS/2 Version 2.0 Developer's Toolkit is a comprehensive selection of
language-independent build tools, productivity tools and sample programs,
on-line reference information and a kernel debugger.  The IBM OS/2 Version 2.0
Developer's Toolkit is designed to help the developer exploit the IBM Operating
System/2 Version 2.0 (OS/2 V2.0) Application Programming Interfaces (API's).

IBM WorkFrame/2 Version 1.0 is a configurable project-oriented application
development environment featuring an SAA/CUA* conforming user interface.  It is
built with an open interface to serve as the integration point for the tools in
the IBM OS/2 Version 2.0 Developer's Toolkit as well as tools supporting C and
other languages.  IBM WorkFrame/2 allows both 16- and 32-bit OS/2 tools to be
plugged in.

IBM C Set/2 Version 1.0 consists of both a 32-bit SAA C Compiler with its
run-time libraries that generates code for IBM Operating System/2 Version 2.0,
and a fully interactive, full function, source level PM debugger.

IBM OS/2 Version 2.0 Technical Library is a comprehensive set of publications
designed to complement the IBM OS/2 Version 2.0 Developer's Workbench and help
the programmer take full advantage of the programming interfaces provided in
IBM Operating System/2 Version 2.0.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. IBM OS/2 LOCAL AREA NETWORK SERVER VERSION 1.3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM OS/2 Local Area Network (LAN) Server Version 1.3 uses the improved program
load facility of OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.3.  This provides a
performance enhancement when loading many OS/2 applications from Servers to
Requesters.  Enhancements include DOS LAN Requester (DLR) support for Windows
3.0(1) and ethernet support for DOS LAN Requester (DLR) through IBM LAN Support
Program V1.2(2) which is included with the Product.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Utilizes OS/2 Extended Edition 1.3 improved performance when
        loading applications over the LAN
    o   Windows 3.0 support for DOS LAN Requester
    o   The user is authorized, without additional payment to IBM, to
        make and use up to 128 copies each of IBM LAN Support Program
        Version 1.2 and DOS LAN Requester
    o   DLR ethernet support
    o   DLR NET STOP command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. IBM OS/2 IMAGE SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM OS/2 Image Support enables office professionals to create color, gray, or
bilevel images for inclusion in documents, in an OS/2(TM) environment.  The
product uses either of the OS/2 Standard Edition Version 1.2 or the OS/2
Extended Edition Version 1.2 operating environments.  Images can be created
using a scanner or video camera.  IBM OS/2 Image Support's extensive online
help and easy-to-use interface allow customers to create, modify, print, change
format, display and manipulate images without specialized computer skills.  IBM
OS/2 Image Support's advanced CUA interface is consistent with OfficeVision/2
Release 2.  IBM OS/2 Image Support also extends image capability to software
application developers, who can use its programming interface to build OS/2
image applications without extensive training in image technology. (TM)OS/2 is
a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

IBM OS/2 Image Support is targeted at two main groups.  The first includes
office professionals who need to create images for their documents and
presentations, particularly those using the OfficeVision products, which IBM
OS/2 Image Support is designed to complement, and OS/2 desktop publishing
users.  These users will readily perceive the product's value in that it will
give them the flexibility to create their own images for their documents.
Customers who currently rely on cut-and-paste techniques to prepare their
illustrations will find this a cost-saving feature.

The second target group includes software developers.  This group of potential
customers can use IBM OS/2 Image Support's programming interface to build OS/2
image applications, without the investment required to train programmers
extensively in image technology.

The product's functional strengths are in its use of an OS/2 environment, the
speed and capacity of which are ideal for image processing, and in its support
of color images.  Some IBM OS/2 Image Support functions are found in other IBM
image products (for example, IBM ImagEdit(TM) 2.0 and PC/IDU). However, these
products operate in the DOS environment, and do not support color.

Customers requiring sophisticated image editing capability, such as graphic
artists, will find IBM ImagEdit 2.0 more suitable, but for many users, the
functions provided by IBM OS/2 Image Support will be a good match for their
needs and budget. (TM)ImagEdit is a trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Create color, gray, or bilevel images; crop, size, rotate or flip
        them; adjust brightness and contrast; then save in many popular
        formats.  Use a scanner or video camera for image creation.
    o   The OfficeVision Release 2 correspondence processor, Storyboard
        Plus, Interleaf, and image-capable DisplayWrite products are just
        a few of the programs able to use images created by IBM OS/2
        Image Support.
    o   Intuitive CUA end-user interface consistent with OfficeVision/2
        Release 2.  The help, tutorials, and messages conform to the
        OfficeVision/2 Release 2 interface standard.
    o   Simple programming interface offers image capability to developers
        unskilled in image technology.  Extensibility allows addition of
        new datastreams, scanners, and printers without programming
        changes to the product.
    o   Prints on all-points-addressable printers supported by OS/2
        Standard Edition or OS/2 Extended Edition as well as the
        Mitsubishi G650, and the Shinko CHC-345 color printers.
    o   You can invoke IBM OS/2 Image Support from the main OfficeVision
        window via an image icon representing the product, or automatically
        by opening or printing image objects from an OfficeVision window.
    o   The communication links provided by OfficeVision can allow you
        to store and retrieve images from the AS/400, MVS, or VM host or
        the LAN server, as well as the programmable workstation.  IBM OS/2
        Image Support code must be installed on the user's workstation, not
        on a LAN server or host machine.
    o   Utilizes the speed and storage available in an OS/2 environment.
        IBM OS/2 Image Support uses the Presentation Manager environment
        of OS/2 Standard Edition or OS/2 Extended Edition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. IBM SAA DATATRADE/2 FOR OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

5621-405 IBM SAA DataTrade/2 Workstation

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF MARCH 21, 1994.)

5621-406 IBM SAA DataTrade/2 Broadcast Injector

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF MARCH 21, 1994.)

5621-407 IBM SAA DataTrade/2 Directory Manager

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF MARCH 21, 1994.)

5621-408 IBM SAA DataTrade OS/2 Distributed API

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF MARCH 21, 1994.)

The IBM DataTrade* Licensed Programs for OS/2 are repackaged.  Additionally,
OS/2 workstation connectivity to DataTrade MVS/ESA Edition (5756-034) is
enhanced.

The DataTrade/2 Edition communications licensed program (5601-336) is
repackaged into the IBM SAA DataTrade/2 Series, which consists of separate
Workstation, Broadcast Injector, and Directory Manager products (5621-405,
5621-406, and 5621-407, respectively).  This simplifies ordering and provides
greater flexibility when configuring DataTrade environments.

An optionally installable MVS connectivity application, allowing communications
between existing DataTrade applications and DataTrade MVS/ESA applications,
will be provided with select DataTrade Series Workstation Licensed Programs.

Also included as part of the repackaging offering is the introduction of the
IBM SAA DataTrade OS/2 Distributed API as a licensed program (D5621-408).
Workstation applications developed using the DataTrade OS/2 Distributed API may
communicate directly with IBM SAA DataTrade MVS/ESA (5756-034) applications.

The DataTrade Series programs provide a high-level requester-server
application-to-application API.  These cooperative processing enabling products
are applicable to all industries.

Within Financial Services Industries (FSI) DataTrade is positioned as the
enterprise API for IBM's Financial Application Architecture (incorporates and
supersedes the Wholesale Banking Design Principles).  It facilitates
application connectivity and integration in both LAN and WAN environments.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Enhances user productivity through:
        -   A common API
        -   Application-to-application data interchange, with a reliable
            LAN broadcast facility,
        -   Point-to-point communications over wide-area networks (WANs),
            local-area networks (LANs), and via cross-LAN protocol support
    o   Simplifies the development of advanced, distributed business
        solutions through user productivity enhancements
    o   Enables growth by providing access to logical services, rather
        than specific programs
    o   Provides improved investment protection by enabling application
        portability
    o   Supports system management through administrative aids, such as
        on-line facilities for:
        -   Installing and operating DataTrade
        -   A single focal-point for administering DataTrade installations
        -   User and application authorization services
        -   Local, remote and automated operation capabilities and through
        -   Serviceability aids, such as generating alerts, and logging
            facilities to monitor DataTrade and application operation.
    o   Complex DataTrade domains at a reduced cost
    o   Stations that require Directory Manager or Broadcast Injector
        (but not both) with only the functions desired, or
    o   Stations with both Directory Manager and Broadcast Injector
        capabilities
    o   Connectivity to the host product IBM SAA DataTrade MVS/ESA
        (5756-034) via the DataTrade/2 Workstation (5621-405) connectivity
        application and/or DataTrade OS/2 Distributed API program
        (5621-408).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. OS/2 DATA COLLECTION SOFTWARE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

5756-144 DATA COLLECTION CONTROL/2

5756-145 DATA COLLECTOR FOR DISTRIBUTED AUTOMATION EDITION

5756-146 7527 EXTENDED TERMINAL SERVICES

OS/2 Data Collection Software consists of the three Program Products, Data
Collection Control/2, Data Collector for Distributed Automation Edition, and
7527 Extended Terminal Services.  These three products support automatic data
collection using IBM Data Collection Terminals in local processing, host
connection, and distributed processing environments.  The Data Collection
Control/2 product executes on OS/2 Standard Edition or Extended Edition and
provides the ability to program, control, and collect data from IBM 7525 and
7527 Data Collection Terminals.  The Data Collector for Distributed Automation
Edition product executes only on OS/2 Extended Edition and provides the ability
to control and collect data from these terminals in a Distributed Automation
Edition environment.  The 7527 Extended Terminal Services licensed program
provides extensive programming capabilities for IBM 7527 Data Collection
Terminals, allowing expanded use of 7527 terminal capabilities.

Data Collection Control/2, Data Collector for Distributed Automation Edition,
and 7527 Extended Terminal Services are NLS enabled, including Double Byte
Character Set enabled, and provide translated menus and messages in Spanish in
addition to U.S. English.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. OASAS I FOR USE WITH IBM OS/2 BY INTEGRA TECHNOLOGIES, INC. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OASAS I(1) Release 1.0 is to be installed on IBM OS/2 Standard Edition (SE)
1.30.1 or later or the equivalent OS/2 Standard Edition 1.3 Corrective Service
Diskette (CSD) level of 5015; or IBM OS/2 Standard Edition Version 2.0.  It
interfaces with an IBM SCSI adapter to manage a disk array ranging from 3 to 7
IBM SCSI fixed disk drives.  It provides fault tolerant protection for a single
hard disk failure and gives the option of having the disk array drives appear
as a single large volume to the operating system.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Formatting an array of and operating multiple drives; labeling
        single or multiple volumes; allowing the user to choose either
        the High Performance File System (HPFS) or the File Allocation
        Table (FAT) file system for the disk array file system; including
        the option to disable fault tolerance for customer environments
        where performance has priority over redundancy.
    o   Striping of data, programs, and error correction code across all
        drives
    o   Logging system events; recreating a down drive; monitoring drive
        status for errors, and reporting error messages on the local
        system and to a remote workstation on a Local Area Network (LAN);
        online help facilities
    o   Overlapping seeks for performance enhancement
    o   Correction for errors and defects in media


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. IBM PS/2 INTERNAL TAPE BACKUP PROGRAM VERSION 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program Version 2.0 (OS/2 PM compatible)
enhances the PS/2 8540, 8550, 8557, 8560, 8565, 8570, 8580, 8590 and 8595 by
allowing the user to transfer up to 120 MB of formatted data from a disk
storage device to a removable mini tape cartridge for later recall.  The IBM
PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program Version 2.0 (OS/2 PM compatible) is written
specifically for the OS/2 Presentation Manager (Version 1.2 and above). It
provides an easy-to-use window environment for use with either a mouse or a
keyboard.  For convenience, the IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Convenience Kit
Version 2.0 (OS/2 PM compatible) has in one package the IBM PS/2 Internal Tape
Backup Program Version 2.0 (OS/2 PM compatible), the IBM Internal Tape Backup
Unit (FC 5279) and a formatted mini tape cartridge.

In addition, the customer can upgrade from earlier versions of both DOS and
OS/2 compatible programs by ordering the IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program
Upgrade Version 2.0 (OS/2 PM compatible).

The IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program Version 2.0 (OS/2 PM compatible) is
written specifically for the OS/2 Presentation Manager (Version 1.2 and above).
It provides an easy to use window environment for use with either a mouse or a
keyboard. It is positioned to support those customers who want an internal
backup solution for most models of the PS/2, providing a high capacity internal
tape backup solution for that requirement. The IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup
Program Version 2.0 (OS/2 PM compatible) supports the High Performance File
System (HPFS) as well as the IBM Classroom Local Area Network Administration
System (ICLAS) Version 1.4.  Additional features include data compression, data
encryption, the ability to back up and restore data from multiple hard disk
drives in a single operation, a librarian option, and network support.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Systems management is enhanced by the capability to backup data
        from the system's hard disk and network drives in a Presentation
        Manager Windows environment.
    o   User productivity is improved by the ability to operate with
        either a mouse or a few key strokes. The advanced features of this
        program include data compression, data encryption, and a
        librarian option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. IBM CALLPATH/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

20G1-397   CallPath/2, SingleAgent  (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF
DECEMBER 17, 1993.)

20G1-396   CallPath/2, MultiAgent  (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF
DECEMBER 17, 1993.)

20G1-394   CallPath/DOS, SingleAgent

20G1-395   CallPath/DOS, MultiAgent

20G1-393   CallPath Toolkit for OS/2 and DOS

IBM CallPath/2* and IBM CallPath/DOS for Windows**, referred to as IBM CallPath
for Workstations, is a licensed program providing a software platform that
enables applications to link the data-processing power of the Personal
System/2* (PS/2*) with the telephony processing capabilities of select
telephone systems. It facilitates the development of business applications that
can enhance business services, personalize caller interactions, improve
customer service, enhance employee productivity, and optimize the overall use
of assets. CallPath for Workstations provides the customer with a stand-alone
workstation or a network of programmable workstations, which provide a
comprehensive cooperative processing and a peer to peer computing environment.

CallPath Toolkit* for OS/2 and DOS provides a collection of tools to assist the
application developer. The package includes sample applications, programming
manuals, and a test/trace utility. For application writers, the sample
applications may be used in developing applications.

CallPath for Workstations is part of the CallPath family of products which
implement IBM's CallPath Services Architecture. This architecture is strategic
to IBM's support of the telephony environment; the architecture facilitates
bi-directional communication and cooperative processing between a telephone
system and an application executing on a computer or workstation. This offers
the customer a functionally consistent interface to applications, independent
of the switch protocol.  CallPath for Workstations is positioned to address not
only a broad range of inbound and outbound applications, but also any of the
switches supported by IBM CallPath SwitchServer/2.

Introducing CallPath for Workstations into the CallPath product family extends
IBM's opportunity in the Voice Application Solutions marketplace to the
workstation environment, one of the fastest growing environments in data
processing.

CallPath for Workstations has been designed for flexibility and usability. It
is flexible as an API, allowing applications to initiate first-party control or
third-party control actions to the telephone system. In first-party control,
the telephony device is controlled by the user of the device (telephone to
telephone system link control); in third-party control, the control of the
telephony device is by other than the person using that device, (for example,
computer to telephone system link control).

CallPath for Workstations is for customers who want telephony applications that
automate:

    o   Simple and repetitive requests (for example, account balance
        information)
    o   Computer/telephone coordination (for inbound calls and call
        transfer)
    o   Data/caller coordination (manipulation of call profile
        information)
    o   Call handling (reducing caller wait time)
    o   Data collection (for example, teleservicing center utilization
        data)
    o   Outbound dialing (enhanced dialing functions of the switch)

Often times such automation may lead to a clear competitive advantage.

To facilitate usability and productivity, the CallPath Toolkit for OS/2 and DOS
is available to assist in the development of efficient applications.

CallPath for Workstations provides similar functionality to applications as do
IBM CallPath CICS/MVS or CICS/VSE and CallPath/400, but in a workstation (LAN
or stand-alone) environment with a graphical end user interface. CallPath for
Workstations responsiveness makes it ideal for business telephony/data
application development. Its capacity to harness the power and flexibility of
the personal workstation is its chief advantage.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   CallPath for Workstations provides a workstation implementation
        of IBM's CallPath Services Architecture.
    o   CallPath for Workstations enables a broad range of business
        telephony application capabilities, including personal telephony.
        These applications may be used in universities, insurance
        companies, government offices, airlines, hospitals, banks, etc.
    o   CallPath for Workstations enables productivity-enhancing
        applications to automate many aspects of agent activity including
        coordinating information in customer data bases with telephone
        calls to or from their customers, in order to provide those
        customers with faster, more personal service.
    o   CallPath for Workstations enhances application developer
        productivity by providing a functionally rich API which is easy-
        to-use, functionally consistent with other IBM CallPath Services
        Architecture host implementations, and is virtually transparent
        to underlying communications and telephone system protocols.
    o   CallPath ToolKit for OS/2 and DOS provides a collection of tools
        to assist in the application development:  sample program code,
        a test/trace utility, and programming manuals.
    o   CallPath for Workstations API is functionally consistent with
        CallPath/400, CallPath CICS/MVS* and CallPath CICS/VSE*,
        protecting customer application design investment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. IBM EXTENDED SERVICES FOR OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

96F8-326 - IBM Extended Services for OS/2

96F8-328 - IBM Extended Services for OS/2 with Administrator's Kit

04G1-049 - IBM Extended Services with Database Server for OS/2

04G1-047 - IBM Extended Services for OS/2 with DataBase Server with
Administrator's Kit

04G1-091 - IBM Extended Services Administrator's Kit

IBM announces two new program products which provide database and
communications function to OS/2* Operating Systems.  Both programs also contain
database administration tools, Query Manager and enhanced communications
support for local area network (LAN) and stand-alone workstations.  The two
programs are:  IBM Extended Services with Database Server for OS/2 and IBM
Extended Services for OS/2.  Associated only with the Extended Services with
Database Server program, is a distributed feature called Database Client
Application Enablers.  The function offered as a distributed feature is a
subset of that provided in the program product. This feature enables DOS, DOS
Windows and OS/2 clients to access an Extended Services database server on a
LAN or IBM's family of relational host database products including DB2, SQL/DS
and OS/400.  Read/write access to a host database is possible if the IBM SAA
Distributed Database Connection Services/2 Version 1.0 is also installed on the
workstation or database server.  The IBM Extended Services for OS/2 program
includes DOS, DOS Windows and OS/2 client support similar to that in the
distributed feature.

Extended Services is designed to:

    1.  Run on the IBM OS/2 Standard Edition Version 1.3 (Refresh Level
        1.30.1) or replace the communications and database manager
        functions of the IBM Extended Edition Version 1.3 when upgraded
        to Refresh Level 1.30.1.  Extended Services will also run on the
        IBM Operating System/2 Version 2.0 32-bit operating system.
        Extended Services also supports selected versions of the OS/2
        Operating System which have been determined to be compatible with
        IBM's Standard Edition Version 1.3 Refresh Level 1.30.1 or later
        that are marketed by other vendors.
    2.  Be supported on OS/2 compatible versions of the IBM personal
        computer and PS/2 hardware as well as on selected non-IBM
        hardware.

Extended Services includes many function, performance and usability
enhancements to the database and communications applications previously
available in the IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.3.  The base OS/2
operating system, previously part of the Extended Edition's Database and
Communication Manager components, is now a separately packaged program.  The
LAN Requester is now provided with IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   IBM provides two new program products which contain the
        communications and database manager functions of the IBM Extended
        Edition and the functions of the IBM SAA Networking Services/2
        integrated in packages separate from the base OS/2 Operating
        System.  They are called Extended Services for OS/2 and Extended
        Services with Database Server for OS/2.  The former provides
        communications and single user  database function but cannot be
        configured as a database server.  The database server version
        provides the same function in addition to being configurable as
        a database server.  This version also offers DOS, DOS Windows and
        OS/2 NETBIOS client support to other LAN attached workstations
        through a Distributed Feature referred to as the Database Client
        Application Enablers.
    o   Extends the Extended Services communications and database
        functions to selected non-IBM hardware platforms and to selected,
        compatible non-IBM OS/2 operating systems.
    o   Enhances the LAN transport layer in the communications function
        for improved performance and enables exploitation of the Network
        Device Interface Specification (NDIS) by both IBM and vendors.
    o   Offers new communications and database function and usability
        improvements over those offered in the IBM Extended Edition,
        Version 1.3.
    o   Offers an Administrator's Kit to facilitate planning,
        configuration and administration for a multi-workstation or host-
        connected environment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. IBM OS/2 LAN SERVER V3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

96F8400   OS/2 LAN Server 3.0/Entry 3.5-inch

96F8414   OS/2 LAN Server 3.0/Advanced 3.5-inch

96F8455   OS/2 LAN Server for Macintosh 1.0 3.5-inch

IBM OS/2* LAN Server Version 3.0-Entry and Advanced exploits the power of the
OS/2 2.0 operating system. Included in both the Entry and Advanced version are:
Redirected Install enablement (CID), Domain Management API, Peer services, up
to 1000 Requesters per Server on a single network, Thin Client, NTS/2 and
TCP/IP coexistence.  The Advanced Server product also uses the 386
High-Performance File System, has improved disk fault tolerance, and
Multi-Processor enabling on the IBM PS/2* Server 295. Available with OS/2 LAN
Server Version 3.0 is a DOS LAN Requester (DLR) and an OS/2 Requester orderable
as distributed features. The DOS LAN Requester includes the IBM LAN Support
Program Version 1.31, and has performance improvements over the previous DOS
LAN Requester. The OS/2 Requester has been enabled for redirected install
feature, NTS/2 and performance improvements. OS/2 LAN Server for Macintosh
Version 1.0 broadens the scope of support for the IBM OS/2 LAN Server Products.
With OS/2 LAN Server for Macintosh running on an OS/2 LAN Server, DOS, OS/2,
and Macintosh clients may access files created by each other. OS/2 LAN Server
for Macintosh will provide AppleTalk File Server and Print Server functions
(over Token-Ring or Ethernet) that may be integrated with the OS/2 LAN Server.

 HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Entry and Advanced Servers exploit power of OS/2 2.0
    o   Redirected Install (CID) Enabled
    o   OS/2 Requester includes a Thin Client
    o   Peer Services included with OS/2 Requester
    o   Advanced Server has Multi-Processing enabling for IBM PS/2
        Server 295
    o   The OS/2 LAN Server for Macintosh provides access to files and
        print server functions
    o   IBM offers upgrades from competitive LAN software


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. IBM MULTIMEDIA PRESENTATION MANAGER/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

04G3367  IBM Multimedia Presentation Manager/2

04G3369  IBM Multimedia Presentation Manager Toolkit/2

The IBM Multimedia Presentation Manager/2 provides multimedia extensions to the
Operating System/2 32-Bit environment to enhance the personal computer's
ability to run applications that combine sound and images.

The IBM Multimedia Presentation Manager Toolkit/2 contains C language bindings,
sample programs, and documentation to assist the multimedia application
developer.

HIGHLIGHTS MMPM/2

    o   Enhanced quality of information and communication
    o   Easily accommodates new functions, devices and multimedia data
    o   Open extendable architecture, data standards and consistent user
        interface
    o   Increased value of information and decreased user training costs
    o   Easy to use system setup

MMPMTK/2

    o   Business solutions are adaptable from sample programs
    o   Assists application developers in the use of MMPM/2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. IBM SAA DISTRIBUTED DATABASE CONNECTION SERVICES/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM SAA Distributed Database Connection Services/2 Version 1.0 provides
read/write access to host databases for Extended Services database client and
client/server workstations.  The supported hosts include DB2*, SQL/DS* and
OS/400*.

IBM SAA Distributed Database Connection Services/2 Version 1.0 (DDCS/2 V1.0)
implements the DRDA connection to supporting host database products.  For
additional information, refer to Programming Announcement 290-363, dated June
26, 1990

This product requires IBM Extended Services as the installed base and is
available in either single or multi-user versions.  Highlights are:

    o   Single user access to a host database from a stand alone OS/2
        workstation when installed with IBM Extended Services for OS/2
        (single user).
    o   Single user access to a host database from a LAN attached OS/2
        workstation when installed with IBM Extended Services for OS/2
        (single user).
    o   Concurrent, multi-user access to a host database from LAN-
        attached DOS, DOS Windows or OS/2 workstations through a DDCS/2
        server or client/server workstation when installed with IBM
        Extended Services with Database Server for OS/2 (multi-user).
    o   Support of read/write access to host data and remote unit of
        work (one database per unit of work), static and dynamic SQL and
        for SQL unique to the target database server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. IBM DATAHUB TOOLS FOR RATIONAL DATABASES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM* SystemView* Information Warehouse* DataHub* is a database management
product set that provides a workstation-based control point, host support
components, and a tools feature that enables more effective management of
relational databases.

DataHub supports four Systems Application Architecture* (SAA*) relational
database management systems:

    o   Operating System/2* (OS/2*) Extended Services Database Manager
        for the OS/2 environment
    o   Operating System/400* (OS/400*) database manager for the OS/400
        environment
    o   IBM DATABASE 2* (DB2*) for the MVS/XA and MVS/ESA environment
    o   SQL/DS* for the VM/ESA environment.

DataHub is designed to promote the integration of database systems management
tools developed by IBM, International Alliance Members (IAM), vendors and
customers.

DataHub provides a tools feature that address database systems management tasks
in the areas of operations, change, configuration, problem and security
management. DataHub also provides tool developers with a set of common services
to reduce development effort and to ensure consistency among tools.

International Alliance Members PLATINUM technology, inc.** and Candle**
Corporation and Development Partner LEGENT** Corporation are announcing their
intention to enable their SystemView Level 1 conforming products for
participation in the DataHub environment.

Commercial software tool vendors interested in enabling to DataHub environment
should call #800-553-1623 for information on the DataHub Early Test Program.

DataHub can enhance productivity of systems administrators and simplify
database systems management tasks. DataHub provides a user interface that
conforms to SystemView Integration Level 1. A Programmable Work Station (PWS)
component incorporates an object-action oriented graphical user interface that
is consistent for all tools and that associates data with function. From a
control point, customers can manage multiple databases in a homogeneous
environment or multiple databases in multiple environments.  The databases can
be in a single location or multiple locations.

As an Information Warehouse framework product, DataHub extends the advantages
of object management to the Information Warehouse framework and also provides
the ability to copy database objects from one IBM SAA relational database to
another.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. PLANTWORKS STARTER SERVICES/2 AND PLANTWORKS DISPLAY SERVICES/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Additions to the PlantWorks product family are:  new products are:

    o   5713-ADU   Starter Services/2
    o   5713-ADZ   Display Services/2

Starter Services/2 provides PlantWorks functionality on a stand alone node. It
serves as a starter set for PlantWorks application development and minimizes
system resource requirements and greatly reduces installation complexity.  It
is a low cost way of gaining access to PlantWorks capabilities. There is no
communication, networking or distribution support which in effect make the
Starter Services/2 node an island of automation. The Starter Services/2 node
includes build-time support for developing and documenting applications.  It
allows applications to be created from a group of defined services, such as
alarms, automatic event responses, reports, retained historic data, the data to
be operated on, the logic to be applied to that data, and the graphical
displays to present that data to the operator.  Starter Services/2 includes
run-time support for application monitoring, real-time graphical application
displays, report execution, debugging and diagnostic capabilities as well as
other run-time services. An upgrade charge will be provided to customers who
want to migrate from a Starter Services/2 single node to a PlantWorks network
environment.  Display Services/2 provides support for viewing and interacting
with PlantWorks manufacturing-control applications running on other nodes in
the network.

Display Services/2 provides the product user with real time monitoring and
control access to an existing PlantWorks system.  Display Services/2 provides
such runtime services as:

    Monitoring applications
    Controlling applications
    Viewing and printing warning logger data and event logger messages
    Accessing restricted services

Display Services/2 can only be used in conjunction with other nodes in the
PlantWorks network. This product will provide a lower cost solution for
supervisors and front office people who need only a monitoring and control
application. Starter Services/2 and Display Services/2 contain subsets of
existing PlantWorks products.

The PlantWorks family of products, including Starter Services/2 and Display
Services/2, fits within the IBM CIM Architecture as an initial implementation
of an Application Enabler and Build Time concepts as described in the IBM CIM
Architecture.  PlantWorks takes full advantage of the facilities and functions
of Distributed Application Edition (DAE), a Systems Enabler within the IBM CIM
Architecture.  IBM OS/2 Presentation Manager* is utilized, and as such,
PlantWorks conforms to IBM Systems Application Architecture (SAA) by adhering
to Common User Access (CUA) standards.  PlantWorks interoperates with other IBM
CIM Advantage products such as COPICS and MAPICS via the facilities of DAE as
well as other DAE based applications within the enterprise.  PlantWorks is
intended to be used by plant floor personnel, or third parties, in the
development of applications designed for use by Manufacturing and Process
industry customers.  Examples of commonly developed applications using
PlantWorks include:

    o   Cell Monitoring and Control
    o   Work-in-Process Tracking
    o   Statistical Process Control
    o   Monitoring and Reporting of Critical Processes
    o   SCADA Types of Applications

The two products fit within this overall umbrella by providing their own unique
functions. Starter Services/2 supports single node PlantWorks functionality
without capability to communicate with remote nodes. It serves as a starter set
for PlantWorks application development.  Display Services/2 provides the
product user with real time monitoring and control access to a PlantWorks
network.

HIGHLIGHTS These products provide customers access to a subset of PlantWork's
functions at lower costs.

DISPLAY SERVICES/2 OFFERS:

    Lower costs
    Real time monitoring
    Control Access
    Significantly easier installation and configuration

STARTER SERVICES/2 OFFERS:

    Entry-level PlantWorks w/o network communications
    Single node product
    Lower costs
    Significantly easier installation and configuration
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16. MAXIMUM AVAILABILITY AND SUPPORT SYSTEM/2, MULTI PROCESSING EXTENSIONS/2, ORTHOGONAL RAID-5 DISK ARRAY/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   41G9-295 (5875-XXX) - Maximum Availability and Support System/2
    o   41G9-294 (5875-XXX) - Orthogonal RAID-5 Disk Array/2
    o   41G9-293 (5875-XXX) - Multi Processing Extensions/2

The IBM Maximum Availability and Support System/2 (MASS/2), IBM Multi
Processing Extensions/2 and IBM Orthogonal RAID-5 Disk Array/2 applications for
use with the Personal System/2* (PS/2*) Server 295 software products offer
additional function and provide customers with new levels of performance and
reliability.  All three applications, when ordered in conjunction with a PS/2
Server 295, will be preloaded and shipped with the system.

MASS/2 (41G9-295) provides comprehensive system management capabilities,
allowing network control from local or remote locations.  In addition, MASS/2
has extensive error logging and recovery techniques designed to overcome most
hardware and software failures.  MASS/2 is required to fully utilize the system
architecture, is a prerequisite for the PS/2 Server 295, and is shipped
preloaded when ordered in conjunction with a PS/2 Server 295.

IBM Multi Processing Extensions/2 (41G9-293) provides the multiprocessing
capability to the PS/2 Server 295, assuring the highest levels of performance
for today's advanced client/server database applications.

IBM Orthogonal RAID-5 Disk Array/2 (41G9-294) provides RAID-5 level of disk
array data integrity.  In addition, when combined with MASS/2, the IBM
Orthogonal RAID-5 Disk Array/2 application offers protection from failure of
the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) controller or bus.  The Disk Array/2
also offers high performance and large capacity disk storage ideal for mission
critical applications.

IBM Maximum Availability and Support System/2 is an integral part of the PS/2
Server 295 system concept, is a prerequisite for the system, and is shipped
preloaded with each PS/2 Server 295.  This system management software provides
system administrators with a sophisticated tool to manage large geographically
disperse networks, and in conjunction with IBM Multi Processing Extensions/2
and IBM Orthogonal RAID-5 Disk Array/2, provides innovative functions for
high-end mission critical installations.

IBM Multi Processing Extensions/2 provides higher levels of system performance
by enabling multiprocessing in the PS/2 Server 295.  Customers who require the
highest levels of performance in mission critical applications can reach the
goals using this application in conjunction with IBM OS/2 LAN Server 2.0 --
Advanced or other supported network operating systems.  Also, since the
application is designed to run in conjunction with the MASS/2 software,
customers are able to retain comprehensive system management capabilities
essential to large distributed networks.

IBM Orthogonal RAID-5 Disk Array/2 provides large capacity, high performance
disk arrays required in large database applications.  In addition, data
integrity is maintained with the fully integrated RAID-5 technology.  This not
only protects the customer's data, but allows for continued operation of the
LAN, even while the array is being reconfigured.

Because IBM Orthogonal RAID-5 Disk Array/2 is integrated with MASS/2, most
error recoveries are accomplished without human intervention or loss of
services to clients.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   IBM Maximum Availability and Support System/2
        -   Non-intrusive local and remote monitoring, tuning, control
            and error recovery
        -   Most error recovery accomplished without human intervention
        -   Automatic reboot/reconfiguration functions for hardware
            failures
        -   Comprehensive error logging and notification with automatic
            dial-out capability
        -   System access even during power failures via battery backed
            up Remote Maintenance Processor (RMP) -- standard in the
            PS/2 Server 295
        -   Enabled for uninterruptable power supply (UPS)
        -   User and administrator password security
        -   Shipped preloaded with every PS/2 Server 295
    o   IBM Multi Processing Extensions/2
        -   Enables multiprocessing operations for PS/2 Server 295
        -   Allows switching from uniprocessor to multiprocessor and
            vice versa
        -   Integrated with MASS/2
    o   IBM Orthogonal RAID-5 Disk Array/2
        -   High performance RAID-5 Disk Array
        -   Provides protection against failures in the SCSI subsystem
        -   Large capacity -- can support arrays of up to 16 drives
        -   Supports multiple arrays per system
        -   Supports multiple spares and online spares pooling
        -   Supports "hot pluggable" hard files
        -   Bootable array
        -   Integrated with MASS/2
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17. IBM SAA AD/CYCLE PL/I PACKAGE/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM System Application Architecture* (SAA) AD/Cycle* PL/I Package/2 (referred
to in this text as "PL/I Package/2") is designed to provide a leading edge SAA
application development environment, using Operating System/2* (OS/2*) Version
2 as the operating system.

PL/I Package/2 Release 1 is Language Environment enabled and is designed to
provide porting of components from existing S/390 host applications for
execution on the workstation and the development of new applications on OS/2
Version 2.

PL/I Package/2 Release 1.1 will support:

    o   Double Byte Character Set (DBCS) for OS/2J
    o   Workframe/2

AD/Cycle Enterprise customers can develop applications on a workstation
connected to a S/390 host or stand-alone workstation.  They can off-load
development of applications from the host to the workstation.  They can take
advantage of the benefits of the workstation, such as higher productivity,
lower cost, and an isolated test environment.  Programs can be developed in the
OS/2 environment, including editing, and compiling.  Compile time options are
specified depending on the target for the application.  The application can
then be ported for execution on a host or on a workstation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides a common development environment on OS/2 and S/390
    o   Allows for Local Area Network (LAN) based application development
    o   Applications can be readily ported to OS/2 Version 2
    o   Programmer skills in PL/I are usable on OS/2 operating environment


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18. AD/CYCLE - THE INTEGRATED REASONING SHELL DEVELOPMENT/2 RELEASE 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

5621-003 AD/Cycle-The Integrated Reasoning Shell Development/2

5621-004 AD/Cycle-The Integrated Reasoning Shell Runtime/2

This release of The Integrated Reasoning Shell* for OS/2* (TIRS/2) addresses
AD/Cycle* Level 2 integration criteria through its support of the WorkStation
Platform (WSP), the host Software Configuration and Library Manager (SCLM)
library, and other elements of AD/Cycle coexistence.  TIRS/2 Release 3 also
introduces support for OS/2 2.0, for the base product and Japanese national
language features.  This should allow customers to use TIRS in conjunction with
application code developed with the C Set/2 compiler.  Publications have been
revised and enhanced, and additional samples included.  TIRS publications will
be available in soft copy for the first time.  TIRS/2 Release 3 contains
service accumulated since TIRS Release 2 Modification 1 and a corresponding
release for the S/370 host platform, TIRS/370 Release 2 Modification 2 at the
same level of maintenance, is available concurrently.

The Integrated Reasoning Shell (TIRS*) family members for OS/2, AD/Cycle* - The
Integrated Reasoning Shell Development/2 and The Integrated Reasoning Shell
Runtime/2, provide for the development of knowledge-based applications in a
workstation environment and the delivery of these knowledge-based applications
under OS/2.  Knowledge-based applications developed under OS/2 can be delivered
to AIX* for RISC System/6000 and to System/370* VM and MVS environments,
including IMS and CICS.

For AS/400 customers, AS/400 client/server support provides the ability for
TIRS/2 applications to run cooperatively with the AS/400, providing a means to
enhance AS/400 applications with workstation based expert systems function.

The Integrated Reasoning Shell (TIRS) is a relatively new IBM knowledge-based
systems family of products.  This multiplatform knowledge-based tool is
targeted to professional application developers.  These developers do the
application development on workstations under OS/2 or AIX for RISC System/6000,
using pull-down menus and pop-up windows, mouse support, and graphic
representation of the knowledge base.  Applications can be deployed under OS/2,
AIX for RISC System/6000, VM, and MVS including IMS and CICS.  In addition,
applications can be developed under OS/2 EE to run cooperatively with the
AS/400.

The Integrated Reasoning Shell includes such KBS functions as pattern matching,
forward and backward chaining, frames with inheritance, opportunistic
reasoning, and English-like rules.  The Integrated Reasoning Shell product
family is particularly designed for customers who require workstation
development and want to deploy stand-alone or embedded applications on multiple
platforms.  The Integrated Reasoning Shell is also designed for customers who
require fast runtime performance of the generated application programs.

IBM also offers knowledge based systems products which provide application
development capabilities for customers who do not have programming backgrounds.
For information on these offerings, contact your IBM representative.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   AD/Cycle Level 2 integration
        -   WorkStation Platform
            --  Installation
            --  Registration
            --  Invocation
        -   Software Configuration and Library Manager
            --  Data access
    o   Complementary AD/Cycle product support
        -   Workstation Interactive Test Tool
        -   Language Environment/370
    o   OS/2 Version 2 support
    o   Enhanced softcopy publications
    o   Participation in the AD/Cycle Code Development Scenario


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19. IBM SAA AD/CYCLE WORKSTATION PLATFORM/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM SAA AD/Cycle WorkStation Platform/2 is a Systems Application Architecture*
(SAA*) product that provides tools and services in support of the application
development platform portion of the AD/Cycle* framework. These tools and
services operate on the IBM Operating System/2 (OS/2*) Extended Edition (EE)
workstation.  This product provides a set of application programming interfaces
(APIs) that serve as a base for and facilitate the integration of AD/Cycle
tools.

The tools and services provided by IBM SAA AD/Cycle WorkStation Platform/2
Version 1 Release 1 include registration/invocation services and access to
ISPF/PDF Version 3 Software Configuration and Library Manager (SCLM component)
library data from the workstation. The platform also provides an interactive
design tool with a general purpose graphics editor.

AD/Cycle WSP Version 1 Release 2 announced function on September 11, 1991 that
allows third-party library products to use the AD/Cycle WSP library services.
Additional enhancements announced in Release 2 include programmable text editor
components and services, the ability to install AD/Cycle WSP and other AD/Cycle
tools using diskettes or a LAN server source, and functional enhancements to
Graphics Services.

 IBM SAA AD/Cycle WorkStation Platform/2

    o   Replaces the ISPF/PDF Version 3 Release 3 for MVS Workstation
        Platform for OS/2 distributed feature, and
    o   Supersedes the announcement of ISPF/PDF Version 3 Release 2 for
        VM Workstation Platform for OS/2 distributed feature referenced
        in IBM Programming Announcement 291-129.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20. IBM SAA AD/CYCLE TRANSLATIONMANAGER/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Systems Application Architecture* (SAA*) AD/Cycle* TranslationManager/2 is
an AD/Cycle productivity tool in the IBM Operating System/2* (OS/2*)
environment to support the translation of documentation and program-integrated
textual information by bilingual developers or trained translators.  It
supports translation as an integral part of the application development
process, starting with terminology created at the requirements gathering stage,
through translation of documentation and program-integrated text, and
maintenance of this textual information.  Its overall objective is to reduce
the time and effort required for producing finished translations, dictionaries,
and glossaries, while enhancing output quality and consistency.
TranslationManager/2 can also be used in stand-alone mode in an OS/2
environment for translation tasks to translate office- and publication-related
documents.

TranslationManager/2 is an OS/2 product that can be used either on a
stand-alone PS/2* or on a local area network.  In addition, it is a cross life
cycle tool within the AD/Cycle framework to support translation of
documentation and program-integrated textual information in one or more
national languages starting with terminology information being created at the
requirements gathering and early design stages, through dictionary management,
translation, maintenance, and redevelopment of the offline and online
documentation of an application.  TranslationManager/2 can also be used
independently of the AD/Cycle framework in an OS/2 environment, whether the
translator deals with the translation of documents for internal consumption or
for external publication.

A unique capability of TranslationManager/2 is the support of 19 source
languages (see Language Support).  As for target languages, any language
supported by OS/2 can be used, including Japanese, Korean, and Chinese.

TranslationManager/2 does not include bilingual or monolingual dictionaries,
with the exception of a bilingual dictionary sample.  However, machine-readable
bilingual or monolingual dictionaries with SGML file structure are compatible
with TranslationManager/2 and can be imported.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides enhanced business solutions by support of translation,
        as an integral part of developing an application, or in stand-
        alone mode outside of the AD/Cycle environment.
    o   Increases end-user productivity by providing the end user with a
        variety of convenient and powerful translation, dictionary, and
        linguistic support functions to save time and effort in the
        translation process.
    o   Reduces systems management complexity and increases operational
        productivity of the total translation process.
    o   Growth of the customer's organization will be enabled. The
        productivity increase of the human translators, resulting from
        use of TranslationManager/2, enables the customer to increase the
        volume of translations.
    o   Customers' investments will be protected by integrating of
        previously created translation and dictionary files.  Translations
        obtained previously by using TranslationManager/2 can be reused
        and adapted through the translation memory function.
    o   Participates in the AD/Cycle High-Level Language and Generator
        scenarios.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21. IBM SAA AD/CYCLE PROLOG/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM SAA* AD/Cycle* Prolog product family consists of IBM SAA AD/Cycle
Prolog/MVS and VM Version 1 and IBM SAA AD/Cycle Prolog/2 Version 1. IBM SAA
AD/Cycle Prolog is a high-level, high-productivity programming language based
on mathematical logic.

Many types of application can be developed by using IBM SAA AD/Cycle Prolog,
ranging from traditional data processing applications through knowledge-based
processing applications to natural-language processing applications. IBM SAA
AD/Cycle Prolog/2 is particularly efficient when addressing complex domains
because of the power of the declarative and logic expressions of the language.
For a given complexity, applications can be developed more quickly and the
resulting programs can be significantly smaller and easier to maintain when
compared to those developed using other high-level languages.

IBM SAA AD/Cycle Prolog/2 is a new implementation based on its predecessor
products: IBM Prolog for OS/2 (5621-065) and IBM Prolog Runtime for OS/2
(5621-035). It includes enhancements and AD/Cycle Level 2 integration.

AD/Cycle Prolog is a full, logic-based programming language utilizing
inferencing technology.

AD/Cycle Prolog addresses a specific class of programmers: those who are more
highly skilled in conceptual and abstract reasoning, usually college graduates
in Computer Science.

Programming in Prolog is different from using a conventional, procedural
programming language. The programmer concentrates on the logical expression of
the problem rather than on the way the computer has to execute the solution to
the problem.

Prolog programming is also different from the standard KBS shell or tool
approach, where the problem is expressed in terms of rules and frames. In
Prolog the programmer has to manage the top-down logical structure of the
problem, whereas using standard KBS tools the programmer has to manage the
consistency of the knowledge expressed by the rules and frames.

This leads to a clear differentiation between the three approaches, and between
the prerequisite skills and class of problem best suited to each of them.

Prolog will be the first choice when the problem has a complex logic content
and when the application developer concerned has the necessary Prolog skills.
Because of the nature of these skills, and the complexity of the problems that
they address, Prolog programmers prefer to work in their own language syntax
and semantic environment.

Because AD/Cycle Prolog supports the natural-language type of syntax extremely
well, and offers good object-orientation facilities, it is particularly
suitable for developing software engineering tools, application solutions, and
conventional management information system applications. This design should
make it easier to incorporate user-friendly end-user interfaces into
applications.

Because of its logical base and advanced inferencing technology, AD/Cycle
Prolog will also become the natural choice for developing complex artificial
intelligence applications.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   When a programmer uses Prolog he or she develops a logically
        consistent description of the problem. When Prolog executes the
        application it implicitly controls the logical path to the
        solution.  This should lead to more efficient algorithms.
    o   Prolog is designed to be very productive, as it provides
        interactive programming, a fast interpreter, and a full set of
        built-in functions, particularly for developing large and complex
        applications.
    o   IBM SAA AD/Cycle Prolog is also designed to enable application
        developers to rapidly create prototypes. An initial prototype
        provides the basic structure of the final operational application.
    o   The Prolog development features provide a unique application
        development environment which combines object-oriented programming
        facilities with logic programming.
    o   Prolog participates in the AD/Cycle Code Development and Rapid
        Development scenarios.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22. GRAPHICS INTERFACE KIT/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

01G8188     Graphics Interface Kit/2, English

01G8189     Graphics Interface Runtime/2, English

01G8237     Graphics Interface Kit/2, Japanese

01G8238     Graphics Interface Runtime/2, Japanese ;p.Graphics Interface Kit/2
is a licensed product for Data Visualisation.  It generates graphical user
interfaces for a wide range of applications and tools that can display
information in graphical rather than in textual form. It belongs to the
category of CUA User Interface Prototyping and Development tools and runs under
Operating System/2* 2.0(OS/2*)  on a programmable workstation (PWS).

Graphics Interface Runtime/2 is needed on each workstation where an application
developed with Graphics Interface Kit/2 will be executed.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Customer productivity is considerably raised in two different
        ways: productivity of end-users, because of the intuitive and
        graphical way of data presentation achievable with Graphics
        Interface Kit/2; and the productivity of developers, who can
        create graphical interfaces with much less coding than previously
        required.
    o   Adoption of a new technology for information presentation and
        animation (data visualization) will facilitate the implementation
        of business solutions.
    o   Investments for existing programs can be protected, as Graphics
        Interface Kit/2 enables developers to retrofit new graphical
        interfaces on existing applications.
    o   Growth Enablement of applications or tools with a graphical
        interface provided by Graphics Interface Kit/2 is ensured, because
        Graphics Interface Kit/2 supports the OS/2 workplace shell and 32
        bit operation.
    o   Systems Management is supported by the ease with which the product
        is installed (via an installation utility) and used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23. OPERATING SYSTEM/2 (OS/2) VERSION 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Operating System/2* (OS/2*) Version 2.0 will fulfill IBM's stated intent to
deliver a high-quality, advanced function 32-bit OS/2.  The ability to run DOS,
Windows (1) 16-bit and 32-bit OS/2 applications concurrently from a single
operating system makes OS/2 Version 2.0 the "integrating platform" for the
enterprise. In addition, a simplified yet powerful user interface with a
graphical OS/2 2.0 installation procedure, an object-oriented OS/2 Workplace
shell, on-line contextual help, on-line reference and tutorial provide enhanced
ease-of-use and increased productivity.

By exploiting current and emerging technologies such as networking, multimedia,
and object-oriented programming environments, as well as supporting Intel 386
(2) SX and higher hardware platforms, OS/2 Version 2.0 protects customer
investments while moving them into the future.  OS/2 Version 2.0 is positioned
by IBM as the platform of choice for the industry.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides the capability to run DOS, Windows, 16-bit, and 32-bit
        applications concurrently from a single operating system
    o   Provides operating system integrity protecting the kernel from
        applications and applications from each other
    o   Exploits the function provided by Intel 386 SX and higher based
        personal computers
    o   Offers usability enhancements provided by the OS/2 Workplace
        shell, Graphical Installation, Online Tutorial and Online
        Contextual Help
    o   Ready-to-use mini applications (applets) for productivity and
        entertainment
    o   Provides device driver support for new and existing hardware
        devices including many printers and plotters


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24. OPERATING SYSTEM/2 STANDARD EDITION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

84F7-588 - OS/2 S.E. V1.3 3.5-INCH (1.44MB) MEDIA

85F1-671 - OS/2 PROGRAMMING TOOLS AND INFORMATION VERSION 1.2/1.3

Operating System/2* Standard Edition (SE) Version 1.3 fulfills IBM's stated
intent to deliver in OS/2 Standard Edition a 2MB OS/2 entry system and to
further expand the range of OS/2 capable systems.  OS/2 Programming Tools and
Information Version 1.2/1.3 will assist application developers exploit this new
function.

IBM OS/2 SE 1.3 has been enhanced to provide increased performance in memory
constrained environments, reduced requirements for system memory and fixed disk
space.  Also provided are Procedures Language 2/REXX, enhanced font support,
improved printer device drivers and usability enhancements.

IBM OS/2 SE 1.3 is positioned as the advanced, multitasking operating system
for IBM Personal System/2* (PS/2*) Models 25 286, 30 286, 50, 50 Z, 55 SX, 60,
65, 70, P70, 80, 90, 95, the IBM Personal Computer XT* Model 286, and the IBM
Personal Computer AT* (Excluding XT/370 and AT/370).

IBM OS/2 SE 1.3 will replace OS/2 SE Version 1.2.  Its increased performance
and reduced main memory and fixed disk storage requirements are very attractive
to the migrating DOS user.

For users requiring graphical user interfaces, IBM recommends IBM OS/2 SE 1.3
for use on systems with 2 MB or greater main memory and a 30 MB or greater
fixed disk.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Increased performance in memory-constrained environments
    o   Reduced main memory and fixed disk requirements
    o   Adobe Type Manager (1), ATM (1), and IBM's core set of fonts
    o   Procedures Language 2/REXX
    o   Printer installation, performance, usability and device driver
        enhancements
    o   New Program Properties enable simplified application auto start at boot
        time
    o   Programming Tools and Information Version 1.2/1.3
(1) Adobe Type Manager is a Registered Trademark of Adobe Systems Inc.  ATM is
a Registered Trademark of Adobe Systems Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25. IBM OPERATING SYSTEM/2 EXTENDED EDITION V1.3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OS/2 Extended Edition V1.3 takes advantage of the performance improvements and
the reduced memory and fixed disk requirements of OS/2 Standard Edition V1.3.

OS/2 Extended Edition V1.3 provides enhanced font support.

ACDI calls can be re-directed across a LAN to the LAN Asynchronous Connection
Server V2.0 providing line and modem pooling facilities for asynchronous
connections.

OS/2 Extended Edition includes an SAA Procedures Language which is a flexible
language that allows programmers to write command procedures in a clear
structured way.  OS/2 Extended Edition is a primary participant in IBM Systems
Application Architecture. OS/2 Extended Edition installation process is
augmented by the use of Basic Configuration Services and Batch Configuration
support.

The functions supported by the Communications Manager are SNA Gateway, ASCII
and 3270 terminal emulation that run as Presentation Manager applications and
5250 work station feature that runs in an OS/2 full screen session.  There is
conventional LU application support for SNA LU 0, 1, 2, and 3 protocols that
allow OS/2 applications to communicate with LU 0, 1, 2, and 3 host
applications. Supported data links include ethernet DIX Version 2.0 and IEEE
802.3, X.25, twinax, Token-Ring, and SDLC.

The LAN Requester supports the IBM OS/2 LAN APIs and takes advantage of the
performance improvements and large disk media management characteristics
provided by the High Performance File System option of OS/2.  Support is also
included for User Profile Management, ethernet DIX Version 2 and IEEE 802.3 LAN
Media support and additional APIs for application development of distributed
applications over the LAN.

Database Manager capabilities include Token-Ring, PC LAN and etherand LAN
support using Remote Data Services.  The DOS Database Requester also supports
etherand LANs.  It also supports Referential Integrity, Procedures Language
2/REXX support, precompiler support for COBOL/2, C/2, Pascal/2(1), FORTRAN/2
languages, a Query Manager Callable Interface, and a Business Graphics
Interface.  Support is included for Error Log, security functions (SQL
GRANT/REVOKE support), and data isolation.  The Query Manager uses Presentation
Manager controls, graphics, icon, and windowing utilities.  The Database
Manager utilizes X.25 connectivity as provided by the Communications Manager.
This provides support for the Database Manager Remote Data Services, between
OS/2 workstations connected to an X.25 network.

IBM Procedures Language 2/REXX can be used to write command procedures and
macros for OS/2 programs.  Procedures Language 2/REXX is supported by the
Database Manager SQL CPI and the Query Manager Callable Interface.

OS/2 Extended Edition is a single flexible SAA solution for customers requiring
a mixture of communications and data management which can be individually
selected and installed.  This simplifies the customer's software decisions,
education, and product support.  It provides ease of use features for
installation and problem management.

The Communications Manager provides concurrent connectivities, multiple
protocols, concurrent emulation of multiple terminal types, and file transfer.
The network may include Mainframe Interactive (MFI), X.25, SDLC, IBM
Token-Ring, Ethernet DIX Version 2.0, IEEE 802.3 and IBM PC Network links.  An
SNA gateway between supported LANs and a S/370 host is also provided.  Terminal
functions supported are 3270, 5250, and ASCII.  Multiple APIs that may be used
together where appropriate, include APPC, EHLLAPI (for 3270 and 5250), ACDI,
NETBIOS, IEEE 802.2, LUA (for LU 0, 1, 2, and 3), SRPI, and X.25.

The Database Manager supports the relational model of data, the Structured
Query Language (SQL), and is consistent with IBM's host database products DB2,
SQL/DS, and the OS/400 Database Manager.  End-user facilities are available for
data entry, data edit, query, and report writing.  Database Local Area Network
support is provided.

The LAN Requester, when attached to the OS/2 LAN Server, provides for sharing
PS/2 workstations and personal computer resources such as disks, files,
printers, and serially-attached devices.  It provides processing capabilities
over the LAN as if these resources were a physical part of the local
workstation.

OS/2 Extended Edition users have a powerful facility, Procedures Language
2/REXX, to implement simple to complex operations in a form that may be saved
and re-executed with a single command.  Procedures Language 2/REXX may also be
used as a general purpose macro language for a variety of interactive programs
in which the user may have a need to perform repeated complex sequences of
operations.  Procedures Language 2/REXX is similar to the Virtual
Machine/System Product (VM/SP) interpreter and is based on the REstructured
eXtended eXecutor language (REXX).

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Systems Application Architecture (SAA) participant
    o   OS/2 EE V1.3 adds improved performance and reduced memory/fixed
        disk requirements
    o   OS/2 EE V1.3 provides enhanced font support
    o   Stored Program procedures available through the Database
        Application Remote Interface
    o   Multiple connectivity support including SDLC, X.25, DFT links
        together with Token-Ring, ethernet DIX Version 2.0 and IEEE 802.3
        and IBM PC Network LANs
    o   Integrated SAA Procedures Language, Procedures Language 2/REXX
    o   AS/400 Twinaxial Connectivity and 5250 Work Station Feature
    o   3270 and ASCII terminal emulation including file transfer, use
        of the Presentation Manager, 3270 Host Directed Print, and 3270
        Host Graphics enabling
    o   SNA Gateway under OS/2 EE
    o   ACDI redirection to the LAN Asynchronous Connection Server V2.0
        (separate product)
    o   Multiple APIs including APPC, EHLLAPI, ACDI, NETBIOS, IEEE 802.2,
        SRPI, X.25, and SNA LUA (for LU 0, 1, 2, and 3)
    o   Batch Configuration support, Basic Configuration Services and
        Advanced Configuration alternatives
    o   LAN Requester support for the IBM OS/2 LAN APIs and the High
        Performance File System in addition to User Profile Management,
        etherand LAN support, and additional APIs
    o   Etherand LAN support of the DOS Database Requester
    o   Referential Integrity and significant levels of data isolation
    o   COBOL, Pascal, Fortran, C/2 and Procedures Language 2/REXX support
    o   Query Manager Callable interface and a Business Graphics Interface
    o   Query Manager using a Presentation Manager interface
    o   Support for User Profile Management and GRANT/REVOKE SQL
    o   X.25 connectivity, SQLQMF Facility, and Query Manager Menus and
        Panels.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26. IBM SAA COMMON USER ACCESS CONTROL LIBRARY/2 V1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM SAA Common User Access Controls Library/2 Version 1.0 provides a set of CUA
91 graphical user interface controls for OS/2* Version 1.3 and Microsoft (1)
Windows Version 3.0 applications.  With these controls, users can now have
consistent Common User Access* applications across OS/2 Version 2.0, OS/2
Version 1.3 and Windows Version 3.0.  In providing the Presentation Manager*
Application Programming Interface (API) for the SAA* CUA 91 architecture,
Common User Access Controls Library aides in migration from OS/2 Version 1.3
and Windows Version 3.0 to OS/2 Version 2.0.  For OS/2 Version 1.3 users, the
controls provided by Common User Access Controls Library include container,
value set, notebook, slider, file dialog and font dialog.  For Windows Version
3.0 users, the controls provided by Common User Access Controls Library include
spin button, container, value set, notebook, slider, file dialog and font
dialog.

In September 1991, IBM announced CUA extensions to its SAA architecture.  The
SAA CUA 91 architecture strategy is focused on providing a user interface that
can exploit increasing levels of application-to-application interoperability at
the programming workstation while allowing users the freedom to customize and
organize their work environments as the job requires.  Application developers
are encouraged to participate in this strategy by enabling their application to
the enhancements as documented in the following publications:  SAA CUA Guide to
User Interface Design (SC34-4289) and SAA CUA Advanced Interface Design
Reference (SC34-4290).

This strategy recognizes that application developers require not only a
definition of the user interface, but productivity tools to assist in the
development of software to make the user interface a reality.  The Common User
Access Controls Library provides the application developer a set of dynamic
link libraries (DLLs) for both the OS/2 Version 1.3 and Windows Version 3.0
programming environments that can be used in the development of applications
that conform to the CUA 91 architecture.  Common User Access Controls Library
fully exploits CUA 91 architecture guidelines.  Other CUA 91 architecture
guidelines such as the definition of major objects are the responsibility of
the application developer.

DLLs, sample code and on-line documentation are provided for the following the
CUA 91 architecture constructs:

    o   Container Control
    o   Notebook Control
    o   Value Set Control
    o   Slider Control
    o   File Dialog
    o   Font Dialog
    o   Spin Button Control (for Windows only, already included in OS/2 Version
        1.3 operating system).

Usage of these controls will allow development of programs that conform to the
application orientation of the CUA 91 architecture for both the OS/2 Version
1.3 and Windows Version 3.0 environment.  The consistency of the Common User
Access Controls Library interfaces with the new APIs in OS/2 Version 2.0 will
provide for user interface migration with minimal rework.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Offers ability to conform to CUA 91 architecture for OS/2
        Version 1.3 and Windows Version 3.0.
    o   Relieves application developers of significant user interface
        development efforts which allows them to concentrate on the
        competitive functions.
    o   Provides for easier application migration to OS/2 Version 2.0
        because the CUA Controls APIs for OS/2 Version 1.3 and Windows
        Version 3.0 are consistent with those found in OS/2 Version 2.0.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27. IBM RETAIL WORKBENCH/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Retail Workbench/2 is designed to support the development of retail
applications for the 4680 Store System.  IBM Retail Workbench/2 allows for the
integration of four other development tools to create the IBM 4680 Advanced
Development Environment. This environment runs on OS/2* Version 2.0 and
includes support for the 4680 BASIC programming language.

The IBM 4680 Advanced Development Environment expands and enhances the current
development environment with strong support for the 4680 BASIC language.  All
IBM 4680 sales applications are written in 4680 BASIC.

HIGHLIGHTS The IBM 4680 Advanced Development Environment:

    o   Is a complete set of tools running on OS/2 Version 2.0 for developing
        retail applications
    o   Helps enhance programmer productivity through its ease-of-use and
        automation of functions in developing and maintaining applications
    o   Improves the management of application code libraries by automating the
        process of supporting multiple versions of application code and library
        access by multiple programmers
    o   Supports the use of the 4680 Application Debugger.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28. IBM PERSON TO PERSON/2 VERSION 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Methods of improving communication and decision making between people are in
increasing demand.  With the growing power of desktop workstations and the
advent of widespread high bandwidth data networks, new methods encompassing
digital data, graphics, image and even realtime digital video in addition to
voice have become practical.  Allowing several users to communicate and
collaborate on a single piece of work, although in separate locations, is
called Computer Supported Collaborative Working (CSCW).

IBM Person to Person/2 Version 1.0 provides CSCW for multiple users connected
by local or remotely bridged LAN or ASYNC communication links and enables the
establishment, administration and termination of remote meetings.  The product
includes basic desktop conferencing utilities which allow collaborative workers
to share and annotate the information in an OS/2* window on the screen.  Under
the control of members of the collaborative work session, windows may be seen
by all members of the group.  All users see the same window content, which can
be discussed using office telephones.  With the appropriate optional hardware
and software the users can also see one another or other real time images in a
video window on their screens.

IBM Person to Person/2 Version 1.0 is a cross-industry personal productivity
tool for users of OS/2 Version 2.0 LAN attached workstations.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Use workstations for collaborative working between personnel
        in different locations.
        -   Increases decision making accuracy and/or speed
        -   Increases employee productivity
        -   Reduces inter-office movement and travel requirements
        -   Makes more effective use of skilled resources
        -   Saves time
        -   Saves money
    o   Easy to install on existing workstations
        -   Software installed in 30 minutes
        -   Uses existing Token-Ring, Ethernet,** or Asynchronous
            communications.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29. IBM ROUTEXPANDER/2 V1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The RouteXpander/2, an Operating System/2* (OS/2*) licensed program, extends an
existing OS/2 Version 2.0 communicating workstation into a high function, entry
level node in bridge and router networks.  The RouteXpander/2 source route
bridge and multiprotocol routing facilities transport multiple protocols,
including TCP/IP, SNA/APPN, and NETBIOS, over a single physical link, using
either a frame relay or point-to-point connection. RouteXpander/2 can be used
as a low cost 6611 Data Link Switching feeder node to an upstream 6611 Network
Processor.  When combined with the new IBM Wide Area Connector adapter,
RouteXpander/2 provides high speed wide area network communication up to 2.048
MB per second.

RouteXpander/2 provides an economical, entry-level feeder node that will
interoperate with IBM 6611 and industry standard routers.  As a licensed
program offering, it may be easily added to an existing OS/2 file/print/mail
server or standalone workstation, with available capacity.  Because
RouteXpander/2 presents the appearance of a token ring LAN to higher level
protocols, existing communications products need not be modified to gain the
benefits of frame relay, source route bridging, and router networks. Existing
OS/2 communications protocols, such as SNA/APPN, TCP/IP, and NETBIOS, may be
routed or bridged into the backbone network.

RouteXpander/2 is well suited to small LANs and standalone workstations.
Configurations that require off-LAN communication, but that do not need a
dedicated bridge or router, can now gain high-speed access to WANs.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Exploiting the frame relay technology and by serving as a feeder node to
        the IBM 6611 Network Processor and industry-standard router networks
    o   Providing OS/2 applications with high-speed, affordable access to
        enterprise data with minimal consideration of geographic location or
        processor type
    o   Multiplexing multiple protocols over a single physical link thus reducing
        network cost
    o   Supporting the multiple communications protocol stacks available on OS/2;
        allowing development of business solutions using the most appropriate
        applications, without regard for underlying communications protocol.
    o   Providing a high function, entry level network connection for small LANs
        and standalone OS/2 workstations.
    o   Providing a frame relay, bridging, and router programming solution that
        operates on an open, standard platform; allowing customers to tailor
        their systems according to required communications protocols and
        workstation processor power.
    o   Enhances end user productivity when combined with the new IBM Wide Area
        Connector adapter, by providing high speed communication up to 2.048
        Megabits per second; which can improve end user response time for
        communication over wide-area networks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 30. IBM IMS CLIENT SERVER/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IMS Client Server/2*, an OS/2* licensed program, provides facilities to enhance
the use of programmable workstations (PWS) in an IMS/ESA* Transaction Manager
(IMS TM) environment.  These facilities increase the productivity of
application developers, enabling them to be more responsive to the needs for
new business solutions that take advantage of the capabilities of the PWS,
while protecting the IMS/ESA TM customers' investment in existing applications
(stored procedures) for 327x terminals.

IMS Client Server/2 is the OS/2 product that promotes the development of
Client/Server Systems Application Architecture* (SAA*) transaction processing
applications with IMS/ESA TM hosts, enabling business solutions that
incorporate the technology of the PWS into an IMS/ESA TM environment.  IMS
Client Server/2 provides cooperative processing client functions, operating on
a PWS network connected to a host IMS/ESA TM server with its associated
database.  That database may be either IMS/ESA Database Manager (IMS DB) or
DATABASE 2* (DB2*).

While EASEL Workbench** can be used to generate applications that can
communicate with any host that supports LU2 or LU6.2, the functions provided by
IMS Client Server/2 are designed specifically and optimized for IMS/ESA TM
applications (stored procedures).  Thus, while IMS Client Server/2 is designed
to be used only with IMS/ESA TM applications, it provides substantially simpler
and more functional IMS/ESA TM interfaces than EASEL and significantly shields
the application from the details of communicating with the host.  Additionally,
IMS Client Server/2 is compatible with EASEL and they can be used in
conjunction with each other to yield a hybrid application utilizing features of
both products.

    o   The non-DP professional for improved access to IMS data needed to make
        business decisions.
    o   The DP professional for development of new, or exploitation of existing,
        IMS/ESA TM transaction-oriented applications which access IMS/ESA DB
        and/or DB2 in a distributed processing environment.
    o   OS/2-based product that enhances user productivity by promoting the
        development of Client/Server SAA applications with IMS/ESA TM hosts.  IMS
        Client Server/2 includes a facility that helps customers upgrade existing
        IMS/ESA TM applications (stored procedures) with an OS/2 Presentation
        Manager* end-user interface.
    o   Enables business solutions that incorporate the technology of the PWS
        into an IMS/ESA TM environment.
    o   Provides investment protection by allowing existing IMS 327x MFS
        applications (stored procedures) to be invoked by an OS/2 application
        without change to the IMS/ESA TM application itself.
    o   Interactive dialogs for system management.
    o   Enables customer growth in PWS based services by providing client/server
        processing access to IMS/ESA TM data at the host.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31. IBM CALLPATH CALLCOORDINATOR/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

20G0563     CallPath CallCoordinator/2

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF MARCH 21, 1994.)

20G0564     CallPath CallCoordinator/2 Server

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF MARCH 21, 1994.)

20G0565     CallPath CallCoordinator/2 Archive

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF MARCH 21, 1994.)

IBM* announces CallPath* CallCoordinator/2*, a licensed software application
which can add call management capabilities to existing business applications
and help increase the productivity of call centers, help desks, and service
bureaus.  CallCoordinator/2 provides advanced call management function, access
to applications in multiple IBM operating environments, connectivity to IBM
DirectTalk* voice processing systems, and can be linked to several different
telephone systems.  Similar to IBM DirectRoute/2*, CallCoordinator/2 is a
member of the IBM CallPath Family and uses SwitchServer/2* and CallPath/2* to
obtain access to telephone switching systems.

CallPath CallCoordinator/2 is a LAN-based system and includes three separately
priced programs:

o   CallCoordinator/2:  The base program which resides on each agent
    workstation.  It provides advanced call management function and merges
    telephone system-provided data with new or existing business
    applications. This component includes an application access development
    facility, as well as code to interface with specific programs and
    devices.
o   CallCoordinator/2 Server: An optional server which provides the ability
    to coordinate voice and data transfers.
o   CallCoordinator/2 Archive: An optional server which can collect and store
    call data with related business data.

CallCoordinator/2 provides both inbound and outbound capabilities.  These
include: intelligent answering, integrated voice and data transfer, call
conferencing and consultation, the ability to make a call, and the ability to
retrieve data on either a caller or called party.  CallCoordinator/2 can use
both Automatic Number Identification (ANI) and Dialed Number Identification
Service (DNIS) to provide intelligent answering solutions.

CallCoordinator/2 includes programs to interface to the IBM DirectTalk* family
of voice processing systems and the 9270 voice response unit, enabling the
creation of automated call attendant solutions.

CallPath CallCoordinator/2's flexibility and connectivity enables the
development of call center solutions in a distributed data environment.
CallCoordinator/2 is implemented as a LAN-based system which runs on Operating
System/2* (OS/2*) Version 1.3 Extended Edition* on a Personal System/2* (PS/2*)
workstation.

CallCoordinator/2 can provide access to multiple applications on OS/2,
Operating System/400*, (OS/400*), VM, MVS, IMS, and VSE.  Sample interfaces are
provided for OS/2 Database Manager and the OS/2 dynamic data exchange (DDE)
facility.  A special tool is provided to simplify the linking of
CallCoordinator/2 to existing System/370* and Application System/400* (AS/400*)
applications through terminal emulation.

CallCoordinator/2 can interface with a variety of telephone systems through
IBM's CallPath Services Architecture.  These include:

    o   American Telephone and Telegraph DEFINITY(1) Generic 2(1)
    o   Northern Telecom Meridian(2) 1 Communications System
    o   Rolm 9751 Business Communication System

CallCoordinator/2 can operate with the ROLMphone(4) 244PC as well.

IBM CallPath CallCoordinator/2 is similar to IBM DirectRoute/2, a call
management application.  DirectRoute/2 is an inbound only product for
connection to certain Northern Telecom and AT and T telephone switching
systems. CallCoordinator/2 is an inbound/outbound call management application
which interfaces to IBM CallPath/2 and uses IBM CallPath SwitchServer/2 for
connection to a greater variety of telephone switching systems.

Compared to other call management applications, CallCoordinator/2 provides a
superior combination of flexibility, function, and connectivity.  Many other
products support only one telephone system, or support only one hardware
platform, or operate in only one host computer environment.

IBM CallPath CallCoordinator/2 can operate with a variety of telephone systems,
access applications on multiple IBM computer hardware platforms, and in
multiple environments.  In addition, CallCoordinator/2 provides interfaces for
IBM voice processing systems and other devices.  Finally, CallCoordinator/2
provides a robust set of call management functions.

Each customer situation will be unique, in terms of requirements for function,
telephone system support, application platforms and environments. Other issues,
such as solution programming requirements, solution cost, and speed of
implementation may be important.

CallPath CallCoordinator/2 should be considered when:

o   The customer wishes to add call management function to existing
    applications
o   Users have or are planning to install a Token-Ring or Ethernet system of
    intelligent workstations capable of running OS/2 Version 1.3
o   Business applications reside on OS/2 or on a computer and environment
    accessible via 3270 or 5250 terminal emulation
o   The customer prefers a distributed, cooperative processing call
    management solution which can interface to multiple host computers
o   The customer desires to implement a call management solution quickly or
    start with a pilot program and grow it over time
o   The customer's business applications reside on IBM operating systems or
    environments not served by other CallPath products

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Helps increase agent productivity by minimizing the time spent gathering
        information from a caller and by reducing the number of keystrokes
        required to complete a transaction screen.
    o   Helps protect call center investments by interfacing to existing host
        applications with little or no modification and by supporting the most
        commonly installed PBX switches, through the IBM CallPath Services
        Architecture.
    o   Helps improve service to the call center customer by obtaining caller
        data without making the caller wait and answer questions.
    o   Provides a low cost of entry for smaller call centers and an incremental
        growth path for call centers by utilizing PS/2 workstations and the
        expandable IBM Token-Ring network.
    o   Improves the ability to analyze call center operations by providing a
        facility to collect call data and associated business data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32. IBM OS/2 LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) SERVER VERSION 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

04G1-051  IBM OS/2 LAN SERVER VERSION 2.0-ENTRY (3.5 INCH)

04G1-055  IBM OS/2 LAN SERVER VERSION 2.0-ADVANCED (3.5 INCH)

Major new capabilities, options, features and support are announced for the
OS/2 LAN Server.  IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0-Entry supports either 16-Bit
or 32-Bit operating systems, provides enhancements in the areas of system
management, Double Byte Character Set (DBCS) support for DOS LAN Requester,
Windows 3.0 support and OEM enabling.  The Entry product is especially
attractive for customers specializing in workgroup computing.

A LAN Requesters Distributed Feature is offered to enable DOS and OS/2
workstations to access the OS/2 LAN Server in a Client/Server relationship. The
function offered in the Distributed Feature is a subset of that provided by
OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0.

In addition to the function described above, excluding 32-Bit operating system
support, IBM OS/2 LAN Server 2.0-Advanced provides additional performance
enhancements by exploiting advanced functions of the Intel 386 architecture.
Also provided is disk mirroring/duplexing and local server security. These
functions allow the IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0-Advanced to support
customers with mission critical applications requiring higher performance and
enhanced data integrity.

IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0 has the same APIs as well as most of the same
functions as Microsoft's LAN Manager 2.0. However by providing unique features,
IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 2.0 achieves competitive advantage in many
marketing situations.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Entry Server supports either 16-Bit or 32-Bit Operating Systems
    o   OS/2 LAN Server was repackaged to include Requesters
    o   OS/2 Requester supports 16-Bit or 32-Bit Operating Systems
    o   DOS LAN Requester support for DOS 5.0 upper memory blocks
    o   Support for selected OEM Hardware and Operating Systems
    o   Advanced Server supports Disk Mirroring and Duplexing


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33. IBM OS/2 EXTENDED EDITION VERSION J1.3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Operating System/2 (R) Extended Edition (OS/2 (R) EE) Version J1.3 is a
Japanese language version of the OS/2 EE operating system.  With this
announcement, a Japanese version of OS/2 EE will be marketed, serviced and
supported in the United States.

OS/2 EE Version J1.3 will be attractive to customers who choose to work in the
Japanese language.  It can be installed on a PS/2 (R) Model 56 SX (Models 043
and 045 only) or PS/2 56 SLC (Models 55 and 59 only) with the Japanese DBCS
Keyboard and the PS/2 Japanese Display Adapter.  The IBM OS/2 EE can be used
for Kanji, Katakana or Hiragana data processing.  Refer to Product
Announcements 192-053 and 192-056, dated February 25, 1992, for additional
information. (R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Increased performance in memory constrained environments
    o   OS/2 EE Version J1.3 minimum memory requirement reduced
    o   Communications Manager enhancements for asynchronous
        communications support, Ethernet local area networks (LANs),
        batch configuration and 3270 emulation
    o   Support for new hardware
    o   Data base DOS Requester support for Ethernet LAN


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34. IBM CALLPATH SWITCHSERVER/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM CallPath SwitchServer/2 (TM) (5621-159) is enhanced to provide support of
the Northern Telecom DMS-100 and the American Telephone and Telegraph (AT and
T) DEFINITY (1) Generic 3i (G3i).  This is in addition to the previously
announced support of the Siemens Hicom (2) 300* Northern Telecom Meridian (3) 1
Communications System, ROLM 9751, AT and T DEFINITY Generic 2 (1), and the NEC
APEX/NEAX 2400 Information Management System (IMS).  SwitchServer/2 support of
all telephone systems is not available in all countries, therefore it is
necessary to verify availability through each country-specific announcement.

CallPath CICS/MVS (TM), CallPath CICS/VSE (TM), CallPath/2, and CallPath/DOS
for Windows (4) will support all of the telephone systems in this announcement.

In addition, CallPath SwitchServer/2 will provide switch connectivity to
CallPath/400.  CallPath/400 is a software program running on an Application
System/400 (R) (AS/400 (R)).  With this announcement, CallPath/400 will support
only the DMS-100.  This is in addition to the previously announced support of
the NEC APEX/NEAX 2400 IMS private branch exchange (PBX) in Asia Pacific. (TM)
Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (CallPath,
SwitchServer, SwitchServer/2, and CallPath SwitchServer/2 are trademarks of
IBM.) (1) DEFINITY and Generic 2 are registered trademarks of AT and T. (2)
Hicom is a registered trademark of Siemens AG, Munich and Berlin, Germany. (3)
Meridian is a registered trademark of Northern Telecom Incorporated. (4)
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp. (R) Registered trademark
of International Business Machines Corporation. *CallPath SwitchServer/2 will
also operate with currently installed IBM Com300 telephone systems.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides the mapping between the CallPath services application
        programming interface (API) and telephone systems' specific
        protocols
    o   Shields the business application programmer from telephone
        systems' specific formats and protocols (the programmer, however,
        should be aware of the telephone systems' functional capability)
    o   Provides interface (via OS/2 (R) Communications Manager) for
        network management, remote console support, systems
        administration, and problem determination
    o   Designed for unattended operation
    o   Allows flexibility through the selection of telephone systems to
        match varying businesses' needs
    o   Provides an interface to multiple hosts, reducing network costs
        and simplifying computer-telephone system networks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 35. IBM NETWORK TRANSPORT SERVICES/2 (NTS/2) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Network Transport Services/2 (NTS/2) provides programming interfaces
(NetBios, IEEE 802.2, and Network Driver Interface Specification (NDIS))
necessary for OS/2* 2.0 LAN enablement in customer environments where the OS/2
LAN Server is not required.  NTS/2 provides the transport protocols and network
adapter software to run network applications.

Integrated with NTS/2 is the LAN Configuration Installation Distribution
Utility which supplies file system redirection and code server setup for OS/2
2.0-based products.

Through the NDIS interface, NTS/2 allows the Novell* NetWare* Requester for
OS/2 to share network adapters with other network applications.

Using NTS/2, DOS applications written to the NetBios and IEEE 802.2 interfaces
on OS/2 2.0 are supported.  This virtual local area network (LAN) support
enables these DOS applications to share an adapter with other DOS and OS/2
applications running on the same machine.

IBM Network Transport Services/2 (NTS/2) is a solution for a LAN environment in
which there is no enterprise host system.  An example of this would be a small
business or a small, standalone workgroup LAN environment. It is intended to be
used for installation performed by an individual who initiates the installation
process at a workstation and performs other tasks such as removing/replacing
diskettes when prompted and rebooting the system when prompted.  NTS/2 does not
provide distribution services. NetView DM/2 can be used in either the LAN
environment without an enterprise host, or in conjunction with NetView DM for
MVS in an enterprise LAN environment made up of large complex workgroup LANs
with an MVS host. In both environments, it provides an unattended installation
solution and extends the CID process over the Wide Area Network.  Distribution
services, such as scheduling and administrative tracking, are also provided by
NetView DM/2. NetView DM/2 is the only solution that provides unattended
installation as well as installation of non-CID enabled products such as end
user applications.  In addition, NetView DM/2 provides the capability to clone
software across LANs.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides LAN enablement for NetBios and IEEE 802.2 APIs.
    o   Provides NDIS compliant LAN Adapter and Protocol Support (LAPS).
    o   Enables Novell NetWare Requester adapter sharing.
    o   Provides OS/2 2.0 virtual NetBios and virtual IEEE 802.2 API
        support for DOS applications.
    o   Provides OS/2 2.0 LAN Configuration Installation Distribution
        Utility.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Standard Microsystems (SMC) and Ethercard Plus are
trademarks of the Standard Microsystems Corporation. ** Ungermann-Bass (U/B)
and NIU are trademarks of the Ungerman-Bass Corporation. ** 3Com and Etherlink
II are trademarks of the 3Com Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 36. IBM LAN ENABLER VERSION 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM LAN Enabler 2.0 offers the OS/2 Requester, LAN Support Program and DOS
LAN Requester (DLR), that is identical function to the requesters that are
included with the IBM OS/2 LAN Server 2.0, in a separate program product. This
will allow connectivity to 80286 and 80386 workstations, including OS/2 LAN
Server 2.0 and Microsoft LAN Manager 2.0 as well as other compatible servers.
This product will also allow customers using IBM OS/2 2.0 to access NetBios,
NDIS-based and 802.2-based subsystems at a very economical price. IBM OS/2 LAN
Server 2.0 Softcopy Library, provides on 3.5-inch media, the publications for
OS/2 LAN Server 2.0. These publications are for display using BookMaster READ
products.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Enables OS/2 workstations to run NetBios, NDIS and 802.2
        applications without LAN Server 2.0 or Extended Services/2
    o   Provides connectivity to 80286 and 80386 workstations, including
        LAN Server 2.0 and Microsoft LAN Manager 2.0 as well as other
        compatible servers
    o   OS/2 LAN Server 2.0 Softcopy Library now available in Diskette
        form, for use with BookManager READ products


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37. IBM PRINT SERVICES FACILITY/2 (PSF/2) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Print Services Facility/2 (PSF/2) Version 1.10 is an Advanced Function
Printing (AFP)* print server that supports both stand-alone Local Area Networks
(LAN's) and enterprise-wide distributed print networks.  Functional
enhancements include:

    o   The Distributed Print Function (DPF), which allows distributed
        printing from MVS, VM, VSE, and OS/400* hosts
    o   The ability to print PostScript** Level 1 documents on all
        supported AFP and non-AFP printers
    o   The ability to convert Adobe Type 1 outline format fonts into
        rasterized AFP fonts for use on AFP printers.

Previously-announced support for OS/2 Version 2.0 and Novell Netware** 3.11 is
also included.

PSF/2 Version 1.10 bridges between PS/2*, LAN, and host printing, providing a
consistent distributed print solution for the entire enterprise.  It will be
available December 18, 1992.  No-charge upgrades are offered to existing
licensees of PSF/2 Version 1.00 and to licensees of IBM Remote PrintManager
(RPM) 3.0 who upgrade by December 31, 1993.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Distributed printing from MVS, VM, VSE, and OS/400 hosts
    o   Distributed printing from up to four simultaneous hosts
    o   Increased number of printers supported
    o   PostScript Level 1 printing on all PSF/2 supported AFP and
        non-AFP printers
    o   Support of the OS/2 Version 2.0 Operating System
    o   Support for Novell Netware 3.11
    o   Access to Adobe Type 1 outline format fonts
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc. **Microsoft
and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation **LaserJet is a
trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company **UNIX is a trademark of Unix System
Laboratories, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38. IBM LAN DISTRIBUTED PLATFORM (LANDP) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM LAN Distributed Platform (LANDP) products provide a client/server
distributed programming capability, well suited for applications, in a LAN
environment of mixed operating systems, DOS, OS/2*, and AIX*, and mixed machine
types, PCs, PSs, and RISC/6000*.  Clients, servers or a combination of clients
and/or servers may reside in any machine.  A common API across platforms and an
open design that accommodate user written servers are also provided.  LANDP/DOS
and LANDP/2 are introduced with this release.  In the OS/2 environment, LANDP/2
provides enhanced services built upon the OS/2 LAN Server, OS/2 LAN Requester,
OS/2 Communications Manager, and OS/2 Database Manager, through servers and a
high level LANDP call API.

LANDP products provide, additionally, a very significant set of sharing,
communications, system management, software distribution, and other system and
general purpose functions.

LANDP evolves from IBM FBSS family of products and extends and enhances the
function provided by FBSS products.  (For new function when comparing with FBSS
products, refer to the Compatibility section.)  LANDP/2 extends the FBSS/2 V1.1
function from 16 bit implementation to 32 bit implementation for support of
OS/2 V2.0.  Mixed LANs including FBSS and LANDP workstations are supported and
upward compatibility for FBSS applications is provided.

IBM LAN Distributed Platform (LANDP) products provide a consistent application
platform and application services to enable the design and implementation of
distributed applications over heterogenous workgroup LANs based on the client
server paradigm, with transparent access to workgroup the computer technology.

LANDP is a step forward distributed processing environments allowing users to
design and write today distributed applications over heterogeneous workgroup
LANs.  Designing and implementing today distributed applications will smooth
migration to distributed computing environment for customers willing to adopt
such strategy for their applications.

The LANDP workgroup system supports DOS, DOS/Windows**, and OS/2, workstations,
and AIX systems in a LAN and integrates those operating systems into a
consistent application platform using an LANDP Common Application Programming
Interface (API).  Application programs, independent of the underlying operating
system may be written using the LANDP Common API.

Windows compatibility is supported on specific scenarios.  Refer to the
Limitations section for more information.

LANDP open design allows users to implement applications as servers and
distribute them in any LANDP processor in the LAN.  User servers may also be
written to implement generic application functions and to support specific
industry devices and make the device functions available to all the workgroup.

LANDP extends and complements the respective operating systems to provide a
similar and consistent set of functions across the supported platforms.

LANDP includes a very rich set of services implemented either as utility
programs or as servers developed using the LANDP client/server paradigm, in one
or both LANDP products.  LANDP products provide solutions for WAN
communications (SNA (LU0, LU1, LU2, LU6.2), and Native X.25 servers, 3270 and
3287 emulators (for DOS)), data services (query, shared DOS directory, and
shared file servers), system management servers), generic application servers
(store for forwarding, forwarding, and electronic journal servers) and I/O
device support (4717 MSR/E, IBM 4718 PIN Pad, IBM 50-Key keyboard, and specific
banking printers and devices).  Among others, the following facilities are also
included:  Installation and Customization programs to allow the user to tailor
the above services to each workstation, and Debugging and Trace tools.  The
MVDM LANDP Relay and other functions allow LANDP/DOS applications to run in the
OS/2 V2 Virtual DOS Machine (VDM).

The powerful LANDP communications facilities implement communication services
and enhance and facilitate the existing ones.  The product is well suited for
customers that have a host system and want to support LAN-based remote
locations.  However, the broad set of LANDP functions make it also a good
choice for workgroup LAN system sharing capabilities across DOS, Windows, OS/2,
and AIX platforms.

IBM LANDP complements IBM OS/2 LAN Server and IBM OS/2 LAN Requester to build a
LAN Client/Server environment.  When the customer requirement is to share
system-type services, as for example file or print services, through
redirection in an individual LAN level, OS/2 LAN Server and OS/2 LAN Requester
are required.  When, additionally, the customer requirement is to have a
development environment accessing a set of distributed applications building
blocks as if they existed locally, LANDP provides the additional capabilities
plus a set of built-in functions in the application services arena.  There is
no direct interface between LANDP/2 and OS/2 LAN Server and OS/2 LAN Requester.
The facilities of these products are utilized through the normal OS/2 LAN
Requester redirection facilities which are transparent to LANDP.

LANDP is also compatible and complements other distributed services available
from IBM NetView DM/2, and IBM CICS OS/2 by either providing a layer of
services, neither covered by these products nor by the operating system, or
facilitating the existing services.  LANDP enhancements relate to data sharing,
communications, software distribution, system management and distributed
processing among others.  Specifically, LANDP/2 provides a high level LANDP
call API to the OS/2 Communications Manager and OS/2 Database Manager utilizing
and accessing the facilities of these products through the use of LANDP
distributed servers which may reside in any workstation or dedicated server
machine in the LAN.

LANDP evolves from IBM FBSS family of products and provides full compatibility
with existing FBSS products, supporting mixed LANs, including FBSS and LANDP
workstations, and providing upward compatibility for FBSS applications.  LANDP
is the natural growth path for current FBSS customers. LANDP products add new
function to FBSS products.  LANDP/2 extends the function of FBSS/2 V1.1 from a
16 bit implementation to 32 bit implementation for support of OS/2 V2.0.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Workgroup LANs supporting DOS, DOS/Windows, OS/2, and AIX, by
        extending the respective operating system function
    o   A common application platform for the design and development of
        both LAN distributed applications and user written servers using
        the client/server paradigm
    o   A LAN single system image for applications, by making to any
        LANDP workstation, and providing flexibility to select the best
        hardware/software implementation for each server function by
        allowing client and server processes to be allocated in any LANDP
        workstation in the LAN.

LANDP contribution to these areas and to system management is further enhanced
by a significant set of LANDP provided servers and facilities which utilize the
function of the supported Operating Systems, OS/2 LAN Server, OS/2 LAN
Requester, OS/2 Communications Manager, and OS/2 Database Manager. The LANDP
servers and facilities which provide this enhanced function include:

    o   Wide area network communications support for a variety of
        protocols:  SNA (LU0, LU1, LU2, LU6.2 (only with LANDP/2)) on
        SDLC, IEEE 802.2, and X.25. Also, Native X.25 on X.25.
    o   A variety of data services: Shared File server, Shared DOS
        directory server in LANDP/DOS; Shared File server, Query server
        in LANDP/2; and utility programs to ease maintenance and setup
        of data services
    o   Servers and utilities for LAN management, administration, and
        maintenance, including software and data distribution
    o   Compatibility with FBSS and PC/Integrator products, supporting
        mixed LANs and upward compatibility for FBSS applications
    o   A set of services allowing to design portable applications
        between the supported operating systems.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. **
Micro Focus is a trademark of Micro Focus (Note:  COBOL/2 is a trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation licensed for use by Micro Focus.).
** Intel and 80386 are trademarks of the Intel Incorporated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 39. CICS OS/2 VERSION 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

53G3-861 - CICS OS/2 VERSION 2.0

    Order Type   Feature   Part
    Number       Number    Number             Program Name
    ----------   -------   -------    -------------------------------
    5871-AAA      3127     53G3861    CICS OS/2 Version 2 single-user
    5871-AAA      3130     53G3862    CICS OS/2 Version 2 multi-user

Customer Information Control System* (CICS*) Operating System/2* (OS/2*)
Version 2 provides CICS transaction management to multiple users of
LAN-attached programmable workstations and ARTIC-attached ASCII terminals. CICS
OS/2 Version 2 operates as a server for clients, supports cooperative
processing when required with other CICS Family systems, and provides powerful
OLTP (online transaction processing) capabilities to support business critical
applications and their data in client/server environments. In addition CICS
OS/2 Version 2 provides enhanced CICS support for the single user at a
stand-alone or host-attached workstation.

CICS provides an environment for transaction management.  It enables the easy
building of a very wide range of business applications, providing the
application programmer with facilities which make transparent to him the
environment and all systems functions such as communications, and providing a
basis of high integrity.

The CICS product family is intended to provide compatible support across a wide
range of hardware and operating system platforms.  CICS products exploit
particular hardware and software capabilities of individual platforms, but are
broadly neutral with respect to choice of platform:  the choice of platform on
which to build may therefore be based on other factors, such as existing
investments in hardware or software, or existing skill sets.

CICS OS/2 Version 2 is the CICS product family member for the programmable
workstation, based on the OS/2 platform but with support for other popular
operating systems. In particular CICS OS/2 Version 2 is a client/server product
and is designed to optimize the exploitation of client/server networked
workstations. To effectively develop a transaction management business solution
in a client/server environment requires a transaction manager. CICS OS/2
Version 2 provides a transaction manager which is a member of the CICS family,
bringing the benefits of the standard CICS facilities and existing CICS
applications. It also enables interoperation with applications running under
CICS on other platforms.

CICS OS/2 Version 2 provides the capability to place business applications and
data on any server within the enterprise network.  When a transaction
management solution is required in the programmable workstation environment and
especially in client/server configurations of Local Area Networks, the solution
of choice should be based on on CICS OS/2 Version 2.  If there are no other
considerations to determine the operating system to be employed then OS/2
throughout may be recommended, but if the customer already has installations
based on DOS or Windows** then a LAN solution may be adopted with the use of
DOS or Windows clients.

A customer who has already installed an industry-specific IBM LAN solution,
such as those using FBSS, LANDP, DAE or DataTrade, should consider installing
CICS OS/2 Version 2 as a platform for future server applications and for future
interoperability with host systems. In most cases, applications using these
industry-specific solutions can interoperate with CICS OS/2 Version 2 via the
CICS ECI.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Enhanced support for Client/Server online transaction processing
        on stand-alone or host-connected local area network (LAN)
        configurations or ASCII terminal clusters with servers running
        OS/2 Version 2.
    o   Use of existing LANs and existing inventory of personal
        computers running DOS, OS/2, or Windows.
    o   Application of available CICS programming skills to the
        Client/Server environment, allowing new applications to be
        implemented without extensive retraining.
    o   User productivity enhanced by enabling customers to build client
        applications that exploit the advanced graphical user interface
        capabilities of OS/2 Version 2 or Windows.
    o   Installation of CICS OS/2 Version 2 from diskettes and use of a
        range of CICS-supplied transactions for administration tasks.
    o   Support for 32-bit applications.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. **
Novell, Btrieve and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40. IBM LAN NETWORK MANAGER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

74F5-538 LAN Network Manager Version 1.1

74F5-539 LAN Network Manager Entry

IBM LAN Network Manager, a SystemView* level 1 conformance licensed program,
allows the customer to manage multi-segment IBM Token-Ring Networks, broadband
and baseband IBM PC Networks, and the IBM 8209 LAN Bridge that interconnects a
Token-Ring segment and an Ethernet** segment.  Using this program, the customer
may choose to manage the Local Area Network (LAN) either centrally from an
enterprise NetView* or locally using the operator interface at the LAN
workstation.  It provides facilities to manage the LAN media and the LAN
adapters in the IBM Token-Ring Network or the IBM PC Network.  It uses the IBM
System Application Architecture* (SAA*) Operating System/2* (OS/2*) Extended
Edition (EE) or Extended Services (ES) Presentation Manager for the operator
interface and the IBM OS/2 EE or ES Structured Query Language (SQL) based
Database Manager for building the LAN configuration database, providing an
excellent platform for developing customized LAN management functions.  IBM LAN
Network Manager enhances the currently available IBM LAN Manager (P/N 25F8215)
using IBM LAN Station Manager and the IBM 8230 Token-Ring Network Controlled
Access Unit (CAU).

IBM LAN Network Manager extends the NetView-LAN commands to access an expanded
set of LAN parameters from NetView Version 2 Release 2 or later so that
customers can develop an integrated enterprise LAN/WAN (Wide Area Networks)
management solution.  IBM LAN Network Manager Version 1.1 also provides
graphics display support at the LAN to enhance user productivity.  A command
line interface at the IBM Network LAN Manager console that can be used for
local automation is also provided by IBM LAN Network Manager Version 1.1.

IBM LAN Network Manager functions will be released in two versions.  Current
users of IBM LAN Manager programs (83X9100 or 25F8215) are offered an upgrade
to IBM LAN Network Manager Version 1.0, or 1.1 for a charge.

IBM LAN Network Manager Entry, working in conjunction with NetView Version 2
Release 2 or later allows management of remote single-segment IBM Token-Ring or
IBM PC Network (broadband or baseband) LANs.  It runs as a task in the
multitasking IBM Operating System/2 (OS/2) Extended Edition (EE) or Extended
Services (ES) and communicates with NetView at the host using the OS/2 EE or ES
Communications Manager via an existing LAN SNA gateway. IBM LAN Network Manager
Entry provides the same expanded command/response facilities with NetView
Version 2 Release 2 or later as LAN Network Manager Version 1.1, allowing the
customers to integrate LAN/WAN management into a central management facility
with NetView.  No local operator interface is provided at the LAN workstation.

Current users of IBM LAN Manager Entry (25F8217) and IBM PC 3270 Emulation LAN
Management Program (83X8873) are offered an upgrade to IBM LAN Network Manager
Entry for a charge.

IBM LAN Network Manager Version 1.0 uses the SAA OS/2 EE or ES Presentation
Manager interface.  The OS/2 EE or ES Database Manager is used to build the
configuration table which allows our customers to develop database applications
that are unique to their LAN environment.  Customers may also have their own
report generating tools use this data to produce reports to meet the needs of
their business.  IBM LAN Network Manager Version 1.0, provides the capability
of managing LAN segments across an IBM 6611 Multiprotocol Router when the
router is attached to a bridge, that uses the IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge
Program, on that segment (PTF UR37051 is required).  With the graphics and IBM
LAN Station Manager support available in IBM LAN Network Manager Version 1.1,
customers may improve operator productivity in managing the LAN.  IBM LAN
Network Manager Version 1.1 also supports commands at the local command line
interface that can be used for automation at the LAN.  IBM LAN Network Manager
working with IBM 8230 Token-Ring Network Controlled Access Unit (CAU) and the
IBM LAN Station Manager enables managing establishment LANs from a PS/2
workstation; and therefore, should be proposed as the LAN management product
for establishment LANs.

With IBM LAN Network Manager Version 1.1, the NetView operator gets an expanded
set of LAN commands that may be issued from NetView Version 2 Release 2 or
later.  From NetView Version 2 Release 2 or later the customer has available
all of the commands that are available from the LAN Network Manager Version 1.1
console, allowing the customer to manage an unattended LAN Network Manager
Version 1.1 from NetView.  However, the customer will not see the graphic
topology displays that are available for the LAN Network Manager Version 1.1
console.  Using these commands, the NetView operator can develop an integrated
LAN/WAN management strategy for the enterprise.  This positions Version 1.1 as
the product of choice in enterprises that have multi-segment bridged LANs and
those that have implemented or plans to implement central network management
strategy using NetView.

IBM LAN Network Manager Entry is designed for managing remote single IBM
Token-Ring or IBM PC Network segment from NetView.  Large enterprises in
industries, such as insurance, retail, airlines and banking have multitudes of
small branches having small number of workstations installed in a single LAN
segment.  Because these branch locations generally do not have adequate
expertise available for diagnosing LAN problems, IBM LAN Network Manager Entry
provides an opportunity to integrate the management requirements for these
remote LAN locations into NetView, running at the central location. LAN Network
Manager Entry is also useful for managing LAN segments that are connected to a
host through Token-Rings that are attached with an IBM 6611 Multiprotocol
Router.  The expanded set of commands that may be issued from NetView allows
the integration of the enterprise LAN/WAN management into one NetView product,
thus making IBM LAN Network Manager Entry a powerful and attractive LAN
management offering for medium to large enterprises.

Marketing representatives may offer IBM LAN Network Manager to those customers
who require management of bridged LAN.  In this case management functions will
be available at NetView as well as locally at the LAN.  If the customer has a
single LAN segment and plans on managing the LAN from the central NetView, the
lesser cost alternative of IBM LAN Network Manager Entry which does not require
expertise at the LAN and which has no user interface at the LAN, may be
proposed.

HIGHLIGHTS IBM LAN Network Manager Version 1.0:

    o   Extends and enhances the management of LAN media and LAN
        attachments using IBM's SAA OS/2 EE or ES Presentation Manager
        and Database Manager
    o   Provides a powerful platform for growing LAN management
        applications using SQL database to manage Token-Ring and IBM PC
        Network, broadband and/or baseband.
    o   Working with CAU, allows control of access to the LAN
    o   Provides a facility to manage the explosive growth of LAN
        attached assets in the establishment.

IBM LAN Network Manager Version 1.1

    o   Expands and extends the NetView-LAN commands to allow accessing
        of the LAN functions from NetView, facilitating focal point
        LAN/WAN management using NetView
    o   Protects customer investment by the use of IBM LAN Network
        Manager - IBM LAN Station Manager communication protocols based
        on international Standards that facilitate inter-operability
        between different vendor products
    o   Provides graphics support that may increase network-management
        personnel productivity by using pictorial network topology for
        LAN management
    o   Allows local automation on the LAN using the command line
        interface support.

IBM LAN Network Manager Entry:

    o   Provides the same expanded set of NetView commands supported in
        IBM LAN Network Manager Version 1.1 allowing integration of LAN
        management into enterprise LAN/WAN management with NetView
    o   Provides a powerful platform (working with CAU and IBM LAN Station
        Manager) for growing LAN management applications to manage single
        segment Token-Ring or IBM PC Network, broadband or baseband
    o   Protects customer investment by the use of IBM LAN Network
        Manager Entry
        - IBM LAN Station Manager communication protocols based on
          international
        Standards that facilitate inter-operability between different
        vendor products
    o   Provides a facility to manage the explosive growth of LAN
        attached assets in the establishment.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 41. IBM LAN STATION MANAGER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM LAN Station Manager provides LAN configuration and environment data to
the IBM LAN Network Manager Version 1.1 from DOS and OS/2* LAN stations
attached to the IBM Token-Ring Network and the IBM PC Network.  The LAN Station
Manager in conjunction with the IBM 8230 Token-Ring Network Controlled Access
Unit also provides improved asset control for Token-Ring stations. *OS/2 is a
trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

The IBM LAN Station Manager should be installed on all LAN attached
workstations connected to Token-Ring and PC Network LANs that use the LAN
Network Manager.  The LAN Station Manager maintains a Management Information
Base (MIB) of station information that is available to the LAN Network Manager
that allows for enhanced station information and better management of LANs.
Some of the information in the MIB is dynamically set when the station is
started which allow changes in the station configuration to be detected by the
LAN Network Manager.

Information about the LAN attachment (access unit number, lobe number and
attachment module number) is automatically updated when the LAN Station Manager
is started if the 8230 Controlled Access Unit is used.  This allows the LAN
Network Manager to detect changes in the station attachment that indicates
whether the station has physically moved and is connected to a different LAN
attachment.  This is of great benefit for persons that must monitor and
inventory LAN assets.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides detailed LAN station information to the LAN Network
        Manager that allows it to manage LANs more effectively.
    o   Centralizes information so that physical assets can be better
        monitored and managed.
    o   Investment protection is assured with support of existing LAN
        stations and communication protocols based on international
        standards that facilitate inter-operability between different
        vendor products that support the same standards.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 42. IBM DISTRIBUTED CONSOLE ACCESS FACILITY (DCAF) V1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Distributed Console Access Facility* (DCAF*) has been enhanced to support
OS/2* Presentation Manager applications, in addition to the already-supported
OS/2 or PC/DOS full screen text mode applications.

Other improvements or new functions include: one-to-many support, mouse
support, new security functions, DOS file transfer capabilities and improved
performance. In addition, DCAF 1.1 provides APIs for accessing DCAF functions
from other applications.

The Distributed Console Access Facility Version 1.1 is the first IBM
stand-alone remote console function that supports DOS and OS/2 stations.  In
addition to full-screen text mode DOS or OS/2 applications, it also supports
OS/2 Presentation Manager applications.

It has also been enhanced to allow encryption and decryption of data, file
transfers, user ID and passphrases, as well as logging all connections to allow
tracking and auditing.

DCAF supports connection via switched asynchronous lines as well as SNA LU6.2,
and LU6.2 to NETBIOS for interactions with stations on the LAN.

The Distributed Console Access Facility allows a variety of ways for central
site control/monitoring of workstations distributed across a LAN/WAN or through
a SNA network, as well as for performing functions from a remote location, such
as a users home to allow the user to take over a workstation in the network.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Management of distributed intelligent workstations is enhanced
        through remote console functions.
    o   Network administration/support personnel productivity is enhanced
        through central-site control and monitoring capabilities.
    o   Enables migration and growth from host system environments to
        systems based on distributed intelligent workstations by providing
        powerful central Help Desk control and monitoring.
    o   Supports Data Encryption and decryption, user ID and passphrase
        validation by "third party" authentication server.
    o   Allows the remote control of workstations installed at locations
        where physical presence is difficult or inconvenient.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Ethernet is a registered trademark of the Xerox
Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 43. IBM DISTRIBUTED CONSOLE ACCESS FACILITY (DCAF) V1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF JUNE 30, 1994.)

IBM Distributed Console Access Facility Version 1.0 is an IBM Personal
Computer-based remote console function that allows one personal computer to
control and monitor the display and keyboard input of another.  The two
workstations communicate via an LU6.2 (SNA) connection, LU6.2 to NetBios for
either DOS or OS/2* workstations on a LAN, or via switched asynchronous link.

The capability to remotely run a workstation anywhere in the network from a
central site provides a powerful tool for network management, network
administration, problem determination/debug, and application assistance in the
form of "Help" desk type functions.

The Distributed Console Access Facility Version 1.0 is the first IBM
stand-alone remote console function that not only supports DOS stations, but
OS/2 stations as well.  In addition to supporting connection via switched
asynchronous lines, this product supports SNA LU6.2, and LU6.2 to NetBios for
interactions with stations on the LAN.  The Distributed Console Access Facility
is intended for point-to-point connection, and for the large enterprise
environment where central site control/monitoring of workstations distributed
across the LAN/WAN topology is required.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   System management of distributed intelligent workstations
        enhanced with the availability of remote console functions.
    o   Network administration/support personnel productivity enhanced
        through central site control and monitoring capabilities.
    o   Enables growth and migration from host system environments to
        systems based on distributed intelligent workstations by providing
        the capability for powerful central Help Desk control and
        monitoring.
    o   Protects the customer's investment by providing flexibility for
        establishment and management of a distributed environment.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 44. IBM LAN NETVIEW FAMILY OF PRODUCTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   LAN NetView Manager Version 1.0 3.5-inch media (96F8459)
    o   LAN NetView Enabler Version 1.0 3.5-inch media (96F8540)
    o   LAN NetView Agents for DOS Version 1.0 3.5-inch media (96F8545)
    o   LAN NetView Agents Extended Version 1.0 3.5-inch media (96F8549)
    o   LAN NetView System Package 3.5-inch media (96F8792)

Note:  The part numbers for the LAN Netview View Version 1.0 program and the
formerly announced 5.25-inch media versions of the other LAN NetView products
are being withdrawn due to the repackaging of the products.  If desired,
5.25-inch replacement media (with the exception of LAN NetView View) will be
provided at no additional charge.  The outside of the box will mention the
availability of 5.25-inch media.  A flyer with ordering instructions will be
included in the program package.

The IBM LAN NetView family of products provides an effective solution for
system administrators who need efficient and reliable management services to
keep their LAN systems operating smoothly.  Application developers will benefit
from the set of tools and services that LAN NetView* provides for writing
management applications.  End users will benefit from knowing they can work
effectively and efficiently, free from concern about how the system is running.

Since the announcement of the LAN NetView family of products in October 1992
significant restructuring and repackaging has occurred.  These changes in the
products make them easier to order, install and operate than the original
announced products.  As announced in January 1993, the LANfocus family of
products name has been changed to the LAN NetView family of products.

The repackaging provides a great deal of product simplification.  The user
interface previously contained in the LAN NetView View Version 1.0 product is
now contained within the LAN NetView Manage Version 1.0 product and is no
longer a separate product.  In addition, the OS/2* and the LAN requester agents
are now contained in the LAN NetView Manage Version 1.0 and LAN NetView Enabler
Version 1.0. products.  These changes decrease the number of products the
customer must acquire and install.

Significant new function is also added to the products, including:

    o   Generalized tool for querying and modifying workstations and
        network devices
    o   Ability to request execution of an OS/2 command on a remote
        workstation
    o   Sample programs and examples of managing SNMP network management
        devices
    o   Enhanced manageability of OS/2, IBM and Microsoft** DOS, and
        DOS/Windows** workstations.

Based on our customers requesting solutions for the management of LAN-based
workstations, servers and other devices, IBM announces the availability of the
following set of products in the LAN NetView family of products:

    o   LAN NetView Manager Version 1.0
    o   LAN NetView Enabler Version 1.0
    o   LAN NetView Agents for DOS Version 1.0
    o   LAN NetView Agents Extended Version 1.0
    o   LAN NetView System Package

IBM is working with a number of vendors to provide a broader group of compliant
applications designed to enhance the management capabilities essential for
managing our customers' LAN-based, multi-vendor, heterogeneous environments.

The LAN NetView family of products will be useful for customers who have chosen
to acquire products that adhere to IBM and international standards. The LAN
NetView family of products provides support for industry standards such as the
Common Management Information Protocol (CMIP), Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP), and Guidelines for the Definition of Managed Objects (GDMO).
To encourage the development of third-party applications, the LAN NetView
family of products provides a common application programming interface based on
the X/Open Management Protocol (XMP).  These standards are utilized by both the
SystemView strategy, IBM's strategy for enterprise-wide systems management, and
the Open Software Foundation's (OSF) Distributed Management Environment.

The LAN NetView family of products conforms to SystemView Integration Level 2
and is a major step in the implementation of the SystemView structure.

The IBM LAN Network Manager and IBM LAN Station Manager products should be
viewed as complementary products. These products provide for the management of
the token-ring media and adapters on the LAN. The LAN NetView family of
applications provide function to manage the software operating system and
components of OS/2 and DOS.  The agents for LAN NetView and the LAN Station
Manager can coreside in the same managed system.  The LAN NetView Manage
product in the managing system and the LAN Network Manager products cannot be
in the same OS/2 system without some loss of function in the LAN Network
Manager.

Since LAN Network Manager can deal with all workstations on a token-ring LAN
while LAN NetView can deal with a defined subset of such workstations or with
workstations that are not directly connected to the token-ring, the domains of
information from each product do not necessarily correspond.  In order to allow
appropriate placement of each product, we recommend running these two products
in separate machines, using DCAF to access relevant information available via
one product from the other product's machine.  Such a configuration ensures
that the full capabilities of each product are available.

The IBM LAN NetView Management Utilities for OS/2 (LMU) product provides
applications for managing OS/2, DOS, LAN Server, and NetWare clients and
servers.  This product provides the needed function for many customers. Where
customers require extended application function, extensibility of the
management applications or an integrated set of management function that
conforms to industry and IBM standards, the LAN NetView family of products
should be recommended.  The application function provided by the LMU product
will be intercepted by the LAN NetView family of products.  The two product
families can coexist on both the managing and managed workstations for purposes
of migration, or to gain added function with both products installed.  The LMU
product is integrated into the LAN NetView family.  This integration allows
customers who have chosen the LMU product to migrate to LAN NetView at a
manageable pace and maintain the LMU application support for as long as
necessary during the migration.  For customers who wish to maintain the LMU
function and add LAN NetView function or function provided by vendor
applications, the integrated version of LMU provides this capability.

For new customers, the combination of the LAN NetView Manage product as a
framework for management and the LMU product as applications, may provide a
good alternative for affordable application function from LMU and the growth
potential available with the LAN NetView framework.

The LAN NetView System Package (96F8792) provides the ability to order a
configuration of the managing system platform including LAN NetView Manage, LAN
NetView Monitor and LAN NetView Fix under a single part number at a reduced
price.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   System and network management for LAN- and WAN-attached
        workstations, including OS/2 2.0/2.1, IBM DOS 5.0/6.1, Microsoft
        DOS 5.0/6.0, DOS with Microsoft Windows** 3.0/3.1 and Novell**
        NetWare** environments.
    o   Comprehensive set of systems management applications from IBM and
        vendors.  Provides distributed systems management for both local
        and remote LAN management.
    o   The View user interface integrates both IBM and vendor
        applications under a single user interface.
    o   Topology display for different perspectives of the network with
        automatic discovery and monitoring of resources.
    o   IBM supplied resource manager agents with a goal of making OS/2
        2.0/2.1 the best managed system in the industry.
    o   Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) Managing and Managed system
        model.  Industry standard interface, endorsed by the Open
        Software Foundation (OSF), X/Open** and the SystemView* strategy.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** MicroSoft and DOS/Windows are Trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation. ** Novell and NetWare are Trademarksof Novell Corporation. **
X/Open is a Trademark of X/Open Company, Limited. ** Windows is a Trademark of
MicroSoft Corporation. ** Quarterdeck QEMM386 is a Trademark of Quarterdeck
Office Systems ** Qualitas, 385Max, and BlueMax are Trademarks of Qualitas,
Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 45. SYTOS PLUS FILE BACKUP MANAGER FOR OS/2 AND DOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sytos Plus is a high-performance backup utility that offers direct support for
the industry's most advanced mass storage devices across a wide variety of
operating system platforms.

Two new versions of Sytos Plus File Backup Manager, Version 1.42 for DOS and
Version 1.37 for OS/2*, now offer support for the IBM 1.2GB External 1/4-Inch
Cartridge Tape Drive Model 001, the IBM 5.0GB 8mm Tape Drive Model 001, the IBM
Personal System/2* (PS/2*) 3.5-inch Enhanced Rewritable Optical Drive, the IBM
16-Bit AT Fast SCSI Adapter and extensive OEM device driver support.

The new versions of Sytos Plus File Backup Manager for DOS and OS/2 continue to
provide support for the IBM 2.0GB 4mm Tape Drive, the IBM 2.3GB 8mm Tape
Drives, the 6157 Streaming Tape Drives, the IBM PS/2 3.5-inch Rewritable
Optical Drive and the IBM PS/2 2.88MB Diskette Drive.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides a corporate-wide solution with industry-leading storage
        device support
    o   Provides multiple PC operation system support
    o   Facilitates data interchange via a universal file format
    o   Extensive network support ensures minimal reconfiguration time
    o   Increased administrator productivity with network-specific
        features
    o   Customized retry of busy files allows any backup strategy to be
        implemented
    o   Maximize resources with the unattended and automated backup
        options
    o   Implements IBM CUA-compliant user interface
    o   Maximize storage capacity with Move feature
    o   Maximize media with software data compression
    o   Ensure data integrity with Error Correction Code
    o   Improve Restore performance with Quick File Access
    o   Secure sensitive data with password protection
    o   Command line or batch file operations
    o   Ensure data integrity with automatic file compare after backup
    o   Diverse Log to record operation
    o   Improved flexibility with redirection on Restore
    o   Comprehensive on-line help facility
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Sytos Plus is a trademark of Sytron Corporation. **
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Incorporated. ** Archive DAT is a
trademark of Archive Corporation. ** Exabyte EXB-8200 is a registered trademark
of Exabyte Corporation. ** Hewlett Packard is a trademark of Hewlett Packard
Corporation. ** Legacy 150s, 500s, 1000s, 2000s, 2200D, and 4000D are
registered trademarks of Legacy Manufacturing Corporation. ** SSI DATa-bak is a
trademark of Storage Solutions, Inc. ** Tandberg 3660, 3820, 4120, and 4200 are
registered trademarks of Tandberg Data AS. ** Tecmar 4000 DAT, DATaVault,
THS-2200*, Tecmar ProLine DAT, ProLine 250, ProLine 525, ProLine 1000, ProLine
2200, ProLine 4000, QT-250es, QT-525es, and QT1000es are registered trademarks
of Tecmar, Inc. ** WangDAT 1300, and 3200 are registered trademarks of Wangdat,
Inc. ** Wangtek DAT, 5150ES, 5525ES, and 51000ES are trademarks of Wangtek,
Incorporated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46. IBM LAN NETVIEW START VERSION 1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM LAN NetView* Start (Start) program is a tool for planning and managing
the configuration of Operating System/2* (OS/2*) software and for enabling IBM
configuration, installation, and distribution (CID) conventions for remote
installation in an OS/2 LAN.

The Start program runs on Version 2 of IBM OS/2 and provides an
object-oriented, graphical, Presentation Manager* interface enabling an
administrator to plan and manage the configuration of network workstations
within the intuitive context of a graphical representation of the network. For
each workstation requiring a change in configuration (selected by the
administrator), the Start program generates the files required by the IBM CID
process that enable remote (across-the-network) installation or automated
program distribution. These files include configuration response files and
either OS/2 REXX install command files for use with NTS/2 or IBM NetView
Distribution Manager/2 (NetView DM/2) change files depending on the method of
program distribution.

The following IBM subsystems are supported by the Start program in each type of
CID file:

    o   LAN Server 3.0, Entry and Advanced
    o   Extended Services for OS/2
    o   Network Transport Services/2

In building the NetView DM/2 change files for automated code distribution, the
Start program can include both CID-enabled applications as well as those
applications not enabled for the CID process. Only applications enabled for CID
are included in the REXX install command files, which are used by the IBM
Network Transport Services/2 product for remote installation.

The most significant enhancement in Version 1.1 of the Start product is an
administrative interface to the IBM NetView* Distribution Manager/2 product to
generate and catalog NetView DM/2 change files.  During the process of building
the change files, the Start program also creates two cross-reference lists
mapping code server and change files to workstations to further assist the
administrator in managing workstation updates.

Version 1.1 of the Start program also includes a number of changes designed to
enhance its usability.  These include:

    o   An applications union window that enables the administrator to
        identify and manage the application content of groups of
        workstations simultaneously.
    o   A node list notebook that allows the administrator to manage
        supplemental response files for applications across selected
        groups of workstations.
    o   Object pop-up menus similar to those provided in the OS/2 2.0
        desktop.

Finally, Version 1.1 includes three mini-applications for preparing the Network
Transport Services/2 code server, for converting plain-text (ASCII) database
files into SQL database rows, and for generating a master attribute value file
from a SQL database. (Note:  IBM is providing these utilities as a convenience
to the Start user. They are provided "as is" and are not included in the
service described for the program product).

With the availability of Version 1.1 of the IBM LAN NetView Start product,
Version 1.0 is being withdrawn, effective immediately. The IBM LAN NetView
Start product was initially released as LANfocus Start/2.

The LAN NetView Start Version 1.1 program enables centralized management of
system software resources in the Operating System/2 2.0 LAN environment.
Customers with a need for resource management and for automated software
distribution can benefit from the function delivered in the Start product.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Enables centralized OS/2 LAN system configuration planning and
        management.
    o   An object-oriented, graphical user interface with many advanced
        usability features (drag and drop technology, notebook controls,
        object pop-up menus).
    o   Interactively validates connections between remote data services
        servers and clients, and LAN Server* servers and requesters.
    o   Considers cross-product (OS/2 2.0, Extended Services for OS/2,
        LAN Server, Network Transport Services/2) relationships in
        calculating values for the supported configuration parameters.
    o   Allows editing of the REXX files and response files generated by
        the program.
    o   Allows imbedding user-supplied response files in those generated
        by Start.
    o   An administrative interface to the IBM NetView Distribution
        Manager/2 product.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 47. LANDP/2 VERSION 2 AND LANDP/DOS VERSION 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

65G1-566 - LANDP/2 VERSION 2 AND LANDP/DOS VERSION 2

    o   5871-BBB    P/N 65G1566 IBM LANDP/DOS V2.0
    o   5871-BBB    P/N 65G1557 IBM LANDP/2 V2.0

Applications integration and support for new environments and more heterogenous
systems are some of the key features provided by these announcements of LANDP/2
V2 and LANDP/DOS V2 and the previous AIX* LANDP/6000 announcement.

The LAN Distributed Platform is now available for DOS, Windows*, OS/2, OS/400
and AIX. The new environments are supported through:

    o   Interoperability with the new AIX LANDP/6000 product
    o   Interoperability with the OSF/DCE* world through AIX LANDP/6000
    o   Support for Ethernet networks
    o   Support for TCP/IP protocol
    o   Coexistence with Netware**
    o   Support for LANDP-Windows applications

The new application integration capabilities are provided by the following
features:

    o   CICS OS/2* Call Interface server
    o   DDE Access server
    o   Batch Machine facility
    o   Language bindings for C++ and Smalltalk/V PM** object oriented
        languages

Improved performance, reliability, operatability, and installability are
provided by:

    o   Improvements to the Shared File server
    o   The new Batch Machine Operator
    o   The enhanced SNA server
    o   CID (Configuration/Installation/Distribution) enablement
    o   Language bindings for REXX
    o   Customization aid tool

Primary customers of LANDP products are those wanting to implement distributed
applications in a client/server environment consisting of workgroup LANs
interconnected to host systems.

LANDP provides a common system and application platform across DOS, Windows,
OS/2, OS/400, and AIX. This common platform enables applications to access a
variety of application services distributed in the LAN. To access those
services, both high level and low level interfaces are provided to allow both
make application development simplier or exploit all the functionality of the
services.

The LANDP common API is a cornerstone of the LANDP products. It is common among
the multiple platforms supported (DOS, Windows, OS/2, and AIX).  So the
applications are portable and re-usable, reducing application development cost.
It is common for clients and servers, thus providing the ability to distribute
applications in a real peer-to-peer environment. And finally, it is Common for
all the services provided by LANDP, or through LANDP, thus allowing to access
with a consistent call to all the services available to your workgroup, as well
as to all the LANDP built-in functions to:

    o   Share resources in the network: devices, databases,
        communications
    o   Provide standard application modules: Electronic Journal, Store
        for Forwarding
    o   Network management, software distribution, alerts generation,
        security

As LANDP was initially designed for the finance industry it includes servers to
support specific financial devices and communication with the IBM 4700 Branch
Processor.

LANDP complements the underlying operating systems to provide a cross
client/server environment.  LANDP coexist with other LAN products, and
complements and/or facilitate the services provided by other products:

LANDP complements IBM OS/2 LAN Server and IBM OS/2 LAN Requester to build a LAN
Client/Server environment.  When the customer requirement is to share
system-type services, as for example file or print services, through
re-direction in an individual LAN level, OS/2 LAN Server and OS/2 LAN Requester
are required.  When, additionally, the customer requirement is to have a
development environment accessing a set of distributed applications building
blocks as if they existed locally, LANDP provides the additional capabilities
plus a set of built-in functions in the application services arena.  There is
no direct interface between LANDP and OS/2 LAN Server and OS/2 LAN Requester.
The facilities of these products are utilized thru the normal OS/2 LAN
Requester redirection facilities which are transparent to LANDP.

Additionally, LANDP can be used in conjunction with Netware.  LANDP is
compatible and complements other distributed services available from IBM
NetView DM/2, and IBM CICS OS/2 by either providing a layer of services,
neither covered by these products nor by the operating system, or facilitating
the existing services.  Specifically, LANDP/2 allows LANDP applications to act
as clients to a CICS OS/2 server.  LANDP/2 also provides a high level LANDP
call API to the OS/2 Communications Manager and OS/2 Database Manager utilizing
and accessing the facilities of these products through the use of LANDP
distributed server which may reside in any workstation or dedicated server
machine in the LAN.

LANDP also interacts with some host programs such as NetView, for alert
processing, NetView DM, for file distribution, and CICS/VS and IMS/VS for
forwarding server usage.

LANDP open architecture allows customers to add and distribute their own
servers in the LAN.  This capability to provide value-added features makes the
product appropriate for software vendors, system integrators, OEM, and in-house
developers.

The value-added features are provided using the LANDP Common API used for
application development.  It is an easy and published API that makes the LANDP
client/server infrastructure available for distributed application development.

The features provided by the new versions of LANDP are an example of how LANDP
enables growth and accomodates new technologies, standards, and products
(OSF/DCE, DDE, TCP/IP) while keeping customer investment in their current
applications and hardware.

They also show an impressive set of application integration capabilities over a
variety of operating systems and environments conforming in whole a product
well suited for a variety of customers.

In summary, all the features described make LANDP products a client/server
platform that provides a variety of functions, complements or cooperates with
other LAN and host products, enable application development and application
integration, and allow to be the base for value added development.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   New application enabling/integrating capabilities:
        CICS OS/2 Call Interface server, DDE Access server, Batch
        Machine facility, and language bindings for REXX, and C++ and
        Smalltalk/V PM object oriented languages.
    o   Support for new environments and heterogeneous systems:
        Support for Ethernet networks, and TCP/IP protocol, coexistence
        with Netware, and interoperability with AIX LANDP/6000 and with
        AIX DCE.
    o   Increased performance, reliability, and operatibility, provided
        by: Enhancements to the existing services and functionality as
        the Shared File and SNA servers, the new Batch Machine Operator,
        and other enhancements.
    o   Installation and distribution enhancements provided by CID
        enablement which allows redirected install, and configuration
        enhancements provided by the new customization aid tool.
    o   LANDP extension to the AIX/6000 operating system:
        Enabling LANDP applications running on either of the supported
        platforms to access LANDP services provided on AIX, including
        the LANDP/DCE interoperability and access to AIX databases
        (supporting INFORMIX), additionally to the services on the DOS,
        OS/2, and OS/400 platforms.
    o   Support for LANDP-Windows applications.
    o   Professional and technical services for application development,
        and program services extensions are available for a fee.  Refer
        to the Planning Information section.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation **  Windows is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation **
OSF is a trademark of Open Software Foundation **  Netware is a trademark of
Novell Inc. **  Smalltalk/V PM is a trademark of Digitalk Corporation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48. IBM GRAPHICSVIEW/2 VERSION 1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM GraphicsView/2 is a configuration graphics application designed for
operating in an IBM Personal System/2* running IBM Operating System/2 Extended
Edition (OS/2 EE)*, exploits the powerful features of the OS/2 EE Presentation
Manager and Help Manager and conforms to IBM Systems Application Architecture
(SAA) Common User Access (CUA) specifications.

The IBM LAN Network Manager is the first application to exploit the
capabilities of GraphicsView/2 and together, they simplify the operator's task
of interpreting and reacting to local-area network management data by
presenting graphic displays of the network configuration and indicating, in
real-time mode, the status of network resources. *Personal System/2 is a
trademark of the International Business Machines Corporation. *OS/2 is a
registered trademark of the International Business Machines Corporation.

The IBM GraphicsView/2 with the IBM LAN Network Manager, addresses the LAN
management needs of communications network customers, and allows IBM to provide
a cohesive set of functions and interfaces that allow a user to use graphics in
monitoring network status at the workstation.

GraphicsView/2 is a SystemView* Common Application Service facility for the
end-use dimension.  GraphicsView/2 runs in a PS/2* with OS/2 Extended Edition,
and utilizes the services of the OS/2 Presentation Manager.

GraphicsView/2 supports the IBM LAN Network Manager.

The IBM network management strategy positions GraphicsView/2 as the SAA network
management configuration graphics interface for system and network management
applications.  The marketing strategy should feature the GraphicsView/2 as a
major new SystemView product in the implementation of this strategy.
*SystemView and PS/2 are trademarks of the International Business Machines
Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Ensures investment protection by:
        -    Using a general configuration graphics application within
             SAA conforming to CUA specifications
        -    Providing problem determination aids through automatic
             logging of error information and selectable tracing options
    o   Providing a mouse-driven window interface using the OS/2 EE
        Presentation Manager
    o   Displaying system and network configurations with color-coded
        status indicators
    o   Providing the capability of navigating easily within a graphical
        view using zoom, pan, find, and scale functions.
    o   Provides business solutions by:  providing a layout of system
        and network topology, automatically
    o   Enables growth by using graphics for assisting in monitoring
        networks.
    o   Enhances systems management by supporting SystemView architecture
        and using graphics for increasing operator efficiency in monitoring
        systems and networks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 49. IBM LAN TO LAN WIDE AREA NETWORK PROGRAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM LAN to LAN Wide Area Network Program is a licensed program that
interconnects remote local area networks (LANs) across a wide area network
(WAN).  Applications written to the IEEE 802.2 interface and using the IBM
NETBIOS frame protocol will be able to communicate with remote LANs using the
wide area network as a transport medium.  The IBM LAN to LAN Wide Area Network
Program provides the interface between the LAN and the WAN.  Sessions will be
established between IBM LAN to LAN Wide Area Network Programs to provide the
communication path.  This communication will be via the LU 6.2 facilities
provided by OS/2* EE Communications Manager 1.2 or 1.3. *OS/2 is a trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS The following are the key functions of the IBM LAN to LAN Wide Area
Network Program:

    o   OS/2 EE 1.2 or 1.3 based product with full 802.2 and LU 6.2
        support that does not require a dedicated processor.
        Allows IBM Token-Ring Network, IBM PC Network, and Ethernet LANs
        to communicate with each other over a wide area network, using
        NETBIOS-NETBIOS flows.  The connection through the wide area
        network could be one of the following:
    o   LU 6.2 advanced program-to-program communications (APPC) session
        over Systems Network Architecture (SNA) network.
    o   LU 6.2 APPC session over X.25 network.
    o   LU 6.2 APPC session over synchronous data link control (SDLC)
    o   LU 6.2 APPC session over LAN.
    o   Interprets IBM NETBIOS session activation and datagram frames
        and will act upon the name in these frames to determine the target
        local area network of the request.  If another IBM NETBIOS
        application is to run in the same processor as the IBM LAN to LAN
        Wide Area Network Program, another LAN adapter will be required
        for the other NETBIOS application.
    o   Limits the amount of broadcast traffic on the LAN that passes
        through the wide area network.
    o   Uses 802.2 interface for LAN communication.  Link-Level Control
        timers (T1, T2, Ti) will be applicable only to the LAN.  They
        apply between the end station and the IBM LAN to LAN Wide Area
        Network Program but not between the IBM LAN to LAN Wide Area
        Network programs.  The NETBIOS and application timers will be
        between end stations, since the NETBIOS session runs from end
        station to end station and not from end station to the IBM LAN to
        LAN Wide Area Network Program.  It may be necessary to increase
        the end station NETBIOS and application timers to accommodate the
        wide area network delays.
    o   Allows control of which source and target stations may
        communicate with each other through supplied or user-written
        filters.
    o   Provides full visibility (at the IBM LAN to LAN Wide Area Network
        Program processor) of the current state of all wide area network
        sessions and connected IBM LAN to LAN Wide Area Network Programs,
        as well as detailed logs of errors, events and statistics; LAN
        circuit bring-up, takedown, and statistics; and wide area network
        session bring-up, takedown and statistics.
    o   Provides some network management, such as alert notification to
        a host of IBM LAN to LAN Wide Area Network Program error
        conditions (session lost, resources depleted).  These alerts will
        be sent either using a PU-SSCP session to the host or the Alert
        Transport Facility of the LAN Manager.  If the PU-SSCP session
        is not available and LAN Manager is not present, alerts cannot
        be sent to the host.
    o   Allows a single IBM LAN to LAN Wide Area Network Program to
        establish wide area connections (up to a maximum of 47) with
        multiple other IBM LAN to LAN Wide Area Network Programs on
        different local area networks simultaneously.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50. NETBIOS VERSION 1 FOR TCP/IP FOR OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM NetBIOS Version 1 for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) for OS/2 (known hereafter as TCP/NetBIOS) provides a NetBIOS (Network
Basic Input/Output System) interface for NetBIOS applications that allows
TCP/IP to be used as the transport protocol between workstations/systems.
NetBIOS applications can then communicate through the NetBIOS interface and the
TCP/IP layer with other nodes containing the NetBIOS interface, TCP/IP support
and NetBIOS applications.  TCP/NetBIOS can be used with any adapter supported
by TCP/IP Version 1.1 for OS/2, extending the adapter support to permit NetBIOS
application programs to communicate over the TCP/IP network.

NetBIOS is a programming interface used in a large inventory of PC based Local
Area Network, LAN, customer application programs. TCP/IP is a networking
protocol used in LAN and Wide Area Networks, WANs, to facilitate communications
among heterogeneous, multivendor system environments. The TCP/IP protocol has
standards defined (specifically Request For Comments RFC 1001 and RFC 1002)
which provide the ability to encapsulate NetBIOS application traffic and send
it over the TCP/IP network.

TCP/NetBIOS enables NetBIOS applications running on OS/2 Extended Edition
workstations with IBM's TCP/IP for OS/2 to communicate over a TCP/IP network to
NetBIOS applications on other OS/2 EE workstations with TCP/IP for OS/2 or
other vendor platforms which are running equivalent RFC1001 and RFC1002 TCP/IP
support. TCP/NetBIOS is compatible with both IBM's NetBIOS and Microsoft's
NetBIOS specifications.

Installing TCP/NetBIOS onto the workstation effectively replaces the native
NetBIOS module normally used for NetBIOS to NetBIOS traffic on the LAN;
therefore, once TCP/NetBIOS is installed only the TCP/IP path will be used for
communication.  There is no ability to have flows pass through both native
NetBIOS and TCP/NetBIOS from the workstation when TCP/NetBIOS is installed.

Use of TCP/NetBIOS between OS/2 based workstations can be achieved only by
installing it on all those workstations.  Workstations using TCP/NetBIOS cannot
communicate with DOS based workstations.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   NetBIOS Peer-to-Peer Communications across TCP/IP network
    o   Standard Network Interface to Applications
    o   Based on Request for Comment (RFC) 1001 and 1002
    o   Nodes known by name
    o   Two methods: Virtual Circuits and Datagrams
    o   Statistical and Control functions
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. (1) Trademark of 3Com Corporation (2) Trademark of
Western Digital Corporation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51. NETVIEW/PC VERSION 1.2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NetView/PC is an extension to Communication Network Management (CNM) services
provided by NetView*.  NetView/PC Version 1.2 extends this support to the IBM
Operating System/2* and takes advantage of the memory protection and increase
of useable memory provided by OS/2*.  Other Version 1.2 enhancements apply in
the areas of Open Applications Program Interface (API) for asynchronous
communication, "C" language Sample Program, generic alerts display and build,
Service Point Command Facility (SPCF), alternative host connection options, and
Japanese translation.

IBM intends to provide additional support after the availability of Version 1.2
for the NetView/PC Remote Console on OS/2 and Asynchronous API via the OS/2
Extended Edition Communications Manager. * NetView, Operating System/2, and
OS/2 are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation.

NetView/PC is an extension to CNM services provided by NetView.  NetView/PC
extends the CNM services to the IBM Local Area Networks, Voice Networks,
Computerized Branch Exchanges/Private Branch Exchanges (CBXs/PBXs), and non-SNA
devices, both IBM and OEM.  Through device dependent CNM applications, the IBM
Local Area network, and NET IDNX can be managed using the services of
NetView/PC.  In addition, the Application Programming Interface/Communication
Services (API/CS) allows the further extension of CNM services to non-IBM
communications devices and additional IBM devices.  The Japanese language
feature will enhance the usability of NetView/PC for Japanese customers
worldwide and for the overseas offices of US-based international corporations.

HIGHLIGHTS NetView/PC Version 1.2 provides the following new or enhanced
functions:

    o   NetView/PC support on OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.1
    o   Asynchronous communication access via API/CS
    o   "C" language Sample Program
    o   Generic alerts enhancements
    o   Service Point Command Facility (SPCF) enhancements
    o   Alternative host connection options
    o   Translated panels and messages for Japanese.

IBM intends to provide additional support in the future for the following:

    o   Remote console support on OS/2 Extended Edition
    o   Asynchronous API via the OS/2 Extended Edition Communications
        Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52. NETVIEW/PC VERSION 1.2.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NetView/PC(TM) is an extension to the Communication Network Management (CNM)
services provided by NetView(TM).  NetView/PC Version 1.2.1 updates the
NetView/PC Version 1.2 by adding the Remote Console Facility (RCF), as well as
adding Application Program Interface/Communication Services (API/CS) access to
asynchronous communications through the OS/2(TM) Extended Edition
Communications Manager. (TM) Trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation

NetView/PC is an extension to CNM services provided by NetView.  NetView/PC
extends the CNM services to the IBM Local Area Networks, Voice Networks,
Computerized Branch Exchanges/ Private Branch Exchanges (CBXs/PBXs), and
non-SNA devices, both IBM and OEM.  Through device dependent CNM applications,
the IBM Local Area network, and the Transmission Network Manager (TNM) can be
managed using the services of NetView/PC.  In addition, the Application
Programming Interface/Communication Services (API/CS) allows the further
extension of CNM services to non-IBM communications devices and additional IBM
devices.  The new Remote Console Facility (RCF) may be used for remote control
of the network management console (NetView/PC), remote control of PS/2 based
service consoles (i.e., processors, controllers, etc.), monitoring end user
displays and selections, remote problem determination, remote demonstrations,
remote debugging, sharing of resources, file transfer, and remote on-line
education of NetView/PC.

Vendors and end-users have additional flexibility with the Asynchronous
Communication access via API/CS. In addition to being able to access the IBM
Realtime Interface Co-Processor, the user now has the option to access the
asynchronous functions of the OS/2 Communication Manager from the same API.
This solution provides a less costly implementation for those configurations
where extensive multi-port communications capability is not required.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Remote Console Facility (RCF)
    o   Enhanced API/CS asynchronous communication function

NETVIEW/PC VERSION 1.2.1 WITH ADDITIONAL FUNCTION

NetView/PC* is an extension to the Communication Network Management (CNM)
services provided by NetView.  NetView/PC Gateway function has been added to
NetView/PC version 1.2.1 functions announced on 9/19/89.

NetView/PC Gateway gives customers who require a screenless NetView/PC, an
option to install just the application programming interface/communication
system (API/CS) function of NetView/PC.  It allows the vendor applications to
provide the end users with a single user interface. Also, it continues to
provide base gateway services to NetView*, for IBM and vendor applications
managing Non-SNA equipment.

Install Alternatives:  A capability to selectively install complete NetView/PC
function or NetView/PC Gateway function or both has been added. Remote Console
Facility can be installed in conjunction with these functions. * NetView is a
Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation

The following enhancements to the NetView/PC functions reinforce IBM's
commitment to centralized and multivendor network management.

    o   Addition of NetView/PC Gateway function
    o   Addition of install alternatives

The full function NetView/PC addresses the needs of the customers who require
control and monitoring functions of NetView/PC at the distributed workstation.
The NetView/PC Gateway satisfies the customers who need only the API/CS
function, a programming interface which allows centralized control and
monitoring of Non-SNA equipment from NetView.

NetView/PC Gateway provides the application programming interface/
communication systems (API/CS) services for IBM and vendor applications to
write network management applications. It allows customers to have either a
single user interface at the distributed workstation if the user interface
already exists or to run in unattended environment without any user interface
at the distributed workstation.  In addition, this implementation utilizes
fewer OS/2 system resources like memory, threads and semaphores thus freeing up
system resources for other applications or tasks.

The install alternatives allow customers to selectively install the complete
NetView/PC function or the NetView/PC Gateway option or both. Additionally,
Remote Console Facility can be optionally installed in conjunction with either
of the above alternatives.

The NetView/PC Gateway should be brought to the attention of accounts where
NetView/PC will operate unattended or where customers would prefer to manage
the devices using single user interface.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Screenless NetView/PC gateway function with install options added
        Screenless NetView/PC Gateway function provides the following
        capabilities:
        -   Provides API/CS programming interface to write applications
        -   Allows vendor applications to provide a single user interface
        -   Provides capability to run in unattended environment
        -   Provides optional alert logging capability
        -   Requires less system resources


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 53. NETVIEW DM/2 V2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

53G3941      NetView DM/2 Version 2.0 Entry

53G3924      NetView DM/2 Version 2.0 Extended

NetView* Distribution Manager/2 Version 2.0 (NetView DM/2 V2.0) enhances the
support for distributing software and data to programmable workstations in a
variety of network configurations.

NetView DM/2 Version 2.0 is available in the Extended package and the Entry
package:

    o   the Extended package provides substantial enhancements for the
        support of Local Area Network (LAN)-attached Operating System/2*
        (OS/2*) or Disk Operating System (DOS) workstations, with/without
        a connection to the host.
    o   the Entry package improves the support for host-connected OS/2
        workstations and maintains within the LAN the level of
        functionality which was available with NetView DM/2 Version 1.

In particular, NetView DM/2 V2.0 enhances the support for applying system
software changes by adhering to the Configuration/Installation/Distribution
(CID) directions established for the unattended installation, upgrade and
update of OS/2 system software (see the product description section for
details).

Depending upon the selected package, NetView DM/2 Version 2.0, with NetView DM
Release 4 for MVS, provides:

    o   a centrally managed alternative to diskettes for distributing
        and installing system and application software (vendor and
        customer) and user files at programmable workstations.
    o   support of a variety of enterprise network configurations for
        workstations, such as:
        -   Single OS/2 workstations directly connected to a host System/
            370* or System/390*.
        -   Single OS/2 workstations connected to a host System/370 or
            System/390 via other OS/2 workstations acting as intermediate
            nodes
        -   OS/2 and DOS workstations in a LAN connected to a host System/
            370 or System/390 via an OS/2 workstation
    o   Distribution and installation processes to be initiated by the
        user at the host towards the LAN workstations.
    o   Installation processes (towards other LAN workstations) to be
        initiated by the user at a designated workstation in the LAN.
    o   Tracking of distributed and installed software and data at the
        host and at a designated workstation in the LAN.

NetView DM/2 Version 2.0 also provides support for:

    o   change management in a stand-alone LAN environment with no
        interaction with a host system.
    o   software and data distribution between SNA-interconnected LANs
        with no interaction with a host system.

HIGHLIGHTS NetView DM/2 V2.0 incorporates all the NetView DM/2 Version 1
functions and increases customer value by:

    o   Providing business solutions that extend change management
        activities to OS/2 and DOS LAN-attached workstations and
        enhancing the file distribution functions made available to LU6.2
        connected workstations.
    o   Adhering to the Configuration/Installation/Distribution (CID)
        directions set for installation, upgrade, update of OS/2 system
        (and subsystem) software.
    o   Increasing user productivity by providing additional functions
        via the user interfaces.
    o   Enabling growth by expanding the scope of change management
        activities that the user can perform in his network.
    o   Protecting customer's investments by using established SNA
        architectures.
    o   Allowing automated distribution and change management functions
        to a workstation in a variety of SNA network environments.

NetView DM/2 V2.0 conforms to SystemView (TM) Integration Level 1. NetView DM/2
V2.0 provides the capability to install and remove software and data to Novell
Netware-managed servers through the use of NetWare Requestor for OS/2 or
NetWare Workstation Kit for OS/2.  This support includes:

    o   NetWare Loadable Modules (NLMs)
    o   NetWare utilities and fixes
    o   Shared application software and fixes
    o   Shared user data

NetView DM/2 V2.0 is available in the Extended package and the Entry package.

    o   NetView DM/2 V2.0 Extended includes:
        -   an Extended Base (CDM, Change Control Server, LDU Distributor)
        -   an optional Extended Client (Change Control Client,
            LDU Receiver)
        NetView DM/2 V2.0 Extended should be installed by customers who:
        -   have networks of LAN-attached OS/2 and/or DOS workstations
            with/without a host connection (to an OS/2 workstation)
        -   need to manage from the host the distribution, installation
            and maintenance of software and data files at the workstations
            with no involvement from the remote user
        -   need to manage from a designated OS/2 workstation the
            installation and maintenance of software at the workstations
            with no involvement from the remote user
        -   need to centrally track (at the host and/or at a designated
            OS/2 workstation) the change activities performed in the LAN
        -   need to preserve user customizations and unique system
            configurations at the LAN workstations
        Based on the above, NetView DM/2 V2.0 Extended should be installed
        when there is a need for unattended software distribution and
        installation at any workstation in the standalone or host-
        connected LAN, along with the need for tracking the change
        activities applied in the LAN.
    o   NetView DM/2 V2.0 Entry includes:
        -   an Entry Base (CDM, LDU Distributor)
        -   an optional Entry Client (LDU Receiver)
        NetView DM/2 V2.0 Entry should be installed by customers who:
        -   have networks of single OS/2 workstations connected to the
            host or of LAN-attached OS/2 and/or DOS workstations with/
            without a host connection
        -   need to manage from the host the distribution, installation
            and maintenance of software and data files at the host-
            attached OS/2 workstations (executing Entry Base) with no
            involvement from the remote user
        -   need to centrally track the change activities performed at
            the host-attached OS/2 workstations
        -   have LAN-attached workstations with identical system
            configurations Based on the above, NetView DM/2 V2.0 Entry
            should be installed in network environments with host-
            connected standalone OS/2 workstations or in LAN
            environments where the customer is currently using the LDU
            functions and wishes to continue with it.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 54. IBM PROGRAMMABLE NETWORK ACCESS (PNA) AND TOOLKIT V1.2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

20G0288  Programmable Network Access Version 1.2

20G0298  Programmable Network Access Version 1.2 Tool Kit

IBM's  Programmable Network Access (PNA) has been enhanced to work in
conjunction with IBM's Communications Manager component of Extended Services
(referred to as: Communications Manager) to allow optional use of a single,
shared upstream link from the Personal System/2* (PS/2*) to the host
environment. PNA also has improved network management capability, in
conjunction with NetView*.  The reduction in line cost and network
administration makes PNA more viable for communications from remote business
locations to a centralized host location. Downstream dial-in synchronous data
link control (SDLC) connectivity has been added, increasing the variety of
devices that can be connected to the network through PNA. In addition, PNA has
improved performance.

PNA is a modern and flexible approach to mixed network operations and
management, which offers options for accessing distributed application systems
from terminals using multiple protocols and data streams, via Systems Network
Architecture (SNA) and X.25 networks. It allows customers to reduce operating
costs by:

    o   Using their backbone network to transport SNA as well as non-SNA
        datastreams, instead of operating protocol specific networks
    o   Allowing for remote management of the devices attached to PNA
        via NetView in the host.
    o   Concentrating data traffic to and from multiple devices onto a
        single communications line
    o   Accessing SNA or X.25 applications from  American National
        Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) terminals.

PNA Version 1.2 adds synergy with Communications Manager so that devices
connected downstream of PNA and devices on a LAN downstream of the
Communications Manager can share a single upstream link.  This lowers both line
cost and administration cost.

While some of its functions are similar to connectivity features of current IBM
products (IBM 3708 and 3174) its implementation as a software product for the
Operating System/2* (OS/2*) environment makes it a flexible platform to address
current and future communications requirements.

PNA is a good choice for customers who need to replace Series/1* machines that
were used as a communication gateway.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   PNA/Communications Manager synergy: a single shared upstream link
    o   Dial SDLC support
    o   Additional Asynchronous 3270 terminal emulator enhancements: local
        print copy and attention (ATTN) key support
    o   Network management capability, in conjunction with NetView, with
        devices downstream of PNA
    o   Improved performance.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 55. SAA NETWORKING SERVICES/2 VERSION 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM SAA Networking Services/2 Version 1.0 licensed program provides
Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) capability.  Networking Services/2
provides a key addition to the System Application Architecture* (SAA*) Common
Communications Support (CCS) in the Operating System/2* Extended Edition (OS/2*
EE) environment.  Networking Services/2 provides both end node (EN) and network
node (NN) support, allowing workstations to participate in a peer network with
other small, midrange, and large systems.  This support enables greater
flexibility in network design.

Networking Services/2 V1.0 enhances the OS/2 Advanced Program-to-Program
Communications (APPC) Application Programming Interface (API) by providing
significant performance improvements and substantial reduction in network
definition.  It also supports the SAA Common Programming Interface (CPI) for
Communications, enabling greater portability of applications across different
environments.

No modification of existing APPC programs is required to utilize Networking
Services/2 functional capabilities.

Networking Services/2 provides a networking solution for the customer who
wishes to use OS/2 EE-based distributed applications.  In addition, the
Networking Services/2 user has the flexibility of easily integrating
workstations with other APPN systems.

A customer who has an existing VTAM network installed can use Networking
Services/2 to interconnect workstation-based processing locations.  These
locations can use APPC with reduced system definition for communicating
directly with each other and with host-based applications.

For customers who are modifying their network, Networking Services/2 is a
networking solution that allows nodes to be added to, deleted from, or moved
within the network with limited system definition at the affected node and with
no definition at the other nodes.

Those users who wish to write portable applications for networks of various
machine types can benefit from the Networking Services/2 support of the SAA
Common Programming Interface for Communications.

A customer using IBM Information Network services can now interconnect
Networking Services/2 APPN networks through standard network connections. For
the customer considering using Networking Services/2 for new distributed
network solutions, the IBM Information Network provides an IBM-provided and
managed network solution.  The availability of this support from the IBM
Information Network is country dependent.

HIGHLIGHTS With Networking Services/2 the user may:

    o   Add, delete, or move nodes within the network with limited system
        definition at the affected node and with no definition at the
        other nodes
    o   Use defaults for reducing required system definition
    o   Significantly improve the performance of communications between
        APPC programs, especially in the LAN environment
    o   Use additional debugging tools and sample programs for easily
        developing and using APPC applications
    o   Use the SAA Common Programming Interface for Communications to
        enable greater application portability across different platforms
    o   Use APIs to automate configuration changes and to add network
        management capabilities
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56. OSI/COMMUNICATIONS SUBSYSTEM FOR OS/2EE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM announces the OSI/Communications Subsystem licensed program for OS/2
Extended Edition (OS/2EE) Personal System/2* (PS/2*).  The OSI/Communications
Subsystem supports the protocols of OSI layers 3 through 6, plus ACSE, as
defined by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO).  This
licensed program provides OSI services for IBM's or users' own OSI
applications.  OSI/Communications Subsystem enables the PS/2 to communicate
with non-IBM systems and IBM systems supporting compatible set of OSI protocols
over X.25, ISO 8802/3 and 8802/5 networks.  The OSI/Communications Subsystem is
designed to take into account the regional differences of North America,
Europe, and Asia.  This program will support protocols listed in the
Description Section of this document as specified in the following OSI
profiles:  US GOSIP, UK GOSIP, EN/ENV and INTAP. *Personal System/2 (PS/2) is a
trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

The OSI/Communications Subsystem for OS/2EE addresses requirements for OSI
communications on the PS/2, particularly in support of Government OSI Profiles
(GOSIP).  IBM's implementation of OSI is integrated with SNA communications so
that both may be supported on the same system or workstation.

The OSI/Communications Subsystem for OS/2EE provides National Language Support
for the Japanese language.  End-user interfaces (panels, messages and help
text) will be translated into Kanji.  Translation into European languages will
be negotiated.

HIGHLIGHTS This is the implementing product for the OSI protocols which have
been included in IBM's SAA Common Communications Support.

    o   OSI solution for multi-vendor interoperation
    o   OSI stack of layers 3-6 and ACSE function
    o   Users' OSI applications portable among IBM SAA systems
    o   Allow concurrent operation of multiple OSI applications
    o   Connectivity over X.25, ISO 8802/3, and ISO 8802/5 networks
    o   Operation with OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2
    o   Support for Protocols in world wide OSI profiles.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 57. OSI FILE SERVICES/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM OSI File Services/2 for the OS/2 Extended Edition environment provides
workstations users with the capability to transfer and manage files between
non-IBM and IBM systems as defined by the ISO 8571 File Transfer, Access and
Management (FTAM) International Standard.  Agreements of regional, government,
and private groups requiring the U.S.  National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST) Implementation Agreements and the European Workshop for Open
Systems (EWOS) are supported including U.S. GOSIP, U.K. GOSIP, CEN/CENELEC, and
INTAP profiles.  OSI File Services/2 is comprised of a server feature, which
operates with OSI/Communications Subsystem on the same workstation in order to
support the required protocols of the full seven layer OSI reference model, and
a client feature which operates on a Local Area Network (LAN) OS/2 Extended
Edition workstation with Communications Manager and APPC available, to provide
both an API and interactive interface for users to access the server OSI FTAM
services.

OSI File Services/2 in conjunction with OSI/Communications Subsystem answers
requirements for support of OSI FTAM file transfer and management capabilities
on the Personal System/2, particularly where support for Government OSI
Profiles (GOSIP) is required.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Allows OS/2 Extended Edition processors to participate in
        networks where OSI FTAM protocols are required for
        communications.
    o   Provides an API and interactive interface as a distributed
        featured installed on a LAN workstation.
    o   Allows IBM workstations to exchange and remotely manage files
        with other vendor systems with an equivalent set of FTAM
        protocols.
    o   Part of the network management capabilities provided through
        OSI/Communications Subsystem for OS/2 Extended Edition.
    o   This is the implementing product for the OSI protocols which
        have been included in IBM's SAA Common Communications Support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 58. IBM CALLPATH DIRECTTALK/2 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM V1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

20G1-015 - DirectTalk/2 V1.1 4 Line System

20G1-489 - DirectTalk/2 V1.1 8 Line System

20G1-490 - DirectTalk/2 V1.1 12 Line System

20G1-491 - DirectTalk/2 V1.1 16 Line System

20G1-506 - DirectTalk/2 V1.1 24 Line System

20G1-504 - DirectTalk/2 V1.1 Communications Feature

20G1-503 - DirectTalk/2 V1.1 Voice Messaging Option

20G1-505 - DirectTalk/2 V1.1 Voice Recognition Option

20G1-502 - DirectTalk/2 V1.1 Text-to-Speech Option

IBM CallPath* DirectTalk/2* Version 1.1 is enhanced to provide additional
features, functions and openness, making it possible to build more robust voice
processing applications. DirectTalk/2 Version 1.0 was originally announced on
July 30, 1991.  DirectTalk/2 V1.1 now supports IBM OS/2* V2.0, allowing
DirectTalk/2 to operate on those personal computer industry standard
architecture (ISA) platforms supported by OS/2 Version 2.0.

DirectTalk/2 can now respond to 24 incoming phone calls simultaneously in each
personal computer system. DirectTalk/2 also supports speech synthesis
(text-to-speech) in US English for applications requiring information in ASCII
text files to be synthesized and spoken back to the caller. For customers who
require multi-language voice response, DirectTalk/2 can support multiple spoken
languages (see limitations section), including the correct spoken syntax for
that language and voice recognition for that specific language.  Additional
enhancements include:  enhanced voice recognition (in selected languages),
Token-Ring based distributed servers and node management, enhanced host
communications and terminal emulation support, including multiple host session
access by a single application, Token-Ring support and improved voice quality.
DirectTalk/2 is a versatile system that integrates voice response, voice
message storage, transaction messaging, voice recognition, information
retrieval, audiotex information, outbound call processing, and automated
attendant applications all in a single personal computer system. IBM's CallPath
DirectTalk/2 can automate telephone inquiry and data entry by allowing callers
to access host system databases via their telephone.  DirectTalk/2 now has
greater flexibility to be the platform of choice for developing, building, and
executing voice processing applications. Through the use of IBM OS/2 V2.0,
DirectTalk/2 supports either Dialogic Micro-Channel Voice Communication Kits
(reference Ivory 192-124) or Dialogic Industry Standard (AT bus) Voice
Communication kits (contact Dialogic Corporation directly).  With
DirectTalk/2's open interfaces and published application programming interface
(API), many types of voice processing applications can be designed and
implemented, such as:  place orders, leave and check for messages, and verify
schedules, all through the use of their phone -- 24-hours a day, seven days a
week.

DirectTalk/2 is positioned as the OS/2 based voice processing platform within
the CallPath family of voice/data integration solutions offering either analog
or digital connectivity to the telephone switch.  DirectTalk/2 is significant
in this strategy because it provides customers with:

    o   Comprehensive solution across multiple line sizes.
    o   Modular growth capability within each unit.
    o   Flexible multi-unit configurations for critical applications.
    o   Efficient application solution development tools.
    o   Support of multiple voice processing applications.
    o   Consistent approach to CallPath Services Architecture
        integration.
    o   Open system design.
    o   Multiple host connectivity options.
    o   Local and remote database access.

CallPath Services Architecture and family of products provide the framework for
functionally integrating telephony functions with existing and new data
applications.  The CallPath product family facilitates call monitoring and call
control influence, and can extend the benefits of voice processing beyond the
call center to many callers in other areas of the customer's business.

CallPath DirectTalk/2 is designed for call centers, departmental organizations,
or businesses with distributed data that:

    o   Require 4 to 24 lines per unit expandable through multi-unit
        installations
    o   Have a decentralized or departmental implementation strategy
    o   Need to support multiple spoken languages
    o   Require casual integrated or transaction-related voice messaging
    o   Connect to the AS/400 through native 5250 terminal emulation or
        IBM OS/400* 3270 conversion
    o   Connect to System/370 or System/390 through Token Ring
    o   Require voice recognition
    o   Prefer standard workstation platforms and the OS/2 operating
        system
    o   Present single system image for multi-unit installations

DirectTalk/2 is ideally suited to the customer seeking voice processing
solutions in small or medium calls centers, departmental organizations (such as
employee benefits), account inquiry and helps desks (which typically are
informal telephone call centers), and businesses with distributed data and/or
multiple office locations.  The Voice Recognition option  allows calling
customers with rotary telephones to use voice input to access DirectTalk/2.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   DirectTalk/2 is a flexible platform for developing, managing and
        executing multiple voice applications such as voice response,
        voice message storage, voice recognition, audiotex and automated
        attendant, and connecting to multiple hosts.
    o   DirectTalk/2 handles up to 24 concurrent phone calls within one
        system and can access multiple host sessions simultaneously.  A
        DirectTalk/2 voice application can be expanded beyond 24 lines
        through DirectTalk/2's distributed environment
    o   DirectTalk/2 V1.1 provides customers with business solutions
        utilizing OS/2 V2.0. OS/2 V2.0 supports selected personal
        computers with a 386SX processor or higher, expanding the
        hardware platforms on which DirectTalk/2 may operate.
    o   DirectTalk/2's Text-to-Speech (Speech Synthesis) feature enables
        the voice processing application take information from an ASCII
        text file, and generate computer synthesized speech to provide
        (speak) the information back to the caller thus expanding the
        abilities of the application
    o   Enhanced voice recognition support is provided to prompt callers
        for verification of spoken information which was not initially
        detected thus providing more accurate and timely input by the
        caller.  This enhanced voice recognition option of DirectTalk/2
        also supports multiple national languages.
    o   System enhancements to increase the efficiency of DirectTalk/2
        applications include: the ability to access multiple host
        sessions simultaneously, the ability to use host connection
        methods supported by IBM OS/2 Communications Manager including
        host communications over IBM Token-Ring LAN, and the ability to
        preload a voice program into memory, sharing that single image
        amongst multiple application sessions.
    o   DirectTalk/2's system management enhancement includes the use of
        distributed servers allowing multiple DirectTalk/2 systems to
        share a single server. A single system can collect statistics
        from multiple DirectTalk/2s, while many DirectTalk/2s may share
        one LAN-based voice logic database.
    o   Selectable voice compression rates (24, 32, 48, 64Kbps) by the
        application programmer allows for the variation and optimization
        of disk storage and thus variations in voice quality of the
        spoken responses by the DirectTalk/2 system.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 59. IBM OS/2 DISTRIBUTED APPLICATION ENVIRONMENT PRODUCTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

5601-116 Communications System/2

5621-022 Entry Communications System/2

5601-117 Material Logistics System/2

5601-118 Host Link/2

5601-151 Communication Protocol Programs/A

5621-221 Tools/2

The IBM Distributed Application Environment primary OS/2**-based programs have
been enhanced to offer an object-oriented graphical user interface, support for
100Mbps LANs, DECnet**, advanced peer-to-peer networking (APPN) and X.25
communications, and integration enhancements to Remote Function
Manager/Structured Query Language (SQL) application support.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Consistent programming application programming interfaces and
        system services to support user productivity
    o   Support for growth through portability of application programs
    o   Allows the user to integrate resources and data, building an
        enterprise's business solution
    o   Provides the means for an enterprise to keep track of and manage
        its integrated systems
    o   Protects the user's investment through key architectures and
        products, portability, and national language support.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** DMACS is a trademark of Intellution, Inc. **
Intellution is a registered trademark of Intellution, Inc. ** MAP is an acronym
of General Motors Corporation to identify its Manufacturing Automation
Protocol. ** Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation. ** MAPware is a
trademark of Concord Communications, Incorporated. ** EtherLink/MC is a
trademark of 3COM Corporation. ** EtherCard PLUS/A is a trademark of Western
Digital Corporation. ** PLC and Data Highway are trademarks of Allen-Bradley
Corporation. ** TIWAY is a trademark of Texas Instruments Inc. ** MODBUS is a
trademark of MODICON Inc. ** Series One, Series Two, Series Three, Series Four,
and Series Five are trademarks of GE FANUC Automation Corp. ** Microsoft is a
trademark of Microsoft Corporation. ** DECnet is a trademark of Digital
Equipment Corporation. ** UNIX is a trademark of Unix System Lab, Inc. **
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation. ** PATHWORKS is a trademark of
Digital Equipment Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 60. IBM DISTRIBUTED AUTOMATION EDITION COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM/DOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Communications System/DOS enhances the existing Distributed Automation Edition*
family products by allowing low-cost DOS systems to connect to a Distributed
Automation Edition network. It provides a DOS-based application platform to
complement the OS/2* application platforms provided by both Communications
System/2 and Entry Communications System/2.  It allows existing DOS systems to
be used without expensive upgrades.

Communications System/DOS is a new product designed to enhance and complement
the existing family of Distributed Automation Edition products.  This product
provides a DOS-based application platform to complement the OS/2 application
platforms provided by both Communication System/2 and Entry Communications
System/2.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Business solutions are supported by Communications System/DOS
        because the customer can access the required plant floor data at
        a minimal cost by combining current hardware and software assets
        with Communications System/DOS.
    o   Investment protection is provided to the customer by
        Communications System/DOS by allowing a customer to use current
        assets both hardware and DOS applications, to access plant floor
        data until a decision is made to migrate to other Communications
        System platforms.
    o   Growth is enabled for the customer because of the ability to
        integrate current assets with the new technology represented by
        the Distributed Automation Edition network. As business and
        applications grow, the customer will be able to move to the new
        Communications System platforms.
    o   Systems Management is provided by Communications System/DOS
        operational and administrative functions that are aimed at
        simplifying operations and reducing costs.
    o   End-user productivity is enhanced because of the wide variety of
        features in Communications System/DOS.  They improve the
        availability of and access to plant floor data.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. (1) Ethernet is a trademark of the Xerox Corporation. (2)
3Com and EtherLink are trademarks of 3COM Corporation.  IBM does not sell,
service, or warrant these products. (3) EtherCard PLUS and EtherCard PLUS/A are
trademarks of Western Digital Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 61. IBM S/370 AND S/390 OPTICAL MEDIA ATTACH/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM S/370 and S/390* Optical Media Attach/2 provides mainframe users with
high speed access to data distributed on CD-ROM and other optical media. This
includes the CD-ROM books referenced in the IBM On Line Books (Softcopy)
release also being announced today. The program also provides bidirectional
data transfer between a 370/390 system and a PS/2* using the high speed
capabilities of the host channel.  By emulating a tape device the program
provides compatibility with existing host programs which support 1/2" tape.

This product should be marketed along with applications that require host
programs to access data stored on the PS/2. A typical application is the high
speed transfer of CD-ROM softcopy publications to host systems.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   The Optical Media Attach provides the ability to transfer data,
        up to channel speeds, between a mainframe system and OS/2*. One
        such type of applicable data is the "CD-ROM Softcopy Books"
        referenced in the IBM Online Books release which is also being
        announced today.
    o   Productivity gains are realized by reducing the amount of
        operator time and training required  to transfer large amounts
        of data, or a large number of files, between a PS/2 workstation
        and a host system.  This is particularly important for processing
        installation data distributed on CD-ROM media.
    o   The Optical Media Attach allows a host system to read and write
        data to devices which are supported by the OS/2 file system.
    o   By using familiar PS/2 hardware and software and emulating a tape
        interface, there is minimal impact to system management while
        providing the capability of transferring data between the OS/2
        file system and the host system.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 62. IBM FAXROUTER/2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE FACSIMILE SOLUTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FaxRouter/2 provides the capability to send, receive, display, archive and
print facsimiles from the user's OS/2 token-ring workstation.  Facsimiles can
be automatically routed to all users by the use of a routing code via touch
tone phone (DTMF) or an optical mark recognition (OMR) sheet.  All required
hardware is contained within the FaxRouter/2 server, thus eliminating the need
for additional hardware at the user's workstation.  FaxRouter/2 communicates
with Group 3 industry standard facsimile machines.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Ability to send and receive facsimiles (FAX) to/from an OS/2
        Token-Ring LAN workstation.
    o   Ability to display facsimiles(FAX) at an OS/2 Token-ring LAN
        workstation, print at any APA printer, and archive on the
        workstation.
    o   Provides a graphical toolbar to perform functions
    o   Selects facsimile recipients from a distribution list and
        notifies user when a facsimile arrives.
    o   Automatically resend if recipient facsimile phone is unavailable
        or if send is unsuccessful.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 63. IBM FASTSERVICE AND FFST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FASTService* and First Failure Support Technology* (FFST*) are IBM licensed
programs which provide pro-active systems management technology through event
detection.  FASTService provides customers with tools for implanting probe
statements and defining the data required for event resolution on its first
occurrence to allow them to monitor, record, and track software-detected events
across their enterprise.  FASTService with its prerequisite, First Failure
Support Technology (FFST), can improve reliability, availability, and
serviceability in customer-written software.  FFST provides these same event
detection functions for IBM applications.

FASTService, FFST, and the FASTService Customer Services Automated Service
Interface (ASI) provide pro-active, centralized, automated systems management
with real-time detection of events, precise event description to fingerprint
the event, concise diagnostic data (if required), and virtually immediate
notification of the event with recommended actions.  The FASTService Automated
Service Interface (ASI), available with the FASTService for MVS* Customer
Services, can assist a customer in achieving their goal of Automated Operations
and "lights out" Data Center operations by automatically notifying their
designated support personnel when an event is detected, and recording the event
in their problem management database.  Use of FASTService and FFST can help
reduce the costs associated with customer, vendor, and IBM software management.

The technology incorporated in the FASTService offering utilizes the foundation
for IBM's strategic direction towards automated software event detection and
support.  The FASTService integration of the technology conforms to the
requirements of Systems Application Architecture* (SAA*).  In addition, the
technology has been approved for integration in AD/Cycle tools to pursue an
enterprise-wide system solution of automated event detection, notification, and
support.

HIGHLIGHTS FASTService is more than a problem management solution; it is a
centralized, automated systems management solution since it:

    o   Provides a consistent approach to event detection and data
        collection
    o   Immediately notifies the customer-designated operational
        personnel of an event
    o   Collects appropriate data on the first occurrence of an event
        and returns to the program to continue processing
    o   Provides programmer flexibility in specifying which data is to
        be collected
    o   Identifies dump data set for the event
    o   Effectively utilizes dump disk space by allocating the dump
        dataset at the time of the event
    o   Uniquely identifies the event using a symptom string to enable
        recognition of duplicate occurrences
    o   Suppresses additional duplicate dumps for an event
    o   When attached to a host that uses FFST/MVS, FASTService for MVS
        Customer Services Automated Service Interface, NetView*, and
        Information/Management*, FASTService:
        -   Allows programmer to specify possible causes of the event
        -   Allows programmer to recommend actions for restoration of
            services or for operator intervention
        -   Automates event logging and allows updates to customer's
            problem management databases
        -   Automates searching of the customer's problem management
            databases utilizing the symptom string
        -   Automates assignment of events by notifying customer's
            responsible support group of the event and the availability
            of a resolution for a problem or recommended action for an
            expected event
        -   Automates search of IBM's problem database and queueing of
            problems to the IBM Support Center for applicable IBM
            software products.
    o   Provides customer education on the effective use of FASTService
        by their applications
    o   Provides FASTService Customer Services for customer installation
        assistance
    o   Provides customer hot-line support for the basic license site in
        the MVS and the Operating System/400* (OS/400*) operating environments.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 64. IBM SPEECH SERVER SERIES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

5777-WCQ IBM AIX Speech Server/6000

5777-WCP IBM Speech Client/2

5777-WCN IBM AIX Speech Client/6000

5765-151 IBM AIX Speech Single User/6000

The IBM Speech Server Series programs represent a large vocabulary
voice-to-text system in the IBM AIX* Version 3.2 for RISC System/6000*
(AIX/6000*) and IBM Operating System/2* (OS/2*) environment.  The AIX/6000
server decodes speech into text and an OS/2 or AIX/6000 client provides
functions for end users to enter dictation and control applications by voice.
The system allows end users to create electronic text for business documents by
voice. The text created can later be formatted, edited, and integrated with
other applications.  A language model and a more than 20,000-word vocabulary
support dictations for general business correspondence and documents.
Application programming interface (API) functions enable development of
speech-aware applications.  The system can be used in stand-alone mode on a
RISC System/6000 workstation or in a LAN environment, with an AIX/6000 server
supporting OS/2 or AIX/6000 clients.

The IBM Speech Server Series is a large vocabulary speech recognition system.
With an active vocabulary of more than 20,000 words, the products provide
free-text dictation and command entry by voice for business managers and
professionals. Text created through use of the products can be input to other
applications for the creation of complete and accurate text documents.
User-written application profiles and a set of API functions ease the
integration with other applications.  By optional fee services, a language
model and vocabulary can be tailored to specific enterprise or industry
requirements.  A stand-alone RISC System/6000 workstation is supported as well
as OS/2 or AIX/6000 clients in a LAN environment with an AIX/6000 Server.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Helps increase user productivity, saving time and effort in the
        document creation process, by decoding spoken words directly into
        electronic text, eliminating the need for transcribing and
        enabling direct author control over quality and accuracy during
        dictation.
    o   Provides enhanced business solutions by enabling the creation of
        text by voice for general business documents and correspondence.
        The efficiency of capturing the spoken word into text is
        exploited by support of software packages for document production.
    o   Growth of the customer's organization will be enabled through the
        development and implementation of speech-aware applications and by
        providing opportunities to produce quality text and shorten the
        overall document production cycle.
    o   Protects customers' investments by enabling the integration of
        voice input with existing workstation applications.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Playback Adapter/A is a Trademark of Tecmar
Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65. IBM TCP/IP VERSION 2.1.1 FOR DOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   5871-BBB  87G7184  IBM TCP/IP Version 2.1.1 for DOS
    o   5871-BBB  87G7185  IBM TCP/IP Version 2.1.1 for DOS: NFS Kit
    o   5871-BBB  87G7186  IBM TCP/IP Version 2.1.1 for DOS: NetBIOS
    o   5871-BBB  87G7187  IBM TCP/IP Version 2.1.1 for DOS: Programmer's

IBM TCP/IP Version 2.1.1 for DOS is enhanced with the following new functions
for improved interoperability:

    o   Windows Telnet 5250 terminal emulation for accessing AS/400*
        systems
    o   ODI (open data-link interface) for improved coexistence with
        Novell's NetWare client.
    o   IBM's Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.1 with TCP/IP
        support for 3270 graphic terminal emulation, EHLLAPI (enhanced
        high-level language application programming interface) and
        $FILE support for file transfer.

Improvements have also been made to Windows Telnet, Windows FTP (file transfer
protocol), SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol), NFS* (Network File System) and
NetBIOS (RFC 1001/1002).  Current customers of TCP/IP Version 2.1 can upgrade
to this new release at no charge.

IBM TCP/IP Version 2.1.1 provides both Windows TCP/IP applications and
DOS-based TCP/IP applications.  TCP/IP Version 2.1.1 for DOS provides users of
DOS and Windows the capability to participate in a multivendor network using
the TCP/IP protocol set.  TCP/IP Version 2.1.1 is part of the IBM family of
TCP/IP products that also includes TCP/IP for MVS, VM, OS/2(R), AIX(R),
OS/400(R), and IBM 3174 Telnet.

TCP/IP Version 2.1.1 for DOS enhances the IBM Family of TCP/IP products, which
includes TCP/IP on VM, MVS, OS/2, OS/400, AIX family, and IBM 3174 TCP/IP
Telnet.  These products are designed to address multivendor communication
requirements and to allow most IBM platforms access to networks involving
non-IBM systems.  IBM's TCP/IP Version 2.1.1 for DOS meets these requirements.
Users of the prior releases of IBM TCP/IP for DOS should consider upgrading to
Version 2.1.1, which offers usability, performance and functionality
advantages.  Users of Version 2.1 of TCP/IP for DOS can obtain a no charge
upgrade to Version 2.1.1.  Upgrades are also available for users of Version 2.0
for an upgrade charge.

HIGHLGHT

    o   Provides Windows Telnet 5250 terminal emulation
    o   Improves coexistence with Novell Netware clients with native ODI
        support.
    o   Enhances 3270 terminal emulation with IBM PC/3270 Version 3.1
        for 3270 graphics emulator, EHLLAPI, and IND$FILE
    o   Improves NFS support for mounting drives under Windows and PCNFS
        Version 2.0.
    o   Improves Windows Telnet, Windows FTP, SLIP and NetBIOS (RFC
        1001/1002)
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 66. IBM MAIL LAN GATEWAY/2 V1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Mail LAN Gateway/2 Version 1 is available to assist in the exchange of
electronic mail among unlike electronic mail platforms.  IBM Mail LAN Gateway/2
Version 1 supports cc: Mail** attachments to OfficeVision*/400, the IBM
Information Network IBM Mail Exchange service offering, DISOSS, and
OfficeVision/MVS via DISOSS. The product will reside on the customer's LAN.

The IBM Mail LAN Gateway/2 Version 1 product is designed to complement and
extend the reach of the customer's current cc: Mail electronic mail platform.
IBM Mail LAN Gateway/2 Version 1 is easy to install.  Network planning and
definitions are required when enabling the IBM Mail LAN Gateway/2 Version 1 to
communicate with OfficeVision/400, the IBM Information Network IBM Mail
Exchange service offering, and DISOSS.

HIGHLIGHTS The IBM Mail LAN Gateway/2 Version 1:

    o   Makes system management easy with all modules being resident on
        the LAN
    o   Enhances user productivity with automatic generation of alias
        user IDs that are used to address incompatibility issues
    o   Bridges existing incompatible electronic mail platforms
    o   Allows electronic mail users to reach a new set of trading
        partners
    o   Protects the current investment customers have made in cc: Mail,
        the IBM Information Network IBM Mail Exchange service offering,
        OfficeVision/400, and DISOSS by extending their current reach to
        a new subset of potential electronic mail trading partners.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** cc: Mail is a trademark of cc: Mail, Inc. ** Novell
and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 67. MERVA/2 V2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Message Entry and Routing with Interfaces to Various Applications
(MERVA/2) Version 2 licensed program replaces MERVA/2 Version 1 including the
Multi MERVA workstation feature and the associated product DSNL/2 Version 1.
MERVA/2 Version 2 integrates all the functions necessary to support connections
to the SWIFT II network (the worldwide private networks defined and maintained
by the Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Telecommunication - SWIFT), as
well as to telex networks and other MERVA installations (on PS/2* or CICS based
on System/370* or /390*).  MERVA/2 Version 2 operates under Operating System/2*
(OS/2*).

MERVA/2 Version 2 provides an integrated solution for MERVA users who process,
send, and receive SWIFT and telex messages to or from SWIFT II, telex network,
or another MERVA system.  It is the successor of both MERVA/2 Version 1 with
Multi MERVA and Direct SWIFT Network Link/2 (DSNL/2) Version 1.

MERVA/2 Version 2 provides a full LAN solution, enabling the user to perform
different processing steps (entry, verification, and authorization) on
different workstations, accessing one common data base.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Integrated solution covering the following functions:
        -   SWIFT II network support
        -   Telex network support via the Personal System/2 (PS/2)
        -   MERVA to MERVA connection between PS/2 and System/370 MVS-
            CICS and VSE-CICS
    o   Version 2 supports new and changed message types, scheduled to be
        implemented by SWIFT prior to General Availability of MERVA/2 V2.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68. IBM IMAGEPLUS WORKSTATION PROGRAM FAMILY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

5621-042 IBM ImagePlus Workstation Program/DOS Version 2.2.0 and 2.2.1

5621-047 IBM SAA ImagePlus Workstation Program/2 Version 1.2

5621-211 IBM ImagePlus Workstation Program/DOS for Windows Version 1.1

The workstation programs above make up the ImagePlus Workstation Program (IWPM)
family. They are designed to capture, view, print and manipulate image
documents as essential components of the:

    o   IBM SAA ImagePlus* MVS/ESA* System,
    o   IBM SAA ImagePlus/400 System,
both of which allow the conversion of manual paper-intensive applications to
high performance, computer-based image processing systems.

The new release of the IBM SAA ImagePlus Workstation Program/2 (IWPM/2),
Version 1.2, supports enhanced capture processing functions provided in
conjunction with IBM SAA ImagePlus Capture Facility/2 (ICPF) and IBM SAA
ImagePlus Intelligent Forms Facility/2 (IPFO). IWPM/2 Version 1.2 also supports
the storing and retrieving of notes and highlights and a new masking function
when used with IBM SAA ImagePlus Workfolder Application Facility/400 (WAF/400)
Version 2 Release 3.

A new member of the IWPM family is the IBM ImagePlus Workstation Program/DOS
for Windows** (IWPM/DOS for Windows).  IWPM/DOS for Windows Version 1.1
provides in the Microsoft** Windows 3.1 environment many of the IWPM functions
previously only available in the Operating System/2* (OS/2*) environment.

An important feature of the IBM IWPM family members is the ability to coexist
on the same local area network (LAN), and to share a base of common image
functions.  The OS/2-based IBM SAA ImagePlus Workstation Program/2 Version 1.1
continues to provide the broadest range of image services and support within
the family.

IBM ImagePlus Workstation Program/DOS Version 2.2 in this sales manual refers
to versions 2.2.0 and 2.2.1 of the program.

The OS/2-based IWPM/2 Version 1.2, a 16-bit application, supports Operating
System/2 Version 2.0 and IBM Extended Services for OS/2 Version 1.0, as well as
Operating System/2 Extended Edition Version 1.3.

IWPM/2, the OS/2-based program, is the flagship product of the ImagePlus
Workstation Program family. It is cooperative processing software that works
with the IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA and IBM SAA ImagePlus/400 Systems. IWPM/2
was first made generally available after the successful introduction of two
versions of the IWPM/DOS product. IWPM/2's objectives are to provide a
workstation solution that satisfies the needs of customers who want the
benefits of OS/2 and to support most of the functions and most of the devices
supported by IWPM/DOS while providing a base to introduce additional advanced
image processing functions and devices.  Some of these functions include color
support and published APIs which enable users to customize IWPM/2 for their
unique needs. Also incorporated is support for more languages including double
byte character support (DBCS) essential for other than US markets. IWPM/2
targets all of the market segments covered by IWPM/DOS while extending the
ImagePlus workstation offerings to the increasingly complex environment of the
professional worker, where the multitasking features of OS/2 provide an ideal
base for their operational requirements.

IWPM/2 offers the best environment to be used as a base to satisfy future
advanced image workstation requirements. It is open, customizable, and can
expand to exploit OS/2's system strengths such as reliability, recoverability,
performance, true multitasking, the ability to operate DOS, Windows and OS/2
applications concurrently, SAA, and the graphical user interface (GUI). Also,
it provides customers access to the broad range of devices supported by OS/2
such as display monitors, printers and scanners.

In summary, IWPM/2 satisfies requirements where customers:

    o   Have corporate or departmental preferences for OS/2 Version 2.0
        because it provides advanced OS/2 operating system functions such
        as true multitasking and safeguards to protect one application
        from adversely affecting another.
    o   Require the unique image features available in IWPM/2, but not
        available in:
        -   IWPM/DOS, such as the creation of notes and highlights,
            masking, OCR with the use of IPFO, software bar and patch
            code recognition, color capture/print/display, ICPF support,
            APIs, user exits, and support for a wider variety of printers,
            scanners, and displays, or
        -   IWPM/DOS for Windows, such as color capture/print, OCR with
            the use of IPFO, software bar and patch code recognition,
            ICPF support, APIs, user exits, and support for a wider
            variety of scanners.
    o   Have users that already know and use other SAA applications and
        therefore can reduce the training and support costs of learning
        another operating system.
    o   Require the high productivity achieved through advanced look
        ahead caching (look ahead caching improves productivity by
        decompressing pages received at the workstation but not yet
        viewed, thereby reducing the average page flip time).
    o   Require national language support only offered with IWPM/2.

IWPM/DOS for Windows, the newest member of the IWPM family, is an alternative
for customers who prefer a DOS-based Microsoft Windows environment. IWPM/DOS
for Windows Version 1.1 satisfies that need and allows these customers to take
advantage of ImagePlus Systems by providing many of the functions and devices
offered by IWPM/2.  Like IWPM/2, IWPM/DOS for Windows is cooperative processing
software that works with both the IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA and IBM SAA
ImagePlus/400 Systems.

IWPM/DOS for Windows can make it easier for customers committed to Microsoft
Windows to integrate IWPM/DOS for Windows into their business operations
because system personnel and end users currently involved with Microsoft
Windows applications will not require time or training to become familiar with
a new workstation operating system. Also, some customers with Other Equipment
Manufacturers' (OEM) workstations which are not OS/2-capable but are capable of
running Windows, may prefer IWPM/DOS for Windows for their ImagePlus
workstation.

In summary, IWPM/DOS for Windows satisfies requirements for customers who do
not need the advanced functions of IWPM/2 and:

    o   Have a corporate or departmental preference for Windows and want
        to reduce the training and support costs of learning another
        operating system, or
    o   Want to continue using IBM PS/2 workstations or OEM workstations
        in a Windows operating environment.
        IBM ImagePlus Workstation Program/DOS Version 2 is ideally suited
        for simple, repetitive business activities that require quick
        access to operational image documents.  IWPM/DOS provides entry
        level image functions for IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA and IBM SAA
        ImagePlus/400 Systems but advanced image functions are restricted
        due to the memory constraints of DOS. Although several scanners
        and printers can be used with IWPM/DOS, only two displays (the
        IBM 8506 and IBM 8508) are supported.

IWPM/2 Version 1.2 supports enhanced capture processing functions provided in
conjunction with the following new products IBM SAA ImagePlus Capture
Facility/2 (ICPF) and IBM SAA ImagePlus Intelligent Forms Facility/2 (IPFO).
IWPM/2 Version 1.2 also supports the storing and retrieving of notes and
highlights and a new masking function when used with IBM SAA ImagePlus
Workfolder Application Facility/400 (WAF/400) Version 2 Release 3.

IWPM/DOS for Windows, the newest member of the IWPM family, provides in the
Microsoft(2) Windows 3.1 environment many of the IWPM functions previously only
available in the Operating System/2(*) (OS/2(*)) environment.

The following features can help users expand their image applications with the
assurance of protecting their investment in the IBM ImagePlus Workstation
Program Family:

    o   ImagePlus Workstation Program upgradeability, migratability and
        coexistence
    o   Use of standard IBM image architectures
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation
**Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation **IRMA is a
trademark of Digital Communications Associates, Inc. **National Instruments is
a trademark of National Instruments Corporation. **Howtek is a trademark of
Howtek Corporation. **Sharp is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
**Hewlett-Packard is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. **Bell and Howell,
and Copiscan are trademarks of Bell and Howell Corporation. **IMAGELINK is a
trademark of Eastman Kodak Company. **Polaroid Digital Scanner CS-500 and
Polaroid Digital PhotoPrinter CI-700 are trademarks of Polaroid Corporation.
**Shinko CHC-345 is a trademark of Shinko Seisakusho Company Ltd. **Software
Carousel is a trademark of SoftLogic Solutions Inc. **DCA is a registered
trademark of Digital Communications Associates, Inc. **IRMALAN, QuickHit,
QuickPad, QuickScript are trademarks of Digital Communications Associates, Inc.
**Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Inc. ** IRMA is a trademark of Digital
Communications Associates, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69. IBM COMMAND TREE/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Command Tree/2 is an Operating System/2* Presentation Manager* application
that helps the user build commands and then routes these commands to a
specified destination.  IBM Command Tree/2 builds commands from libraries
shipped with products such as ACF/VTAM Version 4 Release 1, ACF/VTAM Version 3
Release 4.1 and NetView* Version 2 Release 3 or libraries built by the user.
It enables users to create syntactically correct commands without having to
remember such details as option names, the order of options, or punctuation.
IBM Command Tree/2 makes operators more effective when interacting with
products requiring textual commands.

The IBM Command Tree/2 product offers a productivity enhancement to operations
personnel that are required to enter textual commands.  Command libraries will
be shipped with ACF/VTAM Version 3 Release 4.1, ACF/VTAM Version 4 Release 1
and NetView Version 2 Release 3 and users can add their own command libraries.
One copy of IBM Command Tree/2 can be used to access multiple command
libraries.  A no charge copy of IBM Command Tree/2 is supplied with the NetView
Graphic Monitor Facility of NetView Version 2 Release 3.  One copy can be
downloaded per licensed NetView Graphic Monitor Facility workstation.

This OS/2 based program can be used with libraries for host or workstation
based programs.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   User Productivity is improved by allowing operators to issue
        commands without remembering command punctuation and syntax.
    o   Systems Management is enhanced by accessing command libraries
        shipped with products such as ACF/VTAM Version 4 Release 1,
        ACF/VTAM Version 3 Release 4.1 and NetView Version 2 Release 3.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70. IBM SAA BOOKMANAGER BUILD/2 VERSION 1.2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM SAA BookManager BUILD/2 Version 1.2 licensed program provides users the
capability to create softcopy books from WordPerfect**, Microsoft Word**, and
ASCII files on a PS/2* with OS/2* Version 2 installed.  Softcopy created with
IBM SAA BookManager BUILD/2 can be viewed with Release 2, or higher, levels of
BookManager* READ/2, READ/DOS, READ/6000, READ/MVS, and READ/VM. With the
introduction of this product, a softcopy publishing solution with both BUILD
and READ products is available on a personal workstation.  BUILD/2 is a new
product, announced as Version 1.2 to be consistent with other products in the
BookManager family.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   BookManager BUILD/2 is a key component in a business solution for
        enhancing the way information is created, distributed, and used
        within an organization.
    o   Investment protection is provided by allowing customers to use
        the same word-processor source files for creating softcopy
        documentation and printed information.
    o   User productivity is enhanced by the techniques used to create
        softcopy documentation and by the improved access and use of
        information when available in online book format.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** WordPerfect is a registered trademark of the
WordPerfect Corporation. ** Microsoft Word is a registered trademark of the
Microsoft Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 71. IBM BOOKMANAGER READ/DOS 1.2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Softcopy documentation can help companies to manage the ever-increasing volumes
of information needed to operate a business and to reduce the expenses of
publishing in hard copy.  Making information available in softcopy form can
increase worker productivity by giving end users the ability to find, read, and
use the information they need at their DOS workstations.

IBM BookManager* READ/DOS 1.2 enables users to read softcopy information,
search using the hypertext facility, take notes, and print text information. It
provides businesses with a solution for handling information by providing a
method to easily and quickly access information at reduced cost.  End users'
productivity can be improved with the ability to find information quickly and
easily without leaving the workstation.  BookManager READ/DOS 1.2 increases the
ability to manage the information that is vital to the growth of a business,
protecting the company investment by making electronically stored information
useful at a workstation.  System management is improved through the use of
BookManager READ/DOS 1.2 by accessing IBM softcopy manuals and publications at
the workstation.

BookManager READ/DOS is a member of the BookManager family of online
documentation solutions. * BookManager is a trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Softcopy books enhance a company's ability to manage information.
        BookManager READ/DOS 1.2 expands the ability to access the
        business information to the workstation.
    o   Productivity gains are realized by end users, including
        technical, office staffs and other professional personnel, by
        the ability to locate and access information immediately through
        a sophisticated search across books and link capabilities within
        books.
    o   Business growth is enabled by the ability to manage increasing
        amounts of information in softcopy publications.  Softcopy
        documents stored on a LAN server, AS/400 folder, fixed disks,
        diskette, or CD-ROM allow quick access to information as needed.
    o   Information is a key asset of any business.  A company's
        investment is lost if information in the "stacks" cannot be found
        and used.  BookManager protects the company's investment by
        making all information accessible and usable on demand.
    o   System management is improved though the use of BookManager READ/
        DOS 1.2 by accessing IBM softcopy publications or the customer's
        own manuals built with BookManager BUILD/VM Release 2 or Release
        1 and transported to the workstation.
    o   The needs of many companies are supported by BookManager's
        ability to use softcopy books in many languages.
    o   No discount on original license.  Valid discounts apply to
        additional copies only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 72. IBM SAA BOOKMANAGER READ/2 VERSION 1.2.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Softcopy documentation helps companies manage the ever-increasing volumes of
information, reduce the expenses of publishing in hardcopy, and increase worker
productivity.

IBM SAA BookManager* READ/2 Version 1.2.1 provides a solution for handling and
accessing information easily and quickly.  It enables end users' productivity
improvements by providing the ability to find information quickly and easily
without leaving the workstation.  Users can read softcopy documents; find
information through search, and hypertext facility; take notes; or print
information.  BookManager READ/2 Version 1.2.1 increases the ability to manage
the information that is vital to the growth of a business. It also protects a
company investment by making electronically stored information useful at a
workstation.  System management is improved by using BookManager READ/2 Version
1.2.1 to accesses IBM softcopy manuals and publications.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Softcopy books enhance a company's ability to manage information.
        BookManager READ/2 Version 1.2.1 expands the ability to access
        business information at the workstation.
    o   Productivity gains are realized by end users, including
        technical, office staffs, and other professional personnel, by
        the ability to locate and access information immediately through
        sophisticated search and link capabilities within and across
        books.
    o   Business growth is enabled by the ability to manage increasing
        amounts of information in softcopy publications.  Softcopy
        documents stored on a LAN server, AS/400* folder, fixed disks,
        diskette, or CD-ROM allow quick access to information as needed.
    o   Information is a key asset of any business.  A company's
        investment is lost if information in the "stacks" cannot be found
        and used.  BookManager protects the company's investment by
        making all information accessible and usable on demand.
    o   Systems management is improved through the use of BookManager by
        accessing IBM softcopy publications or the customer's own manuals
        built with BookManager BUILD/VM Release 2 Release 1 and
        transported to the workstation.
    o   The needs of many companies are supported by BookManager's
        ability to use softcopy books in many languages.
    o   No discount on original license.  Valid discounts apply to
        additional copies only.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 73. FINANCIAL BRANCH SYSTEM SERVICES/2 VERSION 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Financial Branch System Services/2 Version 1.0 (FBSS/2 V1.0) is now
available with the functions announced on September 19, 1989.  In addition, it
supports new IBM machines and eases the distribution of software from the host
to the branch office.

IBM Financial Branch System Services Version 2.2.1 (FBSS V2.2.1), which is a
Maintenance Release with enhancements to IBM FBSS V2.2, is available at the
same time as IBM FBSS/2 V1.0, which provides the capability of customizing and
implementing a mixed (IBM PC-DOS and IBM OS/2 EE) FBSS local area network
(LAN).  Additionally, IBM FBSS V2.2.1 which includes the previously announced
X.25 Co-Processor/2 support, improves the use of the expanded memory support
and supports the new IBM machines.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   FBSS/2 Version 1.0 with additional capabilities to those
        announced on September 19, 1989:
        -   Enable growth by supporting the PS/2 Model 65 SX (8565-061,
            and 8565-121), and PS/2 Model 70 486, (8570-B61, and 8570-B21
            (In EMEA 8570-R21), and PS/2 Model 80 (8580-A21, 8580-A31,
            8580-X21, and 8580-M21).
        -   Provide improved system management through the Remote Change
            Management Services (RCMS/2).
    o   FBSS Version 2.2.1 Maintenance Release with additional
        capabilities to those announced on September 19, 1989 with FBSS
        Version 2.2:
        -   Enable growth by supporting the X.25 Co-Processor/2 Adapter
            and Support Program, supporting the recently announced PS/2
            Model 65 SX (8565-061, and 8565-121), and PS/2 Model 70 486
            (8570-B61, and 8570-B21 (In EMEA 8570-R21), and PS/2 Model
            80 (8580-A21, 8580-A31, 8580-X21, and 8580-M21), and providing
            customization and installation enhancements that allow
            configuration of a mixed DOS and OS/2 EE LAN.
        -   Ensure investment protection by allowing more servers to be
            loaded into expanded memory, and by maintaining a common
            Application Programming Interface (API), allowing easy
            migration.
        -   Provide business solutions through an enhanced electronic
            journal and store-and-forward function that supports session-
            level encryption for the forwarding function
        -   Improve user productivity with functional enhancements to
            the IBM 3287 Emulator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 74. FINANCIAL BRANCH SYSTEM SERVICES/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FBSS/2 V1.1 provides relevant new functions and enhancements such as, FBSS DOS
Box Tool that allows a FBSS (DOS) application to run in the OS/2 EE* DOS
Compatibility Box, a new FBSS/2 Shared File Server, and supports multiple
FBSS/2 applications running in a single OS/2 workstation that is connected in a
mixed environment.

FBSS/2 V1.1 will only operate with OS/2 EE V1.3; this will allow FBSS/2 V1.1 to
take full advantage of the OS/2 EE V1.3 performance improvements.

FBSS program family combines IBM Personal Computers and IBM Personal System/2s
with their operating systems (DOS and OS/2 EE) to a client/server branch data
processing system with a consistent application platform.

The FBSS client/server mechanism which is provided as extension to each
operating system, builts a common layer on top of the DOS and OS/2* operating
systems, enabling:

    o   resource sharing and
    o   distributed processing

Under this common layer, the FBSS' servers and programs provide for both DOS
and OS/2 workstations a broad set of services and server functions for general
as well as financial purposes.  With today's announcement, OS/2 workstations
running FBSS/2 V1.1 offer a similar level of functionality as the provided by
FBSS (DOS) programs and servers.  Following is an overview of the services
provided:

    o   At system level:
        -   Communications
        -   Database and Shared File servers
        -   System Manager
        -   Software distribution
    o   At generic financial level:
        -   Electronic Journal server
        -   Store for Forwarding and Forwarding servers
        -   Support for financial I/O devices

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Business solutions provided by the new functions: Electronic
        Journal, Store, and Forwarding.
    o   System Management provided by the System Manager services, the
        System Manager Operator, enhancements to the Query server, and
        National Language Support for the operator's interface.
    o   The investment in current FBSS (DOS) applications is protected
        providing the new FBSS/2 Shared File Server and the FBSS DOS Box
        Tool.
    o   Growth enablement provided by host communications enhancements to
        facilitate the use of LU-6.2 communication support, support of
        distributed processing and FBSS common Application Programming
        Interface (FBSS API) for the complete FBSS family products.
    o   User productivity increased by significant Supervisor
        enhancements, by the capability of running multiple FBSS/2
        applications on the same OS/2 machine and by the System Manager
        services.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 75. IBM SYSTEM PERFORMANCE MONITOR/2 VERSION 1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM System Performance Monitor/2 (SPM/2) V1 consists of an integrated package
of performance monitoring and analyzing facilities executable in OS/2* Standard
Edition or Extended Edition V1.2 or 1.3 environments.  SPM/2 enables system
administrators to monitor system performance, to analyze performance problems
and to use SPM/2 as an aid for performance tuning, load balancing and network
growth managing efforts.  In addition, SPM/2 enables application developers to
verify performance objectives and fine tune applications.

System Performance Monitor/2 V1 enables OS/2 system performance management in
OS/2 Standard Edition or Extended Edition V1.2 or 1.3 environments.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Systems Management enhancements in SPM/2 include:
        -   System performance management of OS/2 SE and EE 1.2 or 1.3
            environments for system administrators and application
            developers
        -   A Data Collection Facility that collects critical OS/2 CPU,
            disk and memory utilization data, enabling local or remote
            system management
        -   A Monitor Facility that enables real time performance
            monitoring
        -   Log and Report Facilities that unveil details of resource
            utilization with granularity on a dispatched process basis
        -   Memory and Directory Analyzers that enable in-depth analysis
            of OS/2 memory management and disk capacity information.
    o   Investment Protection is supported by a full-function OS/2
        Command Line interface for all SPM/2 Facilities.
    o   Growth is enabled through an Application Programming Interface
        (API) that provides direct access to continuously collected
        performance data.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 76. IBM SYSTEM PERFORMANCE MONITOR/2 VERSION 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM System Performance Monitor/2 (SPM/2) Version 2.0 provides an integrated set
of performance data collecting, recording, graphing, reporting and analyzing
functions that enable performance management of OS/2* Version 2.0 critical
system resources on IBM and non-IBM PC hardware. Performance management
enabling is also extended to OS/2 16-bit and 32-bit applications executing in
the OS/2 2.0 environment via a supported application programming interface
(API).

In addition to collecting performance data locally on a given system, SPM/2
supports remote data collection from IBM OS/2 LAN Servers and IBM OS/2 LAN
Requesters. In support of remote system management, SPM/2 supports a
distributed feature.  The function offered as a distributed feature is a subset
of that provided in the program product.  This feature enables remote
monitoring for servers and requesters that only require performance data
collection and do not require the data-processing offerings of SPM/2.

SPM/2 provides a user interface that conforms to IBM SystemView Integration
Level 1.  SystemView is the IBM systems management strategy for planning,
coordinating and operating heterogeneous, enterprise-wide information systems.

Additional key enhancements over SPM/2 Version 1.0 include the following:

    o   Presentation Manager based control panel providing centralized
        control for performance monitoring activities
    o   Collection of more extensive performance metrics for CPU, memory,
        files and disk
    o   Collection of thread, cache, printer and communication port
        resource performance data
    o   Collection of user application defined performance metrics
    o   Discovery capability of SPM/2 enabled workstations
    o   Support for multiple concurrent monitoring sessions
    o   Concurrent graphing and recording activity
    o   Graphical playback support for recorded data
    o   Ability to graphically view performance of any workstation within
        a single monitor session
    o   Workstation, application, process and thread level report filters
    o   Support for processing multiple recorded log files into a single
        report
    o   Greatly enhanced function and usability for the Memory Analyzer,
        including a Presentation Manager* and Hyperblock* based interface
    o   API Support enabling user applications and device drivers to
        register performance metrics for collection
    o   API Support enabling collection of real-time performance data and
        processing of historical data
    o   Online hypertext User Guide and References

SPM/2 enables LAN system administrators and capacity planners to monitor system
performance, analyze performance trends/problems and use SPM/2 as an aid for
performance tuning, load balancing and network growth managing efforts.  In
addition, SPM/2 enables application developers and performance analysts to
better analyze designs, verify performance objectives and optimize application
performance.

System Performance Monitor/2 Version 2.0 enables performance management of OS/2
2.0 critical system resources as well as OS/2 user application registered
resources.  SPM/2 enables critical line-of-business applications to be
optimized for performance prior to implementation in a production environment
and enables performance management of OS/2 2.0 and applications within the
production environment.

SPM/2 enables LAN system administrators and capacity planners to monitor system
performance, analyze performance trends/problems and use SPM/2 as an aid for
performance tuning, load balancing and network growth managing efforts.  In
addition, SPM/2 enables application developers and performance analysts to
better analyze designs, verify performance objectives and optimize application
performance.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   SPM/2 enables OS/2 2.0 performance management via:
        -   Collecting and recording of performance data for OS/2 2.0
            critical system resources and for instrumented OS/2 16-bit
            and 32-bit user application resources
        -   Graphically displaying "live" as well as "pre-recorded"
            performance data for any monitored workstation
        -   Reporting utilization details of critical resources via
            summarization levels ranging from high-level workstation
            perspectives to low-level thread perspectives in formats
            ranging from summary to spreadsheet compatible
        -   Analyzing OS/2 2.0 memory management in depth, including
            "working set", via Presentation Manager windows and Hyperblock
            linked control blocks
    o   SPM/2's application programming interface enables business
        growth via:
        -   Enabling performance optimization of OS/2* applications that
            implement and register performance counters and timers for
            collection
        -   Enabling accessibility to collected performance data for
            real-time processing by line-of-business management
            applications
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 77. IBM SAA IMAGEPLUS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM SAA* ImagePlus/2 Version 1.0 is the newest member of the ImagePlus* family.
It is a comprehensive, user-configurable PS/2*, local area network-based
implementation with OS/2* server and workstations and optical hardware support
designed to satisfy the processing needs of enterprise departments and
workgroups, as well as, medium and small businesses. ImagePlus/2 provides a way
to enter, store and retrieve documents online.  It provides
document/case/folder and workflow management.  ImagePlus/2 offers functions
similar to other ImagePlus Family members, IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/Enterprise
Systems Architecture (MVS/ESA*) and IBM ImagePlus/400 system. ImagePlus/2 was
designed using IBM System Application Architecture* (SAA) and Common User
Access* (CUA*) architecture.  It was jointly developed by IBM and the Eastman
Kodak Company.

HIGHLIGHTS IBM SAA ImagePlus/2 provides:

    o   A comprehensive, user-configurable PS/2 stand-alone or local
        area network (LAN) based ImagePlus solution implemented with OS/2
        software.  It is easily expandable with additional workstations
        and devices.
    o   Image document storage and retrieval, folder/case management,
        and menu driven workflow processing which provides an alternative
        to the location, retrieval, distribution and storage of paper
        documents.
    o   APIs and user exits for integration of other applications.
    o   A Common User Access (CUA) compliant architecture and a
        Presentation Manager graphical user interface.
    o   Online System Administration Functions for configuration and
        system management as well as online help documentation.
    o   Support for Mixed Object Document Content Architecture (MO: DCA)
        and Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) document formats and uses the
        OS/2 SQL data base manager.
    o   A range of image-oriented hardware and software functions
        suitable for a wide variety of business solutions.  It provides
        hierarchical system managed storage, error logging and trace
        information for problem determination.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Bell and Howell Copiscan II is a registered trademark
of Bell and Howell Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 78. IBM SAA IMAGEPLUS INTELLIGENT FORMS FACILITY/2 V1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM SAA ImagePlus Intelligent Forms Facility/2 (IPFO) is designed to help
improve productivity and reduce the cost of data entry for customers who scan
forms with typed or machine-printed data for storage in their host ImagePlus
WAF/400 or ImagePlus MVS/ESA systems.  IPFO achieves these benefits through
intelligent forms processing, extraction of user-specified fields, and optical
character recognition (OCR).  The OCR function is built on technology provided
by the CAERE Corporation.  The optional IBM SAA ImagePlus Intelligent Forms
Assist/2 (IPFA) feature of IPFO provides an OCR-reject correction capability
which is designed to increase overall throughput and accuracy of data captured
and documents indexed for storage in these ImagePlus systems.  IPFO requires
the IBM SAA ImagePlus Workstation Program/2 (IWPM/2) Version 1.2 to provide the
scanned document images.

IPFO functions include the automatic recognition of scanned forms and specific
user-defined fields to be processed, separation of field data from the
background content of the form (field extraction), and optical character
recognition of the extracted data.  The results are then returned to IWPM/2
Version 1.2 for indexing and storing in the host ImagePlus system.  If there
are characters in the fields not recognized by IPFO (including unrecognized,
suspicious, or mis-recognized (substituted) characters), then the image and
data may be passed to the IPFA feature which enables a user to simultaneously
view the original image, along with the recognition results, and manually
correct the data. IPFO Version 1.1 will provide the above support for ImagePlus
WAF/400 customers. IPFO Version 1.1.1 will add support for ImagePlus MVS/ESA
environments.

IPFO is designed for ImagePlus MVS/ESA and WAF/400 platform customers planning
to utilize the IWPM/2 Version 1.2 for scanning and manually indexing images
into their systems.  Through the capabilities of IPFO, combined with the error
correction capabilities of the IPFA feature, this process can be automated,
thereby improving the productivity of users and the efficiency of getting
images into the system.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Electronically  processes images from scanned forms to automate
        the indexing and entry of business data from these images.  This
        may be faster and less expensive than traditional manual methods
        of data capture.
    o   Uses intelligent forms processing and optical character
        recognition (OCR) instead of large amounts of key-entry to enter
        indexing information and application data into the ImagePlus
        environment.  Manual techniques are reserved for error correction
        or verification following forms processing and OCR.
    o   Provides a user friendly Forms Definition Utility to simplify
        the creation, and maintainance, of an electronic forms library.
    o   Protects  investment in paper forms and form designs since IPFO
        does not require special forms or the use of drop-out ink.  IPFO
        is compatible with, and supports, current IBM ImagePlus file
        formats.
    o   Recognizes characters from, and operates in, several national
        languages in addition to U. S. English.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Kodak IMAGELINK Scanner 900 is a trademark of Eastman
Kodak company.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79. IBM IMAGEPLUS CAPTURE FACILITY/2 V1 R1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM SAA ImagePlus Capture Facility/2 (ICPF) is a local area network
(LAN)-based, client/server document capture subsystem for ImagePlus MVS/ESA*.
ICPF significantly improves the document capture process by providing support
for a wide range of scanning and indexing options, allowing customers to choose
the most efficient technique for their business process.

The customer now has three choices for manually indexing documents:  index
before scan, simultaneous index and scan, and scan before index.  The new scan
before index function allows batches of scanned documents to be queued on an
Operating System/2* (OS/2*) workstation, the ICPF File Server. Using the ICPF
Indexing Feature running on another OS/2 workstation, the user selects queues
with batches of documents to be indexed.  Documents are then displayed so the
user can enter index information.

Automatic capture of index information has been enhanced beyond the current bar
code capability.  ICPF, together with IBM SAA ImagePlus Intelligent Forms
Facility/2 (IPFO), allows optical character recognition (OCR) to be used to
automatically capture indexing and line-of-business (LOB) data.

ICPF also allows for batches of documents, either manually indexed or with
index information automatically captured, to be temporarily stored on the file
server.  This allows the customers to select the appropriate time for the
transmission of the documents from the file server to the host.

ICPF in conjunction with the IBM SAA ImagePlus Folder Application Facility
MVS/ESA (IPFAF), IBM SAA ImagePlus Object Distribution Manager MVS/ESA (IODM),
IBM SAA ImagePlus Object Distribution Manager/2 (IODM/2), IBM SAA ImagePlus
Intelligent Forms Facility/2 (IPFO), and IBM SAA ImagePlus Workstation
Program/2 Version 1.2 provides an integrated facility for a document capture
system. This facility introduces client/server capabilities to the ImagePlus
MVS/ESA environment and the unified structure supports the functional
capabilities of scan before index and OCR.

ICPF applies to all segments of the ImagePlus MVS/ESA marketplace.  ICPF
provides customers a consolidated front-end document capture capability which
allows customers the choice of selecting the most appropriate capture technique
for their business processes.  It supports both manual and automatic capture of
index information with the bar code or optical character recognition.  Current
customers can continue to use their installed workstations and scanners. Note
that for OCR processing, the IPFO product is required.

The introduction of ICPF into the ImagePlus MVS/ESA environment fulfills a key
requirement of our installed customers and new prospects.  The flexibility for
indexing and scanning documents enhances the platform's ability to process
thousands of documents daily, to handle large numbers of workstations, and to
tightly integrate with LOB applications.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   An integrated front-end document capture facility that introduces
        client/server capabilities to the ImagePlus MVS/ESA environment.
    o   The scan before index function allows scanned documents to be
        batched in queues on the ICPF File Server for later indexing
        using the ICPF Indexing Feature
    o   Supports a wide variety of input devices, single-feed scanners,
        batch scanners and other input devices supported by IBM SAA
        ImagePlus Workstation Program/2 (IWPM/2) Version 1.2
    o   APIs are provided to allow a LOB application to invoke the
        indexing function
    o   ICPF File Server allows batches of documents to be temporarily
        stored on the file server for later transmission to the host
    o   The simultaneous scan and index feature removes the need for the
        user to obtain a TEMPID before scanning the document
    o   Supports IPFO which uses OCR technology to obtain indexing and/or
        LOB data
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 80. IBM SAA IMAGEPLUS OBJECT DISTRIBUTION MANAGER/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The new IBM Systems Application Architecture* (SAA*) ImagePlus* Object
Distribution Manager/2 (IODM/2) product is an extension of the IBM SAA
ImagePlus MVS/ESA* system.  IODM/2 runs in the Operating System/2* (OS/2*)
environment to provide object distribution and storage management in a local
area network (LAN)-based server configuration.  IODM/2 together with the IBM
SAA ImagePlus Folder Application Facility MVS/ESA Version 2 Release 2 (IPFAF)
or a customer written image front-end application (FEA), provides an
operational IBM SAA ImagePlus MVS/ESA system.  Optionally, IODM/2 can work with
the IBM SAA ImagePlus Object Distribution Manager Version 2 Release 2 (IODM) to
deliver an image system capable of supporting both central and remote users.

ImagePlus MVS/ESA implementations now have multiple alternatives for
implementing the object distribution and storage management functions.  Image
implementations can start with a combination of IPFAF and a single IODM/2. Any
combination of IODM/2s and/or IODMs can later be added to the initial
configuration to meet customers' growth requirements.

Existing ImagePlus MVS/ESA headquarters installations can be extended to
support remote or smaller offices with potential reduced telecommunications
costs.  At each remote or small office location, documents are stored on IODM/2
LAN-based server(s) providing local access.  Users at both remote and/or
headquarters offices have access to all documents within the application
regardless of whether they are stored on the local IODM/2, another IODM/2 or
IODM.  Additionally, the documents stored on the local IODM/2 can be migrated
during off-peak hours to another IODM/2 or IODM.  The functions of IODM/2 and
IODM combine into a cooperative LAN and host-based object distribution and
storage management solution.

IODM/2 is an extension to the ImagePlus MVS/ESA offering.  ImagePlus MVS/ESA
Version 2 Release 2 continues support of multiple IODMs configured as one
system.  With IODM/2, storage management may include combinations of MVS/ESA
and OS/2 based object servers.  IODM/2 provides a LAN-based server environment
for the storage and management of active, work-in-progress documents at remote
sites.

IODM/2 in an OS/2 environment and IODM in an MVS/ESA environment perform
similar functions. Because these are installed in two distinctly different
environments, performance characteristics of the OS/2 server are not equivalent
to the MVS/ESA environment.  The performance of IODM/2 will be constrained by
several factors, processor speed, number of workstations supported on the LAN
and the telecommunication line speeds.  IODM/2 provides distributed object
storage and retrieval with the performance considerations inherent in a
Personal System/2* (PS/2*) image server environment.

Business solutions for folder, document, object and workflow management can be
designed with a central index which controls the storage of documents or
objects in a network of servers.  This network of servers can be configured as
centralized or decentralized or any combination of the preceding.

IODM/2, as a LAN-based server, can provide decentralized storage for the local
users who work with the documents during the active period of a document's
life.  After this active period, these documents can then be migrated to an
optical disk attached to IODM/2, or migrated to another IODM/2 or IODM.  Thus,
both IODM/2 and/or IODM can provide long term archiving of documents and
objects.

IODM/2 and IODM can work jointly together to support an enterprise's document
management needs.  For document retrieval requests, IODM/2 will first attempt
to search for the document locally on its magnetic or optical storage.  If the
local IODM/2 does not succeed in finding the document, IODM/2 will
transparently work with another IODM/2 or IODM to satisfy the document
retrieval requests. This is well suited to a business application with regional
or branch users who wish to store lower volume documents locally when they are
active, and then store them permanently either locally or at the headquarters
site.

In contrast, a customer headquarters location may have the need to store high
volumes of documents in a central repository to be accessed by a large number
of user workstations.  IODM can address this business challenge by providing
the centralized high volume, enterprise-wide repository supporting the larger
numbers of users traditionally associated with a headquarters location.

Users at regional or branch office locations need to store lower volumes of
documents, which are stored permanently at headquarters.  IODM/2 addresses this
business scenario, by allowing the remote or branch office the ability to store
and route these documents in their location.  After the work with the documents
are completed, then the documents are migrated to the IODM at headquarters. In
the above scenarios, all users of the ImagePlus MVS/ESA system have full access
to any document regardless of where they are stored.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Extends ImagePlus MVS/ESA with a LAN-based object distribution
        and storage management solution
    o   Provides low cost entry level configuration for ImagePlus
        MVS/ESA
    o   Enables multiple growth options for existing ImagePlus MVS/ESA
        implementations
    o   Utilizes existing ImagePlus MVS/ESA interfaces, operational
        concepts and functions
    o   Offers potential reduction of imaging telecommunications costs
    o   Provides LAN-based storage
        -   DASD storage
        -   Write Once Read Many or Read/Write Optical storage
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** KODAK is a trademark of Eastman Kodak Corporation. **
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 81. IBM NEURAL NETWORK UTILITY/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Neural networks are an innovative approach to information processing.  These
adaptive artificial intelligence systems provide a method for identifying and
classifying patterns in data.  The primary difference between Neural Networks
and conventional programs is that you don't program a Neural Network, you teach
and train it by examples.  A Neural Network can assist in any applications
where substantial amounts of data are used to predict outcome.

Neural Network Utility/2 Licensed Program Offering is a suite of commands and
programs designed to simulate parallel network processing.  After a Neural
Network has been built and trained, it can be incorporated into application
programs.

Neural Network Utility/2 is the PC version of Neural Network Utility/400.
Neural Network Utility/2 is targeted for those customers that wish to develop
their applications on a PC. The customer then has the option of porting their
application to an AS/400 system (if the base Neural Network Utility/400 product
is licensed) or execute their application on the PC in stand-alone mode.

Neural Network Utility/2 is a generalized programming enabler that can be used
in all industry segments and was designed to be integrated with existing or new
application programs.

In the past, discovering patterns and relationships in large sets of data has
required sophisticated statistical techniques, a process that could be
time-consuming and expensive.  Today, Neural Network Utility/2 provides a
method of identifying and classifying complex patterns in data.  Unlike
conventional programming, Neural Networks are not programmed but are trained
with examples taken from the set of data.  Neural Network Utility/2 uses the
data to discover relationships.  Once the Neural Network is trained, it uses
the discovered relationships to make predictions about new data.

Application developers who use Neural Network Utility/2 should have experience
with personal computers (PCs) if using the workstation features and should have
some programming experience.

A number of Neural Network models are supported, providing a broad set of data
processing functions useful for solving business problems.  An open API allows
the addition of new or improved user-defined neural network models.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   User productivity is enhanced by providing support for the IBM
        Wizard (i860) card for PS/2*) systems under OS/2*, along with
        iconic graphic user interfaces.
    o   DOS and OS/2 development and run-time environments are supported
        with equivalent functionality.  This provides flexibility for
        the user to select the appropriate development and delivery
        platforms while minimizing the cost of application migration
        between platforms.
    o   A number of Neural Network algorithms are supported, providing a
        broad set of data processing functions useful in a business
        environment.  Product growth is promoted by a design which allows
        the addition of user-defined Neural Network algorithms.
    o   Existing applications can be enhanced by the addition of Neural
        Network capabilities.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Microsoft is a Registered Trademark of Microsoft
Corporation. ** Windows is a Trademark of Microsoft Corporation. ** Intel is a
Trademark of Intel Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 82. IBM SAA CONSUMER TRANSACTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

44G3111  - IBM SAA CONSUMER TRANSACTION DEFINITION/2

44G3114  SAA CONSUMER TRANSACTION RUNTIME/2

Consumer Transaction/2 and Runtime/2 are licensed programs for Operating
System/2* (OS/2*) Extended Edition (OS/2 EE) Personal System/2* (PS/2*)
environment.  They are Systems Application Architecture (SAA) Common User
Access (CUA) compliant applications, that provide for growth by exploiting the
OS/2 Extended Edition operating system. Consumer Transaction Definition/2 and
Runtime/2 provide the enablers on which to develop integrated advanced branch
teller and platform workstation finance solutions.

Using Consumer Transaction (CT) Runtime/2, PS/2 workstations can participate
with existing Consumer Transaction/DOS (CT/DOS) Runtime PS/2 workstations via
the local area network (LAN). Transactions (code) previously developed for CT
Runtime/2 can be used with CT Runtime/2 without change. Panels previously
developed can be easily converted to be used with CT Runtime/2 as windows for
operation using the OS/2 EE Presentation Manager* (PM).

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Enable growth through:
        -   Use of OS/2 EE multiple concurrent editing capability by CT
            Definition/2
        -   Use OS/2 EE Presentation Manager (PM) dialog boxes, window
            objects and dialog services callable program interfaces
            (CPIs)
        -   CT Runtime/2 supports platform functions.
    o   Offer investment protection through:
        -   Common transaction language for the DOS and OS/2 EE platforms
        -   Coexistence of CT Runtime/2 and CT/DOS Runtime workstations
            on a common token ring LAN using Financial Branch System
            Services (FBSS).
    o   Improve user productivity through:
        -   Employment of SAA CUA and the availability of extensive on-
            line help support
        -   Rapid access to product information via softcopy publications
            and a new easy-to-use installation process.
    o   Offer business solutions by including IBM supplied sample
        transaction sets for teller, platform, and CUA.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. (1) JetForm Server and Jetform Design are trademarks of
Indigo Software Limited (2) JetForm is a trademark of Indigo Software Limited


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 83. IBM PLANTWORKS:  APPLICATION AUTOMATION EDITION R2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

5713-ADM Interface Services/2

5713-ADQ Definition Services/2

5713-ADR Build Services/2

5713-ADS Execution Services/2

The IBM PLANT FLOOR SERIES* PlantWorks*:  Application Automation Edition is an
application enabler that is part of the IBM CIM Architecture.  PlantWorks
complies with the Common User Access (CUA) interface of IBM's System
Application Architecture* (SAA*).  PlantWorks uses the advanced graphical
capabilities of the OS/2* Presentation Manager* to ensure an easy-to-use
interface.  PlantWorks uses touch screens, keyboards, windows, pull-down menus,
dynamically-updated color representations of plant activities, and online
instructions for operation by the plant operator.  PlantWorks provides a set of
software tools that provide significant productivity leverage in developing
factory software applications as well as ensuring an overall fit across a
variety of industries.

The PlantWorks: Application Automation Edition consists of the Execution
Services/2, Build Services/2, Definition Services/2, and Interface Services/2
licensed programs.  PlantWorks allows the plant operator to monitor and control
plant floor equipment.  It allows manufacturing or process engineers to create
applications by graphically manipulating function block objects into logical
chains, and execute a rich set of application facilities. PlantWorks runs on
specified IBM Industrial Computers or specified IBM Personal System/2*
computers, using the IBM Operating System/2* Extended Edition or OS/2 Version
2.0 and the PLANT FLOOR SERIES Distributed Automation Edition*.

PlantWorks fits within the IBM CIM Architecture as an initial implementation of
a application enabler and build time concepts as described in the IBM CIM
Architecture.  PlantWorks takes full advantage of the facilities and functions
of the Distributed Automation Edition, a systems enabler within the IBM CIM
Architecture.  PlantWorks conforms to the IBM Systems Application Architecture
(SAA) and to Common User Access (CUA) standards.  PlantWorks enables the
integration with other IBM CIM Advantage products such as COPICS, MAPICS, CIM
Advantage Production Planning Series (CIMAPPS) via the facilities of
Distributed Automation Edition.  In addition, PlantWorks can interoperate with
any Distributed Automation Edition based applications within the enterprise.

PlantWorks is intended to be used by plant floor personnel or third parties in
the development of applications designed for use by manufacturing and process
industry customers.  Examples of commonly developed applications using
PlantWorks include:

    o   Cell Monitoring and Control
    o   Work-in-Process Tracking
    o   Statistical Process Control
    o   Monitoring and Reporting of critical processes
    o   Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) types of
        applications.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Business solutions are provided at a lower cost because
        application development costs are reduced.
    o   User productivity is increased by using an easy-to-use interface
        which is consistent across SAA environments and applications.
    o   Growth enablement is provided by performance enhancements,
        removal of system limitations and additional capabilities.
    o   Investment protection is realized as applications may be easily
        created, replicated, modified, and maintained over time.
    o   Systems management is provided by printer management, systems
        error detection, and reporting functions.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 84. IBM X25NET CONCENTRATOR RELEASE 2 FOR IBM PS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM X25Net* Concentrator Release 2 is a new licensed program in the X25Net
family.  Like the IBM X25Net Switch and IBM X25Net Manager Release 2 programs,
it runs in an IBM PS/2* Micro Channel* system equipped with IBM Realtime
Interface Co-Processor cards.

The PS/2 equipped with the IBM X25Net Concentrator licensed program is the
entry point in the X25Net network. It is used as a peripheral node, allowing
local switching between the attached DTEs or to concentrate their traffic to
one or multiple IBM X25Net Switch nodes.

Although this is the initial release of IBM X25Net Concentrator, this release
is numbered Release 2 for consistency purpose within the X25Net product family.

The IBM X25Net Concentrator node is the entry point of the X25Net family. It
provides the functions of a concentrator for an X25Net network.  Like the IBM
X25Net Switch, the IBM X25Net Concentrator runs in a PS/2 micro channel system.
It provides the same features as the IBM X25Net Switch Release 2 except for:

    o   There is no transit function: traffic between an NCN or NSN
        X25Net node and another NCN or NSN X25Net node cannot be routed
        through an NCN node.
    o   The aggregate throughput that can be handled by an IBM X25Net
        Concentrator node is limited to 400kbps. The aggregate throughput
        is the sum of the speeds of the lines that are active
        simultaneously.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   The IBM X25Net Concentrator node (NCN) is the entry point of the
        IBM X25Net family of products.  Together with the IBM X25Net
        Switch (5756-111) and the IBM X25Net Manager (5756-110), they
        provide an X.25 network with the level of flexibility required
        by customers, able to interconnect diverse equipment (IBM/non-IBM
        terminals and hosts) according to international standardized
        interfaces as well as IBM and industry standards.
    o   IBM X25Net Concentrator node is fully integrated in the IBM
        X25Net System Management, which is offered through the IBM X25Net
        Manager
    o   Use of standard PS/2 hardware, IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor
        cards and operating systems minimizes the diversity of customer
        investments in terms of equipment, skills and education.
        IBM X25Net Concentrator can run on a DOS session of OS/2* Version
        2.0, allowing other applications to run simultaneously in the
        same PS/2, and thus optimizing the customer investment.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **Minitel is a trademark of France Telecom in certain
countries **VT100 is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation in certain
countries. **HADAX is a trademark of HADAX Electronics, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 85. IBM X25NET SWITCH LICENSED PROGRAM FOR IBM PS/2 R2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM X25Net Switch Release 2

IBM X25Net Manager Release 2

IBM announces the IBM X25Net* Switch and the IBM X25Net Manager Release 2, two
licensed programs belonging to the IBM X25Net family, running in the IBM PS/2*
Micro Channel* systems equipped with IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor cards.

With this hardware/software association, customers can build a IBM X25Net3.
with multiple IBM X25Net Switch nodes to exchange the data and one or more IBM
X25Net Manager nodes to control the network.

IBM X25Net offers ease-of-installation, ease-of-management, high-availability
and non-disruptive operations in case of recovery, growth or change.

Optionally, the IBM X25Net Manager node can be connected to a NetView* program
in an IBM host for centralized network management.

The IBM X25Net Switch and the IBM X25Net Manager Release 2 enhance IBM X25Net
Release 1.0 licensed programs, primarily in the area of high-speed adapters
support (up to 2Mbps) and number of virtual circuits support (up to 2000). They
also provide the connection to and system management of the IBM X25Net
Concentrator.

Many existing IBM products have X.25 DTE capabilities which means that they can
connect to an X.25 network to communicate with other machines attached to the
network.  The IBM X25Net adds a new dimension to IBM's networking capabilities.
The IBM X25Net products provides performant, cost effective X.25 networking
which complements what IBM has already announced in SNA and/or X.25 and
heterogeneous environments (NPSI, XI, CSFI, PNA):

    o   NPSI (NCP Packet Switching Interface) is a licensed program that
        runs in an IBM 37XX Communication Controller and provides an X.25
        DTE interface.  NPSI, in conjunction with NCP, provides an SNA
        host with connectivity to an X.25 network and access to SNA and
        non-SNA users over that X.25 network. The X.25 network may be
        based on usage of the IBM X25Net products.
    o   XI (X.25 SNA Interconnection) is a licensed program that runs in
        an IBM 37XX Communication Controller and provides an X.25 DCE
        interface. XI provides for the attachment of X.25 DTEs and, when
        installed in multiple nodes along with NCP, routes X.25 traffic
        using the facilities of the SNA backbone network. SNA host access
        can be provided by using NPSI in conjunction with XI.
    o   PNA (Programmable Network Access) is a licensed program that
        runs in a PS/2 which provides a platform for enhanced
        connectivity and concentration of multiple protocols and data
        streams into an SNA or X.25 network. The X.25 network may be
        provided by the IBM X25Net or XI products.
    o   CSFI (Communication Subsystem For Interconnection) is a licensed
        program that runs in an SNA host and allows bridging between non-
        SNA terminals/applications and SNA applications/terminals.  NPSI
        is used for connectivity to an X.25 network which may be provided
        by the IBM X25Net or XI products.
    o   IBM X25Net Switch and IBM X25Net Manager are 2 licensed programs
        that run on PS/2 micro-channel platform.
        -   The IBM X25Net Switch nodes can be configured into a private
            packet switched data network supporting advanced networking
            functions.
        -   The IBM X25Net Manager is an application supporting network
            configuration and management.
        -   The IBM X25Net Switch node supports the attachment of X.25
            Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and through integrated PADs the
            attachment of non X.25 DTEs (3X PAD for start-stop mode DTEs
            and SNA PADs for SNA/SDLC and SNA/QLLC DTEs).
        -   It can also connect to private and public Packet Switched
            Data Networks (PSDN) as a DTE.
        -   These products are designed to satisfy customer requirements
            in terms of ease of installation, ease of management and non-
            disruptive operation for recovery, growth and change.
        -   They are complemented by the IBM X25Net Concentrator family.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   The IBM X25Net Switch and IBM X25Net Manager provide an X.25
        network with the level of flexibility required by customers,
        able to interconnect diverse equipment (IBM/non-IBM terminals and
        hosts) according to international standardized interfaces, as
        well as IBM and industry standards.
        -   X25Net Release 2 supports new high speed adapters and more
            virtual circuits per node.
        -   Comprehensive network management in one or multiple specific
            nodes increases network control and security. Optionally, an
            IBM X25Net Manager node can be connected to NetView in an
            IBM host.
        -   IBM X25Net Manager Release 2 fully integrates the IBM X25Net
            Concentrator node, simultaneously announced today, in IBM
            X25Net System Management.
    o   Non disruptive node addition/deletion allows easy network growth
        and change in terms of traffic, terminal attachment and host
        application usage sharing.
    o   Adaptive routing and automatic traffic balancing capabilities
        increase network performance without any operator intervention.
    o   Use of standard PS/2 hardware, IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor
        cards and Operating Systems minimizes the diversity of customer
        investments in terms of equipment, skills and education.  IBM
        X25Net Switch Release 2 can run on a DOS session of OS/2(R)
        Version 2.0, allowing other applications to run simultaneously
        in the same PS/2, and thus optimizing the customer investment.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **Minitel is a trademark of France Telecom **VT100 is a
trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation **Trademark of HADAX Electronics,
Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 86. IBM EDUCATION LAN AND TOOLS V1.10 (EDLAN) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Education LAN and Tools V1.10 is an education network package offering,
which consists of network software, productivity tools, and related
publications for each item.  The network software includes IBM Classroom LAN
Administration System V1.40 and NetWare (1) from IBM V2.2.  The productivity
tools are comprised of IBM LinkWay* V2.01, Microsoft(2) Works V2.0A, LANSchool
(3) V3.01, Excelsior (4) grade2 V1.0, Excelsior QUIZ V2.5, and Express
Publisher (5) V2.0.

IBM Classroom LAN Administration System V1.40 is an education network product
that combines software and documentation to help manage courseware and other
applications in a environment.  It makes use of the NetWare from IBM LAN
operating system and the IBM DOS operating system.

The productivity tools found in Microsoft Works consist of a word processor
with spellchecking, spreadsheet with graphics, data base with reporting
capabilities and communication.  IBM LinkWay V2.01 is an easy to use,
teacher/student productivity tool that enables the user to organize, store, and
retrieve text, pictures, graphic (video) images, and sound (audio) without a
programming background.  LANSchool is an instructional tool that allows the
teacher to "broadcast" computer screens to the student workstations connected
to the network and to project an on-screen pointer for easy instruction.
Excelsior grade2 is a teacher's gradebook offering a student data base, grade
data management, test scoring, and report generating.  Excelsior QUIZ allows
the design and customization of tests using a data base of test items created
by the teacher to develop student tests and quizzes.  QUIZ can provide a direct
link with the Microsoft Works word processor for creating test items.  Express
Publisher is a page design program that allows the combination of graphics and
text to produce newsletters, reports, flyers, or presentation graphics.  It can
import pictures and text from other graphics and word processors.

IBM Education LAN and Tools V1.10 is a network package offering.  The product
is easily installed using a streaming tape which contains all the network
software and teacher tools provided in the package.

For a complete description of the new version of IBM Classroom LAN
Administration System V1.40 contained in the EdLAN package.

EdLAN can be used in a local area network setting at any level; elementary,
middle, high school, vocational school or college.  It can be used to manage
courseware delivery to students or to administer software used by teachers,
administrative staff, and students.  The productivity tools enhance and
increase teacher efficiency in using networks in instructional settings.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Easy installability using a streaming tape provides the customer
        with immediate access to a newly installed, comprehensive network,
        consisting of applications and productivity tools
    o   System management through the use of IBM Classroom LAN
        Administration System V1.40 reduces complexity and improves
        productivity for courseware and other applications management
    o   Comprehensive productivity tools which consist of: gradebook,
        test generator, spreadsheet, desk top publishing capabilities,
        word processor, database, and workstation display controller
    o   IBM LinkWay V2.01 with enhancements and increased function
        enables the teacher/student to design and create text, pictures
        and graphics.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. (1) Registered trademark of Novell, INC. (2) Registered
trademark of Microsoft, Inc. (3) Trademark of Lan Fan Technologies, Inc. (4)
Registered trademark of Excelsior Software, Inc. (5) Trademark of Power Up
Software Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 87. OS/2 2.0 AND YOU/DOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2 2.0 And You/DOS course, announced as a program offering from Skill
Dynamics -- an IBM Company, is computer-based and offers students the
flexibility to study material at the time and place most convenient to them.
This delivery method provides an attractive and economical alternative for some
students, when off-site classroom training is not feasible.

The course features:

    o    Convenient delivery
    o    Built-in learning questions
    o    Attractive visual format
    o    Simulated OS/2 2.0 exercises

It operates under DOS and can be taken before the user has installed OS/2 2.0.

This course is complementary to classroom education and is intended to
supplement and serve as a prerequisite to other IBM courses that deal with OS/2
2.0 products.  The course provides essential technical background material for
students implementing or considering the implementation of a OS/2 2.0. The
computer-based training delivery method allows the student to complete
education "in-house" where other professionals, who have a detailed knowledge
of OS/2 2.0 are available for help and consultation. Tuition, airfares,
housing, meals and other expenses typically incurred when sending one or more
students to off-site class are avoided. The maximum benefits of this
computer-based training course can be realized by studying the on-line
tutorial, and optionally reinforcing that material through the provided quizzes
and summaries. OS/2 2.0 And You/DOS features high-resolution graphics used as a
teaching tool in the tutorial.  Once the course is completed, it can serve as a
refresher and a source of reference.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Covers the basics of using OS/2 2.0
    o   Students learn at their own pace
    o   Training available at the workstation
    o   Runs under DOS; allows training prior to OS/2 installation
    o   Built-in self-evaluation questions provide immediate feedback
    o   Practice exercises simulate OS/2 2.0 to build confidence
    o   "Fast path" available to save time
    o   Learning paths available for three different student backgrounds,
    o   DOS experience, OS/2 1.3 experience, and host-connected terminal
        experience
    o   On-line glossary
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 88. IBM AIX PS/2 OPERATING SYSTEM V1.3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

53G0218 AIX PS/2 Operating System Version 1.3 (Diskette)

53G0219 AIX PS/2 Operating System Version 1.3 (Tape)

52G9954 AIX PS/2 Operating System Version 1.3 (Diskette)

52G9965 AIX PS/2 Operating System Version 1.3 (Tape)

52G9945 AIX PS/2 Application Development Toolkit Version 1.3

52G9946 AIX PS/2 Text Formatting System Version 1.3

52G9947 AIX PS/2 DOS Merge Version 1.3

52G9953 AIX PS/2 INmail/INed/INnet/INftp Version 1.3

52G9948 AIX PS/2 Network File System Version 1.3

52G9949 AIX PS/2 TCP/IP Version 1.3

52G9950 AIX PS/2 X.25 Version 1.3

52G9952 AIX PS/2 X-Windows Version 1.3

52G9951 AIXwindows Environment for PS/2 Version 1.3

52G9955 AIX PS/2 X-Windows Version 1.3

IBM reaffirms its commitment to open systems by announcing Advanced Interactive
Executive (AIX)* PS/2* Version 1.3, its entry level member of the AIX family.

AIX PS/2 Operating System Version 1.3 and its associated Licensed Program
Products (LPPs) provide full hardware support and exploitation for all models
of IBM PS/2 system units based on the 32-bit INTEL** 386sx-16MHz up through the
INTEL 486DX2-66MHz, utilizing both IBM Microchannel or IBM AT-Bus
architectures.  AIX PS/2 Operating System Version 1.3 will offer support for
selected OEM hardware configurations, certifying them on a per bid basis.

Support is offered for numerous new options, adapters, hardfiles and displays
listed in the Growth Enablement Section.

Support is also provided for the IBM GEARBOX* Model 800 486 Industrial
Computer.

Performance tuning in AIX PS/2 Operating System Version 1.3 offers increased
throughput for input/output.

The windowing and Graphical User Interface (GUI) areas have been improved with
the X Window System V11 R5** and OSF/Motif 1.1.3**

AIX PS/2 Operating System Version 1.3 provides interoperability with other
versions of AIX, UNIX* and other IBM and non-IBM Operating Systems through AIX
PS/2 Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Version 1.3 and AIX PS/2
Network File System Version 1.3.

Also provided are enhanced installation, backup and update procedures aptly
named the EZ-UTILITIES which are targeted specifically for IBM Business
Partners, and large installations to simplify operating system installation and
maintenance. Refer to the Systems Management Section for more details on the
EZ-UTILITIES.

AIX PS/2 Operating System Version 1.3 and AIX PS/2 Operating System Extensions
Version 1.3 are again offered on Internal Tape Backup Unit (ITBU)
mini-cartridge tape, to ease installation.

AIX PS/2 Operating System Version 1.3 provides full POSIX IEEE 1003.1-1988
standard compliance as specified in Section 2.1.2.2 of the IEEE standard.

The programs announced today replace Version 1.2.1 of the AIX PS/2 Operating
System and Version 1.2.1 of the Extensions and selected Related Licensed
Program Products.  Upgrades from AIX PS/2 Operating System Version 1.2.1,
Version 1.2, Version 1.1 and Related Licensed Program Products Version 1.2.1,
Version 1.2, Version 1.1 are offered to encourage migration.

NOTE: Transparent Computing Facility (TCF) is NOT supported in AIX PS/2
Operating System Version 1.3 NOTE: Usability Services Version 1.1.1 is NOT
supported in AIX PS/2 Operating System Version 1.3

AIX PS/2 Operating System Version 1.3 offers an entry level UNIX product
targeted for the price-performance conscious INTEL processor based system
market. The enhanced functions and quality improvements make AIX PS/2 Operating
System Version 1.3 very competitive in the UNIX-on-INTEL market.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides full PS/2 Hardware exploitation for 386, 486 and SLC
        processors
    o   Offers limited support for selected IBM compatible systems
    o   Improves windowing and Graphical User Interface capabilities
        through X Windows V11R5 and Motif 1.1.3
    o   Provides DOS 5.0 support under DOS Merge
    o   Improves performance
    o   Connects easily to IBM and non-IBM networks
    o   Simplifies installation and system management
    o   Adds Korn Shell support
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Intel is a Trademark of Intel Corporation ** X Window
System is a Trademark of MIT ** OSF/Motif is a Trademark of Open Software
Foundation, Inc ** UNIX is a Registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories,
Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 89. AIX PS/2 DISTRIBUTED SERVICES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM is expanding the AIX offerings with the announcement of additional AIX/PS2
connectivity programs.  AIX PS/2 Distributed Services supports the sharing of
data and devices with other AIX systems.  AIX PS/2 Network File System (NFS)*
supports file and resource sharing among IBM AIX systems and other systems that
support NFS 3.2 protocol.

AIX PS/2 DOS Server permits users of IBM Personal Computer(s) or IBM Personal
System/2 (s) running DOS Version 3.3 to access and utilize AIX storage, the AIX
file system, printers, and to emulate asynchronous terminals, and to
participate as an intelligent workstation on an AIX host system. *NFS is a
trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

IBM is offering AIX PS/2 Distributed Services, AIX PS/2 Network File System,
and AIX PS/2 DOS Server to enable the Personal System/2 Model 80 or Model 70
workstation to share resources with other systems.

These programs operate independently or can be used in combination.

IBM AIX PS/2 Distributed Services should be marketed to customers who wish to
share files and resources across large or small networks of AIX PS/2 systems or
AIX PS/2 and AIX/RT systems.  This program addresses requirements for a variety
of network system configurations, including those where decentralized
administration and/or security are important.

    1.  Utilize the IBM AIX PS/2 system(s) as a DOS file server or DOS
        print server
    2.  Utilize the IBM AIX PS/2 system as a host for DOS-based systems
        (PCs or PS/2s) functioning as intelligent workstations and/or
        emulating asynchronous terminals.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   AIX PS/2 Distributed Services
        -   Shared files, data, and print access among AIX systems across
            Ethernet* or IBM Token-Ring local area network (LAN)
            *Ethernet is a trademark of the Xerox Corporation
        -   AIX systems and terminals are locally administered and may be
            configured in a variety of system images including single
            system image

IBM AIX PS/2 Distributed Services provides access to data, and devices among
AIX systems running Distributed Services.  These systems, a Personal System/2
Model 80 or a IBM RT PC running Distributed Services, are connected via an
Ethernet or an IBM Token-Ring  local area network (LAN).  The run time physical
location of data and printers is transparent to both application programs and
end users.  Users, who log on to a participating AIX system, gain access to the
resources of other participating AIX systems just as easily as the system they
are logged on to.  Memory management techniques are employed by AIX PS/2
Distributed Services in both local and remote AIX systems to help improve
performance.

FLEXIBLE SYSTEM IMAGE ACROSS AIX SYSTEMS

    o   AIX PS/2 Distributed Services supports both single system image
        and other flexible system images (such as code server or file
        server) based upon customer's resource sharing needs.  AIX PS/2
        Distributed Services also includes capabilities that can help an
        administrator to manage the operation of a network of AIX systems
        running Distributed Services programs.

TRANSPARENT FILE AND DATA ACCESS

    o   IBM AIX PS/2 Distributed Services is designed to provide end-
        users or application programs location transparent access to
        programs and data files stored on other IBM AIX systems on the
        network.  This program provides the user access to a tree
        structured file hierarchy as provided by the AIX operating system.
        This file hierarchy can be composed of files and directories of
        files that can reside locally or across many different
        participating networked AIX systems.  The actual location of the
        file components is transparent to the user or application.  (See
        "Customer Responsibilities")
    o   The file and record locking capability of the IBM AIX PS/2
        Distributed Services is used to help preserve data integrity
        among the various AIX systems comprising the AIX network.  Within
        this network of AIX systems running Distributed Services,
        multiple users can operate with multiple files concurrently
        without loss of data integrity as a result of attempting to
        simultaneously access and update the same information.  This
        protection assistance is extended to both local and remote
        files in the same manner.

REMOTE PRINTER ACCESS AND BATCH FILE SERVER FACILITY

    o   The print and batch server capabilities enable AIX PS/2 systems
        running the AIX PS/2 Distributed Services program to
        transparently share print queues and batch job queues among other
        AIX systems running AIX Distributed Services.  Using this
        facility, applications or end-users can transparently share print
        queues and batch job queues among systems.

PROGRAM (CODE) SERVER

    o   With the program server features, application programs can be
        installed at a server system and accessed at load time by client
        systems connected to the server.  Client systems need only
        install the Distributed Services program, AIX PS/2 Transmission
        Control Protocol/Internet Protocol, and a subset of AIX to access
        programs on the server.  Distributed Services also includes a
        number of functions designed to help an administrator to manage
        the operation of a network of AIX systems running Distributed
        Services licensed programs.

SUPPORTS REMOTE PROCESSING

    o   The combination of the location transparency functions of
        Distributed Services and the remote commands (remsh, rexec, on,
        etc) of AIX PS/2 Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
        can provide users and applications with enhanced capabilities for
        remote processing with other AIX systems running Distributed
        Services programs.

AIX PS/2 Distributed Services uses the Internet Protocol (IP) component of the
AIX PS/2 Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) licensed
program as a transport mechanism over IBM Token-Ring or Ethernet local area
networks (LANs).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 90. NETWARE NETWORK COMPUTING PRODUCTS FROM IBM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NetWare SFT III V3.11 - the high availability mirrored server product is
available from IBM Branch Offices on a controlled-availability basis. Each
potential customer will be required to complete a questionnaire, qualify, and
agree to the conditions of the controlled release prior to receiving the
product. See ordering information section for details.

HIGHLIGHTS NetWare SFT III V3.11 from IBM - Controlled Release:

    o   Allows two network servers to be mirrored using a high-speed
        Mirrored Server Link (MSL) connection. (MSL adapters are
        available from several vendors)
    o   Supports DOS and Operating System/2* (OS/2*) Workstations.
    o   If one server goes down, the second server automatically and
        transparently takes over with no loss of data or service to the
        client
    o   Protects against single server hardware failures, including
        failures in RAM, disk, and LAN adapter components
    o   Online Maintenance achieved by taking one server down at a time
    o   Disaster recovery enhanced by allowing placement of servers in
        different physical locations
    o   Hardware certified for NetWare V3.11 use by Novell is supported.
    o   NetWare V3.11 certified NLMs that do not interface directly with
        hardware can run mirrored, many with no modification
    o   Optional dual processor support
        -   while one processor runs all hardware related I/O and
            mirroring synchronization the other processor performs file
            service and runs other mirrored server applications
    o   Partial NetWare V3.11 function implementation
        -   reason for distribution in controlled release manner
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell,
Incorporated. ** Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Computer, Incorporated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 91. NETWARE NETWORK COMPUTING PRODUCTS FROM IBM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NetWare** from IBM now includes network management products which enhance and
expand the functions of Novell Netware product line from IBM.  NetWare NetWork
Computing Products from IBM will run on the same personal computers and IBM
Personal System/2* (PS/2*) systems as Novell NetWare products.  The specified
operating environment is contained in the program documentation.

Three products are added to the NetWare from IBM product line:

    1.  NetWare Services Manager for OS/2
    2.  NetWare Services Manager for Windows
    3.  NetWare Management Agents

The NetWare Services Manager is an integrated network management platform that
enables network supervisors to manage multivendor networks easily and
efficiently.  The NetWare Services Manager automates resource management,
reduces downtime and maximizes network performance.  It automatically
identifies all devices on the network, displays them in a graphical map,
monitors the entire network and notifies the network supervisor when problems
occur, retaining this information in a centralized database.

The NetWare Services Manager incorporates two sets of software: the console
system and the management agents.  The console system operates on a workstation
and the management agents reside on NetWare servers on the network, collecting
the data which is accessed and displayed by the console. One management agent
is included with the NetWare Services Manager.

The NetWare Management Agents are available singly or in packages of 20, 100,
and 500. (Allow up to 10 weeks after receipt of order for delivery of packages
of 100 or 500.)

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   NetWare Services Manager is available for OS/2* and for Microsoft
        Windows.
        -   Provides graphical view of the NetWare server and its
            resources.
        -   Displays critical system indicators and current node status.
            Alerts and events are stored for trend analysis and reports.
        -   Anticipates potential server problems through the use of user
            adjustable utilization ranges.
    o   NetWare Management Agents run on any NetWare 3.11 server.  They
        act as a universal interface operating between the NetWare
        Services Manager and the managed resources of the NetWare server.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell,
Incorporated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 92. NETWARE NETWORK COMPUTING PRODUCTS FROM IBM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The NetWare from IBM Product Line is expanded to include dial-out asynchronous
communication support, enhanced printing capability between NetWare** and a
UNIX** client, a new entry user configuration level for NetWare for Macintosh**
from IBM, and the LAN Requestors for OS/2* V2.0 and DOS/Windows**.  The special
upgrade to NetWare from IBM V4.0 has been expanded to include V3.11 upgrades.

NetWare upgrades now include upgrade from non-NetWare LAN products.  Also,
several of the NetWare products already offered by IBM are being updated to a
higher function and fix level.

HIGHLIGHTS The following additional NetWare functions are available from IBM:

    o   Dial-out NetWare Asynchronous Communications support
    o   NetWare Requesters for OS/2 2.0 and Windows V1.1
    o   UNIX client support
    o   A new entry level version of NetWare for Macintosh
    o   Non-NetWare product Migration to NetWare

Several of the NetWare products already offered by IBM are being updated to a
higher function and fix level:

    o   NetWare Lite from IBM V1.0 to V1.1
    o   3270 LAN Workstation for Windows from IBM V1.0 to V1.1
    o   3270 LAN Workstation for DOS from IBM V2.0 to V2.02
    o   NetWare for Macintosh from IBM V3.01 to V3.011

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   NetWare for SAA** from IBM V1.2 now available in a 128 session
        version
    o   Upgrades to NetWare from IBM V2.2 and V3.11 from selected non-
        NetWare servers
    o   Special upgrade to NetWare from IBM V4.0 expanded to include
        V3.11 upgrades
    o   A five user configuration of NetWare for Macintosh from IBM
        V3.011 is now available, and the 20, 100, and 200 users versions
        are upgraded to the V3.011 function level
    o   NetWare Workstation Kits for OS/2 and DOS/Windows from IBM
        provide users with enhancements and the most up to date NetWare
        workstation software to keep then current with the latest
        releases of OS/2, DOS, and Windows
    o   NetWare Lite from IBM V1.1 includes reliability and
        performance improvements as well as enhancements to allow
        concurrent operation with Windows 3.x, more DOS application
        memory, and several new commands
    o   3270 LAN Workstation for DOS V2.02 adds HLLAPI and additional
        code page support, support for the IBM 122-key keyboard, password
        encryption and ASCII printer control character translation
        capability
    o   3270 LAN Workstation for Windows from IBM V1.1 adds support for
        Microsoft Windows 3.1, automated installation, font resizing
        (host data scaled to fit in a window) and Windows ANSI table
        support, (allowing special characters used by foreign languages
        to be fully supported in both display and printing modes)
    o   NetWare Asynchronous Communication Services from IBM V3.0 enables
        NetWare V3.11 users to access and share communications resources
        (modems, asynchronous hosts, X.25 network services), along with
        providing dial-up remote access from the LAN
    o   NetWare FLeX/IP from IBM V1.2 facilitates the cost effective
        sharing of printers across NetWare and UNIX environments
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** NetWare is a trademark of Novell, Incorporated. **
UNIX is a trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Incorporated. ** Windows is a
trademark of Microsoft Corporation. ** EASEL is a registered trademark of Easel
Corporation. ** Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 93. NETWARE NETWORK COMPUTING PRODUCTS FROM IBM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM begins a product distribution, licensing, and support relationship with
Novell, Inc. consistent with IBM's interoperability strategy.  Under the terms
of this relationship, IBM will market, service, and support Novell's network
computing software, which includes the NetWare V3.11 (NetWare from IBM V3.11)
product line for enterprise-wide computing, and NetWare V2.2 (NetWare from IBM
V2.2) products used by small business and workgroup computing customers. (1)
NetWare for SAA is a Novell-named product and not IBM SAA certified.

IBM recommends OS/2 LAN Server and NetWare from IBM equally. Let the individual
situation dictate which choice is best for the customer. NetWare from IBM and
the OS/2 LAN Server are marketed by IBM; both are compatible with IBM's
long-term direction to distributed systems.

In general, recommend the OS/2 LAN Server when

    o   The IBM OS/2 LAN Server is already installed
    o   IBM OS/2 LAN Server unique function is required. Examples of LAN
        Server unique function are:
        -   Location-independent resource naming (aliases). To simplify
            the accessing of network resources
        -   Automatic creation of Network Application menus for DOS and
            OS/2 client users.
        -   Automatic server-to-server and server-to-client file
            replication
    o   Server software price is a top priority
    o   A general-purpose programming environment is required in the
        Server machine
    o   OS/2 applications are required to run in the server machine.
        Examples of such applications are:
        -   The IBM LAN Network Manager
        -   The Remote Data Services Server function of the OS/2 Extended
            Edition Database Manager
        -   The Gateway function of the OS/2 Extended Edition
            Communications Manager

In general, recommend the NetWare from IBM servers when:

    o   NetWare is already installed
    o   NetWare unique function is required. Examples of NetWare unique
        function are
        -   Fault tolerance
        -   Arcnet support
        -   Usage accounting
    o   OEM client and/or server hardware is required
    o   Access to server resources from Macintosh or Network File System
        (NFS) clients is required
    o   NetWare-certified applications are required

If high performance is a major consideration for the customer, the performance
differentiation between the products, if any, should be evaluated taking
account of the customer's intended application mix and workload.  In some
environments, NetWare from IBM may outperform the IBM OS/2 LAN Server; in other
environments, the IBM OS/2 LAN Server may outperform NetWare from IBM.

Even if high performance is a major consideration for the customer, the
performance differentiation between the products may not be significant enough
for performance alone to be the deciding factor in selecting a server platform.
All of the customer requirements should be evaluated in arriving at a product
recommendation.

IBM OS/2 EXTENDED EDITION COMMUNICATIONS GATEWAY VS. NETWARE for SAA From IBM
In general recommend the OS/2 Extended Edition Communications Manager when:

    o   Server functions are provided by the OS/2 LAN Server.
    o   Support is required for OS/2 clients (e.g. APPC, LUA, 3270 or
        5250 Emulation).
    o   Gateway function is required to co-reside in the same machine as
        the other IBM products such as the LAN Network Manager.
    o   APPN Networking support is required.
    o   OS/2 clients communicate with a host using Token-Ring
        communication via 3174 or 3745 gateways, or via coax.
    o   The IBM PC 3270 product is already installed on DOS clients that
        communicate via the gateway.
    o   More than 64 LUs must be supported by a single gateway.
    o   AS/400 Ethernet, SDLC, or X.25 connectivity is required
    o   X.25 connectivity is required
    o   Communication function is not required to co-reside in the same
        machine as the NetWare server.

In general, recommend NetWare for SAA from IBM when:

    o   OEM client and/or gateway hardware support is required.
    o   There is a requirement for tight affinity between the NetWare
        server and the communications function.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   NetWare from IBM joins the OS/2 LAN Server as an IBM marketed
        product
    o   IBM technical support and service for NetWare from IBM
    o   Support for OS/2 LAN Server/NetWare client coexistence
    o   Statement of Direction for future products


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 94. VALISYS PS/2 LICENSED PROGRAMS V1 R4 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Valisys** Version 1 Release 4 contains enhancements that improve the
ease-of-use and utility for inspecting and analyzing thin-walled material
parts, such as sheet metal parts.  These enhancements greatly increase the
usability of Valisys for many automotive, aerospace, and consumer product
applications.

The Valisys host and Personal System/2* (PS/2*) licensed programs are a
comprehensive set of tolerance-oriented solutions for designing, manufacturing,
and inspecting discrete parts.  These programs are included in the Computer
Integrated Manufacturing (CIM) Engineering and Plant Floor Series* of the IBM
CIM Advantage* family of programs.  Valisys programs can help improve product
quality while assisting in decreasing, significantly, manufacturing and
engineering costs by linking design to the plant floor.

The Valisys licensed programs address dimensioning, tolerancing, and quality
assurance in a systematic fashion.  Valisys: Design Verification, Valisys:
Tolerance Analysis, and Valisys:  Quality Engineering are integrated with CATIA
and are included in the Valisys: Quality Intelligence Edition of the IBM
Computer Integrated Manufacturing Engineering Series.  Valisys: Inspection and
Valisys: Process Control are included in the Valisys: Quality and Inspection
Edition of the IBM Plant Floor Series.  Valisys licensed programs are also
available on the IBM RISC System/6000 family, providing additional
configuration flexibility to the user.

HIGHLIGHTS Valisys Version 1 Release 4:

    o   Improves, greatly, the utility and ease-of-use of Valisys for
        sheet metal and other thin parts
    o   Provides new edge features which eliminate the need to create
        additional CATIA geometry to model the thickness of thin-walled
        parts before applying Valisys techniques
    o   Supports thin-walled part inspection by measuring, automatically,
        the top surface of the part; and offsetting the inspection path
        to accommodate warpage

Valisys: Quality Engineering and Valisys: Inspection:

    o   Establish a bridge between engineering, manufacturing, and
        quality assurance.

PS/2 Programs:

    o   Provide compatibility with programs on the RISC System/6000*
        platform, enabling configuration flexibility and protecting your
        investment
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** CATIA is a registered trademark of Dassault Systemes.
** Valisys and Softgauges are registered trademarks of Valisys Corporation. 1.
Registered trademark of Valisys Corporation. 2.  Registered trademark of
Dassault Systemes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 95. IBM AIX PS/2 WORK STATION HOST INTERFACE PROGRAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The AIX PS/2 Connectivity Programs consist of three programs that expand the
AIX offerings.  The three programs are AIX PS/2 Work Station Host Interface
Program, AIX Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (IP), and AIX PS/2
INmail/INed/INnet/FTP.  These licensed programs support data and/or program
exchange and sharing in Personal System/2 workstation peer-to-peer and Personal
System/2 workstation-to-host environments.  Some of the popular communication
protocols used to perform the data/program exchange and sharing include
Ethernet* and IBM Token-Ring*. *  Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox
Inc.  Token-Ring is a trademark of the IBM Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Support for IBM PS/2 Model P70
    o   Support for IBM Industrial Computer 7561/7562
    o   AIX PS/2 Work Station Host Interface Program:
        -   3278/79 Terminal Emulation
        -   File Transfer
        -   Application Programming Interface
*  UNIX is a registered trademark of AT and T in the U.S.A. and other
countries.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 96. AIX PS/2 PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES/COMPILERS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

AIX PS/2 VS FORTRAN is a high performance optimizing compiler that produces
object code for execution on the Personal System/2 (PS/2) Model 80 under the
AIX PS/2 Operating System.  It accepts source code in the FORTRAN language as
defined by S/370 VS FORTRAN V2 R2 with minor restrictions, the ANSI-77 standard
for FORTRAN and VAX* FORTRAN V3 with minor restrictions.  AIX PS/2 VS FORTRAN
is source compatible with IBM AIX/RT VS FORTRAN.  It offers new compiler
functions which allow for the migration of application program source code to
AIX PS/2 VS FORTRAN from VS FORTRAN, FORTRAN 77, and VAX FORTRAN.

AIX PS/2 VS PASCAL is a high performance optimizing compiler that produces
object code for execution on the IBM PS/2 Model 80 under the AIX PS/2 Operating
System.  It accepts source code in the PASCAL language as defined by S/370 VS
PASCAL V1 R1 with minor restrictions, and the ANSI-83 standard for PASCAL.  AIX
PS/2 VS PASCAL is source compatible with IBM AIX/RT VS PASCAL.  These new
compiler functions allow for the migration of application program source code
to IBM AIX PS/2 VS PASCAL from S/370 VS PASCAL.

AIX PS/2 C Language is a high performance optimizing compiler that produces
object code for execution on the IBM PS/2 Model 80 under the AIX PS/2 Operating
System.  It is compatible with IBM RT PC C Compiler source code.

AIX PS/2 VS FORTRAN and the AIX PS/2 C Language compilers willcompile programs
that are System Application Architecture (SAA) compliant. * VAX is a trademark
of Digital Equipment Corporation. * UNIX is a registered trademark of AT and T.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Support for the PS/2 Model P70
    o   Support for IBM Industrial Computer 7561/7562
    o   IBM AIX PS/2 VS FORTRAN
        -   IBM S/370 VS FORTRAN V2.2 and IBM AIX/RT FORTRAN source
            language compatibility
        -   ANSI FORTRAN 77 standard
        -   VAX FORTRAN V3 source language compatibility
        -   Optimized object code
        -   Fast compile
        -   AIX system call interface library
        -   Supports PASCAL and C interfacing
        -   Supports dbx for symbolic debugging
        -   Intel 80387* floating point and floating point emulation
            support
        * Intel 80387 is a trademark of Intel Corporation.
    o   IBM AIX PS/2 VS PASCAL:
        -   S/370 VS PASCAL V1 R1 and IBM RT PC VS PASCAL source
            language compatibility
        -   ANSI/IEEE-83 standard
        -   Optimized object code
        -   Fast compile
        -   AIX system call interface library
        -   Supports FORTRAN and C interfacing
        -   Supports dbx for symbolic debugging
        -   Intel 80387 Floating point and floating point emulation
            support
    o   IBM AIX PS/2 C Language:
        -   Optimized object code
        -   Fast compile
        -   Supports PASCAL and FORTRAN interfacing
        -   Intel 80387 floating point and floating point emulation
            support
        -   Supports dbx for symbolic debugging
        -   IBM RT PC C Language source code compatible


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 97. IBM DOS V5.02 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM DOS Version 5.02 is an enhancement of IBM DOS Version 5.00 required for
ergonomic hardware features previously announced for IBM and compatible
systems.  It provides a set of code page fonts that comply with International
Standards Organization (ISO) standards for workplace comfort and safety.  In
addition, the battery life of portable systems is extended with support of the
new Advanced Power Management (APM) feature.  Other IBM DOS Version 5.02
usability enhancements include support of direct computer to computer data
transfer, increased mouse pointer visibility on laptop and notebook LCD
displays, Lock/Unlock/Eject command for media drive security and special needs
support, and format support for partial read only media on rewritable optical
drives that are capable of supporting such media.  The expanded service and
support for IBM compatible personal computers provided by DOS Version 5.00.1
continues to be provided by IBM DOS Version 5.02.  DOS Version 5.00.1 will
continue to be marketed for users who do not require these features.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Complies with new screen standards for workplace comfort and
        safety
    o   Extends battery life of portable systems
    o   Increases mouse pointer visibility on LCD screens
    o   Allows direct transfer of data between systems via cable
    o   New diskette software LOCK/UNLOCK and EJECT features for
        security and special needs users
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 98. IBM DOS V5 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM DOS V5 is the single tasking operating system of choice for the IBM
Personal Computer, IBM Personal System/2* (PS/2*), and IBM Personal System/55*
families and is compatible with the IBM Personal System/1* (PS/1*).  This
version of IBM PC DOS provides the capability on most systems for applications
to enjoy significantly more memory space than  many other previous versions of
IBM DOS.  It offers an enhanced menu-based user interface, improved memory
management, improved performance, and improved functions.  A new IBM DOS V5
Technical Reference is also available separately.

IBM DOS V5 Upgrade is the full IBM DOS V5 product at a significantly reduced
price.  Installation specific programs allow and aid end users with a prior
version of IBM DOS (V2.1 or higher) on their system hard disk to upgrade to IBM
DOS V5.  In addition, IBM is offering new acceptance terms for Additional
License Copies for IBM DOS V5.  Under these new terms, customers may now
acquire additional licenses for IBM DOS V5 by ordering a "Proof of Additional
License" certificate.

The new "Proof of Additional License", which is in the form of a certificate,
is the customer's authorization to make a single copy of the IBM DOS V5
program.  The certificates may be ordered in any quantity.  The customer must
have obtained an original program package for IBM DOS V5 in order to acquire
additional licenses.  The terms and conditions of the IBM Program License
Agreement supplied with the original program package apply to the Additional
License Copies, except that the additional licenses may not be transferred.
There is no machine readable code included with the new "Proof of Additional
License" package.

Customers now have a choice of acquiring additional licenses with the new Proof
of License certificate or by accepting the terms for Additional Licenses Copies
in the existing agreements (IBM Customer Agreement or End User Additional Copy
and Distributed Feature License Agreement).

IBM DOS V5 is the tenth and latest version of IBM's single tasking operating
system.  It replaces and is upwardly compatible with IBM DOS V3.30 and IBM DOS
V4.  An upgrade from prior IBM DOS versions is available at a significantly
reduced cost and will include additional licenses at further reduced cost to be
marketed and supported by IBM.

IBM DOS V5 is the single tasking operating system of choice for the IBM
Personal Computer, IBM Personal System/2, and IBM Personal System/55 families.
It is compatible with the IBM Personal System/1, however, use of IBM DOS V5 on
the Personal System/1 eliminates use of the Personal System/1 shell.  IBM's
OS/2 remains the multi-tasking operating system of choice.

IBM DOS V5 increases user productivity by providing significantly more
application space in conventional memory (0 to 640K) for those systems that can
utilize its new high memory feature.  A system that is capable of utilizing DOS
in high memory has an 80286 or greater processor and 1MB or more of memory.  In
addition, IBM DOS V5 provides improved memory management support, improved
performance, improved usability, improved installation, and increased function.
These features and the reduced cost of its upgrade provide a substantial
incentive to end users to migrate to IBM DOS V5.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   INCREASED USER PRODUCTIVITY
        -   Increases Application Space
        -   Improves Performance
        -   Improves Ease of Use in Installation and User Interface
        -   Provides New and Improved DOS Commands, Programs and Utilities
    o   INVESTMENT PROTECTION
        -   Supports Old Systems and Options
        -   Supports New Systems and Options
        -   Maintains Interfaces (Compatibility)
        -   Provides Easy Upgrade
    o   GROWTH ENABLING
        -   Utilizes More of System Memory
    o   SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
        -   IBM support
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 99. IBM NETWORKING SERVICES/DOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Networking Services/DOS Version 1.0 provides a low-memory Advanced
Program-to-Program Communication (APPC) solution for DOS and Microsoft Windows
environments.  By writing to the Common Programming Interface for
Communications (CPI-C), the Systems Application Architecture* (SAA*) interface
to APPC, Networking Services/DOS users can now utilize existing hardware and
software while developing distributed applications with APPC. DOS and Windows
workstations can also participate, as low-entry networking (LEN) nodes, in
Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) environments, as well as in SNA subarea
environments.  This product runs on DOS (real mode) and on Windows (standard or
enhanced mode).

HIGHLIGHTS With Networking Services/DOS, customers can:

    o   Incorporate their existing DOS and Windows workstations into a
        true SNA APPN distributed computing environment, thus protecting
        their investment in workstations, software, memory, and
        communications adapter cards
    o   Effectively develop and run distributed applications for the DOS
        environment, since Networking Services/DOS can run in as little
        as 90KB of conventional memory, plus 50 to 60KB of memory
        required when communications applications are run
    o   Use CPI-C to provide a consistent programming interface for
        distributed applications throughout their networks and aid
        portability of applications and programming skills
    o   Use the dynamic services of an APPN network node, as well as
        communicate with existing SNA subarea networks.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 100. IBM TCP/IP V2.1 FOR DOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF FEBRUARY 18, 1994.)

IBM TCP/IP Version 2.1 for DOS provides the users of DOS and Microsoft**
Windows** the capability to participate in a multivendor network using the
TCP/IP protocol set.  TCP/IP Version 2.1 for DOS enhances the IBM family of
TCP/IP products that also includes MVS, VM, OS/2*, the AIX* family, OS/400*,
IBM 3174 Telnet, and System 88.  This announcement demonstrates IBM's increased
commitment to TCP/IP as a key networking protocol for the multivendor
environment.

On March 25, 1992, the IBM Networking Blueprint was announced to address
customers' needs to provide integrated networking solutions for client server
applications, merging of local and wide area networks, and support of
multiprotocol and multivendor application and networking environments. TCP/IP
for Version 2.1 for DOS is a primary example of implementing client server
applications.

TCP/IP Version 2.1 for DOS provides significant usability, functional and
performance enhancements.  This new release provides client/server Window's
TCP/IP applications and DOS-based TCP/IP applications.  Easy-to-use Window's
graphical interfaces are provided for mail, printing, file transfer, remote
system access, and remote file access.  TCP/IP Version 2.1 for DOS real memory
requirements have been reduced and new functions have been added such as remote
print server and printer redirection, Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
agent, NetBIOS (RFC 1001/1002), and Windows Sockets application programming
interface.

TCP/IP Version 2.1 for DOS enhances the IBM Family of TCP/IP products which
includes TCP/IP on VM, MVS, OS/2, OS/400, AIX family, and IBM 3174 TCP/IP
Telnet. These products are designed to address multivendor communication
requirements and to allow most IBM platforms access to networks involving
non-IBM systems.  IBM's TCP/IP Version 2.1 for DOS meets these requirements.
User of the past release of TCP/IP for DOS should consider upgrading to Version
2.1 which offers usability, performance and functionality advantages.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Enhances end-user productivity with easy-to-use Windows graphical
        interfaces
    o   Supports both Windows-based and DOS-based TCP/IP applications
    o   Requires small amount of real memory; runs as a protected and
        real mode program
    o   Provides industry standards such as Windows Sockets API
    o   Allows existing NetBIOS applications to be routed through a
        TCP/IP network
    o   Allows personal computers running TCP/IP Version 2.1 for DOS to
        be managed with Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of the Microsoft
Corp. ** VT220 is a Trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation ** Network File
System (NSF) is a Registered trademark of AT and T ** Novell and Netware are
Trademarks of Novell, Inc. ** Sun is a Trademark of Sun Microsystems, ** Intel
is a Registered trademark of Intel Corporation ** Etherlink is a Trademark of
3COM Corporation ** Ethercard PLUS is a Trademark of Western Digital
Corporation Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 101. IBM TCP/IP FOR DOS VERSION 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)* Version 2.0 for Disk
Operating System (DOS) is the latest updated program in the IBM TCP/IP family.
TCP/IP Version 2.0 replaces TCP for the Personal System/2* Computer. TCP/IP
Version 2.0 for DOS provides an extensive set of TCP/IP protocols to enable
users to perform file transfer, remote execution, remote data access, remote
printing, remote logon, and TCP/IP application development.

IBM provides complete IBM and multi-vendor networking solutions with TCP/IP.
This support ranges from personal computers through high-end host computers.
TCP/IP for DOS interoperates with IBM's TCP/IP products and other vendors'
TCP/IP products that provide equivalent protocol support.

IBM's networking vision is to provide customers the ability to collect, manage,
access and integrate information among departments, locations, and companies
worldwide and do it simply and easily.

IBM believes that the customer's environment will be composed of OSI, TCP/IP,
SNA, and other networks coexisting in a heterogeneous state.

IBM must support the customer's freedom of choice and flexibility required to
create a network from diverse technologies, with total interoperability and
comprehensive end-to-end management support and functions.

In today's environment, TCP/IP is a widely accepted product for supporting
multi-vendor networks.  TCP/IP Version 2.0 for DOS interoperates with IBM's
TCP/IP products for VM, MVS, OS/2, AS/400, System/88 and the AIX family and
other products that provide equivalent protocol support.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   End user productivity may be improved by using TCP/IP for DOS
        functions.
    o   TCP/IP Version 2.0 for DOS provides a beneficial solution for
        enterprises planning to connect personal computers to a network.
    o   Users can access information throughout enterprise-wide networks,
        a key enhancement for businesses targeting to realize their
        growth potential.
    o   Tools are available to assist the system administrator or the
        network administrator with the daily operations of the TCP/IP
        DOS network.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. (1) NFS is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. (2) VT
is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation (3) Microsoft Windows 3.0 is a
trademark of Microsoft Corporation (4) Ethernet is a registered trademark of
Xerox Corporation. (5) Netware is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. (6)
Trademark of Microsoft Corporation (7) Trademark of 3COM Corporation (8)
Trademark of Western Digital Corporation (9) Trademark of Microsoft Corporation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 102. IBM LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) SUPPORT PROGRAM VERSION 1.3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Local Area Network (LAN) Support Program Version 1.3 has been extended to
support the IBM Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) network through the
addition of IEEE 802.5 Network Device Interface Specification (NDIS) support.

The Installation Aid has been redesigned to provide easier NDIS adapter
configuration.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Existing DOS applications will be able to operate in IBM FDDI
        networks.
    o   Applications requiring high speed data transmissions like
        Imaging, Video, etc. will be supported.
    o   Existing networks can be expanded with adapters that support
        NDIS.
    o   Interrupt '5C'x can be shared by multiple applications.
    o   The new Installation Aid provides easier NDIS adapter
        configuration.
    o   Compatibility with OS/2 Version 1.3 and Version 2.0 LAN Server
        for IBM Token-Ring, IBM FDDI, IBM PC Network and Ethernet
        adapters.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **EtherCard PLUS is a trademark of Standard Microsystems
Corporation **EtherLink/MC is a trademark of 3Com Corporation **EtherLink II is
a trademark of 3Com Corporation **NIU is a trademark of Ungermann-Bass, Inc.
**SMC is a trademark of Standard Microsystems Corporation **U/B is a trademark
of Ungermann-Bass, Inc. **Western Digital is a trademark of Western Digital
Corporation **3Com is a trademark of 3Com Corporation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 103. PC LOCAL AREA NETWORK (PC LAN) PROGRAM  V1.3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM PC Local Area Network Program V1.3 (IBM PC LAN Program V1.3) is a
licensed program used to provide resource sharing for inter-connected
workstations on the IBM Token-Ring Network and PC Network.  It includes the
enhancements of IBM PC LAN Program V1.2 and Extended Services for the
administration of LAN server resources.  The IBM PC LAN Program V1.3 will be
supported by the newly announced OS/2 LAN Server.

IBM PC LAN Program V1.3 is the continuation of the IBM software support for the
IBM Token-Ring Network and PC Network.  IBM PC LAN Program V1.3 users will have
a choice of attaching to an IBM PC LAN Program V1.3 Server, the advanced
function of the OS/2 LAN Server or to both.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Supported by OS/2 LAN Server V1.0
    o   Extended Services including:
        -   Central resource definition and control
        -   Single systems image of multiple servers
        -   Security enhancements including User logon with optional
            password
        -   Administrator password access to the server machine from any
            workstation
        -   Central distribution of LAN operating system software and
            applications when using Remote Initial Program Load (remote
            IPL) on suitably configured workstations
        -   Ability to view logged on users
        -   Remote workstation print queue access and control
        -   Application selector menu support
    o   Optional blank form suppression at the end-of-job print
    o   Contains the Base Services function provided in the IBM PC LAN
        Program Version 1.2 including support for the the IBM 3363
        Optical Disk Drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 104. IBM LAN ASYNCHRONOUS CONNECTION SERVER VERSION 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Local Area Network (LAN) Asynchronous Connection Server Version 2.0
continues to perform the prior version functions and is enhanced for new
functions.  It will now operate with Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) protocols, (both as a Client and Server), and perform ASCII
to 3270 protocol conversion, providing Telnet connections to IBM TCP/IP hosts
to allow 3270 data stream access.  Operation with IBM LAN Support Program
Version 1.2 using NETBIOS protocols on Ethernet is also now possible.  The two
Interfaces it supports have been adapted for operation under Windows* 3.0.
Network management enhancements, allowing more efficient control of the
operation, and better problem determination features have also been added.  A
graphical-based configuration file generation utility will also be made
available. * Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Since the IBM LAN Asynchronous Connection Server Version 2.0 now operates on
Ethernet, Token-Ring, and PC Network, with NETBIOS or TCP/IP protocols, this
product should be used when connectivity to Asynchronous, ASCII functions,
through direct connection, on Ethernet, or through a modem is required.
Considering the ability to obtain TN3270 protocol conversion to an IBM TCP/IP
host, the product is uniquely positioned to provide connectivity to all of a
customer's ASCII and TCP/IP hosts.

HIGHLIGHTS IBM LAN Asynchronous Connection Server Version 2.0, (Server)
supports:

    o   Operation on Ethernet, the IBM Token-Ring Network, the broadband
        IBM PC Network, and the IBM PC Network Baseband with IBM NETBIOS
        or TCP/IP protocols.
    o   3270 protocol conversion, to IBM TCP/IP Hosts for LAN Attached
        workstations and fixed function Asynch devices.  Workstations
        can utilize the Enhanced Bios Interface, Asynchronous
        Communications Server Interface, (ACSI) or TCP/IP protocols, in
        Telnet Client mode.
    o   Access to shared modems, for LAN Attached Workstations, utilizing
        the Enhanced Bios Interface, Asynchronous Communications Server
        Interface, or TCP/IP Protocols, in Telnet Client mode.
    o   Access to non-IBM TCP/IP Unix hosts, through the Server in line
        at a time character mode for NETBIOS workstations (Running EBI,
        ACSI, emulators), or Off-Net PC or PS/2* devices.  Those
        workstations that support Kermit, can use Kermit to perform bi-
        directional file transfers.
    o   New Server management capabilities, a graphical-based
        configuration file generation utility, and a removable EBIOS
        module.
    o   Operation of the EBI, or ACSI, the SoftLogic Solutions Carousel*
        and the IBM Workstation Connectivity Memory Management
        Enhancement (WCMME) Programs to allow task switching in a DOS
        machine.
    o   Operation of the ACSI and EBI under Microsoft Windows 3.0
    o   Direct connect, leased line, and dial out, AT command set modems,
        at speeds up to 19.2 Kbs., using IBM Realtime Interface Co-
        Processor Multiport/2 (RTICM/2) adapters or two serial
        communication adapters, but not to exceed 34 lines total.
* VT100 is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation. * System/390 is a
trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. * Trademarks and
Registered Trademarks: 1.  VT100, and VT340 are trademarks of Digital Equipment
Corporation. 2.  D100, and D400 are trademarks of Data General Corporation. 3.
PST 100 is a trademark of Prime Computer Corporation. 4.  VIP is a trademark of
the Minneapolis Honeywell Corporation. 5.  Communique is a registered trademark
of Datacode Electronics Limited. 6.  PROCOMM PLUS is a registered trademark of
Datastorm Technologies Inc. 7.  ZSTEMpc is a registered trademark of KEA
Systems Limited. 8.  VsCom is a registered trademark of MH Group Inc. 9.
SmarTerm is a registered trademark of Persoft Inc. 10.  poly-Com and poly-STAR
are registered trademarks of Polygon Inc. 11. Relay Gold is a registered
trademarks of RELAY Communications Inc. 12. Softerm is a registered trademarks
of Softronics Inc. 13. Reflections is a registered trademark of Walker, Richer
and Quinn Inc. 14. Crosstalk is a registered trademark of Digital
Communications Associates   Inc. 15. PFS:  Access is a registered trademark of
Software Publishing   Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 105. NETWARE 4.01 FROM IBM AND OTHER NETWARE FROM IBM NLM'S ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

     Part
    Number   Description
    -------  ----------------------------------------
    53G6457  NetWare 4.01 from IBM 5 User CD
    53G6458  NetWare 4.01 from IBM 10 User CD
    53G6459  NetWare 4.01 from IBM 25 User CD
    53G6460  NetWare 4.01 from IBM 50 User CD
    53G6461  NetWare 4.01 from IBM 100 User CD
    53G6462  NetWare 4.01 from IBM 250 User CD
    53G6463  NetWare 4.01 from IBM 500 User CD
    53G6464  NetWare 4.01 from IBM 1000 User CD
    74G1797  NetWare for Macintosh from IBM v4.0 1000 User 3.5"
    74G1877  Netware 4.01 Documentation Set from IBM
    74G1879  NetWare for Macintosh Client from IBM v1.0 3.5"
    74G1802  NetWare for SAA Services Manager from IBM v2.0 Dual
    53G6366  NetWare Management Agent from IBM v1.5 1 Pack Dual
    53G6367  NetWare Management Agent from IBM v1.5 20 Pack Dual
    53G6368  NetWare Management Agent from IBM v1.5 100 Pack Dual
    53G6369  NetWare Management Agent from IBM v1.5 500 Pack Dual

NetWare** 4.01 from IBM, the newest version of Novell's** enterprise network
operating system, contains significant enhancements and maintenance updates to
the NetWare 4.0 product such as:

    o   Now available in 5 languages, English, French, German, Italian
        and Spanish
    o   Includes a 5 user version of NetWare for Macintosh
    o   Graphical utilities for the OS/2 Presentation Manager platform
    o   Enhancements to NetWare Directory Services
    o   Updated versions of the Virtual Loadable Modules (VLMs) for DOS
        and Windows clients

NetWare Management Agents from IBM v1.5 replace Version 1.0 and include support
for the NetWare 4.x server environment.

NetWare for SAA Services Manager from IBM v2.0 is a Windows based application
that provides extensive network management capabilities for configuring,
monitoring, and maintaining multiple NetWare for SAA servers anywhere on a
network - even over wide area links.  It replaces NetWare Communications
Services Manager.

Upgrades are now available within the NetWare SFT III product family, allowing
existing SFT III customers to obtain a higher user version at substantial
savings.

Increased demand for NetWare 3.11 and 4.0 servers has resulted in a decreased
demand for the 50 and 100 user versions of NetWare 2.2.  Due to this, the 50
and 100 user levels of NetWare v2.2 are being phased out and will be available
only while existing supplies last. Note that the 5 and 10 user versions
continue to be available, and technical support for all levels of NetWare 2.2
remains the same.

A new NetWare for Macintosh from IBM v4.0 product supports the NetWare 4.x
server environment, allowing up to 1000 Macintosh users to log onto a NetWare
4.x server with access to NetWare Directory services through bindery emulation,
and DOS file extension mapping to the Macintosh application environment.

A NetWare for Macintosh Client v1.0 provides an intuitive Macintosh based
utility for managing the user environment in both NetWare 3.11 and NetWare 4.x.

The procedure to obtain, when announced, a free upgrade to a NetWare from IBM
product is defined.

Orders for NetWare from IBM Products whose packaging contains only 5.25" media
continue to be available.  Once current stock is depleted, these products will
be available on a build to order basis.  Up to 10 weeks may be required to get
delivery of the product.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   NetWare 4.01 from IBM is available in 5 languages, English
        French, German, Italian and Spanish, and includes Macintosh
        support and several other enhancements and maintenance fixes.
    o   NetWare Management Agents from IBM v1.5 support the NetWare 4.x
        server environment and replace the previous 1.0 version
    o   NetWare for SAA Services Manager from IBM v2.0 replaces NetWare
        Communications Services Manager and adds support for the NetWare
        4.x server environment
    o   Upgrades are now available within the NetWare SFT III v3.11
        family
    o   NetWare 2.2 50 and 100 user versions are available for a limited
        time while supplies last
    o   Support for Macintosh is now available in the NetWare 4.x server
        family, and a new Macintosh based client is available enabling
        users to manage commonly used resources from any Macintosh on
        the network
    o   The procedure to obtain free upgrades to NetWare from IBM
        products is defined
    o   NetWare from IBM products packaged with only 5.25" media are
        available on a build to order basis once current inventory runs
        out
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell,
Inc. NetWare Loadable Module, NetWare Management System, NetWare for SAA, and
SFT are trademarks of Novell, Inc. Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc. Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corp.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 106. NETVIEW/PC VERSION 1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM NetView/PC Version 1.1 is being re-released to NDD, and is being
distributed through NDD channels.  IBM NetView/PC Version 1.1 is an extension
of the NetView(TM)* Communications Network Management (CNM) services to support
IBM Local Area Networks (LANs), voice networks, Computer-controlled Branch
Exchanges (CBXs) and Private Branch Exchanges (PBXs), non-SNA, and non-IBM
communication devices. *NetView is a trademark of the International Business
Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   NetView/PC is a multitasking personal computer subsystem and an
        implementation of the service point in IBM's Open Communication
        Architecture.
    o   Support of Personal System/2 (R) Models 50, 60, 70, and 80
    o   Support of the IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport/2
    o   NetView/PC Application Programming Interface/Communications
        Services (API/CS) manual (SC30-3313-01) contains both 5.25-inch
        and 3.5-inch diskettes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 107. PC NODE MANAGER VERSION 1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PC Node Manager Version 1.1 (PCNM) is an enhanced and renamed version of PC
Node Executive, which it replaces.  It is a Licenced Program offering for
network based Personal System/2(R) (PS/2(R)), IBM Personal Computer AT(R),
XT(R), or PS/55 that require data and resource distribution and administration
control from a IBM 3090, 308X, 43XX, or 9370 processor.  PC Node Manager (PCNM)
Version 1.1 is operational under the Operating System/2(R) Extended
Edition(OS/2(R)EE) or the Disk Operating System(DOS). It uses the 3270
emulation functions that are available for these systems.

PCNM provides the ability for a IBM 3090, 308X,43XX,or 9370 host processor
product, NetView(TM) Distribution Manager, to distribute and retrieve software
and data to and from workstations directly or indirectly via operation with the
LAN Server files.  PC Node Manager (PCNM) Version 1.1 requires the use of the
corequisite product, VTAM Protocol Conversion Application Release 2, or VTAM
Protocol Conversion Application Release 1 to access NetView Distribution
Manager.

PC Node Manager Version 1.1 and VTAM Protocol Conversion Application Release 2
can have all transmissions between each other in compressed and compacted form.
This reduces line utilization and transmission time. NOTE: PC Node Executive is
not available in Japan.

Customers that can use PCNM Version 1.1 should have or will require host based
NetView Distribution Manager distribution services for their network based
Personal System/2, Personal Computer AT and XT, and PS/55 processors.

Customers currently using PC Node Executive will find PC Node Manager (PCNM)
Version 1.1 an advantageous upgrade, because of improved tranmission
performance and a broader base of nodes supported by PC Node Manager Version
1.1.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   IBM PC, PS/2, and PS/55 computers that are directly attached to
        MVS/ESA(tm), MVS/XA(tm), MVS/SP, VM/XA(tm), VM/SP, or VM/SP HPO
        can use NetView DM  facilities.
    o   "In-line" compression/decompression and compaction/ decompaction
        function provided for improved data transmission performance to
        or from the host NetView Distribution Manager.
    o   Operating System/2 Extended Edition Version 1.1, Version 1.2,
        and Operating System/2 Extended Edition (J) are supported by
        PCNM.
    o   The Japanese IBM Personal System/55 is supported under Operating
        System/2 Extended Edition Version 1.1, Version 1.2, and the
        Operating System/2 Extended Edition (Japanese) Version 1.1 (OS/2
        J-EE 1.1).  The support is for English language mode only.
    o   PCNM is operational with the IBM Personal Communication/3270
        product that runs in DOS.
    o   Users can do a PCNM start (which does a load and run) and a stop
        (which also does a PCNM unload), without operator involvement.
    o   PCNM nodes can be attached to a MVS or VM processor via a DOS
        3270 emulator or the OS/2 EE Communication Manager's 3270
        emulator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 108. IBM CALLPATH COORDINATOR/2 VERSION 1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   P/N 87G7080 CallPath CallCoordinator/2 V1.1
    o   P/N 87G7081 CallPath CallCoordinator/2 V1.1 Server
    o   P/N 87G7082 CallPath CallCoordinator/2 V1.1

CallCoordinator/2* Version 1.1, an inbound/outbound call management
application, has been enhanced to provide additional features which will help
provide a greater array of solutions to customer situations and environments.

The IBM CallPath CallCoordinator/2 Version 1.1 program offering now has
connectivity to additional switching systems, provides Cross Switch Support,
offers expanded terminal emulation support, and has an array of new host
emulator functions.

Also, CallCoordinator/2 Version 1.1 has added support for the Dynamic Data
Exchange (DDE) feature if the application program is configured as a DDE
server.  Now CallCoordinator/2 can support application programs configured as
DDE clients or DDE servers.

CallCoordinator/2 V1.1 is an inbound/outbound call management application which
interfaces to IBM CallPath/2 and uses IBM CallPath SwitchServer/2* for
connection to a variety of telephone switching systems.

Compared to other call management applications, CallCoordinator/2 Version 1.1
provides a superior combination of flexibility, function, and connectivity.
Many other products support only one telephone system, or support only one
hardware platform, or operate in only one host computer environment.

To existing business applications, it enhances call management capabilities and
helps increase the productivity of call centers, help desks, and service
centers.

CallPath CallCoordinator/2 V1.1 can operate with a variety of telephone
systems, access applications on multiple IBM computer hardware platforms, and
in multiple environments.  In addition, CallCoordinator/2 Version 1.1 provides
interfaces for IBM DirectTalk* voice processing systems and other devices.
Finally, CallCoordinator/2 provides a robust set of call management functions.

Each customer situation will be unique, in terms of requirements for function,
telephone system support, application platforms and environments. Other issues,
such as solution programming requirements, solution cost, and speed of
implementation may be important.

CallPath CallCoordinator/2 V1.1 should be considered when:

    o   The customer wishes to add call management function to existing
        applications
    o   Users have or are planning to install a token-ring or Ethernet
        system of intelligent workstations capable of running OS/2.
    o   Business applications reside on OS/2 or on a computer and
        environment accessible via 3270 or 5250 terminal emulation
    o   The customer prefers a distributed, cooperative processing call
        management solution which can interface to multiple host
        computers
    o   The customer desires to implement a call management solution
        quickly or start with a pilot program and grow it over time
    o   The customer's business applications reside on IBM operating
        systems or environments not served by other CallPath products

HIGHLIGHTS CallPath CallCoordinator/2 V1.1 is enhanced to include the following
new features:

    o   Cross Switch Support - CallCoordinator/2 V1.1 will now support
        voice/data transfer between telephone switching systems that
        have intelligent networking capabilities.  The systems must have
        the ability to receive and transfer to a second switch a unique
        ANI (Automatic Number Identification) for each caller. For more
        information please call RALYCALL at [phone].
    o   Support for the AT&T 5ESS Central Office Switching System.
    o   Support for AT&T DEFINITY Generic 3i, Generic 3r, Generic 3s,
        G3V2 CallVisor ASAI (G3V1 compatibility) switch software.
    o   Support for the Northern Telecom Meridian Link 3, Release 18
        software package.
    o   Support for the ROLM 9751 Release 9006 switching system.
    o   Interface to REXX Command files when using OS/2 2.0 or above.
    o   Additional host emulator functions - CallCoordinator/2 V1.1 now
        has new GET and PUT features which allows Host Application
        Transaction programs to dynamically send and retrieve data
        to and from active cursor locations.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **AT&T is a trademark of American Telephone and Telegraph
**G2, G3i, G3r and G3s are trademarks of American Telephone and Telegraph
**Northern Telecom Meridian and Northern Telecom DMS are trademarks of Northern
Telecom **ROLM and CBX are trademarks of ROLM Company


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 109. IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK/IBM PC NETWORK INTERCONNECT PROGRAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Token-Ring Network/IBM PC Network Interconnect Program is a licensed
program for the IBM Personal Computer.  The program permits the exchange of
information between IBM Personal Computers attached to two IBM PC Networks.
This capability is in addition to the previously announced interconnection of
the IBM Token-Ring Network and the IBM PC Network and is included in all
previously shipped copies of the IBM Token-Ring / IBM PC Network Interconnect
Program.

HIGHLIGHTS

Permits the exchange of information between two IBM Personal Computers
attached to two IBM PC Networks in addition to the previously announced IBM
PC Network to IBM Token-Ring capability.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 110. IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK 16/4 TRACE AND PERFORMANCE PROGRAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Token-Ring Network 16/4 Trace and Performance Program works in
conjunction with the IBM Token-Ring Network 16/4 Trace and Performance
adapters.  This program provides a real time view of the traffic on the IBM
Token-Ring Networks operating at 4 million bits per second (bps) or 16 million
bps.  This combination of hardware and software has facilities to analyze trace
data, measure media usage and collect ring station traffic statistics.  Using
this data, the customer can get valuable information for use in debugging
application software, capacity planning and network reconfigurations.

With the evolution of the Token-Ring network as an integral part of the
customers' network, there is a critical need to provide the capability to
analyze the traffic on the ring as well as to measure the media bandwidth
utilization.  The IBM Token-Ring Network 16/4 Trace and Performance adapters
and IBM Token-Ring Network 16/4 Trace and Performance Program provide this
capability.

Using this software in conjunction with the IBM Token-Ring Network 16/4 Trace
and Performance adapters, the customer can develop and debug applications
written to interface to the ring through IEEE 802.2, SNA (LU 2.0 and LU
6.2(APPC)), SMB (as defined in the document "IBM Personal Computer
Proceedings," Volume 2 Number 8, October 1984), Netbios and TCP/IP.

The performance function presents to the operator a real time view of ring
utilization and provides statistics on the traffic handled by different
stations on the ring.  This information may be used as an aid to determine when
to increase the speed of the Token-Ring to 16 million bps, to reconfigure the
ring, or to redistribute stations on the network.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   System management of Token-Ring networks is enhanced with the
        visibility into the network provided by the combination of the
        IBM Token-Ring Network 16/4 Trace and Performance Program and
        IBM Token-Ring Network 16/4 Trace and Performance adapters.
    o   The IBM Token-Ring Network 16/4 Trace and Performance Program
        and IBM Token-Ring Network 16/4 Trace and Performance adapters
        provide utilization data that will enable customers to decide
        when to increase the ring speed from 4 million bps to 16 million
        bps.
    o   The Token-Ring Network Administrator productivity is increased
        with the identical, easy-to-use menu driven interface to debug
        and troubleshoot ring segments running at 4 million bps or 16
        million bps.
    o   Customer investment is protected by allowing a machine to be
        utilized as a standard workstation when not being used for Trace
        or Performance tasks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 111. IBM PC EMULATION LAN MANAGEMENT PROGRAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM PC 3270 Emulation LAN Management Program, Version 1.0 provides a small,
remote Local Area Network (IBM Token-Ring Network or IBM PC Network) the
capability for centralized network management.  The program, residing under an
IBM PC 3270 Emulation Program gateway, monitors the LAN for failures and
provides automatic alerting to a "Netview" host.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides  for  IBM  Token-Ring Network or IBM PC Network LAN
        management
    o   Operates as resident code under an IBM PC 3270 Emulation Program
    o   Requires no additional dedicated machine or TP resource
    o   Builds and sends LAN Alerts to a NETVIEW Host


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 112. IBM PC 3270 EMULATION PROGRAM, ENTRY LEVEL V2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM PC 3270 Emulation Program, Entry Level V2.0 is a program product that
provides CUT (Control Unit Terminal) host connection for the IBM Personal
System/2* (PS/2*) and Personal Computer* (PC*) families.  It replaces IBM PC
3270 Emulation Program, Entry Level V1.2.  Enhancements include:

    o   Improved 3270 Display Compatibility
        -   3270 Font Support
        -   Operator Information Area (OIA) and Divider Line
        -   3270 Cursor Attributes
        -   122-Key Keyboard Support (IBM Host Connected Keyboard)
    o   Usability Enhancements
        -   3270 Setup Utility
        -   Auto3270 Function
        -   Simplified Installation
    o   Network Management
        -   Vital Product Data (VPD)
        -   Extended Vital Product Data (EVPD)
        -   Response Time Monitor (RTM)
        -   Alert
    o   Extended Attribute Buffer (EAB) Support
    o   Country Extended Code Page (CECP) Support
    o   Reduced Memory Requirements

IBM PC 3270 Emulation Program, Entry Level V2.0 extends the capabilities of
V1.2.  V2.0 is a member of the 3270 emulation family of products which
includes:

    o   IBM PC 3270 Emulation Program, Entry Level V2.0
    o   IBM Personal Communications/3270 V2.0

IBM PC 3270 Emulation Program, Entry Level V2.0 provides an entry point for
communications between IBM PC or IBM PS/2 and System/370 hosts. For those users
requiring multiple concurrent host sessions through a range of connectivity
options and/or multiple DOS sessions with native Microsoft* Windows* support,
the IBM Personal Communications/3270 V2.0 is the recommended a solution.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   User productivity is greatly enhanced by improvements to the
        emulator user interface.
    o   Systems management is greatly improved with a special emphasis
        towards users who are migrating from 3270 dependent displays
        (e.g., IBM 3278, 3279, 3471, 3472) to intelligent workstations or
        who need to work in a mixed environment.
    o   Growth is enabled with the support of standardized application
        programming interfaces.
    o   Investment protection is assured by the support of both new PS/2
        hardware platforms and all hardware platforms previously
        supported by PC 3270 Emulation Program, Entry Level V1.2.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 113. IBM PERSONAL COMMUNICATIONS/3270 V3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF DECEMBER 21, 1993.)

IBM Personal Communications/3270 V3 provides host connection and gateway
services for the IBM Personal System/2(1) (PS/2) and Personal Computer** (PC)
families.

The Single Byte Character Set (SBCS) product replaces IBM Personal
Communications/3270 V2.  It provides three modes in a single package:

    o   Entry-Level DOS mode
    o   Full-Function DOS mode with enhanced workstation function
    o   Windows mode as a native Microsoft** Windows** Version 3.0 or
        3.1 application

The Double Byte Character Set (DBCS) product provides a Windows mode as a
native Microsoft(3) Windows(4) Japanese Version 3.0A application.

Workstation enhancements include memory reduction of DOS mode, conventional
memory reduction of Windows mode, host based graphics capabilities for Windows
mode, enhanced dial-in asynchronous support (Home3270), the inclusion of
Control Unit Terminal (CUT) function found in IBM PC 3270 Emulation Program
Entry Level V2, and a number of usability and flexibility enhancements.

PC/3270 V3 extends the capabilities of V2.  V3 is a member of the 3270
emulation family of products under DOS which includes:

    o    IBM PC 3270 Emulation Program, Entry Level V2
    o    IBM Personal Communications/3270 V3

Current users of PC/3270 V1, PC/3270 V2, PC/3270 Emulation Program, PC/3270
Emulation Program Entry Level, 3270 Workstation Program, Information Network
Personal Connectivity Services, or Information Network Personal Connectivity
Services Entry should consider PC/3270 V3 as their program of choice for 3270
emulation. PC/3270 V3 enhances the migration path for current 3270 dependent
display (e.g., IBM 3278, 3279, 3471, 3472) users to the intelligent workstation
environment (e.g., PS/2).  PC/3270 V3 also runs under Microsoft(1) Windows(2)
V3 and V3 as a native Windows application without the IBM Windows Connection
V2. It enhances the migration path to OS/2 Extended Services (OS/2 ES) by
providing a common set of programming interface, i.e., EHLLAPI and DDE.
Personal Communications/3270 V3 also provides a solution for those users
requiring a small Control Unit Terminal (CUT) emulator.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   New function with more efficient use of memory. Improvements in
        Host Graphics support, Asynchronous Connectivity and a variety
        of enhancements which provide greater flexibility to the end user
        in areas such as printing and file transfer.
    o   Improved systems management with an emphasis on users migrating
        from 3270 dependent displays to intelligent workstations, or
        required to work in a mixed environment.
    o   Support of common APIs and multiple working environments for DOS,
        Microsoft Windows, and the OS/2 V2 DOS and Windows virtual
        machines.
    o   Support of new PS/2 hardware platforms, all hardware platforms
        previously supported by IBM PC/3270 V2, and added support for
        other vendors' communications adapters.
(1) Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation (2) Registered
Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation (3) Trademark of 3Com
Corporation (4) Trademark of Western Digital (Standard Microsystems)
Corporation (12) Attachmate is a registered trademark of Attachmate Corporation
(13) DCA is a registered trademark of Digital Communications Associates, Inc.
(14) IRMA3 is a trademark of Digital Communications Associates, Inc. (15)
Xircom is a registered trademark of Xircom, Inc. (16) Pocket 3270 Adapter,
Pocket Token-Ring Adapter and Pocket Ethernet Adapter are trademarks of Xircom,
Inc. (18) ACCTON is a trademark of ACCTON Technology Corporation (1) Trademark
of Novell, Inc. * Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 114. 3270 WORKSTATION PROGRAM 1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

3270 Workstation Program (WSP) 1.1 is enhanced and has an improved availability
schedule.  Memory improvements for Personal Systems/2 Models 50, 60 and 80
allow larger PC DOS sessions, and multiple sessions may use the
Lotus/Intel/Microsoft Expanded Memory Specification (EMS).  The 9370 Processor
and the 3720 Communication Controller are added to the already announced
Token-Ring gateways for host access using 802.2 protocols. Additional IBM
hardware products are supported for compatibility.

HIGHLIGHTS 3270 Workstation Program V1.1 includes the following capabilities:

    o   Provides improved memory flexibility in PS/2 PC-DOS session size
        and multiple EMS sessions (Lotus/Intel/Microsoft Expanded Memory
        Specification).
    o   Supports the 9370 Processor and the 3720 Communications
        Controller as Token-Ring gateways for host access, using 802.2
        protocols.
    o   Provides additional hardware compatibility for PS/2 models and
        features, PC Network Baseband adapters and Color Graphics
        Adapter.
    o   Adds Keyboard Definition Utility support for the Enhanced
        keyboard when attached to the Personal Computers XT, AT, and PS/2
        Model 30.
    o   Adds National Language Support for Latin-American Spanish
        keyboard 171.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 115. IBM ENHANCED 5250 EMULATION PROGRAM V2.3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program now provides additional printer
support, world trade code page 850 support, improved host support, improved
compatibility with other personal computer features, and a simplified
easy-to-use installation process.  An "Install" program was added which
automates the installation process and a "Quick Start" chapter was added to the
User's Guide that simplifies instructions for basic configuration. Printer
Function Tables (PFT) were added for a number of additional printers. The
capability to choose the interrupt level for the product was added. Support of
AS/400* OS/400* Version 2 Release 1 printer transparent data stream was added.
Support of code page 850 was added which provides world trade countries with
improved translation of display and printer characters.

The IBM Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program V2.3, working with the IBM Enhanced
5250 Display Station Emulation Adapter, enables the IBM Personal Computer,
PS/2* Models 25, 25 286, 30, 30 286, 35 SX, 35 LS, and 40 SX, the IBM Personal
Typing System, and the PS/1* 386 SX to emulate IBM 5250 attachment to an IBM
AS/400, System/36, and System/38.

The IBM Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program V2.3 should be used to support twinax
installation of the IBM non-Micro-Channel personal computers.  For installation
supporting PS/2 Models 50 and above, the IBM System/36/38 Workstation Emulation
Program should be used with the IBM System/36/38 Workstation Adapter/A.

The Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program or the System/36/38 Workstation Emulation
Program may also be used to support remote personal computer connectivity
through an IBM 5294 or 5394 Remote Control Unit.  The IBM Remote 5250 Emulation
Program Version 2.0 is a complementary offering that provides connectivity to a
host AS/400, System/36, or System/38 for remote locations having personal
computers.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Helps simplify and reduce installation time.
    o   New personal printer support with additional Printer Function
        Tables (PFT).
    o   Increased flexibility with added choice of different interrupt
        levels.
    o   Improves host support by adding support of the AS/400 OS/400
        Version 2 Release 1 printer transparent data stream.
    o   Added flexibility of display and printer character support by
        adding support of code page 850.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. (1) HP LaserJet is a trademark of Hewlett Packard


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 116. IBM CAD AND CAD/PLUS VERSION 3.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

02G7-074  IBM CAD VERSION 3

02G7-075  IBM CAD/PLUS VERSION 3

Version 3.0 has many user-requested enhancements and creates further advances
for IBM CAD and IBM CAD/Plus in areas of product usability, user productivity,
and CAD function.  Among the many enhancements are faster re-display
performance, associative dimensioning, sets and layers, CALS Computer Graphics
Metafile (CGM) import/export, OS/2* Presentation Manager (PM) support, PM
Metafile output, animation, and improved hardware configuration.  IBM CAD and
CAD/Plus program packages now ship as dual system including installation
diskettes for both DOS and OS/2 environments.  Version 3 also brings support
for the optional IBM CAD/Raster Processing feature for processing scanned image
and the optional CIM/400 IBM CAD OS/2* Services feature for accessing a CIM
AS/400 data base and updating bills of material.

IBM CAD is positioned as a powerful yet economical PS/2* workstation design
program that is well suited for a variety of design related applications as
either stand-alone or networked CAD or as the CAD component in a computer
integrated manufacturing (CIM) environment.

IBM CAD/Plus provides the power, efficiency and versatility of IBM CAD but also
provides features for technical publishing illustration and for extending or
modifying IBM CAD for unique applications.

IBM CAD Version 3 provides usability features and design productivity measures
unmatched by any other CAD system.  Included with IBM CAD are simple data
exchange bridges for DXF, HPGL, ANSI CGM, TIFF image, and PM Metafile as well
as full integration capability with the optional IBM CAD/Host Graphics (CADAM)
Data Exchange, the optional IBM CAD/CATIA Data Exchange, and the optional IBM
CAD/IGES Data Exchange.

The IBM CAD/Plus program adds even more data exchange capability with bridges
for CALS CGM, GDF, EMI, and EPS.  CAD/Plus also provides the CADForth developer
toolkit (IBM CAD language, instruction and programming interface) for advanced
users and programmers for extending the application.

Both IBM CAD and CAD/Plus Version 3 support the newly announced optional IBM
CAD/Raster Processing feature for processing scanned image and the optional
CIM/400 IBM CAD OS/2 Services feature for accessing a CIM AS/400 data base and
updating bills of material.

CADAM Inc., an IBM Company, is now responsible for 1) technical direction of
IBM CAD programs and 2) management of IBM CAD Remarketer channel(s) and
distribution.  This is a new arrangement that will utilize CADAM's resources
and expertise in the area of developing, marketing and distributing CAD
products.

With regard to MICRO CADAM, the established CADAM Inc. PC workstation CAD
program, and the relative product positioning between it and IBM CAD, the MICRO
CADAM solution is most appropriate with heads-down (full-time) drafting
professionals - especially where users have familiarity or involvement with
mainframe CADAM design systems.  IBM CAD is most appropriate for engineers
doing serious-but-occasional drafting, and for a variety of PC workstation
design applications that may involve data exchange, publishing, or program
modification for tailored applications.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   The performance and useability changes provide significant
        productivity enhancement
    o   The change to a dual system (both DOS and OS/2) program package
        provides operating system and application flexibility, growth
        enablement, and investment protection
    o   The new standard and optional features bring added strength and
        efficiency to current user applications and provide the potential
        for adapting or growing into different or new IBM CAD
        applications
    o   The furthering of data exchange and integration capability for
        computer integrated manufacturing (CIM), engineering, and
        publishing environments is a continuation of the IBM CAD
        philosophy and provides investment protection.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 117. IBM CAD/RASTER PROCESSING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM CAD/Raster Processing program extends the IBM CAD application in the
DOS environment to include computerized updating of hardcopy drawings. Scanned
images of paper drawings can be displayed and updated on the PS/2 within IBM
CAD.  Users can update just the portion of a drawing needing change or can
redraw it entirely by tracing the image with IBM CAD.  No digitizing tablet is
required.  A full set of raster and vector editing tools are provided.  The
Raster Processing feature brings new life to old drawings.

IBM CAD/Raster Processing is the economical solution for businesses needing to
update paper drawings or incorporate paper drawings into CAD.

When compared to manual (hand draw) updating or electronic digitizing methods,
the overall cost, and, especially, the update cycle time will be

The IBM CAD/Raster Processing solution provides a means of gradual transition
from a non-computerized design environment to a state-of-the-art CAD
environment.

With IBM CAD and the Raster Processing feature installed on a PS/2*, scanned
drawings that have been converted to raster format can be:

    o   Displayed and edited as raster image
    o   Overlayed with IBM CAD geometry and text
    o   Merged with IBM CAD geometry and text
    o   Converted to vector format
    o   Saved as raster
    o   Saved as IBM CAD (hybrid raster/vector)

The program facilitates the processing of scanned drawings even beyond the
editing/saving/plotting by allowing the use of IBM CAD's extensive data
exchange and bridging capability so that the resulting update can be output in
various ways or converted for transport to and from many CAD and publishing
systems.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Reduces update cost with the introduction of computerized methods
        and by requiring that only that portion of the drawing needing
        change be redrawn
    o   Improves the currency of the engineering library by reducing
        cycle time for drawing updates
    o   Protects and complements the existing investment in paper
        drawings by making them more useful in today's design environment
    o   Serves as the tool for gradual or immediate transition from a
        manual drawing environment to a computerized environment
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 118. IBM CAD/IGES DATA EXCHANGE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM CAD/Initial Graphics Exchange Specification Data Exchange (IBM CAD/IGES
Data Exchange) Version 1 is a licensed program that exchanges Computer Aided
Design/Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAD/CAM) data between IBM CAD and National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) IGES standard.  When running on
IBM Personal Computer AT or IBM Personal System/2 (PS/2) under DOS or OS/2, it
converts IBM CAD files to the neutral IGES format and vice versa.

IGES Data Exchange Version 1 is an addition to the IBM family of Computer
Integrated Manufacturing (CIM) products. It provides additional data exchange
capability to IBM CAD. In addition to already announced data exchanges, IGES
Data Exchange provides the capability of exchanging data with other CAD systems
via IGES standard, the most widely used standard in the industry.

CAD files can be exchanged between IBM CAD and any other IBM or non-IBM system
capable of producing IGES files regardless of hardware platform.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Bi-directional data exchange between IBM CAD and IGES format
    o   Supports IBM CAD Versions 1 and 1.2
    o   Creates files compatible with IGES Standard Versions 3 and 4
    o   Runs under DOS and OS/2 on Personal Computer AT or PS/2
    o   Support for translation of 2-D and 3-D curves, text, and
        annotation
    o   Includes 'User Options' for control over some aspects of
        translation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 119. DATA COLLECTION DEVICE SUPPORT/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Data Collection Device Support/2 extends the device support of the Distributed
Automation Edition* family of products to include the IBM 7525 and 7527 data
collection terminals.  Data Collection Device Support/2 includes a Logical
Device Interface Task/Communications Protocol Program (LDIT/CPP) pair.  The
Communications Protocol Program provides a communications interface from an
OS/2* Distributed Automation Edition system to a 7527 connected to a serial
port or to 7525 and 7527 terminals multidropped from one or more ports of a
Realtime Interface Co-Processor Adapter.  The LDIT buffers the Distributed
Automation Edition Device Data Management Support (DDMS) application program
from the device-dependent command and data formats of the terminals, and
provides data integrity services required in the plant floor data collection
environment.  Terminal errors detected by Data Collection Device Support/2 can
be routed by Communications System/2 to NetView through NetView/PC to allow for
an integrated management network.  Data Collection Device Support/2 supports
7527 terminals controlled by 7527 Extended Terminal Services.  It includes the
capability to import files such as configuration, validation, transaction
definition and message files which were created by Data Collection Control/2.

RELEASE 1.1 SERIAL PORT SUPPORT Data Collection Device Support/2 (5621-135)
Release 1.1 provides the additional capability of supporting a 7527 Data
Collection Terminal connected to serial ports.  Customers who require a limited
number of terminals now have a lower cost solution by using the serial port or
serial adapters. Multiple serial ports and the Realtime Interface Co-Processor
may be supported concurrently.  One or more of the following serial ports is
supported:

    o   System unit serial port
    o   IBM Personal System/2 Dual Async Adapter/A
    o   IBM PC AT Serial/Parallel Adapter

A sample network monitor program is provided that allows the user to quickly
configure and monitor data collection activities in a Distributed Automation
Edition network.  The program prompts for configuration information and
initializes the Communications System/2 nodes that have Data Collection Device
Support/2 installed.  Prebuilt configuration, validation, transaction
definition and message files along with Extended Terminal Services are
downloaded to the data collection terminals as required.

The network monitor program displays the transaction data received from many
node where the terminals are attached.  The same data may be sent to a user
application program that may also reside on any Distributed Automation Edition
node.  A sample user application program is provided for displaying the data.
The network monitor program also displays the status of the data collection
terminals and provides terminal commands to connect, disconnect, set
online/offline and download to any terminal that is controlled by the network
monitor program.  Data Collection Control/2 is the recommended buildtime
program to be used to customize the files that are downloaded to the data
collection terminals.

Data Collection Device Support/2 enhances the device connectivity of
Distributed Automation Edition.  It provides a standard Device Data Management
Support (DDMS) interface to the IBM 7525 and IBM 7527 Data Collection Terminals
(DCT).  Using the DDMS interface, applications can communicate with DCTs either
interactively or can receive unsolicited transactions.  By expanding the DDMS
device interface to include the IBM DCTs, applications can be developed in such
a way that they are device independent.  Data Collection Device Support/2
interacts through the standard communications with the control program that is
resident in the terminal. For the 7525, the control program is stored in the
terminal's Read Only Memory (ROM); for the 7527, the control program is the IBM
7527 Extended Terminal Services (5756-146) which is downloaded to each 7527
DCT.  Providing an interface to the DCT's control program allows the DCTs to
operate as intelligent workstations running their own transaction programs,
while communicating with the Data Collection Device Support/2 to handle service
requests either from the DCT or Distributed Automation Edition application. The
Data Collection Device Support/2 provides functions for controlling the DCTs,
collecting data from the DCTs, and passing data to DAE applications for
processing.

The configuration files, transaction definition files, and validation files
that operate on the DCT may be created by Data Collection Control/2 (5756-144).
Data Collection Control/2 and Data Collector for Distributed Automation Edition
(5756-145) also provide an ability for DAE applications to share data and
communicate to the IBM DCTs, using the DAE message interface. Since the DAE
message interface is not modeled to be device independent, Data Collection
Device Support/2 is more suited for customers who have this type of need.  The
interactive capabilities provided by the Data Collection Device Support/2 also
make it well suited for cell or work station control applications, where the
DCT is used as a data entry device and integrated with other machines tools or
process control equipment on the same controller; whereby Data Collection
Control/2 and Data Collector for Distributed Automation Edition are more suited
as a controller of DCTs.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Data Collection Device Support/2 provides for the integration of
        the interactive interface of the manufacturing worker and the
        manual data collection function into a complete plant floor
        management system.
    o   Provides protection against the loss of transaction data through
        optional input data logging and control over the release of data
        from Data Collection Terminal buffered memory.
    o   Increases application programmer productivity by allowing the
        use of the Distributed Automation Edition DDMS interface which
        is consistent across all Distributed Automation Edition supported
        devices, and which insulates the programmer from the command and
        data formats of the terminal.
    o   Is supported in the Distributed Automation Edition environment
        which can be initially installed in a network with few processor
        nodes and extended non-disruptively to large, multi-node plant
        automation systems.
    o   Brings the data collection terminals under the umbrella of
        Distributed Automation Edition system management, including, for
        example, the ability to control terminals from one or more remote
        Distributed Automation Edition nodes, and to notify operators or
        application programs, or NetView systems of errors in device
        communications.
    o   Protects application programming investment as terminal
        technology advances by isolating device-dependence in the LDIT
        and data definitions external to the application program.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 120. EXTENDED DEVICE SUPPORT/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Extended Device Support/2 extends Distributed Automation Edition* support of
devices attached to IBM industrial computers, IBM personal computers, or the
IBM Personal System/2* (PS/2*).  This program provides the capability for
developing and running a logical device interface task (LDIT) for devices
attached through co-processors, attachment cards, the COM/Serial Port and the
IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor.  A LDIT translates the Communications
System/2 device-independent application program interface (API) commands into
device-dependent commands.  As a Communications System/2 resource, an LDIT has
access to all functions provided by Communications System/2. For example,
device errors detected by an LDIT or a Communications System/2 device API
request can be routed by Communications System/2 to Netview through Netview/PC.

Extended Device Support/2 expands the device attachment options and provides
for easier installation of new device support, because an LDIT is not required
to be linked with Communications System/2.  An LDIT is a separate executable
task and can be used as-shipped.

Extended Device Support/2 is required for the run-time support of an LDIT.

Plant operations offer a major opportunity for realizing the benefits of
Computer Integrated Manufacturing.  The potential for improvements in a
company's products, processes, productivity, and profits is enormous.  CIM must
be reached through the implementation of a series of steps that begin to tie
together the "islands of automation."

A key element in achieving Computer Integrated Manufacturing is the ability to
share data, to make information readily available to people and systems that
require constant feedback in order to perform business processes, and to keep
the company operating.  A cornerstone of the successful CIM system is the
ability to attach to a multitude of plant floor devices.  Extended Device
Support/2 extends this Distributed Automation Edition capability.

Extended Device Support/2 enhances the device connectivity of Distributed
Automation Edition.  It provides a standard device data management support
(DDMS) interface to LDIT that can be used with co-processors, attachment cards,
the COM/Serial Port and IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor. Additional
attachment options can now be supported in a Distributed Automation Edition
network.  These attachments could attach to the following types of devices:

    o   Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC)
    o   Robot controllers
    o   Direct I/O
    o   Numerical controllers
    o   Local area networks

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides business solutions by extending Distributed Automation
        Edition device support capability.
    o   Extends the Distributed Automation Edition device programmer
        productivity by allowing the use of the Distributed Automation
        Edition device data management support (DDMS) interface
        consistent across all Distributed Automation Edition supported
        devices; insulates the programmer from the command and data
        formats of the attached device.
    o   Provides for easier installation of new device support because
        the LDIT is not required to be linked with Communication System/2
        and can be used directly.
    o   Supports growth enablement in the Distributed Automation Edition
        environment because it can be initially installed in a network
        with few processor nodes and extended non-disruptively to large,
        multi-node plant automation systems.
    o   Protects application programming investment as plant floor
        device technology advances by isolating device-dependence in the
        LDIT and data definitions external to the application program.
    o   Provides packaging/installation/configuration advantages to
        adding device support.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 121. SHOP ASSIST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Shop Assist, a member of Graphical Display and Query Facility (GDQF) family of
products, is a licensed program that is designed to be used by the
manufacturing industry on the shop floor.  It can be used to display assembly
or manufacturing instructions consisting of merged text and/or CAD/CAM graphics
on an IBM Personal or Industrial Computer.

This program is intended to be a step towards reducing the need for hard copy
drawings and textual instructions on the shop floor.  Engineering changes and
other information can be viewed on the shop floor terminal in an efficient
manner, without physically handling paper.

Shop Assist is designed primarily for displaying text and graphics on an IBM
Personal or Industrial Computer on the shop floor as a step towards reducing
paper consisting of drawings and textual instructions.  It may also be used in
areas such as Purchasing and Quality Control Departments where viewing of
merged text and graphics is needed.

GDQF Release 4.1 provides host system utilities which may be used to prepare
shop floor packages to be downloaded to Personal or Industrial Computers and
displayed using Shop Assist.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Personal and Industrial Computer based shop floor viewing - Text
        and Graphics
    o   Easy-to-use interface
    o   Minimal user keyboard interaction
    o   Split screen viewing of Text and Graphics
    o   Pan and zoom capability
    o   Bar code reader support

Following utilities are provided in GDQF Release 4.1 to facilitate preparation
of shop floor packages on the host:

    o   Enhanced utility to support preparation of Graphics Data Format
        (GDF) which is suitable for use with Shop Assist.
    o   Operation processor used for preparation of process plans.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 122. FLOOR CONTROL/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM PLANT FLOOR SERIES PlantControl:  Production Activity Edition-Floor
Control/2 provides a set of selectable shop-floor services, which can be used
to configure a shop floor system.  Floor Control/2 is a Systems Application
Architecture Application, is consistent with IBM's CIM Architecture strategic
direction, and enhances IBM capability to provide a total computer integrated
manufacturing (CIM) solution.  It executes on the IBM Industrial Computer or
the IBM Personal System/2, using the IBM Operating System/2* (OS/2*) Extended
Edition and PLANT FLOOR SERIES Distributed Automation Edition*. * Trademarks of
International Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS PLANT FLOOR SERIES PlantControl provides:

    o    Support for a discrete, just-in-time manufacturing environment
    o    Support for migration from a conventional to a just-in-time
         environment
    o    Support for either build-to-plan or build-to-order processes
    o    Support for manual and automated production environments
    o    The capability to configure and customize the system to meet
         the customer's business process
    o    The capability to "push" decision making down to the work cell
    o    A System Application Architecture (SAA) Application in the CIM
         environment.
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 123. PROCESS OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (POMS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM PLANT FLOOR SERIES* Process Operations Management System** (POMS**)
licensed program is a distributed system, providing a single CIM solution for
the process industry and other industries. POMS links production and materials
resource planning with process control and operations, creates electronic batch
or run records in the OS/2* relational data base or other data bases for
analysis and reporting, and helps monitor and enforce compliance with good
manufacturing practices.

With the information that POMS has recorded in a relational data base or other
data bases, and with the ease in which POMS procedures can be modified and
enhanced, POMS assists customers to achieve a continuous improvement cycle in
their manufacturing operations.

POMS operates on a network of specified IBM Industrial Computers or the IBM
Personal System/2* using the IBM Operating System/2* Version 2 POMS supports
linkages to:

    o   Host based planning systems
    o   Material requirements planning system information
    o   Programmable controllers, sensors, data collection terminals,
        and other devices on the plant floor

POMS can be configured to use the network communications of Distributed
Automation Edition (Distributed Application Environment) Communications
System/2 or the Entry Communications System/2.  Distributed Application
Environment supplies a simple common Application Program Interface (API)
providing device data management, communication, routing and system management
services.  The APIs enable programmers to develop applications effectively
independent of the hardware platforms and operating systems they are to run on.
Additionally, Send and Receive functions allow message based communications
between IBM PlantWorks programs and other Distributed Application Environment
based programs.

When the POMS operating environment involves multi-node, heterogeneous or
distributed networks, IBM recommends the use of Distributed Application
Environment as the network communication and system integration tool for the
following capabilities:

    o   Consistency with CIM Architecture
    o   Connectivity and integration with existing and future CIM
        environments
    o   Single-system image
    o   Communication protocol independence (APPC, TCP/IP, DECNET,
        NETBIOS)
    o   Device connectivity (machine tools, PLC devices, data collection
        terminals)
    o   Distribution management (alerts, startup, shutdown, security,
        trace)
    o   Modular network (dynamic changes to resources)
    o   Connection to host transaction application
    o   Remote interprocess communication service
    o   Network management service based on IBM Netview

IBM Services are available to build the programming interfaces to the
Distributed Application Environment functions. POMS supports standard
communication links such as SDLC or Token-Ring to a large number of IBM and
third party programs commonly used in the process industries, including MAPICS
and the Neural Network Utility/2 (NNU/2).

HIGHLIGHTS POMS is a process industry and other industry Manufacturing
Execution System. POMS requirements were defined by a consortium of process
industry companies to specifically address the requirements of the process
industry. POMS provides the following benefits:

    o   Protects customer investment by being a vehicle to implement
        continuous process and quality improvements.
    o   Provides an integrated application solution for control
        and status reporting.
    o   Instructs operators, monitors and enforces good manufacturing
        practices and provides a consistent and standard framework for
        plant floor information systems.
    o   Improves productivity and ensures proper operations by supporting
        linkages to the manufacturing resource planning (MRP) system,
        and other business systems with process control and process
        operations.
    o   Produces a complete record of the production data and actions in
        relational form.
    o   Can optionally use the Distributed Automation Edition
        (Distributed Application Environment) Communications System/2
        and the Entry Communications System/2.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** POMS is a registered trademark of Industrial Computing
Designs Corporation. ** Novell is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 124. IBM PAPERLESS MANUFACTURING WORKPLACE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

5621-235 Plan Viewer

5621-236 Plan Builder

5621-237 Plan Server

5621-238 Plan Packet

The IBM PLANT FLOOR SERIES* Paperless Manufacturing WorkPlace Operator Guidance
Edition is a set of Systems Application Architecture* (SAA)* distributed
applications that are part of the CIM Architecture.  Paperless Manufacturing
WorkPlace addresses the discrete manufacturing environment by providing
application facilities for delivering manufacturing instructions to plant floor
personnel using the advanced graphical capabilities of Operating System/2*
(OS/2)* Presentation Manager to ensure an easy-to-use, intuitive interface for
operators.  Paperless Manufacturing WorkPlace is consistent with Common User
Access (CUA) guidelines with plant floor extensions.

Paperless Manufacturing WorkPlace consists of four programs; Plan Viewer, Plan
Builder, Plan Server, and Plan Packet.  The first three provide the function
which is in the Programming Request for Price Quotation (PRPQ) version of
Paperless Manufacturing WorkPlace, in addition to new functional enhancements.
Plan Packet is a application that links manufacturing orders to instructions
created by Plan Builder.  Plan Packet collects the as-built data about the
manufactured product, which can include electronic buyoffs (operator
"signatures") by operation, the version of process plan used at each operation
and operator comments.  The instruction data and the as-built data are managed
centrally, making Paperless Manufacturing WorkPlace part of an integrated CIM
solution for the plant floor.

Plan Builder is enhanced to include process plan review and approval functions.
In addition, a set of workstation Application Program Interfaces (APIs) allows
other applications to invoke Plan Viewer transparently to the shop floor
worker, making Paperless Manufafturing WorkPlace integratable with
manufacturing execution systems.  Server APIs allow business planning and
engineering applications to store and retrieve data with the Paperless
Manufacturing WorkPlace database.

Other new functions in the Paperless Manufacturing WorkPlace applications
include: forms based data collection to collect parametric data from the shop
floor via Plan Packet or Plan Viewer and VM data store capabilities.

Paperless Manufacturing WorkPlace is part of the IBM CIM Architecture because
it is based on Distributed Automation Edition Communication System/2 (CS/2) or
Entry CS/2 system enablers.  Through the messaging Application Program
Interfaces (APIs) of Distributed Automation Edition, applications have access
to other Distributed Automation Edition applications throughout the enterprise.
A Paperless Manufacturing WorkPlace customer could use these Application
Program Interfaces (APIs) to access Material Requirements Planning (MRP)
Systems data in MAPICS, COPICS, CIM Advantage Production Planning Series
(CIMAPPS), and other business planning systems.

For vector graphics support, Paperless Manufacturing WorkPlace uses IBM CAD
which supports many common vector graphics formats and allows import from
CADAM**, CATIA** systems, IGES, DXF, and others.  Image support is provided by
IBM OS/2 Image Support.

Paperless Manufacturing WorkPlace can be modified to use OS/2 Presentation
Manager compatible editors other than IBM CAD, OS/2 Image Support, and the OS/2
System Editor, as required by the customer.  It can also be used to integrate
other OS/2 applications using the Paperless Manufacturing WorkPlace custom
program capability.

 Typical industry segments include:

    o   Aerospace
        -   Department of Defense
        -   Commercial
    o   Airline maintenance
    o   Electronics
    o   Manufacturing
    o   Fabrication and assembly
    o   Automotive
    o   Machinery
    o   Instruments
    o   Medical diagnostic equipment

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Business solutions are enhanced by letting the operator on the
        shop floor see and use pictures, graphics, text, data collection
        and other IBM Operating System/2 (OS/2) programs.
    o   User productivity is improved by paper documentation being
        replaced by timely information from a single source: the
        Paperless Manufacturing WorkPlace terminal at the operator's
        workstation.
    o   Growth enablement is enhanced through facilities which support
        integration with engineering Materials Requirements Planning
        (MRP) systems, and other manufacturing applications.
    o   Investing in a Paperless Manufacturing WorkPlace implementation
        is an investment in the latest technologies, including image,
        relational database and an object oriented user interface, to
        improve your profitability and meet business objectives.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Microsoft is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. **
CADAM is a registered trademark of CADAM Inc. ** CATIA is a registered
trademark of Dassault Systemes. ** Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox
Corporation. (TM) Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 125. IBM SOMOBJECTS DEVELOPER TOOLKIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   96F8647 IBM SOMobjects* Developer Toolkit for OS/2
    o   96F8649 SOMobjects Publications
    o   96F8673 SOMobjects Workstation Enabler V2.0 for OS/2
    o   96F8675 SOMobjects Workgroup Enabler V2.0 for OS/2

Two of the SOMobjects products have been renamed:  They are now:

    o   IBM SOMobjects Workstation Enabler V2.0 for OS/2 (P/N 96F8673)
    o   IBM SOMobjects Workgroup Enabler V2.0 for OS/2   (P/N 96F8675)

New Additional License Packs provide the ability to obtain Additional Licenses
for each of the Enabler packages in packs of five or packs of twenty, at
significantly reduced prices.  Also, contracts will be available October 30,
1993 to offer the extended right to copy the Workstation Enabler and Workgroup
Enabler packages.

Extended right to copy contracts may be obtained for the following:

    1.  High volumes of right to copy and redistribute SOMobjects
        Enabler V2.0 code and documentation for internal only deployment,
        at deep discounts.
    2.  Inclusion of SOMobjects Enabler V2.0-level code with a software
        vendor's application, for unlimited redistribution.
    3.  Inclusion of the SOM/DSOM components of the Workstation Enabler
        V2.0-level code with a software vendor's application development
        tools offering, for inclusion in the tool user's application.

SOMobjects* Developer Toolkit for OS/2 is an object-oriented programming,
development product. System Object Model (SOM) technology and tools help to
create object-oriented class libraries.  Objects/classes can be created in one
programming language and accessed from a different programming language.
Language neutrality for objects and class libraries is a unique differentiator
for this product.  Code can be reused to extend beyond single language
boundaries, making the benefits of object-oriented programming (OOP) far more
open and expansive. The Toolkit includes language bindings for use with C and
C++ programming languages.

SOMobject for OS/2 is fully compliant with the Common Object Request Broker
Architecture (CORBA) specification of the Object Management Group (OMG). The
product also provides distributed object capability, both across processes or
address spaces in a single workstation, and across multiple workgroup nodes in
a workgroup LAN configuration. The respective runtime packages, Workstation
Runtimes and Workgroup Runtimes, enable the execution of SOM-based applications
with the described distributed capabilities. These products will be available
for both OS/2* and AIX*.

The SOMobjects Developer Toolkit for OS/2 is a toolkit which provides an open,
standards compliant, object-oriented development environment on the OS/2 and
the AIX platforms.  The product provides distributed, language neutral
capabilities for defining and manipulating objects/class libraries. It provides
to the industry the long needed technology for breaking the language barriers
that have confined object-oriented programming development environments to
language-related exclusive islands.  SOM-based objects can be truly open and
shared, in any application language, and distributed across heterogeneous
networks.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Language neutral objects/class libraries
    o   Object modification without application recompilation
    o   Distributed LAN support
    o   CORBA compliant
    o   Multiple platforms: OS/2 and AIX/6000
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 126. IBM NETWORK SIGNON COORDINATOR/2 1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A new version of the IBM Network SignON Coordinator/2 program extends support
to include single signon and password coordination for Novell NetWare(1) v3.11
systems and local DOS host operations.  Version 1.1 also offers the following
extensive usability enhancements:

    o  New graphical, icon-based user interface for OS/2(R) enables
       selecting single systems for signon operations in addition to
       defining default sets of systems
    o  Increased flexibility in host communication scripts, including
       dynamic selection of terminal emulation sessions
    o  Easier administration and maintenance of configuration file
       information
    o  Workstation independence -- end users can access their
       configuration files from a server instead of storing this
       information on the workstations at which they sign on.

IBM Network SignON Coordinator/2 Version 1.1 provides DOS and OS/2 users a
simplified method of logging on to a variety of systems and keeping passwords
synchronized across multiple locally-attached workstations and central site
hosts.

Users can log on to/log off from/change passwords on a variety of systems at
once by using one simple interface (graphical, command line or full screen) to
perform these operations.

Network SignON Coordinator supports DOS, OS/2 and NetWare clients, IBM OS/2 LAN
Servers, NetWare v3.11 servers, remote OS/2 workstations (for example, IBM
Extended Services(TM) database servers and IBM DATABASE 2(TM) OS/2 servers),
and VM, MVS and OS/400(R) hosts.

    Part
    Number      Description
    96F8628     IBM Network SignON Coordinator/2
                 Version 1.1
    96F8628     IBM Network SignON Coordinator/2
                 Version 1.1
(1) Novell NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. (TM) Trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation. (R) Registered trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  Provides single-signon and password change capability for a
       variety of networked systems via one simple interface
    o  Includes support for Novell NetWare v3.11 (OS/2 and DOS) clients
       as well as DOS host emulators
    o  Provides increased flexibility over Version 1.0 with the addition
       of selective signon capability and dynamic emulator session
       selection
    o  Supplies an OS/2 API and toolkit for use by application programs
    o  Allows users to initiate additional coordination and
       synchronization activities with other applications through the
       use of enhanced user exit support


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 127. IBM NETWARE NETWORK COMPUTING PRODUCTS FROM IBM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

32G6107 NetWare Services for OS/2 from IBM

42G1810 NetWare for Macintosh from IBM V3.11 (20 user)

42G1827 NetWare for Macintosh from IBM V3.11 (100 user)

NetWare** Services for OS/2* from IBM (an additional product under a product
distribution, licensing, and support relationship with Novell, Inc., consistent
with IBM's interoperability strategy) and NetWare for Macintosh** from IBM
V3.01 20-, and 100- user levels are being replaced by V3.11.  All NetWare from
IBM products will be available from IBM United States - Direct Marketing
without the previous restrictions to special bid and to qualified Education
Institutions.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   NetWare Services for OS/2 from IBM includes the NetWare requester
        for OS/2 V2.0 along with graphical desktop utilities, enhanced
        installation program, and network management tools utilizing
        IBM's Presentation Manager
    o   Netware for Macintosh from IBM V3.11 includes enhanced printing
        capability and SNMP support
    o   NetWare from IBM products will be available from IBM United
        States - Direct Marketing without the previous restrictions to
        special bid and to qualified Education Institutions.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** NetWare is a trademark of Novell, Inc. ** AppleTalk
and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. ** UNIX is a trademark of
UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 128. NETWARE NETWORK COMPUTING PRODUCTS FROM IBM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

04G4195 NetWare from IBM v3.11 (50 users)

32G6109 NetWare NFS from IBM v1.2

41G7966 NetWare NFS from IBM v1.2 (5 pack)

32G6113 NetWare FTAM from IBM v1.2 NetWare (1) NFS from IBM v1.2, NetWare FTAM
from IBM v1.2 and NetWare from IBM v3.11 (5- and 50-user) products are added to
IBM's distribution, licensing and support relationship with Novell, Inc. (1)
Registered trademark of Novell, Inc.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   NetWare NFS from IBM v1.2 adds NetWare to UNIX (2) print gateway
        in both directions, and XCONSOLE for server management
    o   NetWare FTAM from IBM v1.2 provides full bi-directional
        connectivity between DOS workstations and OSI hosts
    o   NetWare from IBM v3.11 is now available in 5- and 50-user
        configurations
(2) Trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 129. IBM DOS J5.02/V ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM DOS Version J5.02/V is the single-tasking operating system of choice for
users requiring Japanese support.  It supports the 386SX (and above) Personal
System/2 (R) platform, and can also be used with 286 (and above) Personal
System/55 (TM) units.  With this announcement, a Japanese version of DOS is
made available for the first time in the United States.  This version of IBM
Japanese DOS provides the capability on most systems for applications to employ
more memory space than on previous versions of IBM Japanese DOS.  It offers an
enhanced menu-based user interface, improved memory management, and improved
functions.  The IBM DOS J5.02/V can be used for Japanese (Kanji, Katakana,
Hiragana) and English data processing. (R) Registered trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation. (TM) Trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Increases application space
    o   Improves performance
    o   Improves ease-of-use in installation and user interface
    o   Provides new and improved DOS commands, programs and utilities
    o   Supports old systems
    o   Supports new systems and options
    o   Provides IBM support
(1) Registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. (2) Trademark of Microsoft
Corporation. (R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 130. NETWARE COMPUTING PRODUCTS FROM IBM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

85F0788 v2.2 (10 users)

85F0790 v2.2 (50 users)

85F0792 v2.2 (100 users)

85F0796 v3.11 (100 users)

85F0798 v3.11 (250 users)

For NetWare (1) Computing Products from IBM, qualified educational institutions
and special bid customers may now acquire products directly from IBM US Market
Operations -- Direct.

The distribution, licensing and support relationship with Novell, Inc., and the
marketing channels announced in Programming Announcement 291-149, dated March
26, 1991, still apply. (1) Registered trademark of Novell, Inc. (TM) Trademark
of International Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 131. REMOTE TERMINAL INTERFACE UTILITY PROGRAMS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Remote Terminal Interface Utility provides program utilities in support of
the Remote Terminal Interface Adapter (RTI) (#6078).  The RTI is installed in
an IBM Industrial Computer (5531, 7531, 7532, 7552) to provide an interface to
connect the IBM Industrial Computer to the IBM 7552 Industrial Computer through
the keyboard port on the 7552.

HIGHLIGHTS The Remote Terminal Interface Utility Programs for The IBM
Industrial Computers provides support for the following operations:

    o   Remote Diskette
    o   File Transfer
        -   To the IBM 7552
        -   From the IBM 7552
    o   Remote Terminal


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 132. IBM DEVICE DATA MANAGEMENT SUPPORT V 1.01 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Device Data Management Support is a licensed program product that allows
the capturing and management of information flow from a distributed system of
various plant floor devices.  Device Data Management Support will typically be
used to support such devices as programmable logic controllers that are
attached to IBM Industrial Computers.  It supports communication with plant
floor devices in a device-independent manner and supports the transfer,
comparison and startup of user-written device programs.  Device Data Management
Support is intended for use by application programmers, product designers, or
end users who require a solution to device-independent applications and program
distribution on the IBM Industrial Computer, Personal Computer, or Personal
System/2*.

IBM Communication Protocol Programs/A V1.1 (5601-151) can be used with Device
Data Management Support Version 1.01. *Personal System/2 is a registered
trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Device Data Management Support utilizes the services of the Communications
SubSystem, which is a software facility for routing messages between the IBM
Industrial or Personal Computer and one or more Realtime Interface Co-Processor
subsystems.  The Realtime Interface Co-Processor contains its own processor,
realtime multitasking environment, random access memory (RAM), and
communication ports.

HIGHLIGHTS IBM Device Data Management Support provides:

    o   Access to plant floor device data in a device independent manner
    o   Services for up-loading, down-loading, and comparing plant floor
        device programs
    o   Control of execution of plant floor device programs
    o   File services for reading and writing DOS files from either a
        system unit or a Realtime Interface Co-Processor
    o   Menu-driven utilities to perform device management functions
    o   High level language interfaces to compiled programs in IBM C or
        IBM Pascal
    o   A library of functions and sample programs for creation of
        logical device interfaces
    o   Ease-of-writing programs for supporting devices attached to the
        Realtime Interface Co-Processor


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 133. DATA COLLECTION EDITION VERSION 1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

5601299 DATA COLLECTOR VERSION 1.1

5601398 5250 AND MAPICS DATA SERVICES VERSION 1.1

5601399 3270 AND COPICS DATA SERVICES VERSION 1.1

5706274 7527 TERMINAL SERVICES VERSION 1.0

The Data Collection Edition family of data collection Program Products provides
a general purpose system that can be tailored by the user for collecting data
using the 7525 and 7527 Data Collection Terminals.  The Data Collection Edition
consists of the following products:

    o   Data Collector Version 1.1
    o   5250 and MAPICS Data Services Version 1.1
    o   3270 and COPICS Data Services Versions 1.1
    o   7527 Terminal Services Version 1.0

The function and usability of these products allow them to be used for
collecting data in a variety of application areas including work in process,
time and attendance, job reporting, inventory, maintenance.

The Data Collection Edition products replace 5799-PBR, 5799-PBT, and 5799-PDJ
which supported the 7525 Data Collection Terminal.  The Data Collection Edition
products have significantly improved usability and user productivity.
Functional enhancements include support for the 7527 Data Collection Terminals,
7527 Model 2 touch screen support and data verification at the controller.

Upgrades are available at no charge to replace Version 1.0.

These products should be considered for other market segments that require data
collection capabilities for applications such as time and attendance.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Supports 7525 and 7527 Data Collection Terminals
    o   Supports touch screen functions on the 7527 Model 2
    o   Easy installation through default configurations
    o   Interfaces to MAPICS or COPICS as host system using 5250 and
        3278/79 terminal emulation, respectively
    o   Easy user programmability for IBM Data Collection Terminals
    o   Data collection terminal network management
    o   Data verification at the terminal and Data Collection Controller
    o   Supports importing data verification files created by an ASCII
        editor
    o   Supports up to nine 7525 terminal files and 81 7527 terminal
        files
    o   Time synchronization with master clock system


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 134. IBM DISPLAYWRITE ASSISTANT VERSION 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM DisplayWrite Assistant is a text editor for the IBM Assistant Series,
Version 2.0 family of products.  IBM DisplayWrite Assistant is also a member of
the IBM Office Systems Family of Products and as such provides editable
document interchange with other IBM text processing programs through support of
Revisable Form Text Document Content Architecture (RFTDCA).

IBM DisplayWrite Assistant incorporates an enhanced user interface which is
designed for ease-of-use.  IBM DisplayWrite Assistant supports the creation,
revision, and printing of general correspondence, including multi-page
documents, which can contain graphics, reports, and drawings from other IBM
Assistant Series programs.  Comprehensive editing functions, online Helps,
spelling verification, and synonym search and selection are included.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Designed for ease-of-learning/ease-of-use for casual user.
    o   Wide range of text create and revise capabilities.
    o   Enhanced user interface, utilizing pop-up menus.
    o   RFTDCA support for document interchange.
    o   Multi-level menu-driven function selection.
    o   Online Help facility.
    o   Spell Checker to help check spelling of a word, page or entire
        document.
    o   Synonym search and selection.
    o   Quick path (via function key) to save or print.
    o   Cursor draw to create line drawings (using horizontal/vertical
        lines).
    o   Global search and replace.
    o   Block editing.
    o   File merge at print time with variety of file types.
    o   Graphics merge at print time from IBM Graphing Assistant or IBM
        Drawing Assistant.
    o   Subscripts and superscripts.
    o   Headers and footers.
    o   User printer support via table generation facility.
    o   Color selection for display/print (an appropriate color display/
        printer required).
    o   Keyboard extension facility to display/print characters not
        engraved on the keyboard.
    o   Disk/diskette directory support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 135. IBM FILING ASSISTANT VERSION 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

6024457  IBM FILING ASSISTANT VERSION 2.00

6024458  IBM GRAPHING ASSISTANT VERSION 2.00

6024459  IBM REPORTING ASSISTANT VERSION 2.00

6024460  IBM WRITING ASSISTANT VERSION 2.00

6024461  IBM PLANNING ASSISTANT VERSION 2.00

6024462  IBM PROJECT ASSISTANT VERSION 1.00

IBM Assistant Series enhanced function support for new hardware, and Withdrawal
of Selected IBM Assistant Series products announced.

The IBM Assistant Series Version 2.00 consists of the following licensed
programs:

    o   IBM Project Assistant Version 1.00
    o   IBM Filing Assistant Version 2.00
    o   IBM Reporting Assistant Version 2.00
    o   IBM Planning Assistant Version 2.00
    o   IBM Graphing Assistant Version 2.00
    o   IBM Writing Assistant Version 2.00
    o   IBM Document Retrieval Assistant Version 1.00

IBM Project Assistant is a new licensed program in the Assistant Series.  IBM
Project Assistant is a project scheduling program that shows a project's
critical path in the form of a horizontal Gantt bar chart.

IBM Filing Assistant Version 2.00, IBM Reporting Assistant Version 2.00, IBM
Planning Assistant Version 2.00, IBM Graphing Assistant Version 2.00, and IBM
Writing Assistant Version 2.00 will support the IBM PC Convertible, the IBM
Personal Computer AT, models 319 and 339, the IBM Personal Computer XT, models
088, 089, 267, 268, 277, and 278, and the IBM 3.5-inch External Diskette Drive.

IBM Document Retrieval Assistant Version 1.00 supports copy to the 3.5-inch
media.  This allows the user to copy IBM Document Retrieval Assistant Version
1.00 from the 5.25-inch media included in the program package, to the 3.5-inch
media for use on the 3.5-inch Diskette Drive.  For ordering instructions, see
Programming Announcement285-147, dated April 16, 1985.

An upgrade to IBM Assistant Series Version 2.00 will be offered to current
licensees of IBM Filing Assistant Version 1.00, IBM Planning Assistant Version
1.00, IBM Reporting Assistant Version 1.00, IBM Graphing Assistant Version 1.00
or 1.01, and IBM Writing Assistant Version 1.00 or 1.01.  The upgrade offer
will allow current licensees to obtain the new version for an upgrade charge.
This upgrade will be available through May 15, 1987.

The following is included in the IBM Assistant Series Version 2.00 products:

    o   Support for new software and new hardware.
    o   Both 3.5-inch and 5.25-inch media included with each product.
    o   A User Interface offering improved ease-of-use.
    o   A 'front-end menu' program providing a quick method of invoking
        each Assistant Series product in a TopView or non-TopView
        environment.
    o   Greater consistency in the use of menu item numbers and key usage.
    o   A 'Quick Save' feature to save without going to the main menu.
    o   Comprehensive Help text.
    o   An improved install/backup procedure.
    o   Functional enhancements specific to each of the applications.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 136. PERSONAL DECISION SERIES VERSION 2, ENGLISH ACCESS EDITION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

English Access Edition is an English language query product to be used in
conjunction with the Data Edition.  It allows users to make queries using
sentence-like English phrases.  In addition, English Access Edition will allow
the user to display the answer to a query in a graph as well as a report.

English Access Edition is a natural language query product designed to work
with the Data Edition.  It provides access to information for users  who do not
wish to use the Data Edition query language.  English Access Edition allows the
user to make and build queries using simple sentence-like English.

As English Access Edition is used, a dictionary of synonyms and definitions may
be built.  These words or phrases are used to define the data to English Access
Edition.

Alternatively, the dictionary may be predefined so that the synonyms and
definitions are available for immediate use to the beginner.

Text data or graphics data query results may be sent to a display, printer, or
file.  Query results may also be included in a word processing document.
Support for Local Area Network when used with the Network+ Edition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 137. IBM PERSONAL DECISION SERIES VERSION 2, DATA EDITION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Data Edition, Version 2 is a data base manager with query, data entry,
utilities, and procedures designed to increase users on the job productivity
and to help them transform their individual data and knowledge into information
needed to help solve problems and make decisions.  Using the Data Edition, the
users can enter, sort, select, calculate, summarize and present information in
a meaningful way without the need to memorize commands or specify program-like
logic.

The Personal Decision Series Data Edition is a data base manager with query,
data entry, services, and procedures, designed to help increase users'
on-the-job productivity and to help them transform their individual data and
knowledge into information needed to help solve problems and make decisions.
Using the Data Edition, users can enter, sort, select, calculate, summarize and
present information in a meaningful way without the need to memorize commands
or specify program-like logic.  The Data Edition is a prerequisite for the
other members of the IBM Personal Decision Series.

Data provides these key features and functions:

    o   Manages an integrated data base for all members of the Series.
    o   Allows users to quickly perform queries and prepare reports for
        display or printing.
    o   Allows users to set up multiple indexes and views of the same
        data.
    o   Allows users to logically join up to five files for input to
        queries and copying.
    o   Provides a full range of facilities for entering data from the
        keyboard.
    o   Provides the ability to specify special checking to be performed
        on data as it is entered, using a table, a mask, or a range.
    o   Provides file sorting with up to ten sort fields, ascending or
        descending, and record selection.
    o   Allows users to combine Data tasks into procedures for easy
        repetitive operations.
    o   Allows users to define menus.  Menus can be used to run Personal
        Decision Series procedures, or external programs.
    o   Allows users to readily access data from other software for the
        IBM Personal Computer, currently including:
        -   IBM Personal Computer software that uses PC DOS and Data
            Interchange Format (DIF)* files, ASCII text files, and BASIC
            sequential files (CSVD).
        -   The IBM Filing Assistant.
        -   Lotus 1-2-3** files.
        -   Symphony*** files.
        -   dBASE II**** files.
        -   dBASE III, and dBASE III Plus***** files.
    o   Allows character and structure fields of up to 240 characters.
    o   Provides DATE data type and date arithmetic.  DATE data type can
        be used for sequencing, selecting, and checking proper entry.
    o   Supports multipass query which allows sequencing and selecting
        with any fields including calculated ones.
    o   Provides the ability to save commonly-used queries and execute
        them from query, procedure, or menu.
    o   Allows users to extensively tailor query results to produce
        professional quality reports.  For further customizing, query
        reports can be transferred to the IBM Personal Decision Series
        Reports+ Edition Version 2.0.
    o   Allows users to customize display color and highlighting.
    o   Allows users to define up to twenty printer profiles.
    o   Provides organization and maintenance of definitions, programs,
        and data in libraries with the ability for data to reside outside
        the library.
    o   Allows users to redefine data files and transform existing data
        to a new definition.
    o   Provides services to make copies of the data and maintain the
        data base.
    o   Supports the IBM Local Area Network and Token-Ring Network when
        used with the IBM Personal Decision Series Network+ Edition.
        When used with Network+, Data supports data display and entry by
        multiple users to the same file at the same time.
*  DIF is a registered trademark of Lotus Development Corporation. **  Lotus
1-2-3 is a registered trademark of the Lotus Development Corporation. ***
Symphony is a registered trademark of the Lotus Development Corporation. ****
dBASE II is a trademark of Ashton-Tate. *****  dBASE III and dBASE III Plus are
registered trademarks of Ashton-Tate.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 138. IBM PERSONAL DECISION SERIES VERSION 2, NETWORK+ EDITION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Network+ Edition is designed to allow IBM  Personal  Decision  Series
applications to operate with multiple users in the IBM PC Network.  When used
with up to twelve other IBM Personal Decision Series applications, this product
helps provide a growth opportunity for the Personal Decision Series user by
allowing multiple IBM Personal Computers to  run with  a  common set of files
and programs.  This common set of files and programs can be installed on an IBM
Personal Computer XT or an IBM Personal Computer AT which becomes the server
machine.

Additional workstation systems (nodes) can be attached and supported by the
server.

The Personal Decision Series Network+ Edition is a tool for installing other
Personal Decision Series editions in an IBM personal computer network
environment.  This environment may be an IBM PC Local Area Network or an IBM
Token-Ring Network.

Network+:

    o   Sets up a single PC for the use of Personal Decision Series on
        the network.
    o   Replaces parts of Personal Decision Series with functions
        required for operation on a network.
    o   Installs Personal Decision Series editions on a PC or lets the
        PC use Personal Decision Series editions from a server.
    o   Creates DOS batch files containing the network commands needed
        to operate Personal Decision Series in a network environment.
    o   Displays the subdirectory structure Network+ built on your PC,
        including the batch files and their contents.

Network+ is designed to allow Personal Decision Series editions to operate with
multiple users.  When used with other Personal Decision Series editions,
Networks+ allows multiple IBM PCs to run with a common set of files and
programs.  This common set of files and programs is installed on a server PC.
Additional PCs attached to the network are supported by the server.

In order to share Personal Decision Series files and programs, each PC must
have its own licensed Network+ installed.

These capabilities become available after Network+ is installed, allowing
Personal Decision Series to operate in a network environment:

    o   Support multiple concurrent users.
    o   Share data.
    o   Use definitions from common libraries.
    o   Update indexed files by simultaneous multiusers.
    o   Share Personal Decision Series editions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 139. PERSONAL DECISION SERIES VERSION 2, REPORTS+ EDITION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Reports+ Edition is an advanced report writer and an application generator.
Together with Data Edition, Reports+ Edition enables the end user to produce
customized reports and displays from data managed by Data Edition as well as
data from other programs on the IBM Personal Computer.

The Personal Decision Series Reports+ Edition is an advanced report writer,
screen builder, and application generator.  Together with the IBM Personal
Decision Series Data Edition, Reports+ enables you to produce customized
reports and displays from data managed by the Data Edition.

Reports+ provides the following key features and functions:

    o   Reports
            Interactive report design on the screen.
            Automatic report definition using specifications saved from
            a Data Edition query.
            Up to 242 characters wide.
            Dynamic inserting and deleting of lines without redrawing
            the report.
            User-specified titles, headings, and footings.
            Up to five levels of summary totals.
            Numeric formatting using floating dollar signs, leading
            asterisks, leading or trailing plus and minus signs, and
            decimal points.
            Multiple print styles within a report:  expanded, compressed,
            and normal.
            Automatic printing of date and page numbers.
            Conditional print lines specified interactively.
    o   File access
            Up to six files in a program.
            Read, write, erase and update functions.
            Up to 200 fields per report or program.
            Cross-file calculations: addition, subtraction,
            multiplication, division, variance, and cross-foot without
            programming.
    o   Screen design
            Screens for data entry or inquiry with constant text, and
            input/output fields.
            Up to 10 screens per program, 50 fields per screen.
            Windows larger or smaller than the display screen.
            Data entry screens that verify information using range
            checking, table searches, and patterns.
    o   Application program generation
            Programs that automatically read files, print report lines,
            and update files.
            Customized applications using your own BASIC statements.
            Freeform programs to control file, screen and report
            processing.
            Sample programs that can be used as models for file updating
            and transaction processing programs.
    o   Support for IBM local area network and IBM token ring network
        when used with the IBM Personal Decision Series Network+ Edition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 140. IBM PS/2 INTERNAL TAPE BACKUP PROGRAM VERSION 2.0 (DOS COMPATIBLE) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM PS/2* Internal Tape Backup Program Version 2.0 (DOS compatible) and the
IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program Version 1.01 (OS/2* compatible) enhance
the PS/2 8540, 8550, 8560, 8565, 8570, 8580, 8590 and 8595 by allowing the user
to transfer up to 120 MB of formatted data from a disk storage device to a
removable mini tape cartridge for later recall.

For the customer's convenience, the IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program
Version 2.0 (DOS compatible) and the IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program
Version 1.01 (OS/2 compatible) are also offered in separate Convenience Kits
that include the appropriate program, the IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Unit
(#5279), and a formatted mini tape cartridge in one package.  The IBM PS/2
Internal Tape Backup Program Version 2.0 (DOS compatible) and the IBM PS/2
Internal Tape Backup Program Version 1.01 (OS/2 compatible) with the IBM PS/2
Internal Tape Backup Unit provide the customer with an easy to use, easy to
install, and technologically advanced internal tape backup system.

Upgrades from the earlier versions of the DOS compatible program to the IBM
PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program Version 2.0 (DOS compatible) or to the IBM
PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program Version 1.01 (OS/2 compatible) can be done by
ordering the appropriate upgrade. Customers can upgrade from earlier versions
of the OS/2 compatible program by ordering the IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup
Program  Version 1.01 (OS/2 compatible) upgrade.

This product enables the IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program Version 2.0 (DOS
compatible) and the IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program Version 1.01 (OS/2
compatible) to be used for tape backup on the non-Micro Channel* PS/2 8540.
These products are positioned to support both DOS and OS/2 users who want an
internal backup solution for most models of the PS/2, providing a high capacity
internal tape backup solution for that requirement. The IBM PS/2 Internal Tape
Backup Program IBM Version 2.0 (DOS compatible) has also been enhanced to
support error logging, a tape librarian function, Novell 2.15C and Novell
Netware 386. The IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program Version 1.01 (OS/2
compatible) continues to support the High Performance File System (HPFS) as
well as the IBM Classroom Local Area Network Administration System (ICLAS)
Version 1.11 and 1.12 file directories.  The IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup
Program Version 1.01 (OS/2 compatible) runs as a full screen application under
OS/2.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Systems management is enhanced by the capability to back up data
        from the fixed disk.
    o   User productivity is improved by the ability to operate with
        only a few key strokes.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 141. AUDIO VISUAL CONNECTION (AVC) VERSION 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Audio Visual Connection* is a PS/2* application-enabling program. This
program provides authoring software, file management capability, and a runtime
facility.  Applications can communicate with users through hypertext techniques
and digitized, high quality (between AM and FM level) audio and photo-like
color images.  A multitude of sound, display, and motion effects are provided
to make this interchange eye-catching, fast-paced, and attention-holding.  The
AVC can be used to develop standalone applications, or as a presentation
service for other programs.  Highly interactive cooperative processing is
allowed, through the AVC's interface with the host expert system product,
KnowledgeTool 2.1.1.  The AVC, in conjunction with the Audio Capture and
Playback Adapters and Video Capture Adapter/A provides a total audio-visual
solution for the application developer.  The AVC runs under OS/2* EE 1.1 or
1.2, OS/2 SE 1.1 or 1.2, or DOS 4.0 with expanded memory support. * AVC and
OS/2 are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation. PS/2 is
a registered trademark of the International Business Machines Corporation.

The Audio Visual Connection is a PS/2 application-enabling program that
provides authoring software, file management capability, and a runtime
facility.  Applications can communicate to users through hypertext techniques
and digitized, high quality audio and color images.  AVC is designed for use by
the non-data processing individual, as well as the data processing
professional. The Audio Visual Authoring (AVA) language synchronizes image and
audio while providing many special effects.  It enables highly interactive
audio-visual applications by integrating the facilities for logic, file
input/output, variables, and calculations, into dialogs (stories).  Screen
input/output is also supported, and features a hypertext-like "link" capability
which allows random traversing of information.  Uses range from a standalone
non-interactive presentation application to an audio visual workstation
front-end in an application requiring extensive interaction with the
workstation user and complex supporting-application code.  AVC features are
oriented toward Information Delivery applications.  AVC can be used to develop
applications such as marketing and education presentations, self-study courses,
expert systems diagnostics and training, image data bases, merchandising, kiosk
information systems, point-of-purchase advertising, and news dissemination.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Support of OS/2 EE/SE
    o   Desktop audio-visual capability using high quality photo-like
        color images and high quality (between AM and FM level) audio
    o   Access to many types of images, drawings and text screens using
        Video Capture Adapter/A, scanned image, image conversion and
        copy screen programs
    o   High quality presentation text:  Anti-aliased, kerned,
        proportionally spaced, multiple styles and sizes
    o   Audio options:  Voice quality, music quality, stereo music
        quality
    o   Highly interactive applications allowed through the use of the
        Audio-Visual Authoring language
    o   Hypertext-like link capability
    o   HyperHelp*:  A hypertext-like on-line help for animated demos of
        product functions
    o   Runtime component distributed at no additional charge
    o   PS/2 audio-visual presentation services front-end for IBM host
        Expert System product (KnowledgeTool)
    o   All editors and capture facilities designed for ease of use
    o   Flexible user interface:  Keyboard or mouse
*HyperHelp is a trademark of the International Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 142. IBM M-CONTROL PROGRAM/2 VERSION 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM M-Control Program/2 Version 2.0 includes programming interfaces for DOS
and separate multimedia toolkits for OS/2* Presentation Manager* and
Microsoft(1) Windows(2) 3.0.  Significant changes have been made to support the
Media Control Interface (MCI) for the Microsoft Multimedia Windows Extensions
1.0.  The IBM M-Control Program/2 Version 2.0 allows application developers to
utilize the multimedia features of the IBM M-Motion Video Adapter/A.  It
replaces the current IBM M-Control Program/2.

Enhancements include:

    o   Support for the IBM M-Motion Video Adapter/A and various
        videodisc player device drivers for Microsoft Multimedia Windows
        Extensions
    o   Sample Media Control Interface (MCI) application with source code
    o   Digital Audio support for the IBM M-Motion Video Adapter/A under
        Microsoft Windows 3.0 in both MCI and non-MCI environments
    o   Improved video windowing performance under Microsoft Windows 3.0
    o   Additional videodisc player support

Refer to Programming Announcement 290-695, dated October 30, 1990, for more
information on the the IBM M-Control Program/2.  Users who acquire the IBM
M-Control Program/2 Version 2.0 are entitled to a future update of the product
at no additional charge when the OS/2 multimedia extension support becomes
available.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides new videodisc player drivers supporting the Microsoft
        Windows Media Control Interface (MCI) standards.
    o   Provides accessibility to the IBM M-Motion Video Adapter/A's
        digital audio function through the low-level audio services of
        the Microsoft Windows Media Control Interface (MCI).  Also,
        provides emulation of the low-level audio services which enables
        digital audio in a non-MCI environment.  Both mono and stereo
        sample rates are supported.
    o   Provides a string level Media Control Interface (MCI) device
        driver to access the motion and still video functions of the IBM
        M-Motion Video Adapter/A.  This MCI device driver includes new
        customized commands that support the capabilities of the IBM
        M-Motion Video Adapter/A under the Microsoft Multimedia Windows
        1.0.
    o   Enhances video windowing performance under Multimedia Toolkit
        for Microsoft Windows 3.0.
    o   Provides upward compatibility with IBM M-Control Program/2
        supporting the IBM M-Motion Video Adapter/A:
        -   Includes an IBM DOS programming interface
        -   Includes an OS/2 Presentation Manager and a Microsoft
            Windows 3.0 Toolkit containing programmable window class
            objects for motion video and videodisc players
    o   Provides investment protection with compatibility to IBM M-Motion
        Video Adapter/A enhancements and expanded multimedia devices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 143. IBM ACTIONMEDIA II DEVELOPER'S TOOLKIT V1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The ActionMedia II Developer's Toolkit Version 1.1 (F/N 3063, P/N 04G5-131)
allows application and tools developers to become more productive in the
creation of ActionMedia II** programs.  The Developer provides the same
function as Version 1.0 with these additional features:

    o   Executes with AVK 1.1
    o   Executes in an OS/2 2.0 operating environment
    o   Executes in a Windows** 3.1 environment
    o   Provides sample 'C' source code for use in a Windows 3.1 environment

The Developer also includes the ActionMedia II Technical Reference manual and a
Programmer's Guide.  The ActionMedia II Developer's Toolkit Version 1.1 Upgrade
Kit provides customers' using the ActionMedia II Developer Version 1.0 the
capability to upgrade to Version 1.1 without any additional charge.

ActionMedia II products enable all of the advantages of a fully digital
solution to the whole range of multimedia PS/2 applications.  When motion video
is digitized and compressed using the DVI Technology compression techniques, it
can be treated like all other data objects, which are stored, transmitted,
edited and mixed along with digital compressed audio and natural still images
on standard PS/2 media and peripheral devices.  This capability positions
ActionMedia II as the right technology for the future, when multimedia is seen
as the natural extension of the full range of existing PS/2 applications.  The
opportunity exists for a new set of applications dependent on digital
multimedia.  The ActionMedia II Developer Version 1.1 assists developers in
gaining familiarity with the ActionMedia II Audio Video Kernel programming
interface, and reaching a higher degree of competence and productivity in
application development.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Source 'C' code and a Programmer's Guide for use by developers
        to acquire skills in the use of the ActionMedia II Audio Video
        Kernel programming interface
    o   File utilities for developers to edit and check the AVSS files
        they create
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** ActionMedia II is a trademark of Intel Corporation. **
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 144. IBM STORYBOARD LIVE! VERSION 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Storyboard Live! Version 2.0 is a multimedia application that lets the user
mix video, audio, animation, still photography, painting, music and text to
produce high quality on-screen presentations.  IBM Storyboard Live! Version 2.0
is also part of the Ultimedia* Tools Series from IBM.

The four primary target audiences are: managers, staff and assistants in sales
and marketing departments and companies; creative services personnel;
independent software vendors; and independent hardware vendors.

Experience with previous versions of Storyboard has shown that, for most
purposes, the product is limited only by the ingenuity and creativity of the
user.  Storyboard has been used for:

    o   Sales presentations
    o   Product presentations
    o   Product announcements
    o   Pass-by displays
    o   Classroom presentations
    o   Programmed instruction (self-teaching)
    o   Site directory information
    o   Task force reports.

HIGHLIGHTS

      o   Storyboard Live! helps increase user productivity with a new
          user interface and improved function.
      o   Storyboard Live!'s wide range of hardware support allow users
          to easily grow their system in the future.
      o   Storyboard Live! offers an exciting and cost effective
          alternative to traditional presentations as a business
          solution.
      o   Storyboard Live! helps protects a user's investment by offering
          greater integration with other software and hardware.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** AST Premium is a registered trademark of AST Research
Inc. ** Compaq is a registered trademark of Compaq Computer Corporation. **
Dell System is a registered trademark of Dell Corporation. ** Epson is a
registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. ** Equity is a trademark of
Epson America. ** Tandy is a registered trademark of Tandy Corporation. **
Paradise is a registered trademark of Western Digital Corporation. ** Diamond
SpeedSTAR is a trademark of Diamond Computer Systems, Inc. ** Western Digital
is a trademark of Western Digital Corporation. ** Hewlett-Packard LaserJet+,
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 500+, and Hewlett-Packard Paintjet are trademarks of
Hewlett-Packard Corporation. ** Quandram and Quadjet are trademarks of Quadram
Corporation ** Mouse System is a trademark of Mouse Systems Corporation. **
Visi On is a trademark of Visicorp. ** Kurta is a trademark of Kurta
Corporation. ** Summagraphics is a registered trademark of Summagraphics
Corporation. ** Digital Vision, Inc. Computer Eyes is a trademark of Digital
Vision, Inc. ** Jovian Logic Corporation VIA is a trademark of Jovian Logic
Corporation. ** Truvision and Truevision TARGA+ are registered trademarks of
Truvision Corporation. ** Creative Labs Video Blaster and Creative Labs Sound
Blaster are trademarks of Creative Labs, Inc. ** ActionMedia is a trademark of
Intel Corporation. ** Media Vision, Pro Audio Spectrum, Pro Audio Spectrum and
Thunder Board are trademarks of Media Vision, Inc. ** Music Quest MQX-32 and
MQX-16S are trademarks of Music Quest. ** Roland MPU-401 is a trademark of
Roland Corporation. ** Voyetra Technologies V-400x, V-4001cs, V-22, V-22m,
V-24s, and V-24sm are trademarks of Voyetra Technologies. ** MS-DOS is a
trademark of Microsoft Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 145. IBM DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT CLIENT FOR WINDOWS VERSION 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Distributed Computing Environment (DCE) specified by the Open Software
Foundation (OSF) is the foundation for distributed computing in an open systems
environment.  IBM DCE Client for Windows consists of the core services
specified by the OSF DCE architecture necessary to execute a secure distributed
application, including RPC, Security, Threads, Distributed Time and Naming.
IBM DCE Client for Windows provides production level DCE Services to link more
powerful systems like UNIX, AIX, OS/2.  OS/2 DCE Servers are available for
development via the IBM DCE Software Developer's Kit for OS/2 and Windows.  The
client is an end-user product that complements the IBM AIX DCE/6000 Product
Family and the IBM DCE for OS/2 Security and Cell Directory Servers provided in
the IBM DCE SDK for OS/2 and Windows for development to create heterogeneous
distributed systems.  The OSF DCE technology has received strong acceptance in
the computing industry from major system vendors, ISVs, and large corporate
developers.  DCE is becoming a de facto standard for distributed computing in a
multi-vendor environment. Many of the world's leading hardware and software
vendors, as well as industry groups, have publicly committed to using and
delivering products based on the DCE technology.  The DCE is a key part of
IBM's distributed computing strategy.  And with this announcement, IBM is
continuing to provide access to this powerful environment in the PC-LAN
industry.

The IBM DCE Client for Windows consists of:

    o   REMOTE PROCEDURE CALL extends the typical procedure call model by
        supporting direct calls to procedures on remote systems.
    o   NAMING SERVICES provides an application to query the DCE Cell
        Directory Services name space to identify resources by name
        rather than location.
    o   TIME SERVICES provides single system-wide time reference.
    o   SECURITY SERVICES provide encryption and authentication services
        to ensure the privacy and authenticity of the client/server
        transactions.
    o   THREADS provides a convenient mechanism to provide concurrency
        by creating and controlling multiple threads of execution within
        a single process.

This package is offered with User Data Privacy in the U.S. and Canada, and
without User Data Privacy in EMEA, AP, and IBM LA.  The User Data Privacy
function allows applications to encrypt user data via remote procedure calls.
There are U.S. government regulations that control the export of the User Data
Privacy packages outside of the Unites States.  Qualified customers outside of
the U.S. and Canada may obtain the package with User Data Privacy via a special
bid process.  IBM DCE Client for Windows applications may be developed by using
the Windows DCE application development environment available in the IBM's DCE
Software Developer's Kit for OS/2 and Windows.

This new IBM DCE offering for Windows is the latest addition to products
already on the market.  Related products already available from IBM include:
IBM AIX DCE/6000 Product Family, AIX DCE Enhanced Distributed File Server, IBM
AIX DCE GDS Server/6000, IBM AIX DCE GDS Client/6000, IBM AIX DCE Threads/6000,
IBM Encina for AIX products, IBM DCE Software Developer's Kit for OS/2 and
Windows, and IBM DCE Client for OS/2, providing the flexibility for a mixed
client/server environment.

HIGHLGHT

    o   Industry standard foundation for distributed computing
    o   Interoperability and portability across heterogeneous multi-
        vendor platforms
    o   Leadership in PC-LAN open systems solutions
    o   Protection of customer's current investment in hardware
    o   Based on DCE technology licensed from the Open Software
        Foundation (OSF)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 146. MICROSOFT MULTIMEDIA WINDOWS EXTENSIONS 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Microsoft(1) Multimedia Windows(1) Extensions 1.0 adds multimedia
capabilities to Microsoft Windows 3.0. This program enhances the Windows
graphical environment in three key areas: user interfaces, multimedia
accessories, and Control Panel applets.

IBM is providing the Microsoft Multimedia Windows Extensions 1.0 as a retail
offering to allow Windows Multimedia applications to run on IBM Personal
Systems/2* with multimedia hardware adapters. Those Windows multimedia
applications written to the Media Control Interface will be portable to the IBM
multimedia extensions to OS/2 for OS/2 32-Bit. Application content created in
the Resource Interchange File Format will also be usable with the IBM
multimedia extensions to OS/2.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Media Control Interfaces for Application Developers
    o   Hardware support of Audio, MIDI, CD-ROM, Displays and Joystick
        in multimedia environments
    o   Multimedia Control Panel enables easy user interfaces
    o   Driver applets to install new and configure existing drivers

Microsoft Multimedia Windows Extensions 1.0 will provide the application
developer with a consistent high level programming interface.  Application
developers can easily incorporate CD-quality stereo music, voice and sound
effects, images, and animation into traditional business applications such as
spread sheets and word processors. CD-ROM, permits easy distribution of large
data bases.  Multimedia also opens up a new world of business solutions in the
following areas:

    o   Self-guided training
    o   Education
    o   Merchandising
    o   Public access (kiosks)
    o   Entertainment
    o   Publishing
    o   Home use
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. (1) Microsoft and Microsoft Windows are registered
Trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 147. IBM PERSONAL APPLICATION SYSTEM/DOS FOR WINDOWS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

20G0594  Personal AS for Windows

20G0596  Personal AS Development for Windows

20G0598  Personal AS Statistics for Windows

20G0600  Personal AS Business Planning for Windows

The Personal AS for Windows** products provide multi-function, customizable
decision support solutions for the business professional, operating on
stand-alone, LAN-connected and host-connected workstations.  The base product
provides access to a wide range of data on host systems and personal computers,
including access to OS/2, OS/400, DB2, and SQL/DS data.  Data analysis,
reporting and charting capabilities are also provided by the base product,
which is a prerequisite for the other three products.  Personal AS Development
for Windows provides a development environment and an object-based,
event-driven development language designed to enable rapid creation and
prototyping of application solutions.  Personal AS Statistics for Windows
provides a broad range of statistical analyses.  Personal AS Business Planning
for Windows provides a multi-dimensional business modelling tool.

Personal AS for Windows is the third member of the family which also includes
Application System, operating in the MVS and VM environments, and Personal
Application System/2, operating in the OS/2 environment.  Personal AS for
Windows can operate on a mixed LAN of OS/2 and DOS/Windows workstations, with
easy access to relational data stored in the OS/2 Database Manager.

Personal AS for Windows provides equivalent function to Personal Application
System/2 Version 2.02, and there is full two-way exchange of data, chart
specifications, report specifications, queries, graphical procedures,
applications, and business plans between the two products.  This provides an
easy migration, if required, from Personal AS for Windows to Personal
Application System/2 with full exploitation of OS/2 V2.

Personal AS for Windows provides opportunities for cooperative processing with
Application System V2 and Application System V3.1.  The Personal AS for Windows
user can create and edit Application System commands, view the results of
Application System execution, and include Application System commands and
procedures in Personal AS processes.  In addition, Data and specifications can
be exchanged between Personal AS for Windows and Application System.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Enables the creation of fully integrated customized solutions to
        business problems by using the:
        -   Powerful analysis and presentation functions of the base
            product
        -   Specialist function of the Statistics and Business Planning
            products
        -   Prototyping and application creation facilities of Personal
            AS Development for Windows, which can be used to adapt and
            extend the decision support function of Personal AS for
            Windows to meet advanced customer requirements.
    o   Provides easy access to data from a wide variety of personal and
        enterprise sources - OS/2, OS/400, and via Application System to
        DB2, SQL/DS, and heterogeneous data.
    o   DB2, SQL/DS, and OS/400 relational data can also be accessed
        without the need for AS by Personal AS/2 and Personal AS for
        Windows users via a DRDA connection.
    o   Enables cooperative processing business solutions to be built
        using Personal AS for Windows, Personal Application System/2 and
        Application System.
        -   A Personal AS for Windows user can create and edit
            Application System commands, view the results of Application
            System execution, and include Application System commands and
            procedures in Personal AS for Windows processes.
        -   Data tables and specifications can be exchanged between
            Personal AS for Windows, Personal Application System/2 and
            Application System.
    o   Operates on stand-alone, LAN-connected and host-connected
        workstations.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 148. IBM SAA PERSONAL APPLICATION SYSTEM/2 (AS/2) VERSION 2 FAMILY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

32F8344 IBM SAA Personal AS/2

32F8346 IBM SAA Personal AS Development/2

32F8348 IBM SAA Personal AS Statistics/2

32F8350 IBM SAA Personal AS Business Planning/2

32F8352 IBM SAA Personal AS Project Management/2

SAA (TM) Personal AS/2 provides a multi-function decision support solution for
the business professional.  IBM SAA Personal AS Development/2 provides an
object-oriented event-driven development language designed to enable rapid
creation and prototyping of OS/2 (R) application solutions.  IBM SAA Personal
AS Statistics/2 extends the data analysis capability of IBM SAA Personal AS/2
and provides a broad range of statistical analyses.  IBM SAA Personal AS
Project Management/2 is the IBM Project Management tool for AD/Cycle (TM) and
the OS/2 environment.  IBM SAA Personal AS Business Planning/2 provides a
multi-dimensional business modeling tool. TM) Trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation. R) Registered trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 149. PERSONALIZED LEARNING SERIES MVS FACILITIES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MVS Facilities education is a program offering in the Personalized Learning
Series.  The course is computer-based and offers students the flexibility to
study material at the time and place that is most convenient to them.  This
delivery method provides an attractive and economical alternative for some
students, when going off-site for classroom training is not feasible.

Like all Personalized Learning Series offerings, this course features:

    o   Lecture transcripts in the form of an "Electronic Book"
    o   Copies of visuals
    o   Convenient delivery.
This course is an introduction to the facilities and components that make up an
MVS/ESA system (including imbedded MVS/XA functions).  The course outlines how
these facilities and components interact with one another and with subsystems
such as JES.

The Personalized Learning Series approach to education is designed to be
effective and flexible.  It is particularly applicable to an environment in
which different tasks require different information, and the student can take
only the portion that applies to the task at hand.  This course allows the
student to complete the education "in-house" where other professionals may be
available for help and consultation.  Customers should find the course useful
for refresher training or when there is a need to introduce new people to the
MVS operating system.

The maximum benefits of this Personalized Learning Series course can be
realized by studying the lecture notes in the electronic book and optionally
reinforcing that material through the questions and answers provided.  After
the course is completed, it can be used as a refresher, a source of reference
and a job aid.

The Personalized Learning Series gives the customer the ability to have the
education at the time and place most convenient to the student.  It allows IBM
customers to maximize the return on their educational investment by saving on
tuition, airfares, housing, meals, and other expenses typically incurred when
sending multiple employees to off-site classes.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   The investments made in system installation and prior classroom
        training can be protected through the use of this tutorial as a
        job aid
    o   Tutorial can be personalized by the student to meet individual
        needs
    o   Educated personnel should be able to utilize MVS systems more
        efficiently than untrained employees
    o   Education can lead to effective business solutions by fully
        utilizing the MVS operating system
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 150. LINKWAY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

84F7-559 (F/C 1364) IBM LINKWAY SINGLE PACK

84F7-560 (F/C 1365) IBM LINKWAY LAN PACK

IBM LinkWay* Version 2.0 is an easy to use, low cost application development
tool that enables the user to create, present and modify applications
containing text, pictures, video images and sound without requiring a
background in programming or other computer skills.  This version of IBM
LinkWay contains major improvements including VGA graphics, enhanced paint
program, improved text editors and a full function script language. * LinkWay
is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

LinkWay Version 2.00 will become a strategic application authoring and
presentation tool for developing multimedia and hyper-navigation products for
the DOS market, as well as continue to be the ease-of-use application
development tool for teachers and students.  The inclusion of LinkWay in IBM
Education LAN and Tools (EdLAN) will lead to a dramatic increase in the
availability of LinkWay on IBM education networks and encourage the development
of networked as well as stand alone applications.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   High function script language with subroutines, bit maps, and
        button controls
    o   Many usability aids such as contextual help, text reflow, and
        online tutorial
    o   Enhanced paint program with scaling, cut and paste, text
        smoothing and pixel editing
    o   Reference buttons to provide scrolling "hyper-text"
    o   VGA mode (640X480 by 16 colors)
    o   Grayscale printing of MCGA 256 color pictures
    o   User selection and creation of palettes
    o   Performance improvements in picture loading and page to page
        transitions
* Storyboard Plus is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 151. PERSONALIZED LEARNING SERIES - SQL WORKSHOP EXERCISES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SQL Workshop is announced as a program offering in the Personalized Learning
Series.  The course is computer-based and offers students the flexibility to
study material at the time and place that is most convenient to them.  This
delivery method provides an attractive and economical alternative for some
students, when off-site classroom training is not feasible.

Like all Personalized Learning Series offerings, this course features:

    o   Lecture transcripts in the form of an "Electronic Book"
    o   Copies of visuals
    o   A self-evaluation option that provides a personalized study
        recommendation for each student
    o   Convenient delivery

In addition, the course includes exercise materials that allow students to
acquire hands-on practice. Since the Structured Query Language is a Systems
Application Architecture* (SAA) product, SAA exercises are available on the
PS/2* for the S/370* and the PS/2 platforms.  AS/400 exercises can be ordered
also. *Systems Application Architecture and S/370 are trademarks and PS/2 is a
Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

This education is designed to teach the common SQL that can be run in the
relational database management system in the SAA environments- MVS DB2, VM
SQL/DS, OS/400 and OS/2-EE.  This computer-based education is applicable for
SQL users in any of the SAA environments, and is based on the classroom course
of the same name (U4045).

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   An on-line, computer-based tutorial for the common SQL used on
        all SAA platforms
    o   Supplemental training for
        -   SQL users in the MVS DB2* environment
        -   SQL users in the VM SQL/DS environment
        -   SQL users in the OS/2* Database Manager environment
        -   SQL users in the OS/400* relational database environment
    o   Provides on-the-job training and review
*MVS DB2 and OS/400 are trademarks and OS/2 is a registered trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 152. DISPLAYWRITE 5/2(DW 5/2) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM  DisplayWrite*  5/2  is an OS/2 based application product, containing all
the function provided by the IBM Personal Computer DisplayWrite 4/2  Licensed
Program  while  adding  significant new text functions and user interface en-
hancements, including a user specified option to select between two different
user levels and the ability to view and print text, images and graphics.  In
addition,  a command line function provides an expert user the ability to by-
pass menus while in text.  The IBM DisplayWrite 5/2 Composer includes a docu-
ment composition feature providing WYSIWYG (What You See  Is  What  You  Get)
function  of  advanced  layout,  text,  image,  graphics  composition,  and
typographic font printing.  New Direct Customer Support for end users via the
IBM Support Center, 1-800-237-5511, will be available at  General  Availabil-
ity. *DisplayWrite  is  a  trademark of the International Business Machines
Corpo- ration.

With the choice of two interfaces available at all  times,  DisplayWrite  5/2
becomes  the  product  for all, from the casual to the expert user.  In addi-
tion, the extensive on line contextual and topical Help facility  enable  all
users  to  quickly  become  familiar with the use of IBM DisplayWrite 5/2 and
DisplayWrite 5/2 Composer.  With the addition of the composer feature,  DW5/2
provides exciting new, highly competitive document composition function.

IBM  DisplayWrite  5/2  and DisplayWrite 5/2 Composer will be included in the
IBM Software Showcase that allows Authorized IBM Personal Computer Dealers to
have an inventory of various IBM PC Software products available on a consign-
ment basis.  IBM DisplayWrite 5/2 and DisplayWrite 5/2  Composer  will  offer
dealers ProPlan point values.  Dealers can return IBM DisplayWrite 4/2 inven-
tory for IBM DisplayWrite 5/2 and DisplayWrite 5/2 Composer.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   User selectable option of two interfaces
    o   Command line provides the ability to bypass menus
    o   Image/graphics import, view and print
    o   Extensive OEM (Other Equipment Manufacture) printer support
    o   DisplayWrite's entry into desk top publishing functions
        -   Layout editor with typographic font and PostScript printing
    o   1-800 number end user support


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 153. IBM DISPLAYWRITE(TM) DICTIONARIES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

32F8289  IBM DisplayWrite Afrikaans Dictionary

32F8290  IBM DisplayWrite Catalan Dictionary

32F8291  IBM DisplayWrite Danish Dictionary

32F8292  IBM DisplayWrite Dutch Dictionary

32F8282  IBM DisplayWrite English (UK) Dictionary

32F8281  IBM DisplayWrite English (US) Dictionary

32F8288  IBM DisplayWrite English (US) Legal and Medical Dictionaries

32F8284  IBM DisplayWrite French (Canadian) Dictionary

32F8283  IBM DisplayWrite French (National) Dictionary

32F8293  IBM DisplayWrite German (National) Dictionary

32F8294  IBM DisplayWrite German (Swiss) Dictionary

32F8295  IBM DisplayWrite Icelandic Dictionary

32F8296  IBM DisplayWrite Italian Dictionary

32F8285  IBM DisplayWrite Norwegian Dictionary

32F8298  IBM DisplayWrite Portuguese (Brazilian) Dictionary

32F8297  IBM DisplayWrite Portuguese (National) Dictionary

32F8286  IBM DisplayWrite Spanish Dictionary

32F8287  IBM DisplayWrite Swedish Dictionary

IBM DisplayWrite Dictionaries provide writing aids such as spell aid, spell
check, and hyphenation.  Synonyms are supported for selected dictionaries.
There are 17 language dictionaries plus both legal and medical dictionaries in
US English.  All of these dictionaries operate under DisplayWrite 4 Ver- sion
2.  Additionally, the legal and medical dictionaries operate under DisplayWrite
4/2.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   17 language dictionaries for spell aid, spell checking,
        hyphenation
    o   Legal and medical dictionaries in US English are available
    o   Synonyms are supported in seven dictionaries: English (US),
        English (UK), French (National), French (Canadian), Norwegian,
        Spanish, and Swedish
*  DisplayWrite  and  Operating  System/2 are trademarks of the International
Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 154. DISPLAYWRITE 4 V2-ENG. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM DisplayWrite(TM) 4 Version 2, a Personal Computer (DOS) based full-function
text editor, builds on the DisplayWrite family base by offering all of the
functions provided by the IBM DisplayWrite 4/2 Licensed Program which was
shipped in OS/2 earlier this year.  Additional IBM and non-IBM printer support,
import function, enhanced host integration with PROFS Appli- cations Support
Feature 2.2.2 and enhancements for the creation and editing of documents are
featured.  New capabilities include:

    o   Multiple columns of text which can flow from one column to
        another or groups of related items which can be kept together
        across columns
    o   Synonym support
    o   Sort blocks of text
    o   View formatted page and view another document

IBM DisplayWrite Dictionaries are additional dictionaries to be used with IBM
DisplayWrite 4 Version 2.  When invoked, an active dictionary is used in pro-
viding linguistics functions such as spell aid, spell check, and hyphenation.
Synonyms are supported for seven of the language dictionaries.  The languages
are offered in 18 individual packages.  There are 17 language dictionary
packages, and one package that contains both a legal and medical dictionary.

Licensees of IBM DisplayWrite 4 and IBM DisplayWrite 3 Versions 1.0, 1.1, will
be offered an upgrade to IBM DisplayWrite 4 Version 2 for an upgrade charge.
NOTE: DisplayWrite is a trademark of the International Business Machines Cor-
poration.

IBM  DisplayWrite 4 Version 2 should be marketed as a full-function text edi-
tor for the personal computer user in a host connected or standalone environ-
ment who benefits from the extensive printer support, document interchange
capabilities, and enhanced creation and text editing capabilities.  IBM
DisplayWrite 4 Version 2 will be included in the IBM Software Showcase which
allows Authorized IBM Personal Computer Dealers to have an inventory of various
IBM PC Software products available on a consignment basis.  IBM DisplayWrite 4
Version 2 will offer dealers ProPlan point values.

HIGHLIGHTS IBM DisplayWrite 4 Version 2 includes all the DisplayWrite 4
functions plus the following enhancements:

    o   Multi-column text support
    o   View formatted page
    o   Synonym support
    o   Multiple concurrent dictionary support
    o   Change dictionary or supplements in Create/Revise
    o   Spell-check in footnotes
    o   Footnotes have widow-line control
    o   Default type styles are chosen when a pitch indicates a non-
        supported type style
    o   Pitch can be changed in headers and footers
    o   Date control in headers and footers
    o   Color Printing capability
    o   Print Key available in Create/Revise
    o   Help on Keys lists functions with their assigned keys
    o   Text alignment between margins
    o   Optional overstrike of blanks and tabs
    o   Sort (up to 4 levels) blocks of text
    o   Copy document format
    o   Enhancements to the Notepad function include Copy and Append,
        ASCII Copy and Append and Move and Append
    o   Notepad can be used in View Document
    o   View Another Document permits selective copying of text from a
        second document while revising the first
    o   Skip to Line instructions supported in all merge functions
    o   Enhanced data file support for merge with data files
    o   PASF 2.2.2 using the Generalized Callable Interface
    o   Support of Expanded Memory


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 155. IBM DISPLAYWRITE 5 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM DisplayWrite* 5 is a PC DOS based application product, containing all the
function provided by the IBM Personal Computer DisplayWrite 5/2 Licensed
Program, including a user specified option to select between two different user
levels, the ability to view and print text, images and graphics and a command
line function that provides an expert user the ability to bypass menus while in
text.  IBM and non-IBM printer support, host integration using the Generalized
Callable Interface (GCI) and LAN support are featured.

Linguistics functions such as spell aid, spell verify, hyphenation, and
synonyms (in selected languages) are supported by means of the IBM DisplayWrite
dictionaries that include 16 additional languages plus legal and medical
terminologies.  Up to three of these dictionaries can be used concurrently with
DisplayWrite 5.

The IBM DisplayWrite family of licensed programs provides word processing
capabilities for many types of users ranging from the casual user to the expert
user.

Casual users that need basic text entry and editing can license the IBM
DisplayWrite Assistant.  For customers using a Personal Computer XT* (PC XT*)
or Personal System/2* (PS/2*) Model 25/30, DisplayWrite 4 Version 2 is
available.  This version also provides some connectivity support, for example,
Local Area Networks (LANs) and Application System/400* (AS/400*).

With the choice of two user interfaces at all times, DisplayWrite 5 provides
the flexibility of using menus or a command line.  Word processing functions
such as search and replace, spell checker, mail merge functions, footnoting,
macros (for example, keystroke programming), index, table of contents, and much
more are available.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Optional command line allows menu bypass
    o   List processing
    o   Image/graphics view and print
    o   Table of Contents/Index/Table of Authorities (Reference Lists)
    o   LAN server code included
    o   Additional IBM and non-IBM printer support
    o   Host integration using the Generalized Callable Interface
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Compaq and Compaq Deskpro are trademarks of Compaq
Computer Corporation. ** Toshiba is a trademark of Toshiba America
Incorporated. ** PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. **
C.Itoh C-715A is a trademark of C.Itoh Electronic Corporation. ** Citizen,
Citizen 120-D and Citizen Tribute are trademarks of  Citizen American
Corporation. ** Diablo, Xerox, and 4045 are trademarks of the Xerox
Corporation. ** Epson is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. ** Epson
ActionPrinter is a trademark of Epson America, Inc. ** FX is a trademark of
Epson America, Incorporated. ** Hewlett-Packard is a trademark of the
Hewlett-Packard Corporation. ** NEC and Pinwriter are trademarks of Nippon
Electronic Company, Limited. ** OKIDATA and MICROLINE are trademarks of Oki
American, Incorporated. ** QMS and QMS-PS are trademarks of QMS, Incorporated.
** Star NB24-10, Star NB24-15, Star NX-15, Star NX-1000, Star SG-10, and Star
SG-15 are trademarks of Star Micronics, Incorporated; Star Manufacturing
Company, Limited. ** OmniLaser is a trademark of Texas Instruments,
Incorporated. ** Lotus is a trademark of Lotus Development Corporation. **
Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation. ** Novell is a trademark of Novell,
Inc. ** Visi-On Mouse is a trademark of Visi-On Corporation. ** PC Mouse is a
trademark of Mouse Systems. ** Microsoft is a trademark of Microsoft
Corporation. ** 3Com is a trademark of 3Com Corporation. ** Software Carousel
is a registered trademark of SoftLogic Solutions, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 156. IMAGE SUPPORT FACILITY 2 VERSION 1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Image Support Facility 2 Version 1.1 provides support for the IBM 5202
Quietwriter III, IBM Personal System/2 Color Display 8512, IBM Personal
System/2 Color Display 8513, IBM Personal System/2 Monochrome Display 8503, IBM
Personal System/2 Model 30 and the IBM Personal System/2 Models 50, 60, 80
family, in addition to all of the functions contained in Version 1.0 for the
Personal Computer family.  Users of Image Support Facility 2 Version 1.0 will
be offered a chargeable upgrade to Image Support Facility 2 Version 1.1 through
September 30, 1987.

Image Support Facility 2 V1.1 is a "tool kit" which assists programmers in
developing image application programs running on the IBM Personal Computer or
IBM Personal System/2.  It is designed to provide basic image functions and
device support which are prerequisites for image application programs.  Image
Support Facility 2 V1.1 provides the means to capture image information via the
IBM 3117 Scanner and the IBM 3118 Scanner attached to an
appropriately-configured IBM Personal Computer or IBM Personal System/2.

HIGHLIGHTS The Image Support Facility 2 Version 1.1 is compatible with Image
Support Facility 2 Version 1.0 with all the following functions supported for
the current IBM Personal Computer family and also has all the same functions as
those of Version 1.1 for the newly-announced IBM Personal System/2 Models 50,
60, 80 and IBM Personal System/2 Model 30.

    o   Provides an application programming interface (API) to
        facilitate program development.
    o   Provides image support services called or invoked by the
        application
        program via the API.
    o   Supports the IBM 3117 and the IBM 3118 Scanners with/without
        Automatic Document Feed.
    o   Supports the IBM PC or IBM Personal System/2 displays to view
        image.
    o   Supports the IBM PC or IBM Personal System/2 printers to print
        image.
    o   Manipulates image data with the following functions: move, copy,
        rotate, scale, invert, extract, erase, mirror and paint.
    o   Compresses and decompresses image data.

In addition to all of the functions contained in Version 1.0, Version 1.1
provides the following functions.

    o   Supports the IBM 5202 Quietwriter III
    o   Supports IBM Personal System/2 Color Display 8512
    o   Supports IBM Personal System/2 Color Display 8513
    o   Supports IBM Personal System/2 Monochrome Display 8503


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 157. IBM C/2 1.10 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM C/2 (TM) Version 1.10 supports the IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating
System Version 3.30, and IBM Operating System/2 (TM) Version 1.00 and 1.10
Standard Edition (SE), and Extended Edition (EE).  Programmers can use this C
compiler to develop applications that take advantage of Operating System/2
features.  IBM C/2 Version 1.10 delivers the IBM C Common Programming Interface
(CPI) language definition.

IBM C/2 Version 1.10 is a C compiler for the IBM Personal Computer, and IBM
Personal System/2 family.  This compiler will run on and generate code for the
8086/8088/80286 systems with DOS 3.30, and 80286 systems with OS/2 Version 1.00
and 1.10 (SE and EE).  IBM C/2 Version 1.10 operates under DOS 3.30 on 80386
Personal Systems.

IBM C/2 Version 1.10 supports the 80386 under OS/2, in the DOS mode
(Compatibility box only), and OS/2 mode (16 bit 80286/80386 protect mode).

IBM C/2 Version 1.10 is a replacement for IBM C/2 Version 1.00.  The marketing
environment for IBM C/2 Version 1.10 is Application Developers, users who
develop their own internal applications, and users who require the application
portability provided by SAA.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Runs on and generates code for 8086/8088/80286 machines under
        DOS 3.30, and the 80286 with IBM Operating System/2 Version 1.00,
        and 1.10 (SE and EE).
    o   Operates under DOS 3.30 on 80386 and under OS/2 (TM) Version
        1.00, and 1.10 (SE and EE) on the 80386 (16 bit).
    o   Specific Runtime Libraries are reentrant, and the creation of
        Dynamic Link library modules is supported.
    o   Programmers can create code that executes in all OS/2
        environments, including generating IOPL code.
    o   Debugs multi-threaded applications, and applications which run
        under the Presentation Manager (TM) in OS/2 Version 1.10 (SE and
        EE).
    o   Delivers the IBM SAA C CPI language definition.
    o   The utilities EXEMOD, MAKE, LIB, and LINK support DBCS (Double
        Byte Character Set).
    o   The MAKE utility is enhanced to include much of the function of
        the XENIX (TM)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 158. IBM COMPILERS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

6280-179 IBM BASIC COMPILER/2

6280-181 IBM MACRO ASSEMBLER/2

6280-183 IBM PASCAL COMPILER/2

6280-185 IBM FORTRAN/2

The new versions of IBM compilers and assembler include: IBM FORTRAN/2, IBM
COBOL/2, IBM C/2, IBM Macro Assembler/2, IBM Pascal Compiler/2, and IBM BASIC
Compiler/2, and an updated IBM BASIC Reference, Version 3.30.

These compilers and assembler support both the IBM Personal Computer Disk Op-
erating System Version 3.3 and IBM Operating System/2.

IBM COBOL/2 will be staged in two releases with an early release called IBM
COBOL, Version 2.00 which supports IBM Disk Operating System Version 3.2, and
3.3.

In addition, a new version of IBM Personal Computer Pascal Compiler,  Version
2.02, and IBM Personal Computer Professional FORTRAN Compiler, Version 1.30 are
announced for the IBM Disk Operating System Versions 3.2 and 3.3

The IBM Personal Computer Pascal Compiler, Version 2.02 includes both 3.5-inch
and 5.25-inch  media, and also includes fixes to IBM Personal Com- puter Pascal
Compiler Version 2.00 (6024128) which is being withdrawn from marketing.

The IBM Personal Computer Professional FORTRAN Compiler, Version 1.30 in-
cludes both 3.5-inch and 5.25-inch media support and includes fixes to IBM
Professional FORTRAN Version 1.00 (6024200) which is being withdrawn from
marketing.

The following language products: IBM COBOL, Version 2.00, IBM Personal Computer
Pascal Compiler, Version 2.02, and IBM Personal Computer Professional FORTRAN
Compiler, Version 1.30 support IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System
Version 3.2 and 3.3.  The remaining language products are designed to operate
with the IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System Version 3.3, and IBM
Operating System/2 and provide support for the development of applications that
are targeted for execution on these systems. HIGHLIGHTS

    o   IBM COBOL, Version 2.00 is a new compiler and contains both 5.25-
        inch and 3.5-inch diskettes.
    o   IBM Personal Computer Pascal Compiler, Version 2.02, and IBM
        Personal Computer Professional FORTRAN Compiler, Version 1.30 add
        3.5-inch diskettes to the currently available version of these
        products.  These products are for the IBM Disk Operating System
        Version 3.2 and 3.3.
    o   Run on IBM Operating System/2, and IBM Disk Operating System
        Version 3.3.
    o   Generate code for IBM Operating System/2, or IBM Disk Operating
        System Version 3.3.
    o   Languages and generated code can run concurrently with other
        applications in the IBM Operating System/2 concurrent
        multitasking environment.
    o   These Products contain a set of tools including Linker, Library
        Manager, and a Debugger.
    o   On IBM 80286 and IBM 80386 based machines, the compilers and
        Assembler will execute under IBM Disk Operating System Version
        3.3, and IBM Operating System/2.  On 8086, and 8088 based
        machines, the compilers and Assembler operate under IBM Disk
        Operating System Version 3.3 only.
    o   Systems Application Architecture


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 159. MICRO FOCUS PRODUCTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

5758-MFA Micro Focus COBOL Workbench Includes Micro Focus COBOL

5758-MFB Micro Focus COBOL Workbench plus CICS OS/2 Option

5758-MFC Micro Focus COBOL Workbench plus CICS Option

5758-MFD Micro Focus COBOL Workbench plus IMS Option

5758-MFE Micro Focus COBOL Workbench plus CICS Option and IMS Option

5758-MFF Micro Focus COBOL

5758-MFG Upgrade from IBM COBOL to Micro Focus COBOL

5758-MFH CICS OS/2 Option for Micro Focus COBOL Workbench

5758-MFI Micro Focus CICS Option for Micro Focus COBOL Workbench

5758-MFJ Micro Focus CICS Option-Additional Support for EBCDIC or ASCII

5758-MFK Micro Focus IMS Option for Micro Focus COBOL Workbench

5758-MFL Micro Focus IMS Option-Additional Support for EBCDIC or ASCII

5758-MFM Micro Focus 370 Assembler

IBM presents these products under the IBM Cooperative Software Program. Product
information has been provided by the program supplier, Micro Focus Limited.

IBM offers an enhancement to the Micro Focus COBOL Workbench product family
which offers new AD/Cycle Level 2 integration features.

IBM SAA AD/Cycle CoOperative Development Environment/370 (AD/Cycle CODE/370)
and the enhanced Workbench form a natural partnership for the development of
host-targeted COBOL applications.  This enhanced Workbench continues to provide
all of the function of the Micro Focus COBOL Workbench 2.5.

IBM also offers the Micro Focus Dialog System, the Human Interface Management
System (HIMS) for third generation language programmers to productively create
and maintain graphical or character based application user interfaces portable
to multiple environments.

Systems Application Architecture* (SAA*) is the framework for development of
consistent applications across the offerings of the SAA IBM Computing
environments consisting of MVS, VM, OS/400* and OS/2.  Micro Focus COBOL, IBM's
implementing SAA COBOL product for the OS/2 environment and the compiler
included in Micro Focus COBOL Workbench, implements the SAA Common Programming
Interface (CPI) definition of COBOL.  Refer to the Systems Application
Architecture COBOL Common Programming Interface Reference, (SC26-4354).

Micro Focus** ADMVS** Version 1 is an environment for developing applications
that are targeted for execution under MVS, and is designed to provide a set of
tools and facilities under OS/2 and DOS that are familiar to MVS developers.
Panels that resemble TSO/ISPF/PDF panels seamlessly integrate the Micro Focus
COBOL compiler and Advance Animator** with an SPF-like source editor, MVS JCL
and PROC execution facilities, commonly used MVS utilities, and an ISPF Dialog
Manager emulator.

Micro Focus Host Compatibility Option** for Database Manager is designed to
provide for development of DB2 compatible SQL applications using IBM Database
Manager with EBCDIC data and collating sequences.  IBM Query Manager can be
used for reporting using prompted query and forms, interactive and batch update
of table data, import and export, security, and many other uses.

Micro Focus 370 Assembler** (MF/370) Version 3.0.10 lets mainframe programmers
use a PC to support stand alone Assembler programs or COBOL programs containing
dynamic CALL's to Assembler.

In addition to the products above which support the AD/Cycle framework, a new
tool which supports production activities, the Micro Focus IMS Production
Option Version 2 Release 5, is being announced.  The Micro Focus IMS Production
Option Version 2 Release 5 is a multi-user execution environment. Currently,
the Micro Focus IMS Option** can be used to develop and test IMS applications
on programmable workstations (PWSs).

The new Micro Focus IMS Production Option enables the execution of applications
on workstations.  This ability to use the PWS as a production environment is an
exciting new capability for IMS customers.  The Micro Focus IMS Production
Option can be used for developing "departmental" IMS Applications and for
end-user testing of applications. These Micro Focus products are engineered to
run optimally on OS/2* on the PS/2*.

HIGHLIGHTS The Micro Focus COBOL Workbench family offers:

    o   Complementary function with AD/Cycle CODE/370.  By using the
        Workbench with AD/Cycle CODE/370, the COBOL programmer has a
        complementary cooperative debug facility which adds host
        integration and system test capabilities to the workstation unit
        test functions.
    o   AD/Cycle Level 2 integration features:
        -   Installation, registration and invocation of Micro Focus
            COBOL Workbench from the IBM SAA AD/Cycle Workstation
            Platform/2 (AD/Cycle WSP).  Having this Workbench evocable
            from AD/Cycle WSP is a mechanism which helps the end user
            manage AD/Cycle components.
        -   Software Configuration and Library Manager (SCLM) support.
            The Workbench supports access to SCLM.  SCLM provides library
            control for a project, ensuring that the parts of a project
            can be tracked and developed in a controlled manner.  SCLM is
            a component of Interactive System Productivity Facility/
            Program Development Facility (ISPF/PDF).
        -   SAA Common User Access* (CUA)* interfaces which utilize the
            OS/2 Presentation Manager*.  SAA CUA interfaces will be
            implemented initially on major components of Micro Focus
            COBOL Workbench.  Over time, all tools in the Workbench will
            have SAA CUA interfaces.
    o   Prototyping, development, and execution of user interfaces is
        provided through the Human Interface Management System (HIMS) in
        Micro Focus Dialog System, a high level human interface
        management tool offering advanced performance, programmer
        productivity and application portability.
    o   Interactive, visual debugging with Micro Focus Animator**
        Productivity features include break points on changing data,
        windowing, backtracking though executed code, program structure
        documentation tools, and an intelligent source code information
        system that analyzes existing programs and provides data to help
        understand program flow and code utilization characteristics.
    o   Host emulation with the CICS Option, IMS Option and Micro Focus
        370 Assembler products, including selectable EBCDIC or ASCII
        support that allows transparent access to mainframe data and
        code as well as development and testing in EBCDIC on the
        workstation; comprehensive compatibility with mainframe COBOL
        and standards including the SAA COBOL standard, IBM OS/VS COBOL,
        IBM VS COBOL II including floating point support, ANSI 85 High
        Level including the Intrinsic Functions Addendum and ANSI 74
        High Level.

MICRO FOCUS IMS PRODUCTION OPTION IS DESIGNED:

    o   To provide the ability to execute IMS applications on a
        programmable workstation.
    o   With read-only and update database sharing.
    o   To be used with IBM Database Manager for DB2* SQL emulation with
        coordinated synchronization points with IMS databases.
    o   With simple command line entry that starts DB/DC emulation.
    o   To provide for IMS transactions and IMS and COBOL batch programs.
    o   To support DOS, OS/2, and Windows**.
    o   To be used with Micro Focus Production CICS Option for CICS/DLI
        transactions.
    o   To provide for multi-user file sharing with dynamic rollback and
        logging via Fileshare V2 and supports a variety of network
        protocols.

MICRO FOCUS ADMVS IS DESIGNED:

    o   To emulate TSO/ISPF/PDF for OS/2 and DOS.
    o   To allow the user to utilize your company's ISPF panels.
    o   To allow the user to utilize your MVS data set names.
    o   To help support COBOL and Animator integration.
    o   To help support other add-on products:  DB2, IMS, CICS,
        Assembler.
    o   To provide the user with ISPF-like screen and emulation.
    o   To provide the user with ISPF-like browsers and editor.
    o   To support file management using MVS DSNs.
    o   To emulate MVS JCL execution and PROCs.
    o   To emulate MVS utilities, SORT, and IDCAMS.
    o   To emulate panel definition facilities.
    o   To emulate dialog manager.

MICRO FOCUS HOST COMPATIBILITY OPTION FOR DATABASE MANAGER IS DESIGNED:

    o   To enable development of DB2 compatible SQL applications on a
        workstation using Database Manger with EBCDIC data and collating
        sequences.
    o   For use with IBM Database Manager from Extended Services Version
        1.0 with OS/2 2.0.
    o   For use with the EBCDIC versions of Micro Focus IMS Option,
        Micro Focus IMS Production Option, Micro Focus CICS Option,
        Micro Focus Production CICS Option and batch EBCDIC programs.
    o   With a DCLGEN facility for creating COBOL copy member for declare
        table and host variables.
    o   To provide support for DB2 compatible DDL statements in COBOL
        programs.
    o   To enable batch processing of downloaded DB2 DDL statements.
    o   To support Database Manager to DB2 SQLCODE mapping facility.

MICRO FOCUS 370 ASSEMBLER IS DESIGNED TO INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING FEATURES:

    o   HELP/370, an on-line description of the 370 instruction set.
    o   Extended File Handler/370 (EFH/370), which provides:
        -   QSAM sub-system support.
        -   VSAM sub-system support.
        -   100% compatibility with the COBOL file access methods using
            the Micro Focus External File Handler**.
    o   Micro Focus ANIMATOR/370, a full-screen, source-oriented
        analysis and debugging tool.
    o   A "LIST TO CONSOLE" feature to display the assembler listing
        during the assemble step.
    o   A pop up "HEXADECIMAL ADDER/CONVERTER."
    o   A simple "SETUP" installation process.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **Micro Focus COBOL Workbench is a trademark of Micro
Focus Limited. **Micro Focus COBOL is a trademark of Micro Focus Limited.
**Micro Focus CICS Option is a trademark of Micro Focus Limited. **Micro Focus
370 Assembler is a trademark of Micro Focus Limited. **Micro Focus IMS Option
is a trademark of Micro Focus Limited and published and licensed by Stingray
Software Company, Inc. **Micro Focus IMS Production Option is a trademark of
Micro Focus Limited. **Micro Focus is a registered trademark of Micro Focus
Limited. **Micro Focus ADMVS is a trademark of Micro Focus Limited. **Micro
Focus Host Compatibility Option is a trademark of Micro Focus Limited.
**ANIMATOR is a trademark of Micro Focus Limited in the US and Micro Focus
Limited in the UK. **Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. **Micro
Focus External File Handler is a trademark of Micro Focus Limited. **Intel
80386 and Intel 80286 are trademarks of Intel Corporation. **Micro Focus XM is
a trademark of Micro Focus Limited.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 160. REALTIME INTERFACE COPROCESSOR OPERATING SYSTEM/2 SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Realtime Interface Coprocessor Operating System/2 Support is a set of
program modules that support the Realtime Interface Coprocessor, Realtime
Interface Coprocessor Multiport, or Realtime Interface Coprocessor Multiport/2
* in a system unit using the Operating System/2 (OS/2) * as its operating
system.  It consists of the following:  Realtime Interface Coprocessor I/O
Device Driver, Realtime Interface Coprocessor Dynamic Link Routines, Realtime
Interface Coprocessor OS/2 Online Dump Facility, and Realtime Interface
Coprocessor OS/2 Application Loader Utility.

Realtime Interface Coprocessor Operating System/2 Support will be provided on
both 5.25-inch and 3.5-inch diskette media. NOTE: * Trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.

The Realtime Interface Coprocessor Operating System/2 Support provides an
interface between the Operating System/2 and a Realtime Interface Coprocessor
adapter card.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Support for the Realtime Interface Coprocessor, Realtime
        Interface Coprocessor Multiport, and Realtime Interface
        Coprocessor Multiport/2.
    o   Realtime Interface Coprocessor Dynamic Link Routines.
    o   Realtime Interface Coprocessor I/O Device Driver.
    o   Realtime Interface Coprocessor OS/2 Online Dump Facility.
    o   Realtime Interface Coprocessor OS/2 Application Loader Utility.
    o   Realtime Interface Coprocessor Operating System/2 User's Guide.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 161. IBM REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR DOS SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor DOS Support is a set of program modules
that support the Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport/2*, the Realtime
Interface Co-Processor and the Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport in a
system unit using the Personal Computer Disk Operating System as its operating
system.  It consists of a Realtime Interface Co-Processor Interrupt Handler,
Realtime Interface Co-Processor Assembler Language Macro Modules, Realtime
Interface Co-Processor Online Dump Facility, and Realtime Interface
Co-Processor Program Application Loader Utility.  It will be provided on both
3.5-inch and 5.25-inch diskette media. * Trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor DOS Support provides an interface between
the Personal Computer Disk Operating System and an Realtime Interface
Co-Processor Multiport/2 adapter.

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor DOS Support is part of a hardware and
software subsystem which users can use to improve connectivity and flexibility
in interfacing and controlling outboard terminals, communication lines,
protocols, etc.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Support for the Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport/2
    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor Assembler Language Macros
    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor Interrupt Handler
    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor Online Dump Facility
    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor Application Loader Utility
    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor DOS Support User's Guide


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 162. IBM REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR C LANGUAGE SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor C Language Support is a productivity
aid for developing applications for the Realtime Interface Co-Processor,
Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport, or Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Multiport/2 *.  This support will allow users of the Realtime Interface
Co-Processor adapters to write applications and tasks that run on the
co-processor in IBM Personal Computer C Language. * Trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.

The IBM Realtime Control Program DOS Support is a set of program modules that
support the Realtime Interface Co-Processor or Realtime Interface Co-Processor
Multiport in a system unit using the Personal Computer Disk Operating System.
It consists of a Realtime Control Program Interrupt Handler, Realtime Control
Program Online Dump Facility, and Realtime Control Program Application Loader
Utility.

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor C Language Support is a productivity aid
that provides users of the Realtime Interface Co-Processor adapters the ability
to write applications and tasks that run on the co-processor in IBM Personal
Computer C Language.

The Realtime Control Program DOS Support provides an interface between either
the Personal Computer Disk Operating System or and a Realtime Interface
Co-Processor or Realtime Interface Co-Processor Multiport adapter card.  They
are part of a hardware and software subsystem that provides the user with
improved connectivity and flexibility in interfacing and controlling outboard
terminals, communications lines, protocols, etc.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor C Language Support
        -   Support for IBM Personal Computer C Language
        -   Support for small, medium, large, and huge memory models
        -   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor C Language Support
            User's Guide
    o   IBM Realtime Control Program DOS Support
        -   IBM Realtime Control Program Assembler Language Macros
        -   IBM Realtime Control Program Interrupt Handler
        -   IBM Realtime Control Program Online Dump Facility
        -   IBM Realtime Control Program Application Loader Utility
        -   IBM Realtime Control Program DOS Support User's Guide


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 163. IBM REALTIME INTERFACE CO-PROCESSOR DEVELOPER'S KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Developer's Kit is a productivity aid
for the development programmer.  It contains program support to allow the user
to develop applications for the system unit processor using a High-Level
Language.  It also contains a Program Debugger for debugging programs executing
on the Interface Co-Processor, a Dump Formatter for printing files generated
with the Dump Utility, programming examples of applications and tasks for the
Interface Co-processor, and a Developer's Guide that describes the software
support programs and program examples.

The Realtime Interface Co-Processor Developer's Kit is a productivity tool
designed for program developers writing applications for the IBM Realtime
Interface Co-Processor.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   IBM Realtime Interface Co-Processor Developer's Guide
    o   Compiled BASIC Language Interface Modules
    o   Interpretive BASIC Language Interface Modules
    o   Pascal Language Interface Modules
    o   IBM "C" Language Interface Modules
    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor Program Debugger
    o   Realtime Interface Co-Processor Dump Formatter
    o   Example application programs and tasks for the Realtime Interface
        Co-Processor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 164. IBM ISDN CO-PROCESSOR SUPPORT PROGRAM VERSION 1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

94F0696  IBM ISDN CO-PROCESSOR SUPPORT PROGRAM VERSION 1.1

94F0790  DMS-100 NETWORK SUPPORT

94F0699  5ESS NETWORK SUPPORT

The IBM Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Co-Processor Support Program
Version 1.1, selectable Network Support Program and associated hardware enables
the development of personal computer Operating System/2 Standard Edition (OS/2
SE) and DOS applications to utilize the facilities, for transmission of
numeric, text and image data, provided by ISDN.

The IBM ISDN Co-Processor Support Program Version 1.1 and associated hardware
should be considered as part of a comprehensive communications system. ISDN is
complementary to other telecommunications networks such as broadband, local and
wide area networks and for fiber optic technologies and should not be
considered in isolation.

The selectable Network Support program provides the customer with the correct
network differences to operate with the ISDN BRI interface provided by network
supplier.

ISDN should be considered in all cases where workstations are connected to
switched public networks. The 64K bandwidth, high quality digital lines, and
quick call set up capabilities will bring immediate benefits to the customer in
these situations.

ISDN should also be considered as a replacement for leased lines with low daily
usage or in situations where leased lines cannot be justified due to limited
traffic. The tariffs and load must be assessed to make a judgement of the cost
benefits of ISDN in each case.

These programs and the IBM ISDN Interface Co-Processor/2 Model 2 will allow
access to the extended services of ISDN, if provided by the network supplier
and enable customers to utilize these facilities to support applications
previously infeasible on the workstation.

The PS/2 user will be attracted to ISDN for one or more of the following
reasons:

    o   Improved reliability and speed compared with modems.
    o   Lower communications costs, subject to actual tariffs.
    o   Flexibility in using selectable protocols for data transmission
        including Synchronous Data link control (SDLC), an implementation
        of LAP-B layer protocol and ISDN Data Link Control (IDLC) layer
        protocol for attachment to a IBM 3174 ISDN BRI Adapter.
    o   Faster call setup.

The ISDN Interface Co-processor/2 Model 2 hardware provides an attachment to
PS/2 systems Models 50 and above to the BRI of an ISDN, enabling full duplex
data communication to a compatible ISDN host or workstation at  64Kbps (Kilo
bits per second) over each of the two B channels.

These programs provide support for the ISDN Interface Co-processor/2 Model 2
under DOS or OS/2 SE. Customers may elect to use OS/2 SE if their applications
and Support Program combined require over 640K (Kilobytes) of memory or
multi-tasking (flexible use of concurrent B channels to one or more
destinations).

These programs will communicate via ISDN to the following devices

    o   Another compatible PS/2 Workstation.
    o   A host IBM mainframe using SDLC via an IBM 7820 configured for
        64Kbps. (see limitations section)
    o   A Host IBM Mainframe using IDLC via an IBM 3174 ISDN BRI Adapter
        installed.
        Typically the ISDN connection can be used for:
        -   Interactive purposes such as 3270 emulation, remote graphics,
            interactive online support.
        -   Data transfer, particularly where large files are involved,
            such as high quality images.

Communication using ISDN BRI lines to selected equipment in other countries for
international use is also possible.

NATIONAL LANGUAGE SUPPORT Configurator menus, messages and publications will be
translated for the following languages:  UK English, Kanji, French and German.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   ISDN provides fast, flexible communication of text and image data
        on a high-capacity, high-quality digital telephone network.
        These programs, with the associated hardware, connects PS/2*
        workstations running OS/2 or DOS to the BRI of a selected public
        ISDN network.
    o   User selectable and mixable protocol support for
        -   Synchronous Data Link control (SDLC)
        -   An implementation of Layer Protocol for the B Channel (LAP-B)
        -   Layer Protocol for attachment to a IBM 3174 ISDN BRI Adapter
            (IDLC)
        An Application Programming Interface (API), provided as part of
        ISDN Co-Processor Support Program Version 1.1, facilitates the
        development of innovative applications.
    o   This API, provides access capability to ISDN supplementary
        services.  Supplementary services are used to manipulate the data
        and connections to provide sophisticated applications tailored
        to individual business needs.
    o   These programs with supported hardware enables ISDN connectivity
        not only to other similarly equipped PS/2 workstations, but also
        to a wide range of IBM host systems using either the 7820 (refer
        to the Limitations section) or the 3174 ISDN BRI Adapter via the
        ISDN network.
    o   These programs with the supported hardware conforms to a wide
        range of ISDN implementations provided by specific countries and
        is consistent with the International Telegraph and Telephone
        Consultative Committee (CCITT) standards.  These programs have
        been designed to be readily extensible to support additional
        protocols and functions as the CCITT standards develop.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 165. IBM ISDN COPROCESSOR SUPPORT PROGRAM VERSION 1.2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM ISDN Coprocessor Support Program Version 1.2 acts with the IBM
Communications Manager/2 Version 1.0 and the IBM ISDN Interface Coprocessor/2
Model 2 adapter to extend the capabilities of the Communications Manager to
support Basic Rate access to an Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN).
Many IBM Communications Manager/2 Version 1.0 functions and applications
written to Application Programming Interfaces (APIs) provided by the
Communications Manager are now enabled for operation over ISDN.  In general,
functions and applications can run unmodified over an ISDN when the IBM

Communications Manager/2 Version 1.0 is configured to operate with the IBM ISDN
Coprocessor Support Program Version 1.2.  For additional information see PCC
93-034 for details of IBM Communications Manager/2 Version 1.0 capability over
ISDN.

    Number      Description
    51G7127     ISDN Support Program V1.2 (5ESS)
    51G7128     ISDN Support Program V1.2 (DMS100)

HIGHLIGHTS The IBM ISDN Coprocessor Support Program Version 1.2 (hereinafter
called the support program)

    o  Enables IBM Communications Manager/2 Version 1.0 users to exploit
        the benefits of connection to an ISDN Basic Rate Interface.
        These include:
       -  The low error rates characteristic of digital transmission
       -  High bandwidth (2 x 64Kbps full-duplex channels per ISDN Basic
           Rate line   -- see note below)
       -  The ability to exercise the switched nature of ISDN
          communication if required
       -  The potential for reduced cost (subject to local tariffs) when
          compared with commonly used analog modem connections over
          leased line
    o  Extends the capabilities of the Communications Manager to support
       Basic Rate access to an Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
       for many Communications Manager functions and applications written
       to Application
       Programming Interfaces (APIs) provided by the Communications Manager.
    o  Is designed to enable functions and applications, to run unmodified
       over an ISDN when the IBM Communications Manager/2 Version 1.0 is
       configured to operate with the Support Program.
    o  Is easy to install and use.  Configuration is fully integrated
       with the IBM Communications Manager/2 Version 1.0.

Note:  In certain parts of North America the ISDN service provided by the local
telecommunications carrier is restricted to a maximum of 56 Kbps over each B
channel.  These cases are supported by this product.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 166. IBM DATABASE OS/2 V1 AND IBM SAA DISTRIBUTED DATABASE CONNECTION SERVICES/2 V2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    Order Type     Part            Program
    Number         Number          Name
    -----------------------------------------------------------
    5871-AAA       62G3-648         DB2/2 V1 (Single-User)
                                    3.5-inch diskette
    5871-AAA       62G3-712         DB2/2 V1 (Client/Server)
                                    3.5-inch diskette
    5871-AAA       62G3-791         DDCS/2 Version 2 (Single-User)
                                    3.5-inch diskette
    5871-AAA       62G3-799         DDCS/2 Version 2 (Multi-User Gateway)
                                    3.5-inch diskette

IBM is offering two new relational database products for the 32-bit Operating
System/2* (OS/2*) environment:

    o   IBM DATABASE 2 OS/2* Version 1 (DB2/2* V1)
    o   IBM SAA Distributed Database Connection Services/2 Version 2
        (DDCS/2 V2)

Single-User and Client/Server versions of both DB2/2 V1 and DDCS/2 V2 are
provided.

IBM DATABASE 2 OS/2 Version 1 is a relational database management system and a
member of the IBM Relational Database family of products along with DB2* for
MVS, SQL/DS* for VM and VSE, and SQL/400* for OS/400*.  It extends IBM's SAA
relational database technology to the single-user workstation and client/server
LAN environment and it is a key partner in IBM's Information Warehouse
framework.

DB2/2 V1 supports access to OS/2 database servers from OS/2, DOS and DOS
Windows** database client workstations.  DB2/2 V1 is a 32-bit product and
includes the functions previously provided in the OS/2 Extended Services 1.0
Database Manager products.  DB2/2 V1 also includes additional new functions
which are focused on application portability, DB2 compatibility, SQL and
industry standards compliance, new connectivity options, integrity
enhancements, reliability, availability, systems management, and performance.

DB2/2 V1 and DDCS/2 V2 provide relational database access solutions for line of
business, decision support, and online transaction processing applications
which may reside on a LAN or in a host environment.  Application programming
interfaces (APIs) and tools are provided for programmers as well as a database
command line processor, and Query Manager for use by both novice and
experienced users.

IBM SAA Distributed Database Connection Services/2-Version 2 (DDCS/2 V2)
products provide workstation application access to enterprise data.  DDCS/2 V2
provides the ability to develop and run application programs databases from
OS/2, DOS and DOS Windows database client workstations.  The same database
clients installed to access DB2/2 V1 database servers on the LAN can also
access and update host databases through DDCS/2 V2.  To a user or application
program, the host database can be thought of as an extension of the OS/2
database server capabilities.

DDCS/2 V2 is a 32-bit product and includes the same functionality provided in
DDCS/2 V1.  Connectivity to Database 2 Version 2 Release 3, Structured Query
Language/Data Services (SQL/DS*) Version 3 Release 3, and Operating System/400*
(OS/400*) Version 2 Release 1.1 host relational databases is supported.

DB2/2 V1 and DDCS/2 V2 can be acquired separately, but used in conjunction with
the new IBM Communications Manager/2 products also being announced today.

DB2/2 V1 and DDCS/2 V2 are designed to run in conjunction with IBM OS/2 Version
2.0, with Servicepak Level XR06055, or later.  DB2/2 V1 and DDCS/2 V2 are also
designed to run on selected IBM and non-IBM hardware that support OS/2 2.0,
with Servicepak Level XR06055, or later.

IBM DATABASE 2 OS/2 Version 1 and IBM SAA Distributed Database Connection
Services/2 Version 2 are the workstation members of the IBM Relational Database
family of products along with DB2 for MVS, SQL/DS for VM and VSE, and SQL/400
for OS/400. These products provide end-user and application access to
enterprise data.

    o   Exploitation of the 32-bit OS/2 2.0 operating system and its
        application development platform
    o   Improved DB2 Compatibility and SAA SQL Level 2 Language Extensions
    o   Application Programming Language enhancements to aid in programmer
        productivity
    o   Scalability enhancements
    o   Additional connectivity options in support of IBM's recently
        announced Network Transport Services/2 (NTS/2) product and
        Communications Manager/2 products
    o   Systems Management enhancements including expanded support of the
        First Failure Support Technology/2 (FFST/2) and IBM's LAN NetView
        Systems Management products
    o   Remote installation support of DB2/2 V1 components and DDCS/2 V2
        using IBM's Configuration, Installation, and Distribution (CID)
        technology
    o   Inclusion of the functions previously found in the Extended
        Services 1.0 Database Manager products
    o   Continued support of 16-bit OS/2 database applications
    o   Database Client-Enabling Distributed Feature support for OS/2,
        DOS, and DOS Windows 3.0/3.1 workstations, provided with the
        Client/Server version with DB2/2 V1
    o   Additional National Language codepage support for Latin-2
        countries, Turkey, Arabic countries and Israel
    o   A Query Manager Distributed Feature included as part of the the
        Client/Server version of DB2/2 V1, for OS/2 client-only
        workstations to access remote database servers on a LAN using
        Query Manager
    o   Access to downlevel Extended Services 1.0 database servers from
        DB2/2 V1 database clients
    o   Access to DB2/2 database servers from downlevel Extended Edition
        1.3 and Extended Services 1.0 OS/2, DOS, and/or DOS Windows
        clients
    o   OS/2, DOS, and DOS Windows database client access to DB2, SQL/DS,
        and OS/400 databases using DDCS/2 and the Distributed Relational
        Database Architecture
    o   Flexible price/performance packaging options
    o   Overall quality and performance improvements

DB2/2 V1 and DDCS/2 V2 protect customers' investments in current database
management applications and provide a foundation for expansion of future
database management requirements. * Signifies a trademark or registered
trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. ** Lotus is a
trademark of LOTUS Corporation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 167. IBM SAA PLANT FLOOR SERIES DATA COLLECTION EDITION -- APPLICATIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Plant Floor Series (TM) Data Collection Edition (TM) applications consist
of two SAA (TM) applications designed to improve productivity by reporting data
obtained by automatic data collection. The applications are:

    o   Time and Attendance/2
    o   Labor and Production Reporting/2.

The Data Collection Edition applications significantly lower the cost of
implementing plant floor, decision-based applications by providing pre-written,
pre-tested data collection applications. These products collect data by using
IBM Data Collection Control/2 (5756-144) to collect personnel and production
status through IBM 7525, 7526 and 7527 Data Collection terminals. (TM)
Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (R) Registered
trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

    o   Information decision tools are brought to the plant floor where
        they can best be applied to the minute-by-minute decision making
        required in today's dynamic manufacturing environments.
    o   Significantly lower cost implementation of plant floor,
        decision-based applications by providing pre-written, pre-tested
        data collection applications.
    o   Applications take full advantage of the functions and features of
        OS/2 (R) 2.0 and Data Collection Control/2 (DCC/2), eliminating
        the need for extensive application design and development effort,
        and their associated costs (time and money).
    o   Flexibility to run on a single system or is installed and used on
        a local area network by using the LAN capabilities of OS/2 2.0.

The Data Collection Edition applications improve the ability to manage business
operation by providing easy, quick, accurate, real-time access to automatically
collected employee and work-related data (using IBM Data Collection Terminals
or terminals compatible with them such as the Norand RF terminals available as
a Complementary Hardware Product).  The individual application functions that
provide this capability include:

    o   Time and Attendance/2:
        -   Current and accurate timekeeping capability
        -   Documentation and reporting of labor history
        -   Real-time access to actual current attendance data
        -   Inquiries and reports at a Data Collection Terminal and PS/2
            (R) or Industrial Computer
        -   Three different features available with different prices,
            depending on the required capacity (number of employees).
    o   Labor and Production Reporting/2:
        -   Current actual status of production hours and workforce usage
        -   Status of manufacturing hours and shop floor scheduling
        -   Reports on indirect hours including machine downtime and
            breaks
        -   Inquiries and reports.

Labor and Production provides critical information to plant floor management
that can streamline manufacturing, assembly and process operations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 168. IBM COMMUNICATIONS MANAGER/2 V1.0 AND COMMUNICATIONS MANAGER CLIENT SERVER/2 V1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Communications Manager/2 Version 1.0 and Communications Manager Client Server/2
Version 1.0 provide expanded communications services for IBM Operating
System/2* (OS/2*).  These programs represent the separation and further
enhancement of the communications manager components that are included in the
IBM OS/2 Extended Edition and Extended Services for OS/2 products.  The
enhancements include a client/server implementation of Communications Manager
function, improved installation and configuration processes, the incorporation
of the First Failure Support Technology (FFST) for improved problem
determination, usability improvements, an improved and converged 3270 and 5250
terminal emulator, the addition of ISDN connectivity services, and multiple PU
2.0 support.

The Communications Manager Client Server/2 includes a distributed feature, the
Communications Client, for OS/2 workstations.  The Communications Client
provides the same 3270 and 5250 emulation function that is available on
Communications Manager/2.  It also provides a rich set of SNA APIs and
services.

Communications Manager/2 and Communications Manager Client Server/2 are
intended to run on OS/2 Version 1.30.1 (with CSD 5050) or later, the OS/2
Version 2.0 or later.  Communications Manager/2 and Communications Manager
Client Server/2 support most IBM Personal System/2* (PS/2*) and PS/ValuePoint
systems, and selected non-IBM systems.

Communications Manager/2 is IBM's premier communications manager for OS/2
workstations.  It contains the communications functions from Extended Services
for OS/2 and includes major enhancements including: conversion to Presentation
Manager, configuration and installation aids, improved 3270 emulation,
conversion of 5250 emulation to Presentation Manager interface, improved
problem determination functions, and the addition of ISDN communication
services.  Communications Manager is also now available in a client/server
implementation - Communications Manager Client Server/2.

Communications Manager/2 and Communications Manager Client Server/2 provide
IBM's flagship solution for communications management for OS/2.  They provide a
broad set of communications capabilities.  These include functions such as: SNA
gateway capability; 3270 and 5250 terminal emulation; a wide range of API
support including, EHLLAPI and CPI-C; APPN end node and network node support;
SNA Common Services and Management Services; LUA (LU0,1,2,3); the new remote
installation and configuration and improved problem determination functions.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Separated and enhanced version of the Extended Services for OS/2,
        Communications Manager subsystem
    o   Offers client/server capability for communication services to OS/2
        clients
    o   Improves the ease of installation and configuration with totally
        revised installation and configuration processes, and through the
        exploitation of the recently announced IBM configuration,
        installation, and distribution (CID) methodology
    o   Improves the ease of maintenance with the incorporation of First
        Failure Support Technology (FFST)
    o   Provides enhanced usability and increased end user productivity
        with the conversion to the Presentation Manager interface
    o   Offers functional enhancements and Presentation Manager interfaces
        for the 3270 and 5250 terminal emulators
    o   Expands communication services with the addition of support for
        Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Basic Rate Interface
        (BRI) to support lower cost digital switched telephone lines
    o   Increased workstation and gateway capacity
    o   Offers Multiple PU 2.0 support to enable up to three concurrent
        physical host connections
    o   Protects the customers' investment by providing upward
        compatibility with applications written to utilize the OS/2
        Extended Edition and Extended Services for OS/2 Communications
        Manager subsystems APIs
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** DEC is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.
** Ethernet is a registered trademark of XEROX Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 169. IBM ENTRY LAN TO LAN WIDE AREA NETWORK PROGRAM VERSION 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Entry LAN to LAN Wide Area Network Program Version 1.0 is a program
product that interconnects remote local area networks (LANs) across a wide area
network (WAN).  Applications written to the IEEE 802.2 interface, such as Lotus
Notes (1) and others that use the IBM NETBIOS frame protocol, will be able to
communicate with remote LANs using the wide area network as a transport medium.
The IBM Entry LAN to LAN Wide Area Network Program Version 1.0 provides the
interface between the LAN and the WAN and communication will be via the LU 6.2
facilities provided by OS/2 (R) Communications Manager. (1) Lotus Notes is a
trademark of Lotus Corporation. (R) Registered trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.

    o   Improves workgroup computing by enabling customers with small
        remote offices to interconnect their OS/2 LAN Server with NETBIOS
        applications, such as Lotus Notes
    o   Provides filtered access to resources on the LAN
    o   Extends LAN connectivity by its use of data link switching
    o   Offers accounting functions of bandwidth usage for charge-out
        purposes
    o   Enables NETBIOS connectivity to a WAN from a single workstation
    o   Connects NETBIOS sessions over a WAN, which could be SNA, X.25,
        ISDN, or SDLC
    o   Provides interconnectivity to customers implementing
        applications, such as OS/2 LAN Server and Lotus Notes

The major benefit to customers will be to allow the growth of LAN applications
over their existing wide area networks.  This enables multiple users to access
and utilize files and communicate across remote LANs as well as host sites with
NETBIOS applications like Lotus Notes.

With continued emphasis on better workgroup computing and the explosion of LAN
environments, the IBM Entry LAN to LAN Wide Area Network Program Version 1.0
will provide a solution to customers that need to connect their small remote
offices with other LANs and the host site using NETBIOS applications.

The IBM Entry LAN to LAN Wide Area Network Program Version 1.0 offers price
advantages when compared to the regular LAN to LAN Wide Area Network Program.
It will enable customers to extend their networking by allowing up to 10
workstation connections using up to 30 NETBIOS applications.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 170. OASIS I DISK ARRAY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE V2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OASAS I Disk Array Management Software Version 2.0 for OS/2 2.0* manages the
disk array subsystem and provides optional fault tolerance, disk spanning and
minimized down time.  OASAS I Version 2.0 software will support from three to
eight SCSI drives on one to four SCSI adapters as a single array.  It can
support up to four SCSI adapters and four arrays per system, with a maximum of
27 SCSI drives. When mirroring fault tolerance is implemented, each array has
an even number of drives from 2 to 16 with data capacity of 1 to 8 drives.  A
non-fault tolerant array can have from two to eight drives.

OASAS I Version 2.0 provides:

    o   Data striping across drives in the array with fault tolerance
    o   Data striping across drives in the array without fault tolerance
    o   Mirroring fault tolerance

With the proper hardware, OASAS I Version 2.0 provides hot pluggability, by
allowing replacement and recreation of a single drive without shutting down the
system when individual drive enclosures are used.

OASAS I Version 2.0 is designed to provide an entry level software solution to
fault tolerance for a single disk drive failure in OS/2 applications using IBM
PS/2 systems.

OASAS I Version 2.0 provides additional fault tolerance capabilities to IBM
OS/2 LAN Server and provides an entry point for fault tolerant drive arrays in
non-LAN Server applications.

OASAS I Version 2.0 also provides an entry point for applications that require
large single volumes of disk storage such as database applications using
existing IBM SCSI drives. As a software solution OASAS I Version 2.0 does not
provide concurrent maintenance capabilities without special drive enclosure
hardware. OASAS I Version 2.0 can only be used in a OS/2 2.0 environment.

OASAS I Version 2.0 complements OS/2 LAN Server 3.0 by providing RAID 5 fault
tolerance in addition to the RAID 1 fault tolerance provided by OS/2 LAN
Server. With the release of OASAS I Disk Array Management Software Version 2.0
for OS/2 2.0, OASAS I Release 1 (Part number 92F1858) will continue to be
available for OS/2 1.3 only, and will not be supported on OS/2 2.0. Customers
who are migrating over to OS/2 2.0 will require OASAS I Disk Array Management
Software Version 2.0 for OS/2 2.0.

Customers who obtained  OASAS I Release 1 (P/N 92F1858) can receive an upgrade
to OASAS I Disk Array Management Software Version 2.0 for OS/2 2.0 for a small
fee. Customers remaining on OS/2 1.3 will not be able to realize the benefit of
upgrading to OS/2 2.0 and the OASAS I Disk Array Management Software Version
2.0 for OS/2 2.0 package.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides multiple disk array fault-tolerant solutions to mission
        critical business applications.
    o   Supports any standard IBM SCSI adapter and any standard IBM SCSI
        drive.
    o   Provides investment protection for PS/2 systems by adding
        additional capabilities to the SCSI disk storage subsystem.
    o   Increases user productivity by providing better disk storage
        performance, size, and reliability, while decreasing down time.
    o   Allows for greatly improved disk systems management on PS/2
        systems by providing many utilities for disk array management.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 171. IBM TIME AND PLACE/2 VERSION 1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Time and Place/2* is an SAA, OS/2* 2.0 LAN-based time management program
for coordination and scheduling of work-day activities.  IBM Time and Place/2
gives the user control over events, to-dos and memos, allowing the user to
schedule meetings across the LAN environment and to include both people and
resources.  IBM Time and Place/2 operates in a client/server environment. IBM
Time and Place/2 is patterned after common day/week/month desktop calendars.
These different views can be printed in a variety of text or graphical forms.

IBM Time and Place/2 supports both OS/2 2.0 32-bit clients and Microsoft**
Windows** 3.1 clients.  The IBM Time and Place/2 server is an OS/2 2.0 32-bit
application which uses the IBM Extended Services Database Manager.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides time management functions in LAN environment.
    o   Supports OS/2 2.0 and Microsoft Windows 3.1 clients connected
        via NetBIOS to a Time and Place/2 V1.0 OS/2 2.0 server. NetBIOS
        may be supplied by IBM OS/2 LAN Server 2.0 or 3.0 or by Novell
        NetWare V3.11.
    o   Uses OS/2 Database Manager on the Time and Place/2 V1.0 server
       to store events, alarms, to-dos, and personal memos.
    o   Supports Vendor Independent Messaging (VIM) for communications
        with other systems such as Mail and LOTUS Notes.
    o   Use of one distributed feature client (OS/2 or Windows) is
        included in the Time and Place/2 V1.0 program package and
        additional license charges.  Orders for copies of the
        distributed feature are needed to support more Time and Place/2
        V1.0 clients on the LAN.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 172. IBM TOUCHMOBILE SOFTWARE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Three software products provide complete support for the IBM 7684 Portable Data
Collection Terminal (PDCT): the IBM 7685 Stationary Docking Station, the IBM
7686 Vehicle Docking Station and the associated personal computer host.

The TouchMobile Programming Application Environment Services/DOS program
(53G4409) supports the PDCT terminal with data collection, data management,
data display, graphic data and host communication capabilities for the 7685
Stationary Docking Station.  Application building blocks are included for
touch-screen support, signature capture capability and bar code scanning
functions.

The TouchMobile Management Services/2 program (53G4407) is an OS/2(R) Version
1.3 or Version 2.0-based product that provides program and data distribution
and collection services for PDCTs via the Stationary Docking Station.  It
includes an application programming interface (API) for communications and a
Presentation Manager(R) program which provides monitoring and supervisory
functions.

The TouchMobile High-Level Application Generator/2 program (53G4408) is an
OS/2-based application development tool designed for the unique touchscreen,
keyboard-less environment of the PDCT.  A graphical user interface (GUI)
replicates the appearance of the PDCT display and simplifies the construction
of the application screens and associated database and input-output actions.

The TouchMobile High-Level Application Generator/2 provides the complete
run-time environment necessary to display the generated screens, react to touch
input, scan barcodes, and access databases, thus eliminating the need for most
application coding in the PDCT.  TouchMobile High-Level Application Generator/2
also includes a Prototype Application for transferring messages and files
between the PDCT and the Management Services/2 computer.  This application may
be used as-is or used as a basis for a customer-specific application. (R)
Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Three programs provide application development support for the TouchMobile
Portable Data Collection Terminal (PDCT), both Docking Stations and the host
personal computer system.

An easy-to-use design aid creates, modifies, and sequences application screens
and data recording facilities for the PDCT. Touch-screen data entry support for
the PDCTs includes signature capture and bar code scanner input.

Communications and application support for the PDCT operates under the
TouchMobile Disk Operating System for Portable Data Collection Terminals
(provided with the Stationary Docking Station).

Data handling, validity checking, upload and download of both data and
application changes between the PDCTs and the host personal computer is
provided via a Stationary Docking Station.

Intuitive screen presentations and easy-to-read publications help the customer
create and operate applications related to data collection.

Applications developed for TouchMobile terminals can be easily transferred to
the PDCTs using the facilities of the TouchMobile Management Services/2
program.  Terminals are identified and loaded with individual, new, or changed
applications or databases.

The High-Level Application Generator/2 enables easy adaptation of terminal
applications to the user's data formats in existing host applications,
adaptation of user unique terminology and worker management procedures.

Programming exploits the facilities of OS/2, the features of DOS 5.0, the
touch-screen function of the terminal and the terminal bar code scanning
feature.  Programming has been designed for international use and has observed
industry standards for graphic symbols and user interface.

The software usability features facilitate implementation of new end-user
applications and provide the capability of managing an increased number of
terminals or users without undue constraint.

Performance associated with application expansion and an increase in the number
of terminals should not limit growth.

Reliability and availability of the software and applications produced should
not be affected by user growth.

New applications and additional terminals can be installed without restrictions
on growth.

Application changes may be made in most cases with little or no user training
because the touch screen application presentation is intuitive and easily
installed in terminals when the change has been designed and tested. The
application concept is adaptable to a wide variety of mobile worker
environments such as inventory, sales and utility workers.

From a systems management viewpoint the usability features of the High-Level
Application Generator/2 will facilitate application development and application
change control.

Applications which are developed or changed can be reviewed on the High-Level
Application Generator/2 via the screen traversal facility, which enables the
developer to verify screen content, flow and usability prior to live testing
and installation on the TouchMobile terminal.  When applications are developed
and terminals are identified for installation, installation is easily
accomplished through the Management Services/2 Program.

The High-Level Application Generator/2 Program facilitates application
maintenance and new application development.  Screens are saved by the
Application Generator/2 and can be easily modified for desired application
changes or data structure changes.

Product information for the Application Generator/2 is presented in screen
formats consistent with OS/2 presentation conventions and can be used on an
intuitive basis with minimum special education for a PC-OS/2 application
developer.

The High-Level Application Generator/2 provides unstructured application
development and design capability that can be adapted to a wide range of data
collection or distribution uses.

Features of the TouchMobile DOS for PDCTs, the personal computer and OS/2 are
exploited in the implementation of the software, enabling the user or
application developer to take advantage of existing skills in these areas.

The Application Generator and the Management Services programs operate under
the facilities of OS/2 and the Application Environment Services program
operates under the facilities of a subset of DOS, conforming to and utilizing
the standards and architecture of these operating systems. estment Protection

The usability features of the software allows easy modification and extension
of applications developed for the portable terminal and allows easy creation of
data formats to interface with existing application programs.

The programs provide for easy loading of revisions, extensions and
modifications to applications that run on the PDCT, which will minimize the
investment needed for program maintenance.

The applications can be used for additional purposes such as inventory
operations or loading dock activity after vehicle pick-up and delivery uses
have been completed.

Exploitation of end-user investment in host applications, communications, OS/2
and personal skill development is possible due to the program implementation.

Graphical User Interface (GUI), communications and national language standards
implemented by the end user are supported by the programs. Productivity is
significantly enhanced by the ease of development and maintenance of
applications, the installation of new or modified applications and the
operation of the Management Services/2 program that monitors the docking
stations and associated terminals. Worker productivity is enhanced by the
automatic and error-free capture of information at the point of delivery or
use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 173. IBM AFP WORKBENCH FOR WINDOWS VERSION 1.00 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM AFP Workbench Version 1.00 is IBM's end-user product for viewing print
files that have been formatted for Advanced Function Printing* (AFP)*. Online
access to critical business data, such as account statements and invoices, will
help to improve customer service support while realizing significant savings
through the reduction of microfiche and print. AFP Workbench runs as a Windows
application under Microsoft Windows** Files, such as documents formatted by
Document Composition Facility (DCF), can be viewed in full-page "what you see
is what you get" (WYSIWYG) format including the electronic forms, text, image,
and color.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   PC application supported on Microsoft Windows 3.0 and 3.1 and on
        OS/2* (WIN-OS/2) Version 2.0.
    o   Consistent solutions for printing and viewing based on IBM's
        Advanced Function Printing data stream (MODCA-P) architecture.
    o   Full page viewing capabilities for ASCII text and Advanced
        Function Printing data stream (MODCA-P) files, such as DCF or
        DisplayWrite/370 documents, including electronic forms, text,
        and image.
    o   Viewing of S/370 line printer data that has been formatted with
        a page definition to create an Advanced Function Printing data
        stream (MODCA-P).
    o   Selective printing of one or more pages of a document to a Print
        Services Facility/2 (PSF/2) attached printer or a Windows
        attached printer.
    o   IBM Core Interchange fonts provided in suitable outline format
        for text viewing.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation. ** ATM and Adobe are trademarks of the Adobe Systems
Inc. ** Times New Roman is a trademark of The Monotype Corporation, plc.
Monotype is a registered trademark of The Monotype Corporation, plc. **
Helvetica is a trademark of Linotype AG and/or its subsidiaries.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 174. NETWARE NETWORK COMPUTING PRODUCTS FROM IBM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o     P/N 53G5581  NetWare Lite from IBM V1.1 Windows Utility
    o     P/N 53G5599  NetWare Lite from IBM V1.1 for DOS and Windows
    o     P/N 32G6105  NetWare Workstation Kit for OS/2 from IBM V1.3
    o     P/N 53G5312  NetWare HostPrint from IBM V1.0 - 8 session
    o     P/N 53G5313  NetWare HostPrint from IBM V1.0 - 32 session
    o     P/N 53G5314  NetWare HostPrint from IBM V1.0 - 64 session
    o     P/N 53G5315  NetWare HostPrint from IBM V1.0 - 128 session
    o     P/N 53G5317  NetWare SNA Links from IBM V1.0 - Single Pack
    o     P/N 53G5318  NetWare SNA Links from IBM V1.0 - 20-Server Pack
    o     P/N 53G5319  NetWare SNA Links from IBM V1.0 - 60-Server Pack
    o     P/N 53G5331  NetWare Asynchronous Communications Services from
          IBM V3.0 - 16-Port
    o     P/N 53G5341  NetWare 3270 Vector Graphics Option from IBM V3.0
          (Server Based)
    o     P/N 53G5884  LANalyzer for Windows from IBM V2.0
    o     P/N 53G5345  NetWare 3270 LAN Workstation for DOS from IBM V3.0
    o     P/N 53G5887  NetWare Access Services from IBM V1.3
    o     P/N 53G5890  NetWare Communication Services Manager from IBM
          V1.1
    o     P/N 41G9045  NetWare NFS from IBM V1.2B
    o     P/N 53G5392  NetWare NFS from IBM V1.2B - 5-pack
    o     P/N 53G5895  NetWare NFS Starter Kit from IBM V1.2B
    o     P/N 53G5897  NetWare for SAA from IBM V1.3 - 16 Session
    o     P/N 53G5900  NetWare for SAA from IBM V1.3 - 64 Session
    o     P/N 53G5902  NetWare for SAA from IBM V1.3 - 128 Session
    o     P/N 53G5904  NetWare for SAA from IBM V1.3 - 254 Session

The NetWare** from IBM Product Line is expanded to include the following:

    o   Connectivity support for geographically dispersed NetWare LANs
    o   Dial-in support for expanded network services sharing
    o   Server-based printer emulation services for printing host
        information on a LAN.
    o   Access to IBM mainframe graphics applications
    o   Network analysis and trouble-shooting tool
    o   NetWare Workstation Kit (Requester) for OS/2* V1.3
    o   NetWare NFS Starter Kit

Several of the NetWare products already offered by IBM are being updated to a
higher function and fix level, including:

    o   NetWare for SAA* from IBM V1.3
    o   NetWare 3270 LAN Workstation for DOS from IBM V3.0
    o   NetWare Communication Services Manager from IBM V1.1
    o   NetWare NFS from IBM V1.2B
    o   NetWare Lite from IBM V1.1 for DOS and Windows**

Also included in this announcement is the introduction of a new process and
form to be used when requesting upgrades.

Operating Environment:  Same personal computers and PS/2* systems as Novell
NetWare products; interoperates with many IBM products, such as OS/2, VM, MVS,
OS/400*, plus other IBM and non-IBM products.

HIGHLIGHTS The following additional NetWare function is available from IBM:

    o   Connectivity between geographically dispersed NetWare LANs over
        existing SNA WAN connections for a SAA server
    o   Scalable, server-based printer emulation services for host
        printing
    o   Access to IBM mainframe graphics application
    o   Easy-to-use network monitoring and troubleshooting system
    o   Dial-in and local access to network services and resources via
        asynchronous modems and other connections
    o   NetWare client support for OS/2 V1.3
    o   NetWare NFS Starter Kit - a five-user version of NetWare NFS

Several of the NetWare products already offered by IBM are being updated to a
higher function and fix level:

    o   NetWare Asynchronous Communications Services from IBM V3.0
        16-port (2-, 8-, and 32-port are already available)
    o   NetWare 3270 LAN Workstation for DOS from IBM V2.02 to V3.0
    o   NetWare Communication Services Manager from IBM V1.0 to V1.1
    o   NetWare NFS from IBM V1.2 to V1.2B
    o   NetWare for SAA from IBM V1.2 to V1.3
    o   NetWare Lite from IBM V1.1 for DOS and Windows
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** NetWare is a trademark of Novell Corporation. **
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. ** Ethernet is a trademark of
Xerox Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 175. IBM SAA CROSS SYSTEM PRODUCT FOR OPERATING SYSTEM/2 (OS/2) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Systems Application Architecture* (SAA*) Cross System Product/2
Application Development Version 1 Release 2 (CSP/2AD) provides definition
capabilities and a fully integrated interactive test facility for Cross System
Product applications in the Operating System/2* (OS/2*) Extended Edition (EE)
environment.

CSP/2AD Version 1 Release 2 is installable from diskettes, enabling those
application developers on VSE and VM systems to use the CSP/2AD Version 1
Release 2 interactive test facility (ITF) for testing Version 3 Release 3 Cross
System Product applications.  In addition, CSP/2AD Version 1 Release 2 provides
functions for converting and protecting Cross System Product Version 3 Release
3 Member Specification Libraries (MSLs) on the programmable workstation (PWS).
Application developers on VSE and VM systems must continue to use CSP/AD 3.3 or
CSP/AD PWSF 3.3 to define applications.

The CSP/2AD Version 1 Release 1 interactive test facility provides certain new
features (such as temporary member save during application test) that are only
available when using Version 1.1 - compatible MSLs.  Therefore, developers of
CSP/AD Version 3.3 applications using Version 3.3 MSLs with CSP/2AD V1.2 for
testing may not be able to use certain features available in the interactive
test facility, although full test support is available.

The IBM SAA Cross System Product is a family of products that provide
definition, test, generation, and execution of programs.  The Cross System

Product family includes the following licensed programs:

    IBM SAA Cross System Product/2 Application Development (CSP/2AD)
    Version 1 (5688-205)
    IBM SAA Cross System Product/2 Runtime Services (CSP/2RS) Version 1
    (5688-195)

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   CSP/2AD Installation from Diskettes
    o   CSP/2AD Mixed-level MSL Protection
    o   Cooperative applications support
    o   State-of-the-art definition and test facilities
    o   Language enhancements
    o   Migration of interpretive to compiled COBOL execution
    o   Enhanced workstation development environment
    o   Implements SAA Application Generator Common Program Interface
        Level 1
    o   SQL enhancements
    o   Call interface compatible with Easel Workbench for OS/2 EE
    o   Supports growth into cooperative processing
    o   Supports distributed relational database architecture
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 176. IBM PERSONAL APPLICATION SYSTEM/2 (AS/2) V3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Personal AS/2* Version 3 provides multi-function, data analysis solutions
for the business professional in an office environment, fully exploiting the
advanced facilities of OS/2* Version 2, for example 32-bit, workplace shell,
Drag/Drop and DDE. When installed on a PC, IBM Personal AS/2 Version 3 is able
to operate across a LAN or WAN if connected.  This provides access to a wide
range of data on host systems and personal computers, including access to OS/2
Database Manager, DB2/2, OS/400* Database, SQL/DS, DB2 and heterogeneous data.

Included in IBM Personal AS/2 Version 3 are an integrated set of functions:

    o   Query
    o   Report
    o   Chart
    o   Table Edit
    o   Graphical Procedure
    o   Command
    o   Calculator

IBM Personal AS Builder/2 Version 3 provides prototyping and application
creation features which can be used to adapt and extend the standard decision
support facilities to meet advanced customer requirements.

Applications and procedures developed with either IBM Personal Application
System/2 Version 2 or IBM Personal Application System/DOS for Windows, will run
in the IBM Personal AS/2 Version 3 environment.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides easy access to data from a wide variety of personal and
        enterprise sources -such as, OS/2 Database Manager, DB2/2 and via
        a Distributed Relational Database Architecture (DRDA) connection
        to OS/400 database, DB2, SQL/DS. A connection via Application
        System to DB2, SQL/DS and heterogeneous data is also available.
    o   Includes a comprehensive set of decision making tools which are
        fully integrated to provide access to data, data manipulation
        and display of results, these are:
        -   Query
        -   Report
        -   Chart
        -   Table edit
        -   Graphical Procedure
        -   Command
        -   Calculator
    o   IBM Personal AS/2 Version 3 is fully integrated with OS/2 Version
        2, exploiting both 32 bit and the workplace shell. This means
        that function such as drag/drop to OS/2 objects such as Mail,
        Folders, Printers and the Shredder is supported, use of the
        clipboard and Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) links can be
        established with other products running in the OS/2 environment.
    o   Integration with IBM's office systems will be provided, which
        means that files and data can be sent to applications in both
        IBM and non-IBM products.
    o   Using IBM Personal AS Builder/2 Version 3, 32 bit applications
        can be built that integrate with the work-place shell of OS/2
        Version 2, enabling the creation of fully integrated customized
        solutions to business problems by using:
        -   The powerful analysis and presentation functions of IBM
            Personal AS/2 Version 3
        -   The application creation facilities of IBM Personal AS
            Builder/2 Version 3, which can be used to extend the standard
            decision support function provided, to meet specific customer
            requirements
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 177. SOFTWARE FOR PS/2 SERVER 295/195 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Products for NetWare from IBM V3.11

    Order Type   Part No.  Feat.#  Program Name
    5875-RAL     61G2234   5299    Maximum Availability and Support
                                   System/2
    5875-RAL     61G2235   5300    Multi Processing Extensions/2
    5875-RAL     61G2236   5301    Orthogonal RAID-5 Disk Array/2
    5875-RAL     61G2237   5302    Parallel Network Array

The following programs should be ordered only for preload on the PS/2 Server
195 or 295. All other orders for NetWare from IBM V3.11 should be ordered
according to instructions in 291-328.

    Order Type       Part No.  Feat#    Program Name
    5871-RAL          61G2238   5303     5 User Preload
    5871-RAL          61G2239   5304     10 User Preload
    5871-RAL          61G2240   5305     20 User Preload
    5871-RAL          61G2241   5306     50 User Preload
    5871-RAL          61G2242   5307     100 User Preload
    5871-RAL          61G2243   5308     250 User Preload

This release is NetWare support for the IBM Maximum Availability and Support
System/2 for NetWare (MASS/2 NW), IBM Multi Processing Extensions/2 for NetWare
(MP/2 NW) and IBM Orthogonal RAID-5 Disk Array/2 (Disk Array/2 NW) applications
for use with the Personal System/2* (PS/2* Server 295* and 195. Also announcing
is a new product, Parallel Network Array for NetWare (PNA NW).

These software products offer additional function and provide customers with
new levels of performance and reliability.  All four applications, when ordered
in conjunction with a PS/2 Server 295 or 195, can be preloaded and shipped with
the system.

MASS/2 NW provides comprehensive system management capabilities, allowing
network control from local or remote locations.  In addition, MASS/2 has
extensive error logging and recovery techniques designed to overcome most
hardware and software failures.

IBM MP/2 NW provides the multiprocessing capability to the PS/2 Server 295 or
195, giving the highest levels of performance for today's advanced client or
file server applications.

IBM Disk Array/2 NW provides RAID-5 level of disk array data integrity. In
addition, the Disk Array/2 NW application offers protection from failure of the
Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) controller or bus.  The Disk Array/2
also offers high performance and large capacity disk storage ideal for mission
critical applications.

The above product functions are supported under OS/2 and NetWare.

IBM Parallel Network Array for NetWare only provides customers the ability to
have hot standby protection from failure of network adapter cards. With PNA/NW
if a network card fails the system will automatically transfer the traffic on
the LAN to the spare adapter without service interruption to the clients on the
LAN thus providing the highest levels of system availability and user
productivity.

IBM Maximum Availability and Support System/2 is an integral part of the PS/2
Server 295 system concept and is avaiable as an upgrade on the PS/2 Server 195.
This system management software provides system administrators with a
sophisticated tool to manage large geographically disperse networks, and in
conjunction with IBM Multi Processing Extensions/2 and IBM Orthogonal RAID-5
Disk Array/2, provides innovative functions for high-end mission critical
installations. In addition, MASS/2 can be launched through LAN NetView View R
and will continue to exploit additional LAN NetView facilities.

IBM Multi Processing Extensions/2 provides higher levels of system performance
by enabling multiprocessing in the PS/2 Server 295 and 195. Customers who
require the highest levels of performance in mission critical applications can
reach the goals using this application.  Because the application is designed to
run in conjunction with the MASS/2 software, customers are able to retain
comprehensive system management capabilities essential to large distributed
networks.

IBM Orthogonal RAID-5 Disk Array/2 provides large capacity, high performance
disk arrays required in large database or file server applications.  In
addition, data integrity is maintained with the fully integrated RAID-5
technology.  This not only protects the customer's data, but allows for
continued operation of the LAN, even while the array is being reconfigured.
Because IBM Orthogonal RAID-5 Disk Array/2 is integrated with MASS/2, most
error recoveries are accomplished without human intervention or loss of
services to clients.

IBM Parallel Network Array for NetWare only provides customers the ability to
have hot standby protection from failure of network adapter cards. With PNA/NW
if a network card fails the system will automatically transfer the traffic on
the LAN to the spare adapter without service interruptionto the clients on the
LAN thus assuring the highest levels of system availabiliy and user
productivity.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   IBM Maximum Availability and Support System/2
        -   Enabled for OS/2 1.3 and NetWare
        -   Non-intrusive local and remote monitoring, tuning, control
            and error recovery
        -   Most error recovery accomplished without human intervention
        -   Automatic reboot/reconfiguration functions for hardware
            failures
        -   Comprehensive error logging and notification with automatic
            dial-out capability
        -   System access even during power failures via battery backed
            up Remote Maintenance Processor (RMP) -- standard in the
            PS/2 Server 295
        -   Enabled for uninterruptable power supply (UPS)
        -   User and administrator password security
    o   IBM Multi Processing Extensions/2
        -   Enabled for OS/2 1.3 and NetWare
        -   Supports multiprocessing operations for PS/2 Server 295 or
            195
        -   Allows switching from uniprocessor to multiprocessor and vice
            versa -   Integrated with MASS/2
    o   IBM Orthogonal RAID-5 Disk Array/2
        -   Enabled for OS/2 1.3 and NetWare
        -   High performance RAID-5 Disk Array
        -   Provides protection against failures in the SCSI subsystem
        -   Large capacity -- can support arrays of up to 16 drives
        -   Supports multiple arrays per system
        -   Supports multiple spares and online spares pooling
        -   Supports "hot pluggable" hard files
        -   Bootable array
        -   Integrated with MASS/2
    o   IBM Parallel Network Array
        -   Enabled for NetWare
        -   Provides hot standby for Netork adapter cards
        -   Works in either Uni or Multi Processing Modes
        -   Works with adapters on the same or different Micro Channel
            buses
        -   Provides high levels of availability for critical
            applications
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **Netware is a Registered trademark of Novell, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 178. ISPF/PC II V2 (EZ-VU II RUNTIME FACILITY) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ISPF/PC II (EZ-VU II Runtime Facility) is an enhanced version of ISPF/PC (EZ-VU
Runtime Facility) and is a productivity aid that reduces the effort required
for the development of interactive applications for the IBM Personal Computer
family.  It provides a conversational interface between the user and an
application program.  It provides services such as application program
selection, full-screen panel display, user input validation, input/output field
translation, and help panel or message display.

Application developers can shorten the development cycle by using the extensive
dialog management features.  Non-programmers can design screens and extract
data from files.  The simplicity of the user's interface results in early
productivity for the inexperienced application developer.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Reentrant.
    o   Supports nested dialogs and modular programming.
    o   Selectable fields to reduce keystrokes and entry errors.
    o   Multiple panels displayed and active simultaneously.
    o   SELECT function for nesting dialogs.
    o   New operations for variable pools.
    o   Floating-point variables now supported.
    o   C language now supported.
    o   Direct buffer write option.
    o   Library services specify panel groupings.
    o   Application Programming Interface Extension allows users to
        extend ISPF/PC II services.
    o   Performance has been improved over that of the previous version
        by options that allow optimized panel access, direct display
        update, library storage of panels, messages to be stored with a
        panel, and small sized panels.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 179. IBM C SET++ THE LATEST TOOLS FOR APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT FOR OS/2 VERSION 2.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   5871-AAA     3206      61G1175    IBM C Set++ (3.5)

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF MARCH 14, 1994.)
    o   5871-AAA     5347      61G1412    IBM C Set++ (CD-ROM)

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF MARCH 14, 1994.)
    o   5871-AAA     3202      61G1176    IBM C/C++ Tools Version 2

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF MARCH 14, 1994.)
    o   5871-AAA     3200      61G1177    IBM WorkFrame/2 Version 1.1

IBM introduces IBM C Set++ (2.0) for Operating System/2* OS/2* (IBM C Set++),
the Object Oriented Development Tools for OS/2  --- a complete C/C++
application development solution for OS/2 2.0, in a convenient single package.
This package - available in both diskette and CD-ROM formats - contains the
following:

    o   The new IBM C/C++ Tools Version 2.0:
        1.  The IBM C/C++ compiler that generates 32-bit code for IBM
            Operating System/2 Version 2.0 and higher, and that includes:
            -   Standard Class Library
            -   User Interface Class Library
            -   Collection Class Library
        2.  The fully interactive, full function, source level IBM C/C++
            C/C++ Debugger
        3.  The IBM C++ browser
        4.  The IBM C/C++ execution trace analyser
    o   IBM WorkFrame/2 Version 1.1. - a new release of IBM WorkFrame/2
        Version 1.0, IBM's highly configurable project-oriented
        application development environment, that features an SAA/CUA*
        conforming user interface.  This release is designed for C/C++
        users.
    o   IBM Developers Toolkit for OS/2 2.0 (currently available), - a
        selection of language-independent build and productivity tools
        designed to help the developer exploit the OS/2 2.0 Application
        Programming Interfaces (APIs).

Users of the above IBM C/C++ Tools product must use this Toolkit as well as the
Toolkit Update Diskette that is supplied as part of the IBM C Set++ and IBM
C/C++ Tools packages.

Note that IBM C Set++ replaces the original IBM C Set/2 convenience kit and IBM
C/C++ Tools replaces the original IBM C Set/2 Version 1.0.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Maximize productivity using our new C/C++ compiler and its
        associated tools - an even greater range of powerful application
        development tools than before, designed by IBM for developing for
        OS/2.
    o   Generate high-performance business solutions using state-of-the-
        art code optimization in the C and C++ environments, to exploit
        the power of IBM OS/2 V2.0 running on 80386-, 80486- and Pentium*
        processor-based computers.
    o   Capitalize on IBM's powerful, flexible C/C++ development
        environment - including class libraries - to promote broad 32-bit
        OS/2 application development and protect and grow your investment.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Pentium is a trademarks of Intel Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 180. SECURED WORKSTATION MANAGER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

42G0-474 - SECURED WORKSTATION MANAGER

    o   5871-AAA  42G0474    Secured Workstation Manager (3.5 inch)
    o   5871-AAA  42G0475    Secured Workstation Manager (5.25 inch)
    o   5876-AAA  42G0478    Secured Workstation Manager Administrator
        Guide
    o   5871-AAA  42G0479    Secured Workstation Manager Systems
        Integration Support Program
    o   5781-AAA  42G0480    Secured Workstation Manager Browser Audit
        Analysis Program
    o   5876-AAA  42G0481    Secured Workstation Manager User Guide
    o   5872-AAA  42G0482    Secured Workstation Manager Additional
        License
    o   5872-AAA  42G0483    Secured Workstation Manager Proof of
        Additional License
    o   5876-AAA  53G1502    Secured Workstation Manager Command
        Reference Guide

To respond to the customer's demand for a secured DOS* workstation, IBM
announces Secured Workstation Manager (SWSM). This vendor-logo product,
developed by Micronyx, Inc., was formerly announced as Secured Workstation
Manager/DOS. The program supports a graphic user interface that conforms to the
Common User Access* (CUA*) in MS Windows mode.  The product has the following
characteristics: designed to meet the C2 level of function as defined by the
United States Department of Defense "Trusted Computer System Evaluation
Criteria", execution from conventional or expanded memory (EMS), simple
installation and user-friendly interfaces.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides security for DOS and MS Windows, desktops, laptops,
        notebooks and portable workstations.
    o   Installs quickly (less than 15 minutes) and easily (menu-
        driven).
    o   Limits usage of workstations to authorized individuals only.
    o   Establishes a secure signon for use in access control and
        auditing.  Users can validate their identity by using a
        combination of passwords and electronic tokens.
    o   Controls access to protected files via access control lists.
        Protected files are also automatically and transparently encoded
        to protect files when they are on removable media, LAN Servers,
        or when there is an attempt to access them by means of an
        unauthorized operating system.
        Users are never required to enter or manage encoding keys.
    o   Allows the Secured Workstation Manager site administrator to
        implement and distribute security rules to protected workstations.
        This allows the administrator to set minimum security
        requirements that are enforced on all workstations.  Local users
        can add to but not reduce the security established by this
        administrator.
    o   Maintains user accountability through audit logging of user and
        administrator activities; such as, all signon attempts, and all
        attempted security violations. Audit logs can be managed locally
        or from a central location.
    o   Provides an application program interface (API) with the optional
        Systems Integration Support (SIS) Program toolkit. This allows
        users to customize their programs to take advantage of the
        security features.
    o   Establishes a secured access signon to allow Secured Workstation
        Manager users to easily sign on to other secured environments
        (e.g., LAN Servers, OS/400).
    o   Enhances system integrity when using Secured Workstation Manager
        with the IBM PS/2 56 486SLC2 (9556), the IBM PS/2 57 486SLC2
        (9557) and the IBM PS/2 Ultimedia M57 486SLC2 (9557)
    o   Designed to meet the C2 level of function as defined by the
        United States Department of Defense "Trusted Computer System
        Evaluation Criteria", which includes user identification and
        authentication, file access control, auditing and object reuse
        protection.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 181. IBM INTERNAL TAPE BACKUP PROGRAMS 250 FOR PERSONAL SYSTEMS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

49F5-693 - IBM INTERNAL TAPE BACKUP PROGRAMS 250 FOR PERSONAL SYSTEMS (DOS AND
WINDOWS)

    5871-AAA       49F5693         IBM Internal Tape Backup Program 250
                                   for Personal Systems (DOS compatible
                                   Version 3.0)
    5871-AAA       49F5666         IBM Internal Tape Backup Program 250
                                   for Personal Systems (Windows
                                   compatible Version 1.0)
    5871-AAA       64G3736         IBM Internal Tape Backup Convenience
                                   Kit 250 for Personal Systems
                                   (DOS compatible Version 3.0)
    5871-AAA       64G3713         IBM Internal Tape Backup Convenience
                                   Kit 250 for Personal Systems
                                   (Windows compatible Version 1.0)

The IBM Internal Tape Backup Program 250 for Personal Systems (DOS compatible
Version 3.0) and the IBM Internal Tape Backup Program 250 for Personal Systems
(Windows** compatible Version 1.0) provide the user with an easy to use
application utility to backup and/or restore data from large capacity fixed
disks on network file servers as well as stand-alone systems. The DOS
compatible version 3.0 is an enhancement for the IBM PS/2* Internal Tape Backup
Program (DOS compatible version 2.01), while the Windows version 1.0 is a new
IBM tape backup offering.  Both programs include data compression, data
encryption, librarian option, multi file and multi disk operation. These
programs and the currently available IBM PS/2 Internal Tape Backup Program
version 2.0 (OS/2(R) PM compatible) support most models of PS/2 Systems.  The
programs are available for separate order or packaged with the appropriate tape
drive and a mini tape cartridge as an orderable Convenience Kit.

The IBM Internal Tape Backup Program 250 for Personal Systems (DOS compatible
Version 3.0) and the IBM Internal Tape Backup Program 250 for Personal Systems
(Windows compatible Version 1.0) are written to support those users who want an
easy-to-use, low cost backup solution.  When used with the IBM PS/2 Internal
Tape Backup Unit they provide a high capacity internal tape backup solution for
that requirement. Network backups are supported, including the IBM Classroom
Local Area Network Administration System (ICLAS) Version 1.4. Additional
features include data compression, data encryption, the ability to back up and
restore data from multiple hard disk drives in a single operation, and a
librarian option.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Single application support for compatible Personal Systems.
    o   Single mini tape cartridge stores as much as 250 megabytes
        (250MB) of data using software data compression.
    o   Provides common user access across the leading industry operating
        systems
        - DOS, Microsoft Windows, OS/2 Presentation Manager*, Netware**.
    o   Designed for individual or network file server backup.
    o   Standard recording format provides data integrity when using the
        IBM tape backup programs and IBM personal systems.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell Inc. **
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 182. OS/2 2.1, DEVELOPER'S TOOLKIT FOR OS/2 2.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

61G0-900 - OS/2 2.1, DEVELOPER'S TOOLKIT FOR OS/2 2.1, OS/2 ONLINE BOOK
COLLECTION

    5871-AAA   61G0900         OS/2 2.1 3.5-Inch Diskettes
    5871-AAA   61G0901         OS/2 2.1 5.25-Inch Diskettes
    5871-AAA   61G0904         OS/2 2.1 CD-ROM
    5872-AAA   61G0910         OS/2 2.1 Adtl Lic W Certificate
    5872-AAA   61G0917         OS/2 2.1 Adtl Lic W/O Certificate
    5873-AAA   61G0902         OS/2 2.1 Upgrade 3.5 Diskettes
    5873-AAA   61G0903         OS/2 2.1 Upgrade 5.25 Diskettes
    5873-AAA   71G1877         OS/2 2.1 Upgrade CD-ROM
    5874-AAA   61G0911         OS/2 2.1 AL Upg W Certificate
    5874-AAA   61G0918         OS/2 2.1 AL Upg W/O Certificate
    5876-AAA   61G0905         OS/2 2.1 Documentation Only
    5871-AAA   61G1416         Developer's Toolkit for OS/2 2.1
    5871-AAA   61G1417         Developer's Toolkit for OS/2 2.1
    5873-AAA   61G1564         Developer's Toolkit for OS/2 2.1
                               Upgrade 3.5-inch diskettes + CD-ROM
    5873-AAA   61G1565         Developer's Toolkit for OS/2 2.1 Upgrade
    5876-AAA   71G2224         MMPM/2 Technical Library Version 1.1
    5871-AAA   53G2166         OS/2 Online Book Collection

OS/2 2.1 fulfills IBM's stated intent to deliver an enhanced OS/2 32-bit
operating system.  It includes support for Windows 3.1 applications, a new
32-bit graphics engine, 256-color XGA and Super Video Graphics Adapter (SVGA)
device drivers, support for high speed printers and popular CD-ROM drives. OS/2
2.1 is enabled to support the emerging technologies of mobile computers,
pen-based systems and multimedia. Multimedia Presentation Manager/2 (MMPM/2) is
included with this OS/2 offering and adds enhanced audio, basic image and
software motion video playback capabilities for users of OS/2.  The Developer's
Toolkit for OS/2 2.1 contains bindings, tools, sample programs and
documentation to assist the OS/2 software developer. It includes the Multimedia
Presentation Manager Toolkit/2 (MMPMTK/2) which allows developers to take
advantage of MMPM/2 function.  The IBM OS/2 Online Book Collection contains
over 100 softcopy manuals delivered on a CD-ROM with the IBM Library Reader.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Runs OS/2, Windows - including 3.1 and DOS applications
        concurrently on a single display
    o   Provides a new 32-bit graphics engine and additional 256-color
        XGA and Super Video Graphics Adapter (SVGA) drivers for most
        displays.
    o   Enabled to support mobile computers with Advanced Power
        Management to extend battery life and support for Personal
        Computer Memory Card International (PCMCIA) specifications
        -- the new standard for credit-card sized hardware options
    o   Multimedia Presentation Manager/2 (MMPM/2) provides enhanced
        quality of information and communication, easily accomodates new
        functions, devices and multimedia data
    o   The Developer's Toolkit for OS/2 2.1 contains tools and
        documentation, including multimedia, to assist the OS/2 2.1
        application developer
    o   OS/2 Online Book Collection provides over 100 manuals on a CD-ROM
        with the IBM Library Reader*
* Signifies a trademark or registered or International Business Machines
Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 183. ENHANCED 5250 EMULATION PROGRAM MICRO CHANNEL SUPPORT VERSION 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This program provides function and features equivalent to the currently
available IBM Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program Version 2.3 in support of the IBM
Enhanced 5250 Display Station Emulation AdapterSTORM., a new member of the IBM
5250 Emulation Family.

This program eliminates any impact to businesses who have invested employee
training expense in the IBM Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program Version 2.3 and
would now like to install new 5250 Emulation desktops based on the IBM Micro
Channel Standard.  It enables the use of a common 5250 terminal emulation
application on both of IBM's desktop platforms - PC AT(R) and Micro Channel.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Supports the new IBM 5250 Emulation Adapter/A with function and
        features equivalent to the IBM Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program
        Version 2.3
    o   Provides two host sessions (display or printer) with concurrent
        access to PC DOS via a user-defined hot-key.
    o   Uses the same installation and configuration procedures as the
        currently available program.
    o   Increases flexibility with choice of different interrupt levels.
    o   Reduces cost to current users of the IBM Enhanced 5250 Emulation
        Program Version 2.3 by providing only the required publication
        update pages.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. (1) Trademark of Microsoft Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 184. IBM NETWORK DESIGN AND ANALYSIS/2 (NETDA/2) VERSION 1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Network Design and Analysis/2 (NETDA/2) Version 1 is a workstation-based
topology and routing design tool.  NETDA/2 Version 1 provides a SNA network
design that balances cost, performance, and reliability subject to specific
constraints imposed by the user.  NETDA/2 Version 1 provides the same network
analysis and optimization functions implemented in the host-based NETDA Version
2 Release 2, but also designs a network 'topology'.  NETDA/2 Version 1 gives
the customer more creativity in supporting current SNA/subarea networks, as
well as planning for future SNA/subarea networks, pure SNA APPN* networks, or a
mixture of both environments.  NETDA/2 Version 1 assists the network designer
with the following system management functions:

    o   Performance/Capacity Planning Management
    o   Network Configuration Management
    o   Business Management.

NETDA/2 Version 1 supports customers migrating to VTAM Version 4 and assists in
designing networks that may contain APPN and subarea SNA products from IBM or
other vendors.  NETDA/2 Version 1 also considers message delays of SNA nodes
attached to LANs, message delays on bridges and routers connecting LANs, and
message delays and cost of SNA nodes attached to private or public service
networks.  Additionally, NETDA/2 Version 1 includes a sample utility that
extracts traffic data from Network Performance Monitor (NPM) records and
provides the capacity to insert this information into the appropriate NETDA/2
tables.

NETDA/2 Version 1 exploits the new IBM OS/2* 2.1 functions and provides online,
integrated help panels to create a user-friendly environment and a workstation
based platform for maintenance and future enhancements.  In addition, NETDA/2's
user interface conforms to SystemView Integration Level 1.  IBM GraphicsView/2
is used to graphically represent a newly designed network's topology and
routing information and to display the relationship between resources in a
network.

In addition to the announcement of NETDA/2 Version 1, customers will have an
optional fee service available for pricing their newly designed SNA network(s).
Customers with IBMLink userids will be able to electronically send a tariff
request input file to an IBM tariff database to obtain actual link costs for a
network that will be designed by NETDA/2 Version 1.  Once the tariff input file
is returned to the customer through IBMLink, the pricing information can be
inserted into a user exit for future reference.

NETDA/2 Version 1 is an OS/2-based network topology design tool developed by
IBM to provide customers with a SNA network design that balances performance,
reliability, and cost and permits specific performance and reliability
constraints to be imposed by the user.  NETDA/2 Version 1 complements IBM's
introduction of ACF/VTAM Version 4 Release 1 by enabling the customer to
design, analyze, and optimize the availability and performance of independent
SNA APPN networks, existing SNA subarea networks, as well as the mixed
APPN/subarea networks.  NETDA/2 Version 1 offers continued support of existing
VTAM SNA subarea networks, as well as migration assistance for those VTAM
customers migrating to VTAM Version 4 Release 1.

As IBM networking moves into the future, NETDA/2 Version 1 will provide
continued support for all SNA APPN products, regardless of whether VTAM is
installed in the network.

Because NETDA/2 Version 1 runs within the object oriented OS/2 2.1 Workplace
Shell* (WPS), it is taking advantage not only of the 32-bit operating system,
but also the much friendlier working environment and user interface that OS/2
2.1 provides.  With the addition of online, integrated help panels, this
environment will significantly increase the productivity of network support
personnel and enhance the system management of network tasks.

NETDA/2 Version 1 is the follow-on product to NETDA Version 2 (5685-045), NETDA
Version 1 (5664-202), and Route Table Generator (RTG) (5668-815). Today, NETDA
Version 2 is a host-based product that provides network optimization but not
true network design capabilities as does NETDA/2 Version 1.  IBM believes
support of SNA/APPN enhancements through NETDA/2 will better serve the
networking community for today and into the future.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Creates a network topology and routing design for a completely
        new network or for a network modified from an existing design.
    o   Provides support for pure SNA Subarea and APPN networks, as well
        as mixed SNA APPN/subarea environments.
    o   Supports peripheral and backbone nodes and links.
    o   Assists in sizing the backbone nodes.
    o   Assigns peripheral and backbone link capacities required to
        support a given set of traffic demands.
    o   Provides 'what-if' scenario capability to demonstrate the impact
        of node(s) and TG(s) failures on the network.
    o   Offers the ability to perform capacity planning exercises on a
        regular basis to facilitate network growth and reduce networking
        costs.
    o   Assists VTAM customers in their migration to VTAM Version 4 and
        APPN by providing VTAM Class of Service (COS) tables and TG
        profiles and by selecting the optimal composite network nodes
        and directory servers.
    o   Accommodates other IBM APPN products such as AS/400, 6611, and
        OS/2 Extended Services by providing their Class of Service (COS)
        tables.
    o   Generates routes for subarea networks with explicit and virtual
        route (ER and VR) numbers, TG thresholds, VR pacing windows and
        COS tables.
    o   Offers electronic file transfer capability to IBM supplied
        tariff database for network pricing through IBMLink. (optional
        fee service)
    o   Provides user exit to access link tariff user database.
    o   Provides enhanced usability via online integrated help panels.
    o   Generates business graphic distribution/query reports used in
        evaluating the network design
    o   Assists with the analysis of network performance and reliability
        for better tactical planning providing easier network
        administration and lower costs.
    o   Provides functions of current NETDA Version 2 Release 2 such as
        transmission group (TG) utilization and delay, Global VR window
        size values, and traffic load balancing.
    o   Simplifies migration from host-based NETDA Version 2 with a
        conversion utility.
    o   Assists with traffic data collection by providing a sample
        utility that extracts traffic data from NPM records and provides
        the ability to insert this information into the appropriate
        NETDA/2 Version 1 tables.
    o   Assists current ACF/VTAM users by reversing VTAM and NCP subarea
        path statements to be used as input to NETDA/2 Version 1.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 185. IBM DEVICE DRIVER SOURCE KIT FOR OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Device Driver Source Kit for OS/2 (R) (DDK) on CD-ROM media contains:

    o   IBM's latest release of OS/2 device driver source code
    o   Build and test tools for several device drivers
    o   Online documentation.

Customers licensing the product will receive future, generally available
releases to the product, if any, for one year from the ordering date.

Several device drivers for OS/2 have been developed and are supplied in this
kit.  The working source code is far more than a foundation and will enable
rapid development of new device drivers. Additional sources and enhancements
will be included in subsequent releases of the IBM Device Driver Source Kit for
OS/2 as they become available.

Operating Environment:  DDK requires OS/2 2.0 with Servicepak (XR06055) or OS/2
2.1.  The device drivers contained within this product are for versions of OS/2
2.0, or later. (R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.

The IBM Device Driver Source Kit for OS/2 (71G3703) features:

    o   Full source code enabling rapid development of new device drivers
    o   Kit including 79 drivers and tools for the following device
        types:
        -   Display
        -   Printer
        -   CD-ROM (compact disk - read only memory)
        -   DASD (direct access storage device)
        -   SCSI (small computer system interface)
        -   Diskette
        -   Mouse
        -   Keyboard
        -   Multimedia
        -   Pen
        -   Touch
        -   Serial
        -   Parallel.
    o   Nine online books equivalent to over 1,500 pages of printed
        material with detailed information on:
        -   OS/2 device drivers
        -   Device driver function
        -   Hints and techniques for device driver construction.
    o   Generally available updates, if any, for one year from the
        ordering date at no additional charge


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 186. NETWARE NETWORK COMPUTING PRODUCTS FROM IBM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

53G5-742 NETWARE NETWORK COMPUTING PRODUCTS FROM IBM

    Part
    Number  Program Name
    53G5742 NetWare NFS Gateway from IBM v1.1 (5 User)
    53G5743 NetWare NFS Gateway from IBM v1.1 (10 User)
    53G5744 NetWare NFS Gateway from IBM v1.1 (20 User)
    53G5745 NetWare NFS Gateway from IBM v1.1 (50 User)
    53G5746 NetWare NFS Gateway from IBM v1.1 (100 User)
    53G5747 NetWare NFS Gateway from IBM v1.1 (250 User)
    53G5494 NetWare SFT III from IBM v3.11 (5 User)
    53G5495 NetWare SFT III from IBM v3.11 (10 User)
    53G5496 NetWare SFT III from IBM v3.11 (20 User)
    53G5497 NetWare SFT III from IBM v3.11 (50 User)
    53G5498 NetWare SFT III from IBM v3.11 (100 User)
    53G5238 NetWare SFT III from IBM v3.11 (250 User)
    53G6045 NetWare Services Manager (for LAN NetView) from IBM 1.5

NetWare SFT III v3.11 from IBM, the mirrored server capability from Novell, is
available in user levels of 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, and 250. In addition, the
controlled availability restrictions announced December 1, 1992 are removed.

NetWare NFS Gateway from IBM v1.1, a server-based NLM connectivity solution
that extends the reach of NetWare users into the UNIX world, is added to the
NetWare from IBM family of products.

NetWare Services Manager for OS/2 from IBM v1.0 has been updated and now runs
either standalone, or snaps unchanged into IBM's LAN NetView product. It is
also renamed to NetWare Services Manager (for LAN NetView) from IBM 1.5

Upgrades within user levels are available for NetWare HostPrint from IBM v1.0

HIGHLIGHTS Added to the NetWare from IBM product family are:

    o   Multiple user levels of NetWare SFT III from IBM v3.11
    o   NetWare NFS Gateway from IBM v1.1
    o   NetWare Services Manager (for LAN NetView) from IBM 1.5
    o   Upgrades to NetWare Services Manager for Windows from IBM
    o   Upgrades within NetWare HostPrint family user levels
** Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks and NetWare Loadable Module is
a trademark of Novell, Inc. ** NFS is a registered trademark of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. ** UNIX is a registered trademark of AT and T Bell
Laboratories ** Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation ** Macintosh is
a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. * Signifies a trademark or
registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 187. IBM PRESENTATION MANAGER OFFICE/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Presentation Manager* Office/2 (PMO/2) Release 3 is enhanced to add
disconnected user support and to allow it to work with OfficeVision*/VM.  A new
VM host program is announced:  IBM Presentation Manager Office Support/VM
Release 3.  This initial offering is being called Release 3 to be consistent
with release levels of the other PMO programs.  The combination of a Personal
System/2* (PS/2*) program and a host program provides a direct connection
between Operating System/2* (OS/2*) Version 2 workstations and OfficeVision/VM.
IBM Presentation Manager Support/MVS Release 3, which provides a direct
connection between OS/2 Version 2 workstations and OfficeVision/MVS, is
enhanced to support the new disconnected user function.

PMO/2 R3 runs on an OS/2 V2 workstation and integrates selected OfficeVision
functions under the OS/2 Presentation Manager and Workplace Shell* using icons,
windows and a mouse.  IBM Presentation Manager Office Support/VM Release 3 runs
on a VM host along with OV/VM.  Presentation Manager Office Support/MVS Release
3 runs on an MVS host along with OV/MVS.  Each of these host support programs
provides the connection between its associated OfficeVision host program and
the workstations.

Enhancements in Release 3 -- OV/VM functions now supported by PMO/2

    o   Graphical user interface (GUI) to OV/VM
    o   Inbasket, Outbasket, and Send notes
    o   Host Distribution lists
    o   Host Address Book search
    o   Host Document Library
    o   Host Note log
    o   Host File list.

Other PMO/2 functions for OV/VM

    o   Create your own Fast Path Icons
    o   Disconnected User
    o   Import and Export of mail.
    o   Built-in browser for RFT/FFT documents
    o   Customized installation diskettes
    o   Add calendar meeting notice.

OV/MVS enhancements now supported by PMO/2

    o   Disconnected User
    o   Import and Export of mail
    o   Host Address Book search
    o   Customized installation diskettes.

PMO/2 functions common to both OV/VM and OV/MVS include Mail

    o   Select and view incoming mail
    o   Receive mail on host and PS/2
    o   Reply to incoming mail
    o   Use personal address book
    o   Forward mail
    o   Disconnected user
    o   Built-in browser for RFT/FFT documents
    o   Import/Export mail.

Host

    o   Select and view files
    o   Transfer and send files
    o   Use host files with PS/2 tools
    o   Erase host files
    o   Work with multiple host connections
    o   Send notes
    o   Transfer host distribution list to PS/2.
    o   Disconnected User
    o   Host Address Book search

PMO/2 R3 is an OS/2 V2 workstation solution for OfficeVision/VM and
OfficeVision/MVS users.  PMO/2 can be used with CM Mouse Support (5799-PNJ) to
offer graphical user interface solutions to your OS/2 and OV/VM or OV/MVS
users.  PMO/2 uses the characteristic features of OS/2 V2 and its Workplace
Shell, including icons, graphical user interface, and drag and drop.  CM Mouse
Support can help with graphical interface requirements for host business
applications and calendaring.

PMO/2 R3 can provide value in several ways

    o   User productivity is enhanced via improved function and
        usability.
    o   Increased PMO/2 function also protects investments in VM and MVS
        applications and provides for growth enablement.

PMO/2 is an attractive alternative to be considered for OS/2 direct connect
solutions using graphical interfaces, icons, and drag and drop.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   PM Office provides a direct connect OS/2 Version 2 workstation
        for one or more OV/VM and OV/MVS host systems.
    o   Offers cooperative processing with office services on OV/VM and
        OV/MVS.
    o   Offers graphical mail, filing, and personal address book.
    o   Improves usability through icons, drag and drop, windows, multi-
        tasking, and a mouse.
    o   Common User Access* (CUA*)-91 GUI with OS/2 V2 Presentation
        Manager and the Workplace Shell.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 188. IBM MULTIPROTOCOL NETWORK PROGRAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM expands its network software offerings by introducing the IBM Multiprotocol
Network Program (5648-016), IBM's first multiprotocol, multiport, bridge, and
router software product supporting the new IBM 6611 Network Processor 140 and
170, which are shipped with IBM Multiprotocol Network Program preloaded. The
IBM 6611 Network Processor 140 and 170 hardware platform is based on IBM's
proven RISC* technology and will be available in a four-slot model and a
seven-slot model.

Customers are building wide area networks (WAN's) that interconnect local area
network (LAN) technologies and protocols from multiple vendors. The new IBM
Multiprotocol Network Program, by enabling the consolidation of multiple
protocols on a physical link, can reduce a customer's networking expenses. The
basic functions of the IBM Multiprotocol Network Program include the ability to
route a wide variety of LAN protocols as well as the ability to transport
Systems Network Architecture (SNA) and Network Basic Input/ Output System
(NETBIOS) traffic in a bridged or routed environment.  A Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) network management agent is included in the IBM
Multiprotocol Network Program.  It can be managed by an existing SNMP manager
and by the new AIX* NetView*/6000 program (5765-077).

The IBM Multiprotocol Network Program and IBM 6611 Network Processor 140 and
170 are significant additions to IBM's broad range of networking products and
services for high-speed, integrated, open networks. The IBM 6611 Network
Processor connects Local Area Networks (LAN) and/or Wide Area Networks (WAN) in
multiple combinations to form a physically integrated network which transports
multiple networking protocols between like to like entities (applications
speaking the same protocol). The IBM 6611 Network Processor ability to
concurrently provide multiprotocol router and multiport Token-Ring source route
bridge functions makes it a viable solution in the LAN to LAN and the LAN to
LAN over WAN environments.

IBM adds the IBM Multiprotocol Network Program and IBM 6611 Network Processor
to its bridging and routing product line which now includes:

    o   Bridges
        -   The IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge Program Version 2.2 is a
            PS/2*-based program for local Token-Ring to local Token-Ring,
            and for local Token-Ring to remote Token-Ring attachments
        -   8209 LAN Bridge for local attachments; Token-Ring to Token-
            Ring and Token-Ring to ethernet
        -   IBM 6611 Network Processor for multiport support of local
            and remote Token-Rings. A fully configured IBM 6611 Network
            Processor 170 can attach up to seven local Token-Rings. The
            IBM 6611 Network Processor 170 can attach up to twelve serial
            lines each connecting a remote PS/2 running the PS/2 bridge
            program
        -   IDNX bandwidth manager can attach remote Token-Ring to remote
            Token-Ring and remote Token-Ring to remote ethernet
    o   Routers
        -   IBM 6611 Network Processor multiprotocol router supporting
            TCP/IP, DECnet, IPX, XNS, AppleTalk, SNA and NETBIOS
            protocols
        -   IBM 3745 with Network Control Program (NCP) supporting SNA
            and TCP/IP protocols, as well as the transport of NETBIOS
            over SNA when using the LAN to LAN over WAN program.
        -   TCP/IP routing IBM products supporting the DOS, OS/2, AIX
            Family, MVS and VM host environments.
        -   APPN Network Node products including OS/2, 3174 and OS/400
            environments
        -   IPX routing using the Novell bridging program remarketed by
            IBM.

There are a number of decision criteria categories which should be examined to
understand and choose the best fit solution for each customer bridging and/or
routing environment. These criteria include:

    o   Configuration/Connectivity
    o   Network Management
    o   Availability
    o   Performance
    o   Cost Factors

Although most customer environments have unique characteristics, there are
several topological categories into which the majority of environments fall:

    o   Local and campus backbone
    o   Remote bridged and routed network
    o   SNA and non-SNA parallel networks
    o   Voice, data, video integrated networks
    o   Mixed router networks

In the local and campus backbone environment, the IBM 6611 Network Processor
multiport bridge functions compliment attachment into existing networks of IBM
local bridging products and can provide potential savings in combining multiple
separate bridges onto a single IBM 6611 Network Processor.  Using the IBM
Multiprotocol Network Program routing functions, which operate concurrently
with supplied bridge function, provide the benefits of a router, such as
managing unwanted LAN broadcasts (providing protocol firewall).

In the remote bridged and router network environment, the IBM Multiprotocol
Network Program multiport bridge functions compliment attachment into existing
networks of IBM's remote bridging product, the IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge
Program Version 2.2. One can realize potential savings in combining the local
ends of multiple separate remote bridges onto a single IBM 6611 Network
Processor.  As in local bridging environments, one can also enable the
concurrent routing function to accrue those benefits. Token-Rings connected by
the IBM 6611 Network Processor and the Token-Ring Network Bridge Program for
remote connections are supported by the IBM LAN Network Manager.

In the SNA and non-SNA parallel network environment a number of considerations
come to bear. For customer networks where SNA is the predominate protocol, the
3745 with NCP is the recommended SNA routing product.  For SNA networks which
require incidental connection of TCP/IP via ethernet LANs, the 3745 support of
ethernet provides the required TCP/IP routing between TCP/IP workstations and
attached TCP/IP hosts.  When the number of required protocols include more than
those supported by the 3745, the IBM 6611 Network Processor should be assessed.
The IBM Multiprotocol Network Program data link switching support provides
transport of both SNA and NETBIOS protocols over a TCP/IP routing network. This
permits the physical integration of SNA and NETBIOS along with other highly
used protocols such as DECnet, IPX, AppleTalk, TCP/IP and XNS.  Using data link
switching support the IBM 6611 Network Processor can be configured to provide a
multiprotocol backbone, and also connect existing 3745 SNA network resources
via Token-Ring between IBM 6611 Network Processor and the 3745. For networks
whose predominate support requirement is for multiple non-SNA protocols, the
IBM Multiprotocol Network Program and IBM 6611 Network Processor can provide
the solution. It should also be noted that the IBM 6611 Network Processor can
also concurrently support environments requiring downstream attachment of SDLC
lines for concentration of multidropped 3174 controllers and their attached
devices. If the need for running parallel SNA and multiprotocol networks exist,
the frame relay support provided by both the IBM 6611 Network Processor and the
3745 permit both networks to be attached to a common public/private frame relay
network.

In networks requiring integration of voice, data and video, the use of IBM's
IDNX bandwidth manager should be considered. The IBM 6611 Network Processor can
be attached via Token-Ring to the IDNX to exploit the IDNX bandwidth
management. The IDNX contains a featured Lan Wan eXchange card, called LWX,
which also provides multiprotocol support. The IBM 6611 Network Processor and
the LWX card can communicate via LAN when using standard router protocols such
as TCP/IP Routing Information Protocol (RIP).

Integrating the IBM 6611 Network Processor into mixed router networks which
include routing products from multiple vendors requires knowledge of
compatibility levels of intra- and inter- routing protocols. The IBM
Multiprotocol Network Program support for TCP/IP Open Shortest Path First
(OSPF), the most recent intra-router standard, plus RIP, Exterior Gateway
Protocol (EGP), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) and HELLO, and the link protocols
such as Point-To-Point Protocol (PPP), and frame relay, position the IBM 6611
Network Processor for interoperability among those routers supporting
equivalent router protocols. Other considerations include matching the routing
components of protocols such as DECnet, AppleTalk, IPX, and XNS as well as
TCP/IP.

The IBM Multiprotocol Network Program and IBM 6611 Network Processor can
provide a spectrum of protocol support, configuration attachment and integrated
network management. Contact an IBM marketing representative and/or systems
engineer who can help expound on the decision factors involved in making the
product the selection for your particular environment.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Systems Management
        The IBM Multiprotocol Network Program can reduce systems
        management expenses for networking facilities by enabling the
        consolidation of multiple networking protocols on a physical
        link.
    o   End-User Productivity
        The IBM Multiprotocol Network Program addresses customer
        requirements for a cost-effective means of implementing new end-
        user applications that improve end-user productivity through LAN
        technologies and protocols and distributed computing models such
        as client-server computing.
    o   Investment Protection
        The IBM Multiprotocol Network Program , with its ability to
        handle a wide variety of LAN-based protocols as well as SNA,
        enables customer to protect the significant investment that they
        have made in application development, personnel training, and
        computing and networking hardware.
    o   Growth Enablement
         Application growth is no longer constrained by the expense of
        implementing and maintaining multiple physical networks to
        support the wide variety of LAN protocols underlying the rich
        array of LAN-based personal computer and workstation applications.
    o   Business Solutions
        The IBM Multiprotocol Network Program, with its ability to
        handle a wide variety of LAN protocols, enables business
        solutions to be developed to meet unique end-users requirements
        with minimal consideration of, and constraint imposed by, the
        underlying networking protocols.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 189. LAN BRIDGE PROGRAMS AND LAN BRIDGE MANAGER/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    5871-AAA       71G9346         Local Token-Ring Bridge V 1.0
    5871-AAA       71G9347         Remote Token-Ring Bridge V 1.0
    5871-AAA       71G9348         LANStreamer Token-Ring Bridge V 1.0
    5871-AAA       71G9349         LAN Bridge Manager/2 V 1.0

The following four new products in this announcement are:  The IBM LANStreamer
Token-Ring Bridge/DOS VERSION 1.0 provides high performance throughput when
combined with the LANStreamer 32-bit adapter in a local token-ring environment.
It also allows the hop count to be increased from the previous limit of seven
to a maximum of thirteen.

The IBM LAN Bridge Manager/2 VERSION 1.0 enables distributed installation,
setup and management of IBM token-ring bridge program products (IBM 8209
excluded).  The IBM LAN Bridge Manager/2 VERSION 1.0 implements a Bridge
Manager station which manages a client/server relationship with an existing
server and bridge "clients".  Bridges and their resources can now be managed
remotely.  Existing network management function between LAN Network Manager
Version 1.1 and IBM bridges is not affected and are mutually exclusive
products.

The IBM Local Token-Ring Bridge/DOS VERSION 1.0 replaces the current local
bridge program product.  This new local bridge provides identical function to
the local bridge provided in the IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge Program Version
2.2.  The new, lower priced IBM Local Token-Ring Bridge/DOS VERSION 1.0
provides an efficient, cost effective local bridging solution for connecting
and segmenting token-ring networks.  The IBM Remote Token-Ring Bridge/DOS
VERSION 1.0 replaces the current remote bridge program product.  A single
license now supports both halves of a remote bridge.  Remote dial function is
included.

This new remote bridge provides enhancements to the remote bridge provided in
the IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge Program Version 2.2, including:

    o   Support for full T1 (1.544 Mbps) or full E1 (2.048 Mbps) line
        speeds when using the High-Speed Communications Co-Processor/2
        Adapter.
    o   Communications adapter transmit buffer depth is increased from
        64K to 256K bytes.  Remote bridge performance is improved
        through enhanced buffering of bursty traffic.
    o   Two new bridge filters.

IBM Remote Token-Ring Bridge/DOS VERSION 1.0 is equivalent to PTF 37463.  The
new, lower priced IBM Remote Token-Ring Bridge/DOS VERSION 1.0 provides an
efficient, cost effective remote bridging solution for connecting remote
token-ring networks.

Separate local and remote bridge products offer price advantages over the
Token-Ring Network Bridge Program Version 2.2.  Since a single IBM Remote
Token-Ring Bridge/DOS VERSION 1.0 program license now installs the primary and
secondary halves of the remote bridge pair, the value to customers has been
substantially increased.  If high speed performance is not required for some
LAN segments, then these products are very competitive in the token-ring
environment.

If high speed performance is the major requirement, the LANStreamer Token-Ring
Bridge, together with the LANStreamer 32-bit adapter, provide the highest
throughput performance attainable in a token-ring environment.

The Bridge Manager saves the duplication of skills that are required to manage
and maintain bridges in various locations.  It provides the mechanism to
distribute code and run the token-ring bridge applications from a central
location.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   The new, lower priced IBM Local Token-Ring Bridge/DOS Version 1.0
        provides an efficient, cost effective local bridging solution for
        connecting and segmenting token-ring networks.
    o   The IBM Remote Token-Ring Bridge/DOS Version 1.0 includes both
        halves and provides enhancements for full T1 line speed support
        and improved performance through enhanced buffering of bursty
        traffic.
    o   The IBM LANStreamer Token-Ring Bridge/DOS Version 1.0 provides
        high speed performance when combined with the LANStreamer 32-bit
        adapter and allows increased hop counts.
    o   The IBM LAN Bridge Manager/2 provides two major functions,
        centralized software distribution and bridge management.
(1) Trademark of Novell, Inc. * Signifies a trademark or registered trademark
of International Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 190. ULTIMEDIA WORKPLACE/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    Type Model Feature   Part
    Number     Number   Number          Name

    5871-AAA   3007    41G2938    Ultimedia Workplace/2 Product
    5871-AAA   6311    41G2908    Ultimedia Workplace/2 Product
    (Diskettes only)
    5872-AAA   5870    71G3722    Ultimedia Workplace/2
                                    Add'l License with Certificate
    5872-AAA   6308    71G4172    Ultimedia Workplace/2
                                    Add'l License without Certificate

Ultimedia Workplace/2 is an innovative, low-cost multimedia object manager that
runs on OS/2 2.1 and is a member of the Ultimedia Tools Series, a suite of
multimedia software tools provided by IBM and other independent software
developers. Ultimedia Workplace/2 allows users to organize, play, annotate, and
search images, video clips, audio files, and other objects. Its rich
functionality and graphical interface make Ultimedia Workplace/2 equally
valuable for both business users and creative professionals.

The emerging multimedia market has requirements for audio, video, text, and
graphics tools. Ultimedia Workplace/2 is an integral part of the Ultimedia
Tools Series that is provided for users who need to have an effective, rapid,
and easy to use way to classify, organize, and share media objects.

The first group is application creators who create professional presentations
and applications for a living. Their work is seen in kiosks and professional
demonstrations. They need access to large amounts of media data quickly.

The second group is content providers who create media for use by other people.
This group would use the media library management functions to package and sell
their media to creators.  Clip art manufacturers could provide CD-ROMs with
high quality images, audio and video for use by application creators. They can
use the functions of Ultimedia Workplace/2 to create packages tailored to each
target audience of media users.

The third group is composed of users who can use Ultimedia Workplace/2 to
manage the media contained on the personal computer (work or home). The library
management, visual organization, and flexible, user defined media organization
allows anyone to better use the media available to them on their PC.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Innovative, low-cost multimedia object manager
    o   Runs on OS/2 2.1 with MMPM/2
    o   Use to organize, play, annotate, search, and browse images,
        video clips, audio files, and other objects
    o   Rich functionality and graphical interface
    o   For both business users and creative professionals
    o   Member of the Ultimedia Tools Series, a suite of other multimedia
        software tools provided by IBM from other independent software
        vendor developers. Benefits are:
        -   One stop shopping for cross platform multimedia tools
        -   Marketing support via 1-800-228-ULTI
        -   24 hour fulfillment through the Ultimedia Tools Series direct
            channel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 191. ULTIMEDIA BUILDER/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   5871-AAA   3008    41G2937    Ultimedia Builder/2 Product
    o   5871-AAA   6309    41G2926    Ultimedia Builder/2 Product
                                      (Diskettes only)
    o   5872-AAA   5868    71G3727    Ultimedia Builder/2 Add'l Lic with
                                      Certiicate
    o   5872-AAA   6306    71G4171    Ultimedia Builder/2 Add'l Lic. no
                                      Certifiate

Ultimedia Builder/2 is a low cost multimedia authoring solution that runs on
OS/2 2.1 with MMPM/2. Builder/2 has a scripting editor with a graphical front
end for the creation of multimedia applications.  Users can easily drag and
drop multimedia objects from Workplace/2, Perfect Image/2, and the Workplace
Shell onto Builder/2. It provides a graphical or text user interface, and also
includes audio, image, and video browsers, text plane support, and a simple
animation editor.  The graphical editor gives users a visual representation of
a filmstrip-like format that shows the sequence of the multimedia objects
(images, audio, video, etc.) in the presentation being created.  Ultimedia
Builder/2 comes with an OS/2 runtime and a full-function multimedia scripting
language, Audio Visual Authoring/2 Language (AVA/2).

Ultimedia Builder/2 is part of the Ultimedia Tool Series, a suite of multimedia
software tools provided by IBM and other independent software developers.

In addition to the normal marketing channels, IBM Personal Systems Product
Distributors and the Ultimedia Tools Series direct channel are included.

From the multimedia support built directly into OS/2 2.1 to the new multimedia
PS/2's, IBM continues its commitment to provide superior multimedia software
with its Ultimedia brand of products.  One of the first IBM Multimedia
offerings was the award-winning Audio Visual Connection (AVC). The AVC is a
comprehensive multimedia authoring product offering image, audio, graphics,
text, analog (M-Motion) and digital (DVI) full-motion video in one complete,
integrated package.

Today, with the announcement of Ultimedia Builder/2, Ultimedia Workplace/2, and
Ultimedia Perfect Image/2, a suite of OS/2 2.1 multimedia tools, the customer
can now choose a modular solution.  Rather than acquiring one "do-everything"
package, a customer can select the tools best suited for the required tasks and
seamlessly operate these tools to create professional multimedia applications.
In addition, a customer can complement the tools in the suite with the other
multimedia tools included in the Ultimedia Tools Series.

Ultimedia Builder/2, Ultimedia Workplace/2 and Ultimedia Perfect Image/2 all
follow CUA requirements so that learning to use one tool can minimize the time
needed to learn another. Because these tools were designed to be interoperable,
media objects such as image, audio, and video files can be "dragged" from one
tool and "dropped" into another.  Media objects can also be easily exchanged
between Ultimedia Builder/2, Ultimedia Workplace/2 and Ultimedia Perfect
Image/2, and the tools included in the Ultimedia Tools Series.

Ultimedia Builder/2 is the Ultimedia Tools Series product that customers can
use to produce multimedia presentations and applications. This tool provides an
easy-to-use interface for the entry level user, sophisticated functions, and a
state-of-the art tutorial. Ultimedia Builder/2 should be useful to the majority
of multimedia users who are not professional presentation creators but who need
to produce quality presentations quickly and easily.

MULTIMEDIA ENVIRONMENTS

    o   Training
    o   Business Desktop
    o   Industrial
    o   Education
    o   Merchandising
    o   Public Access
    o   Entertainment
    o   Publishing
    o   Home/Personal

Ultimedia Builder/2 provides the following benefits to the customer:

    o   Intuitive, simple, graphic presentation interface for the novice/
        casual user enables presentations (including branching logic) to
        be created without any need for entry of language syntax.
    o   Text interface for the more experienced user enables scripting
        to the full richness of AVA/2 data processing and multimedia
        function.
    o   State of the art tutorial on CD-ROM provides instructional
        dialog via rich audio/visual techniques.
    o   Data/file sharing and/or interoperability with other Ultimedia
        Tools Series products. This open-ended approach allows users to
        assemble sets of production tools best suited to their particular
        needs and skill levels, selecting from a collection of the very
        best in current and future multimedia products.
    o   Use of MMPM/2 I/O procedures to read image and audio objects
        (files) enables AVA/2 to automatically display and play the many
        file formats currently supported by these MMPM/2 procedures. This
        allows users to use files directly in their native forms and
        avoid the need for converting files.
    o   Rich multimedia capability. AVA/2 supports all major multimedia
        forms; high resolution image (XGA and SVGA 800 X 600 and 1024 X
        768), PCM, MIDI and ADPCM audio, analog and digital video
        playback and capture, anti-aliased text in high quality fonts,
        and touchscreen support.
    o   Some image editing is available with text plane support. This is
        a user interface that allows users to add or modify text and
        trigger fields in existing AVC images. It specifically works with
        the 'text plane'. It allows for creating, editing, moving, and
        deleting text from within an existing AVC image as well as
        defining the text styles, sizes, colors, and drip shadows. In
        addition to text handling, support is available for creating,
        editing, moving, and deleting trigger fields.  Text plane
        support reads any file supported by MMIO Procs but will write
        only AVC file format.
    o   AVA/2 provides for interoperability with OS/2 IPF (Interactive
        Presentation Facility). Users will be able to combine, handle,
        and display high volumes of text including scrolling, hyper-like
        linking, and automatic flowing and formatting of the text.
    o   AVA/2 can access and process SQL relational databases for read/
        write and query.  When used with the compatible Workplace/2
        product, users can access dBASEIV format files, DB2/2, and OS/2
        Database Manager from within a Builder story.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Functionally rich, low-cost presentation authoring tool
    o   Runs on OS/2 2.1 with MMPM/2
    o   Increases user productivity with an easy-to-use graphical
        interface and a textual interface for authoring multimedia
        presentations
    o   For both business users and creative professionals
    o   Is a member of the Ultimedia Tools Series, a suite of multimedia
        software tools provided by IBM from other independent software
        vendor developers.
        Benefits are:
        -   One stop shopping for cross platform multimedia tools
        -   Marketing Support via 1-800-228-ULTI
        -   24 hour fulfillment through the Ultimedia Tools Series
            direct channel.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 192. ULTIMEDIA PERFECT IMAGE/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    Type Model Feature   Part
    Number     Number   Number          Name
    5871-AAA   2932    41G2942    Ultimedia Perfect Image/2 Product
    5871-AAA   6310    41G2940    Ultimedia Perfect Image/2 Product-
                                  Diskettes only
    5872-AAA   5869    71G3721    Ultimedia Perfect Image/2
                                  Add'l License with Certificate
    5872-AAA   6307    71G4173    Ultimedia Perfect Image/2
                                  Add'l License without Certificate

Ultimedia Perfect Image/2 is a high quality image capture, convert, image
enhancement, and print tool that runs on OS/2 2.1 and is part of the Ultimedia
Tool Series from IBM, a suite of other multimedia software tools provided by
IBM and other independent software vendor developers.  IBM proprietary image
enhancement functions help the casual user as well as the professional achieve
quality results quickly.

The emerging multimedia market has requirements for audio, video, text, and
graphics tools.  Ultimedia Perfect Image/2 is an integral part of the Ultimedia
Tools Series that is provided for users who need to have professional quality
images available for their multimedia applications.

There are three major areas of opportunity:

    1.  The first is composed of users who can use Ultimedia Perfect
        Image/2 to retouch images and produce creative works from the
        results.  Ultimedia Perfect Image/2 is a tool that combines
        sophisticated image enhancement with functions that are easy to
        apply to images without being a professional graphics artist or
        computer specialist.
    2.  The second is content providers who create presentations on the
        desk top.  This group uses their creativeness to sell their ideas
        via the presentations but are not professional presentation
        creators.  They will be able to use the functions of Ultimedia
        Perfect Image /2 to enhance and retouch images for professional
        looking results.
    3.  The third, application creators, create professional
        presentations and applications for a living. Their work is seen
        in kiosks and professional demonstrations. The sophisticated
        functions of Ultimedia Perfect Image/2 that are easy to use can
        help them perform more output in less time with results that can
        add to the quality of their deliverables.

The needs of these groups can be met using the retouch, video capture, and
sophisticated enhancement functions provided by Ultimedia Perfect Image/2.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Allows the casual user the opportunity for the easy capture of
        images for presentations using digital content
    o   Increases user productivity with immediate feedback to image
        enhancements and an easy to use interface
    o   Protects user investment by processing existing image file
        formats
    o   Provides business presentations with high quality image functions
        that can be installed and used immediately with existing images
    o   Allows use of multimedia images with OS/2 2.1 services to expand
        the reach of the desktop.
    o   Improves system management by being OS/2 2.1 compliant.
    o   Member of the Ultimedia Tools Series, a suite of other multimedia
        software tools provided by IBM from other independent software
        vendor developers. Benefits are:
        -   One stop shopping for cross platform multimedia tools
        -   Marketing Support via 1-800-228-ULTI
        -   24 hour fulfillment through the Ultimedia Tools Series direct
            channel
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 193. AIX ACCESS FOR DOS USERS VERSION 3.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   65G1479   AIX Access for DOS Users Version 3.1
    o   65G1505   Additional License for AIX Access for DOS Users
        Version 3.1 (includes Proof of Additional License certificate)

AIX* Access for DOS Users Version 3.1 provides a transparent access for
personal computer users to the AIX Version 3.2 RISC System/6000* (AIX/6000*
Version 3.2) file system and, allows AIX/6000 Version 3.2 applications to be
executed on the RISC System/6000 processor via keyboard emulation. This latest
version includes Microsoft** Windows** 3.1 integration, DOS Version 5.0
enablement and support for Network Driver Interface Specification (NDIS)
drivers.  AIX Access for DOS Users Version 3.1 allows DOS Personal Computer
users to share the AIX/6000 Version 3.2 file system of the host RISC
System/6000 in a manner that requires no AIX operating system knowledge by the
user and provides access to system printers attached to the RISC System/6000
POWERserver.  AIX Access for DOS Users Version 3.1 replaces AIX Access for DOS
Users Version 2.1.

AIX Access for DOS Users Version 3.1 provides existing IBM DOS Version 5.0 and
MS-DOS users with the following communications access to AIX file systems and
printers.  A terminal emulation function is also provided. Adapters supported
include:

    o   3COM EtherLink (3C501)
    o   3COM EtherLink Plus
    o   3COM EtherLink 16
    o   3COM EtherLink II (3C503)
    o   3COM EtherLink III
    o   3COM EtherLink/MC**
    o   DEC DEPCA
    o   IBM Token-Ring Network Adapters 16MB and 4MB**
    o   Intel EtherExpress**
    o   Intel TokenExpress**
    o   Interlan NI5210**
    o   Interlan NI6510**
    o   Novell NE1000**
    o   Novell NE2000**
    o   SMC (Western Digital) WD8003/8013**
    o   SMC (WD) 8003 E/A (MCA)**
    o   Ungermann-Bass NIC (ISA)**
    o   Ungermann-Bass NIC (MCA)**
    o   XIRCOM**
    o   XIRCOM II**

TCP/IP support includes:

    o   TCP/IP for IBM X-Windows for IBM DOS, Release 2.1 with a
        supported network adapter
    o   Excelan's LAN Workplace Network Software for PC DOS TCP/IP
        Transport System, Version 3.5, with a supported network adapter
    o   Novell's LAN WorkPlace for DOS, Version 4.0, with a supported
        network adapter
    o   FTP Software's PC/TCP, Release 2.05, with a supported network
        adapter
    o   IBM LAN Support Program, Version 1.2, with a supported network
        adapter
    o   Ungermann Bass NetOne, with a supported network adapter.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Allows users of IBM DOS Version 5.0 and MS-DOS to share AIX file
        system transparently
    o   Integrates with Microsoft Windows 3.1
    o   Supports NDIS drivers
    o   Provides access to system printers attached to the RISC
        System/6000 POWERserver
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Microsoft, Windows, and MS-DOS are tademarks of
Microsoft Corporation. ** 3COM EtherLink, 3COM EtherLink Plus, 3COM EtherLink
16, 3COM EtherLink II, 3COM EtherLink III, and 3COM EtherLink/MC are trademarks
of 3COM Corporation. ** DEC DEPCA is a trademark of Digital Equipment
Corporation. ** Intel EtherExpress and Intel TokenExpress are trademarks of
Intel Corporation. ** Novell NE1000 and Novell NE2000 are trademarks of Novell
Corporation. ** Interlan NI51210 and Interlan NI6510 are trademarks of Racal
Information Systems, Inc. ** SMC WD8003/8013 and SMC 8003 E/A are trademarks of
Western Digital Corporation. ** Ungermann-Bass NIC (ISA) and Ungermann-Bass NIC
(MCA) are trademarks of Ungermann-Bass, Inc. ** XIRCOM and XIRCOM II are
registered trademarks of Zircom Corp.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 194. IBM SEARCHMANAGER/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   80G0-045 IBM SearchManager/2
    o   80G0-039 IBM SearchManager LAN Server/2, Client/2
    o   80G0-051 IBM SearchManager Client/DOS for Windows

SearchManager/2 is IBM's solution for text retrieval in the OS/2 Version 2
environment. It offers linguistic and precise search options in the single user
or client/server environment, where the server is OS/2 2.0 and the clients are
either OS/2 2.0 or DOS/Windows 3.1 based.  SearchManager offers support for a
variety of document formats, types and languages. The documents may be located
in either the OS/2 file system, or LOTUS Notes library or a customer chosen
library, where SearchManager provides the enabling support for any library and
a sample for relational database.

SearchManager end-user interface complies to CUA '91 architecture
(object-oriented workplace model) and is fully integrated into the OS/2
workplace shell. All SearchManager objects are represented as ICONs and allow
for drag and drop access. IBM SearchManager/2 offers thesaurus navigation
capabilities in conjunction with IBM Thesaurus End User System Toolkit/2. These
customers will participate in a program designed to validate that IBM has
achieved the quality objectives for IBM SearchManager/2, IBM
SearchManager/2lan., and IBM SearchManager Client/DOS for Windows in a variety
of production environments.

When these customers confirm that IBM has achieved its quality objectives, IBM
will announce general availability and ordering information.

SearchManager/2 is IBM's solution for fulltext retrieval in OS/2 2.0
environment. It is especially well suited, for target applications with the
following characteristics:

  Number of documents                   hundreds, thousands, ....
  Document structure                    no structure
  Document format                       various formats
  Document languages                    various languages
  Online update of documents            yes
  Change of document (time)             frequent change
  Document location                     filesystem, other via API
  Compound documents                    yes, via hyperlink
  Precise searches                      yes
  Linguistic searches                   yes
  Boolean searches                      yes
  Proximity searches                    yes
  Wildcard support                      yes
  Security                              use library security
  APIs                                  yes
  Search concurrent to index build      yes
  Thesaurus support                     via IBM Thesaurus End User System/2

SearchManager/2 complements SearchManager/370, which is IBM's solution for host
based information retrieval:

IBM  SearchManager/370  is  a  key  IBM  solution  for  full-text retrieval of
documents  consisting  of  text,  graphics  and/or images. It provides Boolean
and context operators  for  full-text search,  offers  them  in  a CUA (TM) 89
user-friendly dialog and enables customers  to  use  full-text retrieval  also
in  their applications via an application programming interface (API).

The  IBM SearchManager/370 Migration Component provides migration and
coexistence for users of the predecessor products STorage And Information
Retrieval System (STAIRS) in  both  the  MVS  and  VM environments.  When IBM
SearchManager/370 is used in conjunction with  OfficeVision*/MVS  and its
Document  Writing  Feature (DisplayWrite/370  - MVS environment) or with
OfficeVision/VM and DisplayWrite/370 (VM environment), and the Graphical Data
Display Manager (GDDM)*, it offers a solution for  creating,  storing,
retrieving, displaying, processing, and distributing of documents consisting of
text, graphics and/or images.

In VM environment, IBM SearchManager/370 interfaces to OfficeVision/VM mail
function to send  documents  stored  in  IBM SearchManager/370 databases.

SearchManager/370 is especially well suited, if the application it is targeted
for has the following characteristics:

  Number of documents                   hundreds, thousands, millions
  Document structure                    full structure (section,attributes)
  Document format                       STAIRS input formats, RFT
  Document languages                    language independent
  Online update of documents            no
  Change of document (time)             infrequent change
  Document location                     SM/370 database
  Compound documents                    yes, via hyperlink
  Precise searches                      yes
  Linguistic searches                   no
  Boolean searches                      yes
  Proximity searches                    yes
  Wildcard support                      yes, endmasking
  Security                              yes
  APIs                                  yes
  Search concurrent to index build      no
  Thesaurus support                     no

BookManager provides a tool for customers to develop and deliver softcopy
documentation. It is well suited to handle books that are created by one of the
IBM publishing programs. The solution is based  on  converting machine-readable
source  files into a form that then can be searched and viewed at display
terminals.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Enhances corporate and personal productivity by providing
        participants direct, flexible access to information residing on
        the LAN server.
    o   Provides a business solution for customers who need text
        retrieval integrated into their business applications and support
        of compound documents.
    o   Protects the investments in documents by supporting a variety of
        document formats including SearchManager/370 and STAIRS format
        (ECTF).
    o   Allows for growth enablement through the client server concept
        in OS/2 Version 2 environment.
    o   Offers powerful systems management through time and event based
        administration functions.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 195. PC DOS VERSION 6.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PC DOS Version 6.1 is the significantly enhanced primary operating system for
entry level IBM and Compatible OEM personal computer systems.  PC DOS Version
6.1 features a library of integrated DOS utilities.  The utilities, which
include disk compression (*), anti-virus, full screen backup, new full screen
editor, and program scheduler result from alliances with award-winning software
vendors and IBM Research.  PC DOS Version 6.1 provides important additional
features such as new hardware support (PEN, PCMCIA), a memory optimizer to
access more memory in order to run applications better, a program scheduler
with a full-screen calendar that allows day or night program scheduling, and a
powerful new editor that provides new capabilities, such as draw, box, sort and
add, plus the ability to edit multiple files.

In addition, the DOS kernel has been reduced in size and the overall
performance improved.  PC DOS Version 6.1 extends memory expansion to 8086/88
and 80286 systems by providing device drivers that can utilize a wide variety
of video and expanded memory adapters to load applications high.  The product
is offered in two versions: a base product for new systems, and a full PC DOS
Version 6.1 upgrade package capable of upgrading over any existing DOS (version
2.1 or higher installed on a hard disk) at a significantly reduced cost.

DOS 5.02 continues to be available to those customers not requiring the PC DOS
Version 6.1 utilities or features.

The planned availability of PC DOS Version 6.1 is July 26, 1993.  (*) Disk
compression will not be initially included in the product, but will be made
available at no additional charge (or $1.00 in Canada) with planned
availability starting on September 30, 1993. Customers can obtain the disk
compression after its availability by submitting the special coupon included in
the product ship group.  Customers should allow four to six weeks for delivery.

PC DOS Version 6.1 should be considered cross-industry and in OEM channels as
the primary operating system for the entry level IBM and IBM-compatible
personal computer systems.  PC DOS Version 6.1 should also be considered as the
operating system for non-entry IBM and IBM-Compatible systems, whenever
advanced solutions, very large memory, storage protection, and multi-tasking
are not required.

The PC DOS kernel is based off the MS-DOS 6* kernel and is therefore compatible
with Windows 3.X, Windows Applications, DOS extenders, and DOS applications.

IBM is committed to DOS and DOS customers.  IBM is making a real investment in
upgrading DOS users with state-of- the-art utilities and hardware support (PEN,
PCMCIA).

PC DOS Version 6.1 features competitive, award-winning DOS utilities which
surpass those offered in the MS-DOS 6 product.  The new utilities, which
include disk compression, anti-virus, full-screen backup, new full screen
editor, and program scheduler result from alliances with award-winning software
vendors and IBM Research.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Improves and optimizes memory management and performance
    o   Significantly increases the amount of data that can be stored on
        the hard disk
    o   Improves backup performance and features
    o   Provides robust file protection against computer viruses
    o   Allows programs or DOS commands to run unattended with flexible
        new scheduler
    o   Provides easy-to-use installation
    o   Improves editing capabilities
    o   Offers new device support with PEN extensions
    o   Provides PCMCIA Card Services (PCMCS) support
** - MS is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation ** DR DOS is a trademark of
Digital Research, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 196. IBM THESAURUS ADMINSTRATOR/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    5871-BBB    80G0035  IBM Thesaurus Admistrator/2
    5871-BBB    80G0037  IBM Thesaurus End User System Toolkit/2

The Thesaurus Management System, consisting of the Thesaurus Administrator/2
and the Thesaurus End User System Toolkit/2, is an easy-to-learn and
easy-to-use application for the use, maintenance and acquisition of
terminological data thesauri.

The Thesaurus Management System represents thesauri via a knowledge based
logical model.  Thesaurus Administrator/2 can assist in improving and enhancing
e.g.  conceptual searching through the ability to capture and work with
standardized terms.  A thesaurus can be viewed as a large body of terms,
semantic relations (for example, hierarchical, synonym, associative and
others), concept attributes and global description.  Various functions can be
performed to derive specific information from this structure, such as:

    o   Requested view of thesaurus, including links, terms and features
    o   Global thesaurus description
    o   Feature information

The two components share a data interface, the thesaurus index file.  This
index file is generated by the Thesaurus Administrator/2 and can be
read-accessed through any application calling the Thesaurus End User System
Toolkit/2

First Customer Shipment:  By June 29, 1993, to an already selected set of
customers.  These customers will participate in a program designed to validate
that IBM has achieved the quality objectives for IBM Thesaurus Administrator/2
and IBM Thesaurus EUS Toolkit/2 in a variety of production environments.  When
these customers confirm that IBM has achieved its quality objectives, IBM will
announce general availability and ordering information.

The Thesaurus Administrator/2 and Thesaurus End User System Toolkit/2 are
applicable for most industries and functional business areas, including:

    o   Creators and providers of information
    o   Translation departments
    o   Libraries and documentation centers
    o   Legal
    o   Research and development
    o   Customer service
    o   Human resources
    o   Office system support
    o   Planning.

The key benefits of the two components are:

    o   In general:  Terminological data accessable through IWS
    o   For indexers:  Improved indexing facility through data validation
        and data integrity as terms are entered or loaded in the database
    o   For users:  Increased productivity and improved precision through
        knowledge and/or content based searching
    o   For translators:  Clarified and standardized terminology through
        data validation, data integrity and intuitive graphical display.

HIGHLIGHTS The Thesaurus Management System consists of two components:

IBM THESAURUS ADMINISTRATOR/2 Creates and maintains the logical model (LM) of a
thesaurus and derives a thesaurus index structure from the LM:

    o   Supports standardized terminology
    o   Creates compact thesaurus index structure
    o   Supports fast data access
    o   Allows easy modification through bulk update
    o   Allows thesaurus search with partial match and attribute
        orientation
    o   Allows customization of thesaurus structure via object oriented
        graphic editing
    o   Ensures coherence and consistency
    o   Provides automatic link generation through backward inferencing
    o   Allows import/export of thesauri in various formats (for example,
        SGML)

IBM THESAURUS END USER SYSTEM TOOLKIT/2 Provides thesaurus information in read
mode to any terminology using application such as the SearchManager/2 Client:

    o   Easy use of online thesaurus
    o   Fast access even to large thesauri
    o   Sorage reduction through computed links
    o   Better consistency of terminology data
    o   Common set of thesauri used by entire community
    o   Retrieval of any thesaurus information defined in the LM (for
        example, global structure, terms, relations)
    o   Retrieval aid


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 197. IBM CONTINUOUS SPEECH SERIES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Continuous Speech Series is a set of programs that consist of a toolkit
for developing speech enabled applications and a runtime for execution and
operation of those applications. The developers toolkit provides the necessary
tools for application programmers to speech enable their existing products or
to develop new applications which exploit speech recognition. Using the speech
recognition Application Programming Interface (API), developers can produce
applications that recognize and process a continuous flow of spoken U.S.
English words. Using ICSS can help you to enhance the functionality of many
software applications and to develop new software applications that meet the
dynamic needs of todays markets.

The IBM Continuous Speech Series for Windows will be available through a beta
program starting in July 23, 1993. The initial release of the ICSS for Windows
program will allow Windows application developers to speech enable Windows
applications running in the WIN-OS2 session of OS/2 2.1. Customers must
complete the membership application form and fax back along with check or
credit card to receive the beta code, documentation and technical support. This
application is available by calling 1-800-627-8363 and asking for an ICSS
information package.

The main features of ICSS are:

    o   Speaker Independence
        Though there are variations in human speech from person to
        person, ICSS has the capability to process speech from different
        speakers. In addition, ICSS requires no speaker enrollment or
        training, unlike some other speech recognition systems. ICSS has
        been tested with a wide variety of accented speech. With
        experience, users learn appropriate microphone positioning and
        speaking volumes so that recognition rates improve with repeated
        speaker use.
    o   Continuous Speech
        Continuous speech is a series of spoken words without a
        requirement for pauses between words. This feature provides the
        ability for users to speak at natural or even rapid rates and
        enjoy successful speech recognition. This capability  is well
        suited for command and transaction applications that require
        high speed control of user interfaces. o   Large Vocabulary
        The ICSS dictionary has over 20,000 U.S. English words. The
        development tools are provided to allow application developers
        to add words not included in the dictionary such as proper nouns
        and industry-specific technical terms. Each active context can
        contain up to 1,000 active words. ICSS can provide recognition
        using up to 128 dynamically switchable contexts. By using the
        context switching feature, multiple contexts can be pre-loaded
        and rapidly switched, thus extending the practical reach of the
        system to complex real world applications.
    o   Multi-Platform
        ICSS currently supports the OS/2 and AIX environments with the
        Microsoft Windows 3.1 support available at a later date as stated
        in the Planned Availability Section below. ICSS Windows 3.1
        support will also execute in the WIN-OS2 session of OS/2 2.1.
        Along with supporting multiple operating systems, the ICSS for
        OS/2 product supports many of the popular sound cards via MMPM/2
        such as Soundblaster and Pro Audio Spectrum 16.
    o   Client/Server Support
        The recognition server can support multiple applications running
        on the same machine or on multiple machines. The recognition
        engine serves as a serially reusable resource. The ICSS Runtime
        can be installed as either a stand-alone executable, as a server
        or as a client. When installed in client/server mode, thus
        requiring 2 licenses, the client hardware resources, in terms of
        memory requirements is reduced.
    o   Published APIs
        Documented APIs facilitate the speech enablement of new and
        existing applications. The API set gives the application
        developer an efficient method of utilizing the speech recognition
        engine. The advantages and flexibility of a continuous speech
        interface can be quickly applied to a broad spectrum of existing
        user applications in a manner that protects and enhances user
        software investment.

The IBM Continuous Speech Series is positioned as the premium command/control,
data entry/retrieval and forms fill system.  This developers toolkit provides
application developers speech recognition vocabulary size unparalleled in the
industry. This is the only speaker independent speech recognition product
offered by IBM.  For customers who require speech to text dication, with free
form speech, highly accurate, large dictionaries (20,000 words), and can work
with speaker dependent, discrete speech systems, IBM offerst the IBM Speech
Server Series.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Continuous Speech Recognition, so you do not have to pause between
        words
    o   Speaker Independent, therefore no training is required and thus
        allowing for walk-up-and-use applications
    o   Multiple Operating System Support providing the ability for you
        to write cross-platform speech enabled applications (OS/2, AIX
        and Windows 3.1)
    o   Large Vocabulary allows most applications to be speech enabled
        because over 20,000 words are in the dictionary with up to 1,000
        active any any given time.
    o   Stand-Alone or Client/Server provides resource savings and
        allowing for enablement of current client/server applications.
    o   The IBM Continuous Speech Series is a program consisting of a
        developers toolkit and a runtime environment. The toolkit
        provides the ability to speech enable applications and the
        runtime allows the execution of these speech enabled applications.
    o   Dictionary tools to Add Words are included with the developers
        toolkit allowing industry-specific terms, and other unique words
        to be integrated into the speech enabled application
    o   Documented APIs, providing application developers easy access to
        the speech recognition engine, thus reducing the time it takes to
        speech enable an application.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 198. IBM PEN FOR OS/2 VERSION 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Pen for OS/2 operating system extension to OS/2* Version 2.1 lets users
access programs and operating system services and functions using a pen,
instead of a mouse or keyboard, provides handwriting recognition, and "soft"
keyboard data entry. Pen for OS/2 supports existing programs, including
programs that were not designed to use a pen.

Pen for OS/2 supports 16-bit and 32-bit unmodified OS/2 programs.  It also
supports unmodified Windows** programs running in a WIN-OS/2* window and
unmodified DOS programs running in a DOS window.

Pen for OS/2 has integrated features built around its ability to interpret
handwriting as commands and data. This ability also allows the keyboard to be
eliminated in some applications, reducing the physical dimensions and weight of
a system.

Pen for OS/2 provides a set of system gestures, or hand drawn symbols, that are
translated into commands for the operating system or application program. Pen
for OS/2 also includes tools that enable both pen-aware and pen-unaware
programs to use a pen. These tools make pen-unaware programs work as if they
were receiving information from a mouse or keyboard.

The pen is a natural writing and pointing device. By using the pen for
navigating the Workplace Shell and all application windows, a more natural user
interaction with OS/2 is achieved. Pen for OS/2 also supports finger
touch-sensitive digitizing devices with a separate "touch" device type for
applications for which touch is a better user interface.

There are many uses for pens on desktop as well as in mobile environments.
Examples include:

    o   Interactive teleconferencing
    o   Handwritten notes
    o   Freehand drawing
    o   Annotation of documents
    o   Data capture in the field
    o   Sales presentations with mark-up and pointing
    o   Signature capture

A pen-based chalkboard applet is included with Pen for OS/2.  This application
allows users to establish a link over a LAN and share the same viewing and
editing space simultaneously, adding bitmaps, screen captures, colored ink,
shapes and handwriting in real time.

The open architecture provided by the Pen for OS/2 Application Programming
Interface (API) invites independent software vendors to modify existing
applications or create new applications that take advantage of the pen/ink on
paper metaphor. To accommodate the rapid evolution of pen computing components,
Pen for OS/2 provides a number of well-defined interfaces for peripheral and
integral pen devices and handwriting recognition providers. These interfaces
allow developers to take advantage of breakthroughs in technology without
appreciable impact to previously-developed code.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Pen extensions to OS/2 Version 2.1
    o   Runs existing OS/2 Presentation Manager (PM), Win-OS/2, and DOS
        applications unmodified
    o   Provides mouse emulation for existing applications
    o   Provides on-screen pop-up keyboards for text entry
    o   Provides a set of standard gestures (symbols written with the
        pen or touch that trigger system or application functions)
    o   Allows the user to assign gestures for fast menu item selection
        or macro execution
    o   Provides handwriting recognition which translates pen input into
        alphanumeric text and forwards that text to an application
    o   Provides device drivers for opaque tablets, tablet computers and
        digitizers from the industry's most popular manufacturers and
        allows for others to be added in the future
    o   Includes LAN-based chalkboard applet
    o   Includes Sketch Pad tool for creating freehand drawings that are
        inserted into applications through the system clipboard
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 199. PENDOS VERSION 2.2 AND PENDOS UPGRADE FOR PC DPS 6.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The PenDOS(1) Version 2.2 operating system extensions to DOS lets users access
DOS programs, operating system services, and functions using a pen instead of a
mouse or keyboard. PenDOS allows the pen to function as the primary computer
interface via recognition of handwritten characters, "soft" keyboard data
entry, and mouse emulation.

PenDOS expands the capabilities of DOS with the following features:

    o   Full recognition of handwritten alphanumeric or symbolic
        characters with language-specific dictionaries
    o   Gesture macro editor that allows the user to map single or
        multiple DOS or application commands to a particular hand drawn
        symbol
    o   Handwriting trainer to customize the recognizer to personal
        handwriting style and improve recognition accuracy
    o   Freehand FAX applet
    o   Expense Account applet.

PenDOS has integrated features built around its ability to interpret
handwriting as commands and data. This ability also allows the keyboard to be
eliminated in some applications, reducing the physical dimensions and weight of
a system.

PenDOS provides a set of system gestures, or hand drawn symbols, that are
translated into commands for the operating system or application program. The
pen is a natural writing and pointing device. By using the pen, a more natural
interaction with the computer is achieved.

There are many uses for pens on desktop as well as in mobile environments.
Examples include:

    o   Interactive teleconferencing
    o   Handwritten notes
    o   Freehand drawing
    o   Annotation of documents
    o   Data capture in the field
    o   Sales presentations with mark-up and pointing
    o   Signature capture

A PenDOS Software Development Kit is available to help DOS applicatio
developers quickly and easily modify existing DOS applications or write new
"pen-centric" applications.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   PenDOS Version 2.2 provides pen extensions to DOS Versions 5.0
        and later
    o   PenDOS Upgrade for PC DOS 6.1 provides pen extensions to PC DOS
        Version 6.1 only (available only with the coupon in the product
        package for PC DOS 6.1, and only in the United States)
    o   Provide handwriting recognition which translates pen input into
        characters and forwards that text to the system or application
    o   Provide on-screen keyboards for text entry
    o   Provide mouse emulation for existing applications
    o   Provide a set of standard gestures (symbols written with the pen
        that trigger system or application functions)
    o   Allow the user to assign gestures to a command or group of
        commands that can be invoked through the writing of that gesture
    o   Include Freehand FAX applet
    o   Include Expense Account applet
    o   Include device drivers to support industry standard video
        displays, digitizer tablets, and pens.
(1) Trademark of Communication Intelligence Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 200. IBM TIME AND PLACE CONNECTIVITY/2 VERSION 1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Time and Place Connectivity/2* Version 1.1 is a LAN-based bi-directional
calendar connectivity program.  This SAA* OS/2* 32-bit program allows users of
IBM's OS/2 2.0 and 2.1 LAN-based IBM Time and Place/2 Version 1.01 time
management product and OfficeVision/VM* (OV/VM) 1.2 users to perform
interactive bi-directional view and free time calendar search in both the LAN
and OV/VM environments.

The graphical Administration window of Time and Place Connectivity/2 Version
1.1 provides administration functions such as adding, deleting, and updating
routing access to the calendars of OV/VM 1.2, and Time and Place/2 Version
1.01.  Additional administrative functions include viewing logged messages and
starting or stopping a calendar access.

Time and Place Connectivity/2 Version 1.1 satisfies the statement of general
direction from the Time and Place/2 Version 1.0 announcement by providing view
and free time search capability between Time and Place/2 Version 1.01 and
OV/VM, as well as provides the ability to send meeting notices to IBM
OfficeVision/VM.

IBM intends to provide the Time and Place Connectivity/2 product, which enables
viewing of calendars and free time search across IBM Time and Place/2 and IBM's
other host OfficeVision calendars.

The market has been shifting from host to LAN applications. This trend demands
that LAN-based applications have connectivity to existing host systems.

The host connectivity capability of Time and Place Connectivity/2 Version 1.1
is an IBM differentiators that exploits Time and Place/2 Version 1.01.

Time and Place Connectivity/2 Version 1.1 is IBM's calendar connectivity
product and a key component of IBM's LAN office solution.  Time and Place/2 is
most valuable in OV/VM enterprises that have moved, or are planning to move to
OS/2 LAN servers and LAN-based office solutions.

This LAN and OV/VM calendar connectivity provides an orderly transition and
co-existence for users who are moving to a LAN environment over time.  Time and
Place Connectivity/2 Version 1.1 provides the option to selectively move
departments, project groups, etc.

As new LAN-based end users are added to existing OV/VM enterprises, both host
and LAN end users will be able to transparently perform view and free time time
search operation with each other thus allowing the ability to expand existing
OV/VM calendar functions to the LAN-based end users.

This improved communications among host and LAN users will increase cross
functional activities by allowing users to effectively participate in calendar
interoperability across the enterprise.

With the addition of a mail gateway, Time and Place/2 Version 1.01 can use
Vendor Independent Messaging (VIM) to send calendar meeting notices to OV/VM
users.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Allows LAN and host calendar users to perform interactive bi-
        directional view and free time calendar search in LAN and OV/VM
        calendar environments
    o   Provides a permanent solution to improve communication between
        Time and Place/2 Version 1.01 and OV/VM calendar users
    o   Provides an orderly transition for customers migrating to a LAN
        environment and provide ongoing LAN user access to OV/VM
        calendars
    o   Provides an easy-to-use graphical administration window for
        adding, deleting, and updating routing information to OV/VM and
        Time and Place/2 Version 1.01 and the ability to view logged
        messages, starting or stopping host calendar access and
        displaying connectivity status
    o   With the addition of a mail gateway, Time and Place/2 Version
        1.01 can use VIM to send calendar meeting notices to OV/VM users
    o   Enables users to view calendar data in a transparent mode without
        learning a new calendar system.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 201. IBM 4700 PERSONAL COMPUTER APPLICATION SERVICES VERSION 2.2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM 4700 Personal Computer Application Services (PCAS) is a licensed program
that operates in an IBM Personal System/2* (PS/2*) or IBM Personal Computer
(PC) to emulate an IBM 3278-2 or IBM 4704-2,3 display when attached to an IBM
4701 Controller or IBM 4702 Processor.  Also provided are the capability to
print on a PC-attached printer, access to the 4700 virtual volume, and
programming interfaces.  With Version 2.2, IBM 4700 Personal Computer
Application Services (PCAS) is being enhanced to support PC DOS Version 6.1
along with new models of the IBM Personal System/2 including the ValuePoint*
models.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Includes support of new PS/2 and ValuePoint models
    o   Provides support of PC DOS 6.1 and OS/2* MVDM (multiple virtual
        DOS machines)
    o   Affords equivalent functionality of PCAS 2.1 at the latest
        corrective service level
    o   Permits access to the IBM financial I/O devices in an OS/2 2.0
        MVDM session from a specific version of DOS
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 202. IBM SAA CONSUMER TRANSACTION (CT) DEFINITION V1.2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   71G9-442 (5871-BBB) CT Definition/2 Version 1.2
    o   71G9-443 (5781-BBB) CT Runtime/2 Version 2

The IBM Consumer Transaction/2 (CT/2) products, IBM SAA Consumer Transaction
(CT) Definition/2 and IBM SAA Consumer Transaction Runtime/2, are licensed
programs for the IBM Operating System/2* (OS/2*) that provide for an
application development and execution in an IBM Personal System/2* (PS/2*)
workstation environment.  Together, they are Systems Application Architecture
(SAA) Common User Access* (CUA*) compliant application enablers on which to
develop integrated advanced workstation solutions.  The IBM Consumer
Transaction/DOS (CT/DOS) Runtime and IBM Consumer Transaction/DOS Platform
Version 1.3 licensed programs, combined, provide an IBM DOS solution for branch
automation tasks at platform and teller workstations.

Version 2 of CT Runtime/2 provides major enhancements, including operation in
32-bit mode, supported by Version 1.2 of CT Definition/2.  These enhancements
offer customers the ability to better use their people, their data, and the
functionality of their workstations.

By exploiting the OS/2 operating system, CT Definition/2 developers can take
advantage of the power of OS/2 and Presentation Manager* (PM) based enabler to
compose applications for the both the OS/2 and DOS workstation environments.
CT Runtime/2 is a powerful LAN based application engine using a PM Graphical
User Interface (GUI) and exploiting OS/2 for providing customer sales and
service, thereby improving customer satisfaction.  Using CT Runtime/2, PS/2
workstations can participate with CT/DOS Runtime PS/2 workstations via the
local area network (LAN).  Developed originally for the finance industry, CT
can be used in variety of advanced function workstation environments.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Enable growth through:
        -   Use of OS/2 multiple concurrent editing capability by CT
            Definition/2
        -   Use of OS/2 Presentation Manager (PM) dialog boxes, window
            objects and dialog services callable program interfaces
            (CPIs)
        -   Providing for intelligent windows, thus allowing dynamic
            changes to windows.
        -   Use of CT Runtime/2 and CT/DOS Runtime platform functions.
    o   Offer investment protection through:
        -   Common transaction language for the DOS and OS/2 platforms
        -   Coexistence of CT Runtime/2 and CT/DOS Runtime workstations
            on a common token ring LAN using IBM LAN Distributed Platform
            (LANDP)
    o   Improve user productivity through:
        -   Single-definition facility for complete support of CT
            Runtime/2 and CT/DOS Runtime
        -   Employment of SAA CUA
        -   The availability of extensive on-line help support
        -   Rapid access to product information via softcopy publications
        -   Easy-to-use installation process.
    o   Offer business solutions by:
        -   Operation of CT Runtime/2 with OS/2 Version 2 in 32 bit mode
        -   Providing verbs for CT Runtime/2 to
            --  allow access to relational databases via the SQL interface
            --  support generic LANDP (IBM LAN Distributed Platform) SRPI
                accesses.
        -   Including:
            --  an IBM supplied set of sample transactions for teller,
                platform, and CUA.
            --  a customization library to allow for easy configuration
                of LANDP.
            --  an example of how to access the IBM SAA Integrated
                Reasoning Shell (TIRS).
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **JetForm Server and Jetform Design are trademarks of
Indigo Software Limited.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 203. ENHANCED 5250 EMULATION PROGRAM PCMCIA SUPPORT VERSION 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This program supports the IBM 5250 Emulation PCMCIA Adapter, a new member of
the IBM 5250 Emulation Family.  It provides functions and features equivalent
to those provided by the currently available IBM Enhanced 5250 Emulation
Program Version 2.3.

This program eliminates any impact to businesses who have invested employee
training expense in the IBM Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program Version 2.3 and
would now like to enhance their employees' productivity by providing portable
5250 Emulation desktops capable of supporting PCMCIA credit cards.  It enables
the use of a common 5250 terminal emulation application on all of IBM's desktop
personal computer platforms: PC AT*, Micro Channel* and now PCMCIA-enhanced
portables.  National Language Support is provided for the following languages:
US English, French, German and Spanish.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Supports the new IBM 5250 Emulation PCMCIA Adapter with functions
        and features equivalent to those of the IBM Enhanced 5250
        Emulation Program Version 2.3
    o   Provides two host sessions (two display or one display and one
        printer) with concurrent access to PC DOS via a user-defined
        hot-key
    o   Uses similar installation and configuration procedures as the
        currently available program
    o   Increases flexibility with choice of different interrupt levels
    o   Reduces cost to current users of the IBM Enhanced 5250 Emulation
        Program Version 2.3 by providing only the required publication
        update pages
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **Windows is a Trademark of Microsoft Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 204. NETWARE NETWORK COMPUTING PRODUCTS FROM IBM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    Order     Part
     Type    Number              Description
   --------  ------- ------------------------------------------

   5871-AAA  53G5720 NetWare 4.0 from IBM Documentation Set
   5871-AAA  53G5730 NetWare 4.0 for OS/2 from IBM 3.5-inch
   5871-AAA  53G5605 NetWare 4.0 from IBM 5 User CD
   5871-AAA  53G5606 NetWare 4.0 from IBM 10 User CD
   5871-AAA  53G5607 NetWare 4.0 from IBM 25 User CD
   5871-AAA  53G5608 NetWare 4.0 from IBM 50 User CD
   5871-AAA  53G5609 NetWare 4.0 from IBM 100 User CD
   5871-AAA  53G5610 NetWare 4.0 from IBM 250 User CD
   5871-AAA  53G5611 NetWare 4.0 from IBM 500 User CD
   5871-AAA  53G5612 NetWare 4.0 from IBM 1000 User CD
   5871-AAA  53G5935 NetWare Workstation Kit for OS/2 from
                     IBM V2.01 3.5-inch
   5871-AAA  53G5936 NetWare Workstation Kit for OS/2 from
                     IBM V2.01 5.25-inch
   5871-AAA  53G5937 NetWare Workstation Kit for DOS/Windows from IBM
                     V1.01  3.5-inch
   5871-AAA  53G6037 NetWare Workstation Kit for DOS/Windows from IBM
                     V1.01  5.25-inch

NetWare** 4.0 from IBM is Novell's newest advanced network operating system
that turns a multiserver NetWare environment into a single integrated system.
NetWare 4.0 builds on the familiar NetWare architecture to provide easier
network management and better access to network resources.

NetWare 4.0 from IBM inherits all the power and capabilities of NetWare V3.11
and adds the following new features:

NETWARE DIRECTORY SERVICES (NDS) provide a single view of the network and gives
customers seamless, global access to all company resources allowing them to
reduce administrative costs and increase productivity.

SECURITY ENHANCEMENTS such as new security and auditing capabilities that
utilize public key cryptography, provide a more secure environment for
protecting vital corporate data and ensure that security policies are
maintained.

WIDE-AREA CONNECTIVITY improvements allow for faster response, lower bandwidth
utilization, and greater productivity across the network locations.

ADMINISTRATOR PRODUCTIVITY improved by new graphical administration tools.

IMPROVED MANAGEMENT CAPABILITIES give network managers more information about
the server for easier and more effective management.

MULTIPLE LANGUAGE SUPPORT allows customers to access and manage the network
using their native language.

ADDITIONAL STORAGE MANAGEMENT SERVICE (SMS) Target Service Agents (TSAs) allow
customers to backup DOS, Windows, and OS/2* clients, as well as NetWare V3.11
and NetWare 4.0 servers.

UPGRADE UTILITIES automate the transfer of information from NetWare V2.x or
V3.x binderies to the NetWare 4.0 directory, greatly reducing the cost and time
needed to upgrade to NetWare 4.0.

NETWARE CORESIDENCE WITH OS/2 allows NetWare 4.0 to run in a non-dedicated mode
on the OS/2 2.x platform, giving customers the functionality of NetWare in
OS/2's multi-tasking environment.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Includes NetWare Directory Services, which lets a multiserver
        network be viewed as a single information system
    o   Provides a single, integrated interface for all network
        administration
    o   Secures the network against any unauthorized intrusion
    o   Restricts user access to network resources
    o   Allows the administrator to retain central network control or to
        delegate administrative responsibilities
    o   Lets all network activity be monitored
    o   Includes file-by-file compression, which increases the capacity
        of network drives
    o   Includes burst mode technology that increases the speed of data
        transfer over wide area links
    o   Provides large packet capability for increased network throughput
    o   Provides controlled service broadcasting for decreased network
        overhead
    o   Supports all popular client operating systems, including DOS,
        OS/2, Windows**, UNIX** and Macintosh**
    o   Includes migration tools that make it easy to upgrade from
        previous versions of NetWare
    o   Makes network printing easier to set up, use and manage
    o   Includes RCONSOLE for remote network management
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell,
Incorporated. ** UNIX is a trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Incorporated.
** Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. ** Windows is a trademark
of Microsoft Corporation. ** NFS is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. **
Hewlett-Packard is a trademark of Hewlett-Parkard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 205. IBM TCP/IP VERSION 2.0 FOR OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

  o   65G1220 TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2 - Base Kit
  o   65G1224 TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2 - Extended Networking
  o   65G1228 TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2 - X Window System
  o   65G1232 TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2 - Total Kit
  o   65G1236 TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2 - Programmer's Toolkit
  o   65G1240 TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2 - NetBIOS Kit
  o   65G1243 TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2 - X Window System
  o   65G1249 TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2 - MultiMail Kit
  o   65G1255 TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2 - NFS Kit
  o   71G9486 TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2 - OSF/Motif Kit
  o   70G3751 TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2 - DOS/Windows Access
  o   70G3884 TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2 - Applications Kit
  o   76G8086 TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2 - Domain Name
  o   70G3754 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : Base - 5 User Pak
  o   70G3755 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : Base - 25 User Pak
  o   70G3756 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : Base - 100 User Pak
  o   70G3757 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : OSF/Motif - 5 User Pak
  o   70G3758 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : OSF/Motif - 25 User Pak
  o   70G3759 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : Network File System - 5 User Pak
  o   70G3760 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : Network File System - 25 User Pak
  o   70G3761 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : Network File System - 100 User Pak
  o   70G3764 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : X Window System Server - 5 User Pak
  o   70G3765 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : X Window System Server - 25 User Pak
  o   70G3766 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : X Window System Server - 100 User Pak
  o   70G3768 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : Applications - 5 User Pak
  o   70G3762 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : Applications - 25 User Pak
  o   70G3763 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : Applications - 100 User Pak
  o   70G3769 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : Extended Networking - 5 User Pak
  o   70G3770 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : MultiMail - 5 User Pak
  o   70G3772 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : Total - 5 User Pak
  o   70G3773 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : Total - 25 User Pak
  o   70G3774 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : Total - 100 User Pak
  o   70G3775 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : NetBIOS - 5 User Pak
  o   70G3776 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : NetBIOS - 25 User Pak
  o   70G3777 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : NetBIOS - 100 User Pak
  o   70G3778 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : X Window System Client - 5 User Pak
  o   70G3779 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : X Window System Client - 25 User Pak
  o   70G3781 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : DOS/Windows Access - 5 User Pak
  o   70G3782 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : DOS/Windows Access - 25 User Pak
  o   70G3783 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : DOS/Windows Access - 100 User Pak
  o   70G3784 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : Domain Name Server - 5 User Pak
  o   70G3785 IBM TCP/IP V2.0 : Programmer's Toolkit - 5 User Pak

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Version 2.0 for OS/2
provides upgrades to functions previously provided in Version 1.2 and Version
1.2.1 for OS/2 and includes support for OS/2 2.0 and OS/2 2.1 operating
systems. Additionally, new functions which further highlight and define the IBM
business solution for customers in a multivendor environment for connectivity.

TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2 interoperates with IBM TCP/IP products for MVS, VM,
DOS, OS/400, System/88 and the AIX/UNIX family.

To provide flexibility in ordering to customers with different networking
needs, IBM will continue to offer various packaging options, plus new packages
for most of the new functions. Also, IBM is introducing a new price structure
for TCP/IP for OS/2. This structure allows customers to obtain various kits at
a larger discount.

The new kits with Version 2.0 include:  X Window System Client Kit, OSF/Motif
Kit, DOS/Windows Access Kit, Applications Kit, NetBIOS Kit, and the Domain Name
Server Kit.  There is no Source Kit offered.

Customers who want multiple copies can order TCP/IP V2.0 for OS/2 through
product User Paks.  Customers ordering User Paks can take advantage of lower
prices for multiple users.  A 5-User Pak, 25-User Pak, and 100 User Pak are
provided.  The single license charge and additional license charge are
applicable.

IBM TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2 enhances the IBM Family of TCP/IP products
which includes TCP/IP on VM, MVS, OS/2, OS/400, AIX family, and IBM 3174 TCP/IP
Telnet.  These products are designed to address multivendor communication
requirements and to allow most IBM platforms access to networks involving
non-IBM systems.  IBM's TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2 meets these requirements.
Users of the past release of TCP/IP for OS/2 should consider upgrading to
Version 2.0 which offers usability, and functionality advantages.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   TN5250
    o   32-Bit API's
    o   32-Bit X-Windows X11R5 Server Support
    o   File Locking for NFS Client
    o   Workplace Shell Integration for selected applications
    o   NetBIOS support
    o   X-Windows Client support
    o   OSF/Motif Client support
    o   C/I/D Enablement for network installation
    o   Frame Relay support
    o   FDDI support
    o   DOS/Windows Access
    o   SNAlink LU6.2 support
    o   TN3270 External Translate Tables
    o   SNMP DPI Version 1.1 Enhancements
    o   New Applications Kit for customers on protocol stacks that are
        equivalent to the protocol stack in the IBM TCP/IP Version 2.0
        Base Kit.
    o   Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) scripting capability for VJ
        compression.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 206. IBM ANYNET/2 VERSION 1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

AnyNet*/2 V1 is part of a family of solutions that can help customers who run
multi-protocol networks add more applications and simplify their networks.

AnyNet/2 V1 delivers Multiprotocol Transport Networking (MPTN) Architecture
support to OS/2 workstations and allows APPC, CPI-C, and sockets applications
to operate independently of SNA and TCP/IP protocols.  Applications can be
written or acquired without concern for the underlying network transport
protocol normally associated with the application programming interface (API).
Additionally, AnyNet/2 is compatible with the VTAM AnyNet/MVS feature.
AnyNet/2 V1 provides two API/protocol combinations:

    o   Sockets over SNA
        -   Allows existing SNA networks to add Berkeley Software
            Distribution (BSD**) socket application support without
            adding a separate TCP/IP network or TCP/IP protocol stack.
    o   APPC over TCP/IP
        -   Allows existing TCP/IP networks to add APPC or CPI-C
            applications without adding a separate SNA network.

Together, these AnyNet/2 V1 functions can help organizations to:

    o   Broaden end users' access to applications and reduce the cost
        and effort usually required to achieve this connectivity
    o   Reduce the number of physical and logical networks required
        thereby simplifying the network and reducing maintenance costs
    o   Improve application programmers' productivity by allowing
        programmers to write applications and focus on the business
        solutions without concerning themselves with the underlying
        network protocol
    o   Protect their investment in existing and future applications
        through application independence from the transport layer

AnyNet/2 is the OS/2 workstation software in diskette form that is included in
the VTAM V3R4.2 AnyNet/MVS feature.  Marketing should advise customers that the
workstation code can now be ordered and installed independently of a host.

AnyNet/2 provides customer migration and flexibility advantages.  AnyNet offers
customers maximum flexibility in planning and execution of network migrations.
AnyNet/2 provides customers with an easy, quick, and low cost solution for
continued use of existing protocol dependent applications when changing the
underlying transport network.  Additionally, AnyNet/2 provides for adding
applications to non-native protocol environments quickly and inexpensively.
Customers with a need to transport APPC/LU 6.2 data across TCP/IP networks
should use AnyNet/2.  This is compatible with VTAM AnyNet/MVS to permit smooth
host and workstation migration.  These software solutions do not require any
additional hardware.  AnyNet/2 solutions are distinct from the similar
solutions provided by routers by not encapsulating data but actually using the
full capabilities of the underlying protocol.  AnyNet/2 is distinct from
middleware solutions in that no application changes are required nor are new
APIs introduced.  AnyNet/2 is an implementation part of the Networking
Blueprint's CTS layer.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Easy access to new and existing applications for end users on
        OS/2 workstations
    o   Reduces costs by eliminating duplicate network hardware,
        software, and communication lines
    o   Offers enhanced flexibility and migration to customers with
        multiprotocol networks or customers who plan to add or change
        protocols
    o   Unlike router application, uses the full capabilities of the
        underlying protocols
    o   Requires no changes in applications
    o   Allows programmers to apply existing API skills to new protocols
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **Berkeley Software Distribution (BSD) is a trademark of
University of California - Berkeley. **Intel is a registered trademark of Intel
Corporation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 207. IBM DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT (DCE) FOR OS/2 AND WINDOWS VERSION 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Distributed Computing Environment (DCE) for OS/2* and Windows is the
foundation for distributed computing in an open systems environment.  IBM DCE
for OS/2 and Windows incorporates the core technologies specified by the Open
Software Foundation (OSF) DCE architecture.  IBM DCE for OS/2 and Windows
product family provides a Software Developer's Kit (SDK) and client base
services for OS/2 and Windows.  The clients are enduser products that
complement the IBM AIX DCE/6000 Product Family to create heterogeneous
distributed systems.  The DCE client for Windows is only available via a beta
program.  The application programming interface (API) resides above the
operating system and network transport layers, simplifying application
development, and reducing development time of distributed applications.
Programmers are insulated from the underlying network and operating system
complexities.

The OSF DCE technology has received strong acceptance in the computing industry
from major system vendors, ISVs, and large corporate developers. DCE is
becoming a de facto standard for distributed computing in a multi-vendor
environment.  Many of the world's leading hardware and software vendors, as
well as industry groups, have publicly committed to using and delivering
products based on the DCE technology.  The DCE is a key part of IBM's
distributed computing strategy.  And with this announcement, IBM is providing
access to this powerful environment in the PC-LAN industry.

The IBM DCE for OS2 services consists of:

    o   Security Services - provide encryption and authentication
        services to ensure the privacy and authenticity of the
        client/server transactions.
    o   Directory Services - provides a naming model that allows users to
        identify resources by name rather than location.  This is called
        the Cell Directory Services.
    o   Remote Procedure Call - extends the typical procedure call model
        by supporting direct calls to procedures on remote systems.
    o   Time Services - provides single system-wide time reference.
    o   Threads - provides a convenient mechanism to provide concurrency
        by creating and controlling multiple threads of execution within
        a single process.

IBM DCE for OS/2 is designed to interoperate with IBM AIX DCE/6000, IBM DCE
Client for Windows, and other OSF DCE compliant implementations.

The IBM DCE Client for Windows services available in the SDK and via a beta
program consists of the core OSF DCE services necessary to execute a secured
distributed application.  The core components are: Remote Procedure Call (RPC),
Security, Threads, and Cell Directory Service (CDS). In addition, some limited
time synchronization services are also provided.  IBM DCE Client for Windows is
designed to interoperate with IBM AIX DCE/6000, IBM DCE for OS/2, and other OSF
DCE compliant servers.

IBM DCE for OS/2 and Windows product family offers a Software Developer's Kit
which includes OS/2 Security Services, OS/2 Cell Directory Services, five OS/2
Clients, five Windows Clients, and application development tools for OS/2 and
Windows.  There are DCE Clients for OS/2 and Windows packages that do not
include development tools (Runtime only).  The Windows Client is currently
available via a beta program.  These packages are offered with User Data
Privacy enablement in the United States and Canada, and without User Data
Privacy enablement outside of the United States and Canada.  The User Data
Privacy function allows applications to encrypt user data via remote procedure
calls.  There are U.S. government regulations that control the export of the
User Data Privacy packages outside of the Unites States and Canada.  Customers
that qualify under U.S.  regulations can obtain the version of the product with
user data privacy by submitting a special bid request.

These layered DCE services offer the application developer high security,
resource location transparency, and a standard programming paradigm across a
heterogeneous computing environment, using an open systems solution.  Using
these services, applications can be developed with great confidence of
portability and interoperability.  This new IBM DCE offering for OS/2 and
Windows platforms is an addition to IBM's DCE offerings which already includes
AIX DCE Product Family, providing the flexibility for a mixed client/server
environment.

The IBM DCE for OS/2 and Windows product family is the first PC-LAN industry
standard solution for distributed computing through the evolution and
unification of today's leading technologies.  It provides an integrated
approach to timing, security, naming, and interprocess communications.  IBM DCE
for OS/2 and Windows will facilitate the development and deployment of
portable, interoperable applications for multi-vendor, heterogeneous
environments.  IBM DCE for OS/2 and Windows provides a high-level, coherent
environment for developing and running applications on a distributed system.
The DCE services are integrated and comprehensive.  The DCE components are well
integrated, as they use one another's services whenever possible, since many of
the DCE components are distributed applications.  IBM DCE for OS/2 and Windows
provides management tools for administering all of the services and many
aspects of the distributed environment.  The IBM DCE for OS/2 and Windows
architecture allows for different operating systems and hardware platforms.
Along with IBM's already available DCE products for AIX, IBM AIX DCE Product
Family Version 1.2, the IBM DCE for OS/2 and Windows allows for an open,
heterogeneous distributed computing environment.  The IBM DCE SDK for OS/2 and
Windows provides the application developer the capability to develop a complete
distributed solution, and the IBM DCE Client for OS/2 and the IBM DCE Client
for Windows beta program, along with the AIX DCE for RS/6000 provide today, a
foundation, for the enduser, for distributed computing in an open systems
environment.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Industry standard foundation for distributed computing
    o   Interoperability and portability across heterogeneous platforms
    o   Leadership in PC-LAN open systems solutions
    o   Protection of customer's current investment in hardware
    o   Productivity gains for application development
    o   Based on DCE technology licensed from the Open Software
        Foundation (OSF)
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 208. THE DEVELOPER CONNECTION FOR OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Developer Connection for OS/2* is an annual membership program that
delivers the most current information, tools, and pre-release code available
from IBM to developers in support of continuing application development on the
32-bit OS/2 platform.

The cornerstone of The Developer Connection for OS/2 is the Developer
Connection for OS/2 CD, which is delivered four times a year to program
members.  Since the CD contains both pre-release-level code and release-level
code, it is considered Beta and is licensed for 120 days or until the next
release of The Developer Connection for OS/2 whichever comes first.  The
initial 1993 CD provides release-level versions of the Developer's Toolkit for
OS/2 2.1, which includes the Multimedia Presentation Manager Toolkit/2 1.1, and
the Pen for OS/2 Developer's Toolkit 1.0.  Softcopy documentation, including
the OS/2 Technical Library, is also provided.  Members also receive The
Developer Connection for OS/2 News, a newspaper which accompanies the CD and
delivers the most up-to-date information about IBM personal operating systems
direction, operating system extensions, and development products. The Developer
Connection for OS/2 News also provides useful programming tips and other
technical information.

The Developer Connection for OS/2 is an annual membership program for 32-bit
OS/2 software developers who need a comprehensive source of tools and
information delivered and updated on a regular basis (with a limited license to
code provided on the CD).  The Developer Connection for OS/2 CD not only
delivers technical information but supported tools and a myriad of
pre-release-level code.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Delivers limited licenses to the latest pre-release code so
        developers can prepare for and simulate future environments
    o   Delivers the most up-to-date versions of technical documentation
        on OS/2
            -- currently over 50,000 pages
    o   Delivers limited licenses to toolkits, productivity tools,
        development tools, and sample code
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 209. IBM THINKABLE/DOS VERSION 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM THINKable/DOS is a versatile educational and therapy tool for
rehabilitation and special education professionals who help people with
attention and memory problems.  THINKable/DOS enhances the efficiency of
attention and memory therapy by combining real pictures, direct response (touch
screen) and motivating exercises for direct student or client therapy.

THINKable/DOS provides a new, multilingual option that allows the user to
install options for changing language of text and audio presented to the
client.  These options will include the following languages:

    o   French
    o   Spanish

With this multilingual option, teachers and clinicians can service multilingual
students and clients.

THINKable/DOS now runs with DOS 4.0 and higher, with some 486 systems requiring
DOS 5.0, or higher.

THINKable/DOS offers price advantages when compared to the previous release of
THINKable. Reduced system requirements increase the potential teacher/clinician
user base and consequently expand the client base for whom the product is
applicable.  The DOS-base and attractive pricing make THINKable/DOS very
competitive in both the school and rehabilitation environments.

    o   QuickSelect menus
    o   New pictures
    o   All existing therapy functions of previous THINKable products

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Enhances all of the clinical power of THINKable, a proven
        clinically effective tool, now operating with DOS
    o   QuickSelect menus increase ease-of-use
    o   Multilingual support helps patients who speak Spanish and French
    o   Allows for customized spoken and text reinforcement messages
    o   Tutorials for QuickSelect operations make the application easy
        to learn
    o   Attractive pricing makes THINKable/DOS affordable for schools
        and small clinics.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 210. IBM ADDRESS BOOK SYNCHRONIZATION/2 VERSION 1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Address Book Synchronization/2* provides a uni-directional host-to-LAN
address book synchronization from IBM CallUp* Version 1 Release 3, and custom
address books for enterprises who are using Lotus Notes** or cc: Mail** LAN
Mail environments.  This SAA* OS/2* 32-bit program provides LAN-based users of
IBM's OS/2 2.0 and 2.1, the host-to-LAN address book synchronization required
to exchange mail across the enterprise, including synchronization for the IBM
Mail LAN Gateway/2* Release 2.

For the CallUp OfficeVision/VM* (OV/VM) users, the host-to-LAN address book
synchronization can be automatic by allowing the administrator to specify
frequency of CallUp extracts, transfers to the LAN, and apply changes to cc:
Mail, Lotus Notes, or the IBM Mail LAN Gateway/2 address books.

The Address Book Synchronization/2 supports user written custom address books
by allowing the administrator to develop a VM host custom address book extract
program.  Depending on how custom address books are managed and the
synchronization needs, administrators may select to do some or most of the
extract and transfer with their existing tools.  However, Address Book
Synchronization/2 is designed to automate much of that effort.

The graphical user interface of Address Book Synchronization/2 allows
administrators to:

    o   Select VM host and LAN address books
    o   Specify the address book field mapping relationships
    o   Specify frequency for automatic synchronization

Additional administrative functions include viewing logged messages and
starting or stopping synchronization.

There has been explosive growth in the number of LAN-based systems. This trend
demands that LAN-based applications have connectivity to existing host systems.
The IBM Adress Book Synchronization/2 supports this growth by providing the
ability for host-to-LAN address book synchronization for the VM enterprise,
with an operational CallUp or custom address books with a need to exchange mail
between host and LAN.  This synchronization product is a part of IBM
connectivity suite of products (Time and Place Connectivity/2, and LAN Mail
Gateway/2) which enhances the enterprise opportunity to exploit LAN-based
systems by providing interoperability between the OV/VM and LAN users.

Administration resources required by an enterprise to manage both host and LAN
address books can be reduced by using Address Book Synchronization/2. For
example:

    o   In CallUp OV/VM environments, host-to-LAN address book
        synchronization can be automated according to administrator
        specifications. In addition to full automation, the administrator
        may control the synchronization steps individually or at
        intervals suited to the needs of the enterprise.
    o   In VM custom address books environments, host-to-LAN address book
        synchronization can be automated; the administrator can provide
        a user extract program to generate an extract file and use the
        Transfer program provided, or a user written program to transfer
        the extract file to the LAN.  Once the extract file is received
        at the LAN, the Apply program synchronizes the : cc Mail, Lotus
        Notes or IBM Mail LAN Gateway/2 address books.

HIGHLIGHTS Address Book Synchronization/2 is designed to:

    o   Ease the administrative burden of maintaining address books
        across the enterprise by allowing host-to-LAN users to perform
        one-way address book synchronization from OV/VM environments to
        Lotus Notes and : cc Mail LAN environments
    o   Provide an orderly transition for customers migrating to Lotus
        Notes and : cc Mail LAN environments and provide ongoing LAN user
        address book synchronization with VM users
    o   Provide a graphical user interface for adding, deleting, and
        updating mapping information to OV/VM and Address Book
        Synchronization/2 Version 1
    o   Provide additional administrative functions such as viewing
        logged messages, stopping or starting synchronization
    o   Provide automatic host-to-LAN synchronization for CallUp and VM
        host customized address books
    o   Provide field level mapping for fields with different names and
        lengths
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **Lotus Notes is a trademark of Lotus Corporation. **: cc
Mail is a trademark of : cc Mail, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 211. IBM EXTENDED OPERATIONS CONSOLE FACILITY/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Extended Operations Console Facility/2 (EOCF/2*) is an Operating
System/2* (OS/2*) based program that provides enhancements to the Transaction
Processing Facility (TPF) console operations.  Using the features of OS/2
Extended Edition (EE), EOCF/2 provides increased usability and the ability to
operate and automate TPF systems from a single workstation with the function of
a relational database to replace the TPF hard-copy console log. Combined with
Token-Ring technology, EOCF/2 provides a highly flexible and available console
operations management configuration that may be centralized, distributed, or
remote.

EOCF/2 is appropriate for all customers of TPF Version 3.1 and subsequent
releases who have a need:

    o   For outboard operation and automation
    o   To increase reliability and availability of TPF systems
    o   To replace hardcopy TPF system log printers with softcopy TPF
        system log
    o   Improve operator productivity and console consolidation required
        to operate multiple TPF systems

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Improves operations management through a high degree of
        flexibility in the configuration of operator workstations,
        including centralized, distributed, and remote capabilities
    o   Increases operator productivity through console consolidation
        and ease of use features
    o   Improves TPF systems management by providing easy and reliable
        access to console log data
    o   Improves TPF systems availability by reducing both planned and
        unplanned outages
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 212. IBM LAN NETVIEW MANAGEMENT UTILITIES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM LAN NetView Management Utilities for OS/2 (LMU) is an upgrade from, and
consolidation of, the earlier LMU/2 program offerings and PRPQs into one
product that will be available worldwide. Client coverage is enhanced to
support Macintosh** and Window 3.1 clients. Industry standard SNMP gateway
support has been added to communicate between SNMP-compatible network
management consoles and LMU managing systems. LMU cooperates with the IBM
NetView* products to integrate PC LAN management into overall enterprise
network management. LMU provides an easy-to-use graphics end user interface
that conforms to IBM SystemView* integration level 1.

IBM LAN NetView Management Utilities is an OS/2* based set of services that
aids systems management of LANs, and is designed for the client/server
enterprise environment. It allows a designated workstation to manage both
servers and requesters in IBM LAN Server and Novell NetWare networks by
providing the following system management functions:

    o   Operations Management
    o   Configuration Management
    o   Performance Management
    o   Fault/Problem Management.

IBM LAN NetView Management Utilities consists of a graphical display of the
LAN, command/data transport, management applications (Configuration,
Performance and Fault), and an OS/2 database for data collection. User-written
applications can supplement those supplied by IBM.

HIGHLIGHTS IBM LAN NewView Management Utilities provides the customer with:

    o   A graphical display of local area network (LAN) stations and
        their status, panel-driven commands and notification of alert
        conditions.
    o   A transport method by which systems management applications can
        be invoked remotely and systems management data can be sent to a
        central collection point.
    o   A set of IBM-supplied LAN systems management applications. These
        applications collect and report information necessary to assess
        and manage the LAN environment, and respond to certain user-
        specified fault conditions.
    o   Software to maintain an OS/2 database that contains the response
        information from the IBM-supplied management applications.
    o   Communications with higher level NetView platforms to integrate
        the PC LAN status into the enterprise network management.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **Macintosh, AppleTalk, and TokenTalk are Trademarks of
Apple Computer Corp.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 213. IBM WORKSTATION INTERACTIVE TEST TOOL (WITT) VERSION 2 RELEASE 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Instead of having your valuable software professionals testing interactive
applications by hand, automate your testing using Workstation Interactive Test
Tool (WITT).  With WITT, building a "bucket" of reusable, reliable test cases
can be made quicker and easier.

WITT automates many of the tasks associated with interactive application
testing:

    o   Create scripts when you run your application. WITT records
        keystrokes and mouse movements.
    o   Save and compare screens or areas with screens. WITT quickly
        identifies differences.
    o   Customize any script with your own text editor.
    o   Add logic to your scripts with 2/REXX commands.
    o   Play back your test case interactively or in unattended batch
        mode.

WITT 2.2 provides the following additions and enhancements:

    o   OS/2(R) 2.1 support
    o   Text-based application support including:
        -   Micro Focus COBOL Workbench** OS/2 text screen emulation
            modes
        -   IBM CICS* OS/2 text screens
    o   OS/2 Multimedia application support
    o   Communication Manager/2 support

WITT Version 2 Release 2 continues to support record and playback of OS/2 2.0
Presentation Manager* (PM) applications as well as MVS, VM, VSE (VSE/ESA*) and
CICS/VSE*, and OS/400* applications.

WITT is a productivity tool used during the testing and maintenance phases of
the development cycle.  WITT can be used for regression testing after coding is
complete, as well as during new coding to test parts and determine performance.

WITT is positioned in the AD/Cycle* Test/Maintenance Box and fits into test
scenarios, maintenance scenarios and redevelopment/reuse scenarios by providing
a means to duplicate test cases for new and existing code.

Customer benefits can include standardized application testing, increased
productivity and testing accuracy, which can produce higher quality
applications and code.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides function that can make regression testing faster and easier.
    o   Enables new test cases to be quickly created, updated, and/or reused.
    o   Improves testing productivity and quality by automating many of the tasks
        associated with interactive application testing.
    o   Enables users to quickly become productive through the WITT online
        tutorial, samples, and online HELP.
    o   Supports key application platforms including:
        -    OS/2 Version 2 PM, multimedia, and text windows
        -    MVS, VM, VSE, via the OS/2 3270 Emulator
        -    OS/400 via the OS/2 5250 Emulator.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **COBOL Workbench is a registered trademark of Micro
Focus Limited.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 214. IBM PERSONAL COMMUNICATIONS/3270 VERSION 3.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.1 (PC/3270 V3.1) replaces Personal
Communications/3270 V3.0.

Personal Communications/3270 (PC/3270) provides host connection and gateway
services for PS/2's and PC's.  In a single package, 3270 emulation support is
provided for the following:

    o   Entry-Level DOS mode (CUT and Home3270)
    o   Full-Function DOS mode
    o   Windows mode as a native Microsoft Windows V3.0 or V3.1
        application
    o   3270 DOS Gateway

PC/3270 V3.1 continues the theme of using a single product to satisfy your 3270
emulation requirements and allows you to have a common look and feel across a
wide variety of connections/platforms.

There are several connectivity enhancements aimed at expanding the types and
complexity of supported Local Area Networks (LAN) and Wide Area Network (WAN)
environments.  These include IPX/SPX (Netware for SAA) and TCP/IP support as
well as enhancements to the asynchronous dial capability.  Support is also
provided for connection via credit card (PCMCIA) adapters.

Additional enhancements are aimed at improving usability and increasing overall
product function.  For example, support has been added for Visual Basic and
Word for Windows.  This provides the ability to build PC based graphical
interfaces to existing host applications.  Many other functions such as the
ability to append to the clipboard have also been added.

Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.1 extends the capabilities of Version
3.0.  Version 3.1 is a member of the 3270 emulation family of products under
DOS which includes:

    o   IBM PC 3270 Emulation Program, Entry Level Version 2.0
    o   IBM Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.1

Current users of Personal Communications/3270 Version 1.0, Personal
Communications/3270 Version 2.0, Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.0, PC
3270 Emulation Program, PC 3270 Emulation Program Entry Level, 3270 Workstation
Program, Information Network Personal Connectivity Services, or Information
Network Personal Connectivity Services Entry should consider Personal
Communications/3270 Version 3.1 as their program of choice for 3270 emulation.

Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.1 enhances the migration path for
current 3270 dependent display (e.g., IBM 3278, 3279, 3471, 3472) users to the
intelligent workstation environment (e.g., PS/2*).

Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.1 also runs under Microsoft** Windows**
Version 3.0 and Version 3.1 as a native Windows application without the IBM
Windows Connection Version 2.0.  It enhances the migration path to, 3270
emulation with, OS/2 Communications Manager/2 by providing similar function,
common appearance and a common set of programming interfaces, i.e., EHLLAPI and
SRPI.

Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.1 also provides a solution for those
users requiring a small Control Unit Terminal (CUT) emulator and for those who
want a single emulator which can be used in the office, at home or while
traveling.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.1 expands an already wide
        range of communication connections.  Support is now provide for
        IPX/SPX (Netware for SAA) and TCP/IP.  This allows the customer
        to use PC/3270 for all their host connection needs no matter what
        the LAN protocol is.
    o   3270 asynchronous dial-up connectivity has been enhanced to
        support a faster and wider variety of modems.  This will allow
        users to increase their productivity by using PC/3270 V3.1 as a
        common platform both in the office and at home or on the road.
    o   Personal Communications/3270 Version 3.1 adds support for a
        wider variety of non-IBM products (both hardware and software).
        This gives customers the flexibility to use PC/3270 no matter
        which vendors they have selected to satisfy their PC
        requirements.
    o   With DDE enhancements, support is now provided for Visual Basic
        and Word for Windows.  This provides the customer with the
        ability to create graphical interfaces for their existing host
        applications.
    o   Enhances flexibility and productivity by allowing system
        administrators to modify the Menu Bar.  This allows the customer
        to remove functions from the menu bar after having set up a
        common environment for all their users (i.e., keyboard mapping,
        macros, etc.).  Which helps to insure that all users will have a
        common set of capabilities and look and feel across their
        organization.
    o   Support of common APIs and multiple working environments for DOS,
        Microsoft Windows, and the OS/2 Version 2.1 DOS and Windows
        virtual machines.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **Microsoft is aRegistered trademark of Microsoft
Corporation **Windows is a Trademark of Microsoft Corporation **Carousel is a
Registered trademark of SoftLogic Solutions Inc. **NetWare is a Trademark of
Novell, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 215. IBM CALLPATH/2 VERSION 1.1 AND CALLPATH TOOLKIT FOR OS/2 VERSION 1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   80G0-030 (5871-BBB) CallPath/2 SingleAgent V1.1
    o   80G0-032 (5871-BBB) CallPath/2 MultiAgent V1.1
    o   80G0-034 (5871-BBB) CallPath Toolkit for OS/2 V1.1

IBM CallPath/2 V1.1 is a licensed program providing a software platform that
enables applications to link the data-processing power of the Personal
System/2* (PS/2*) with the telephony processing capabilities of select
telephone systems. It facilitates the development of business applications that
can enhance business services, personalize caller interactions, improve
customer service, enhance employee productivity, and optimize the overall use
of assets.  IBM CallPath/2 V1.1 provides the customer with a stand-alone
workstation or a network of programmable workstations, which provide a
comprehensive cooperative processing and a peer to peer computing environment.

IBM CallPath Toolkit for OS/2 V1.1 provides a collection of tools to assist the
application developer. The package includes sample applications, programming
manuals, and a test/trace utility.  For application writers, the sample
applications may be used in developing applications.

IBM CallPath/2 V1.1 and IBM CallPath Toolkit for OS/2 V1.1 now support enhanced
OS/2 Version 2.0 and 2.1.

IBM CallPath/2 V1.1 is part of the CallPath family of products which implement
IBM's CallPath Services Architecture. This architecture is strategic to IBM's
support of the telephony environment; the architecture facilitates
bi-directional communication and cooperative processing between a telephone
system and an application executing on a computer or workstation. This offers
the customer a functionally consistent interface to applications, independent
of the switch protocol.  IBM CallPath/2 V1.1 is positioned to address not only
a broad range of inbound and outbound applications, but also any of the
switches supported by IBM CallPath SwitchServer/2.

Introducing IBM CallPath/2 V1.1 into the CallPath product family extends IBM's
opportunity in the Voice Application Solutions marketplace to the workstation
environment, one of the fastest growing environments in data processing.

CallPath for Workstations has been designed for flexibility and usability. It
is flexible as an API, allowing applications to initiate first-party control or
third-party control actions to the telephone system. In first-party control,
the telephone device is controlled by the user of the device (telephone to
telephone system link control); in third-party control, the control of the
telephone device is by other than the person using that device, (for example,
computer to telephone system link control).

IBM CallPath/2 V1.1 is for customers who want telephony applications that
automate:

    o   Simple and repetitive requests (for example, account balance
        information)
    o   Computer/telephone coordination (for inbound calls and call
        transfer)
    o   Data/caller coordination (manipulation of call profile
        information)
    o   Call handling (reducing caller wait time)
    o   Data collection (for example, teleservicing center utilization
        data)
    o   Outbound dialing (enhanced dialing functions of the switch)

Often times such automation may lead to a clear competitive advantage.

To facilitate usability and productivity, the IBM CallPath Toolkit for OS/2
V1.1 is available to assist in the development of efficient applications.

IBM CallPath/2 V1.1 provides similar functionality to applications as do IBM
CallPath CICS/MVS, CallPath/6000, and CallPath/400, but in a workstation ( LAN
or stand-alone) environment with a graphical end user interface.  IBM
CallPath/2 V1.1.'s responsiveness makes it ideal for business telephony/data
application development.  Its capacity to harness the power and flexibility of
the personal workstation is its chief advantage.

HIGHLIGHTS IBM CallPath/2 V1.1 offers the following benefits:

    o   Can facilitate reduced call handling time by coordinating
        information in customer databases with telephone calls
    o   Provides for faster and more personal customer service
    o   Can enable automation of repetitive telephone activities (e.g.
        call back, redial, etc. )
    o   Can provide the worker with a single interface to data and voice
        functions, using  the workstation
    o   Extends operational environment to compatible computers of the
        IBM Personal System/2 that support the required OS/2 software
    o   Extends support to additional telephone systems supported by IBM
        CallPath SwitchServer/2.
    o   Enables a broad range of business applications to integrate
        telephone functions, including personal telephone services,
        (e.g., workstation initiated dialing, answer, transfer, etc.)
    o   IBM CallPath Toolkit for OS/2 V1.1 provides a collection of
        tools to assist in the application development:  sample program
        code, a test/trace utility, and programming manuals.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **CBX is a registered trademark of ROLM Systems, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 216. IBM FLOWMARK FOR OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM FlowMark* for OS/2* is the IBM workflow management Program Product which is
offered in the OS/2 Client/Server environment.  It provides a set of workflow
management functions which will help customers in precisely and consistently
documenting the business processes governing their work, in controlling the
execution of their business processes, and in progressively improving them.
IBM FlowMark for OS/2 thus enables organizations to improve the efficiency and
quality of their work.

FlowMark provides functions for the interactive definition of process models,
for their testing with graph animation, for the execution of workflows by
automatically interpreting the process models, and for the recording of
execution time parameters for the purpose of analyzing processes after
execution.

The process models defining the workflows are graphically represented as
networks of activities.  Each activity is described by assigning a role, the
required program or tool to carry out the activity, and data to be manipulated
by the program.  When individual activities are executed they may invoke
programs on the workstation, and also programs that execute in CICS/MVS*,
CICS/ESA*, IMS/VS, IMS/ESA* and TSO environments.

Persons involved in a process see their assigned activities on their
personalized work lists on their workstation.  When they perform activities
from the work list they are guided by appropriate help information, and
supported by seamless invocation of the necessary programs.

While FlowMark supports general business process management in Finance and
Insurance Industries, it can also support workflow management in other business
areas such as office, application development, image processing, information
warehousing, and ISO 9000 certification, as well as the rules for the Malcolm
Baldrige Award.

IBM FlowMark for OS/2 is the IBM workflow management Program Product which is
offered in the OS/2 environment.  It provides a set of workflow management
functions which will help customers in precisely and consistently documenting
the business processes governing their work, in controlling the execution of
their business processes, and in progressively improving them.  IBM FlowMark
for OS/2 thus enables organizations to improve the efficiency and quality of
their work, at the departmental level.

The initial release of FlowMark supports OS/2 in a Client/Server environment.
It provides an easy to use graphical user interface for the customer to define,
verify, and work on a wide range of business processes.

FlowMark should be of interest to customers in all industries, who are
considering or have plans to document, to review and improve, or to implement
business processes. These considerations and plans of customers may be
triggered by changes in their operational environment, by the necessity to
introduce new application solutions, or by the start of a new business
operation.

FlowMark can also support customers engaged in documenting, administering, and
monitoring selected processes when preparing for ISO 9000 certification.

FlowMark can play a central role in the design and implementation of
distributed applications, consisting of component programs residing on
workstations or on a host computer.  It can control the execution and
cooperation of these programs, which may be new or may already exist, and which
may run on workstations under OS/2, or on hosts under CICS/MVS, CICS/ESA,
IMS/VS, IMS/ESA, or TSO.

IBM is a member of the recently formed Work Flow Management Coalition.  This is
a group of companies whose aim is to develop specifications for software that
allow different Workflow Management products to interoperate, and, as
appropriate, to submit those specifications to the appropriate standards body.

HIGHLIGHTS FlowMark features include:

    o   Buildtime Functions
        -   Definition Facilities
            These facilities enable the definition of processes and their
            hierarchies, the assignment of programs to activities, and
            the allocation of staff such as people or roles.  Facilities
            include:
            --  A Process Definition facility, for interactive graphical
                specification and maintenance of an activity network
                representing a process, which can involve multiple steps
                and many users.
            --  A Staff Definition facility for definition of staff to
                which activities are assigned, including authorization
                of persons for FlowMark functions and data.
            --  A Program Registration facility for definition of
                programs which can be invoked at Process Execution, and
                their input/output parameters.
            --  A Data Structure Definition facility for definition of
                information, called data structures, that can be
                transported from a program to FlowMark and from FlowMark
                to a program.
        -   Process Animation Facility
            This facility simulates the defined activity networks (also
            referred to as process models), analyzes their dynamic
            behavior, and checks for consistency, in order to verify the
            process model.  This makes it easy to uncover design errors
            such as loops and unused paths, which are otherwise difficult
            to find.
        o   Runtime Functions
        -   Process Execution Facilities
            Process Execution is the run-time facility which orchestrates
            the actual execution of instances of processes.  It
            coordinates the work of multiple users, as determined by the
            process.
        -   Work List Manager
            The Work List Manager provides users with to-do lists.
            Users can get activities assigned on their work lists from
            one or more activity networks.
    o   Administrative Functions
        FlowMark provides the following functions for the system
        administrator:
        -   Import/Export of processes including staff, program, and
            data structure information from/to flat files
        -   Audit Trail
    o   Sample Process Models
        FlowMark provides a set of sample process models based on
        workflow scenarios from different industries to allow newcomers
        an easy entry to the world of workflow management.  These make
        it easier and faster to get started. Samples for Insurance,
        Banking and Application Development are provided in FlowMark.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 217. IBM OS/2 LAN SERVER VERSION 3.0 ON CD-ROM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM OS/2* LAN Server Version 3.0 is now available on CD-ROM. Included in the
CD-ROM package are the OS/2 LAN Server Version 3.0 Softcopy Library,
BookManager* READ program to display the publication files, and the latest
system level files.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   OS/2 LAN Server 3.0 available on CD-ROM
    o   OS/2 LAN Server 3.0 Softcopy Library, with BookManager READ
    o   OS/2 LAN Server 3.0 on CD-ROM includes latest system level files
    o   Reduced price of OS/2 LAN Server on CD-ROM

IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 3.0 and LAN Server Softcopy Library on CD-ROM
provides ease of installation, price reduction, and latest System level code.

The IBM OS/2 LAN Server 3.0 (Entry and Advanced) are program products that
provide comprehensive local area networking capabilities to inter-connected
OS/2 and DOS workstations on IBM Token-Ring, IBM Personal Computer Network and
Ethernet networks.  The server products (Entry and Advanced) run on an IBM OS/2
2.0 AND 2.1 operating system platform.  These server products are supported on
appropriately configured IBM and OEM hardware platforms running the appropriate
operating systems or their OEM equivalents (ref. Hardware/Software Requirements
Summary).  The server products provide facilities for defining, managing and
controlling access to shared local area network resources such as disks,
printers, applications, and serially attached devices.  The Advanced product is
a highly optimized network server designed for advanced 80386-based platforms
with very large hardfiles.  It consists of an optimized Ring 0 Server tightly
coupled with a bootable Installable File System (386 HPFS) and customized
device drivers to accelerate network file I/O.

OS/2 LAN Server V3.0 on CD-ROM requires a CD-ROM drive on the Server machine
for installation.

IBM OS/2 LAN Server V3.0 now requires OS/2 2.0 or 2.1 on the Server machine and
the OS/2 Requester.  The DOS LAN Requester (DLR) now has DOS 6.x added to the
operating systems supported.

User Profile Management (UPM) performs the user ID and password validation
function at logon time.  UPM also provides facilities for the management of IDs
and groups within the domain.

A network administrator has a wide range of mechanisms with which to control
and manage user access to the network.  A network administrator has the ability
to define:

    o   Valid logon times.
    o   Permitted logon times can be specified in weekly intervals, such
        as Monday, Wednesday and Friday between 9 A.M. and 7 P.M.
    o   Valid workstations.
    o   By default, a user can log on from any workstation on the
        network; however, the administrator can specify one to eight
        workstations to which a user is restricted.
    o   Account expiration date.
    o   Individual accounts can be set to expire on specified dates.
        This is useful for temporary employees and classroom
        environments.
    o   Forced logoff.
    o   When a user's account expires or the limits of a valid logon
        time are reached, the system can be set to force the user to log
        off immediately, grant the user a specified grace period before
        an automatic logoff occurs or ignore the expiration and let the
        user continue working.

The OS/2 LAN Server products use the U.S. Government Data Encryption Standard
(DES) encryption algorithm to encrypt passwords.  Network Administrators can
also use the following system wide settings to control the use of passwords :

    o   Minimum password length - specifies the required number of
        characters.
    o   Maximum password age - forces users to change their passwords at
        specified intervals.
    o   Minimum password age - stops users from altering their passwords
        until a specified interval has passed.
    o   Unique password history - ensures that a password chosen by a
        user is different from as many as eight of the user's previous
        passwords.

Once a user is logged on to a domain, the user's access to a given resource is
controlled by the access control profile for that given resource.  The
permissions which follow can be specified in an access control profile allowing
flexibility in that combinations of appropriate permissions may be constructed
to give very specific control to a user:

    None = No access to the resource.
    Execute = Use the resource (an application program), but not able to
    copy to your diskette or hardfile.
    Read = Read Only.
    Write = Write Only.
    Create = Create a file or directory.
    Delete = Delete a file or directory.
    Attribute = Change the attributes of a file.
    Permission = Gives a User the ability to grant other users access to
    this resource.

By default, all resources are protected.  A network administrator can grant
permissions to groups as well as individual users.  Creating groups of users
with similar resource needs makes it easier to grant access permissions.  New
users added to an existing group inherit the permissions previously given to
the group.  An administrator can effectively manage the resources in the
network by using a combination of group designations and permissions.

There are several facilities available to secure an OS/2 LAN Server which may
not be locked away in a room of its own.  The PS/2 hardware provides a power-on
password facility which disables the machines on startup until the correct
password is provided.  Another password facility allows the locking of the
keyboard for those times when the operator is temporarily away.  A Server Mode
function is also available which automatically disables input at startup but
allows the machine to come to full readiness without operator interaction.  The
386 High Performance File System (HPFS) provides file protection against
unauthorized access to any server file.  This protection can not be evaded by
rebooting the server and is functional even when the LAN Server code is not
running.  This protection applies to all files stored on the 386 HPFS file
partition.  386 HPFS is available with the Advanced product only.

A comprehensive audit trail facility enhances security by enabling
administrators to keep track of selected server resources.  Any network
resource, such as a directory, an individual file, a named pipe or a printer
queue, can be designated for auditing.  Resource auditing can provide data on
the type of access-open, close, read, write, etc., username, accessing
workstation, date and time of occurrence, outcome of access and descriptive
information about the event.  Server auditing can keep track of when the server
is started, stopped, paused, or continued; all logons and logoffs; and all
remote administration connections.  The administrator also has the ability to
audit changes to the user and group account database and to audit changes to
the access control list.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection, and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures, and appropriate controls in
application systems and communication facilities. *Signifies a trademark or
registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 218. IBM LAN NETVIEW MONITOR, LAN NETVIEW FIX, AND LAN NETVIEW TIE VERSION 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Only 3.5-inch media is being offered.  However, if desired, 5.25-inch
replacement media will be provided at no additional charge.  The outside of the
box will mention the availability of 5.25-inch media.  A flyer with 5.25-inch
ordering instructions will included in the program package.

IBM announces of the following IBM LAN NetView* family applications which aid
system administrators with the tasks of performance management, and fault
management:

    o   IBM LAN NetView Monitor* Version 1.0 (Monitor 1.0)
    o   IBM LAN NetView Fix* Version 1.0 (Fix 1.0)
    o   IBM LAN NetView Tie* Version 1.0 (Tie 1.0)

LAN NetView Monitor 1.0 provides automated performance management through the
use of user-defined policies that specify resources to be collected, collection
schedules, threshold levels and actions, and data transfer times. Managed
resources include critical OS/2* 2.x resources (such as CPU, disk, RAM, and
paging activity on any application process or thread, including such
applications as IBM OS/2 Extended Services*, IBM DATABASE 2* OS/2 (DB2/2*), and
IBM OS/2 Communications Manager/2 V1.0), and IBM LAN Server and Requester 3.0
resources.  Performance data is summarized into an IBM Extended Services or
DB2/2 database, from which standardized and user-tailored reports can be
generated for the purposes of problem determination, trend analysis, and
capacity planning.  Realtime graphing is supported, as well as graphing from
the database.  A command line interface to policy creation, and policy start
and stop functions, provides for remote unattended operation of the Monitor 1.0
managing system.

LAN NetView Fix 1.0 is a general purpose event-handling application that
enables software products to automate their problem determination procedures in
a manner that can be tailored and extended by customers.  Fix 1.0 receives and
processes both Common Management Information Protocol (CMIP) events and Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps that are emitted from managed machines
on the network.  Users specify the actions that Fix 1.0 is to take based on the
events that are received.  Both Fix 1.0-supplied and user-written actions can
be specified.

LAN NetView Tie 1.0 enables a NetView* administrator to receive notifications
about LAN NetView-managed resources.  Open System Interconnection (OSI) alarm
notifications are converted to Systems Network Architecture (SNA*) alerts and
sent to NetView on a host system.  Non-alarm notifications can also be
forwarded to the host system.  Both NetView and OS/2 command line interfaces
are provided, enabling the user to register for the desired events, as well as
selectively filter these events.

The IBM LAN NetView family of products will be useful for customers who have
chosen to acquire products that adhere to IBM and international standards. The
IBM LAN NetView family of products provides support for industry standards such
as the Common Management Information Protocol (CMIP), Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP), and Guidelines for the Definition of Managed Objects (GDMO).
To encourage the development of third-party applications, the IBM LAN NetView
family of products provides a common application programming interface based on
the X/Open Management Protocol (XMP).  These standards are utilized by both the
SystemView* strategy, IBM's strategy for enterprise-wide systems management,
and the Open Software Foundation's (OSF) Distributed Management Environment.

The IBM LAN NetView family of products conforms to SystemView Integration Level
2 and is a major step in the implementation of the SystemView structure.

The IBM LAN Network Manager and IBM LAN Station Manager products should be
viewed as complementary products. These products provide for the management of
the token-ring media and adapters on the LAN. The LAN NetView family of
applications provide function to manage the software operating system and
components of OS/2 and DOS.  The agents for LAN NetView and the LAN Station
Manager can coreside in the same managed system.  The LAN NetView Manage
product in the managing system and the LAN Network Manager products cannot be
in the same OS/2 system without some loss of function in the LAN Network
Manager.

Since LAN Network Manager can deal with all workstations on a token-ring LAN
while LAN NetView can deal with a defined subset of such workstations, or with
workstations that are not directly connected to the token-ring, the domains of
information from each product do not necessarily correspond.  In order to allow
appropriate placement of each product, we recommend running these two products
in separate machines, using DCAF to access relevant information available via
one product from the other product's machine.  Such a configuration ensures
that the full capabilities of each product are available.

The IBM LAN NetView Management Utilities for OS/2 (LMU) product is a suite of
applications for managing OS/2, DOS, LAN Server, and NetWare** clients and
servers.  This product provides the needed function for many customers. Where
customers require extended application function, extensibility of the
management applications or an integrated set of management function that
conforms to industry and IBM standards, the LAN NetView family of products
should be recommended.  The application function provided by the LMU product
will be intercepted by the LAN NetView family of products over time.  The two
product families can coexist on both the managing and managed workstations for
purposes of migration, or to gain added function with both products installed.
The LMU product is also planned for integration into the LAN NetView family.
This integration allows customers who have chosen the LMU product to migrate to
LAN NetView at a manageable pace and maintain the LMU application support for
as long as necessary during the migration.  For customers who wish to maintain
the LMU function and add LAN NetView function or function provided by vendor
applications, the integrated version of LMU provides this capability.

For new customers, the combination of the LAN NetView Manage product as a
framework for management and the LMU product as applications, may provide a
good alternative for affordable application function from LMU and the growth
potential available with the LAN NetView framework.

The following text describes positioning on the individual IBM LAN NetView
applications being announced.

LAN NetView Monitor 1.0 and IBM System Performance Monitor/2* 2.0 (SPM/2 2.0)
will both be available simultaneously, with Monitor 1.0 targeted toward the
system administrator audience, and SPM/2 2.0 targeted toward the application
developer/analyst audience or to the customer with a limited number of remote
systems to manage.

    o   People who are currently using SPM/2 2.0 to do system
        administrator tasks (such as monitoring the utilization of a
        large number of remote systems, problem reporting and diagnosis,
        load balancing and trend analysis) will probably want to move to
        the Monitor 1.0 product.  These customers may very likely be
        using SPM/2 2.0 in conjunction with LAN Management Utilities/2
        (LMU/2), or LAN NetView Management Utilities for OS/2 (LMU).
    o   Customers who are managing a small number of remote systems may
        want to stay with SPM/2 2.0, since they probably can get by with
        merely having performance data collected and formatted into
        reports, and can live without database storage, threshold
        support, etc.
    o   Developers and analysts using SPM/2 2.0 to focus in on one or
        more specific applications for tuning and design verification,
        will be candidates to stay with SPM/2 2.0.  More specifically,
        the following characteristics of SPM/2 2.0 will lend itself to
        the development environment:
        -   Developers will typically run on a standalone system or a
            small number of LAN-connected systems, and will not need all
            the function and overhead of the LAN NetView  framework.
            Hence, since SPM/2 2.0 is not dependent on the function of
            other products, it will be the preferred choice for
            developers.
        -   SPM/2 2.0 provides some application development-specific
            functions that are not provided in the Monitor 1.0 product
            (user hooks and the Theseus2 memory analysis tool).

LAN NetView Fix 1.0 is targeted toward the system administrator who needs
LAN-based fault management.

IBM LAN NetView Tie Version 1.0 is targeted for the customer who manages their
Local Area Networks (LANs) via a NetView based remote host system.  LAN NetView
LAN Netview Tie is designed for use by both NetView operators and system
administrators.

LAN NetView Tie 1.0 is useful to customers that install LAN NetView system
management products and need to receive notifications at NetView when specific
events occur at network resources.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Applications integrated with the View component of LAN NetView
        Manage 1.0, to provide a consistent topology-oriented user
        interface.
    o   Written to standardized interfaces of LAN NetView Manage Version
        1.0*
    o   Automated performance management and threshold monitoring with
        LAN NetView Monitor 1.0
    o   Pager support through LAN NetView Fix 1.0
    o   Routing of LAN NetView events to NetView through LAN NetView Tie
        1.0
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **NetWare is a Trademark of Novell, Inc. **X/Open is a
Trademark of the X/Open Company, Limited **LOTUS is a Trademark of the LOTUS
Development Corporation. **MicroSoft and Windows Trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation **QuarterDeck QEMM-386 is a Trademark of Quarterdeck Office Systems
**Qualitas, 386Max, and Qualitas BlueMax are Trademarks of Qualitas, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 219. IBM NETWORK DOOR/2--THE INTEGRATION ENVIRONMENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Network Door/2 (NetDoor (TM)) is a flexible OS/2 (R) LAN-based computing
environment that improves end-user and support personnel productivity and
solves the problems of integrating applications on LANs.  The NetDoor family of
functions is used to create, operate, expand and use an integrated LAN
environment.

NetDoor improves the productivity of support personnel by offering:

    o   Easy integration of applications
    o   Central maintenance of the NetDoor environment
    o   Fault-tolerant access to application servers
    o   Automatic load distribution among application servers
    o   Flexible replication and synchronization of server files
    o   Incremental scalability
    o   An enterprise solution

NetDoor improves the productivity of OS/2 users by offering:

    o   Easy access to applications and information stored on the NetDoor
        application servers
    o   Catalogs of the applications available on the NetDoor application
        server
    o   Central maintenance of stored NetDoor components
    o   A single system image with high availability
    o   A base for transparent access to other systems via IBM TCP/IP or
        IBM Communications Manager/2.

You can use NetDoor's productivity improvements to significantly increase the
number of end users supported by your LAN administration staff.

NetDoor exploits file servers as application servers enabling OS/2  clients to
run many more programs, exploiting the benefits of OS/2's multitasking, to free
their disks for private applications and data.

The combination of your mission-critical applications, your standard
productivity applications, your selection of licensed applications, and
NetDoor's functions, forms an integrated computing environment that is
open-ended, reliable, flexible, extendable, easy-to-use and easy-to-maintain.
NetDoor is a superior integration environment for your enterprise.

NetDoor offers a computing environment that allows users to access selected
programs loaded from servers to run on a client machine.  Many utilities and
tools are included to ease NetDoor administration.

NetDoor supports server functions on OS/2 systems running either IBM OS/2 LAN
Server or IBM TCP/IP for OS/2.  Client functions for NetDoor are supported on
OS/2 clients running either IBM OS/2 LAN Requester or IBM TCP/IP for OS/2.

NetDoor provides a user interface that conforms to SystemView (R) integration
level 2. (TM) Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (R)
Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Easy integration of applications
    o   Central maintenance of the NetDoor environment
    o   Fault-tolerant access to application servers
    o   Automatic load distribution among application servers
    o   Flexible replication and synchronization of server files
    o   Easy access to many applications stored on NetDoor application
        servers
    o   Integration base for accessing other systems and networks
    o   Utility for the installation of NetDoor servers and clients
    o   Ease-of-use features that exploit the OS/2 Workplace Shell (TM)
    o   Support for OS/2-based client systems
    o   Support for LAN Server and TCP/IP Network File System


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 220. NETWARE 3.12 FROM IBM AND NETWARE FOR SAA 1.3B FROM IBM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   74G1620  NetWare 3.12 from IBM 5 User CD
    o   74G1621  NetWare 3.12 from IBM 5 User 3.5"
    o   74G1622  NetWare 3.12 from IBM 10 User CD
    o   74G1623  NetWare 3.12 from IBM 10 User 3.5"
    o   74G1624  NetWare 3.12 from IBM 25 User CD
    o   74G1625  NetWare 3.12 from IBM 25 User 3.5"
    o   74G1626  NetWare 3.12 from IBM 50 User CD
    o   74G1627  NetWare 3.12 from IBM 50 User 3.5"
    o   74G1628  NetWare 3.12 from IBM 100 User CD
    o   74G1629  NetWare 3.12 from IBM 100 User 3.5"
    o   74G1630  NetWare 3.12 from IBM 250 User CD
    o   74G1631  NetWare 3.12 from IBM 250 User 3.5"
    o   74G2043  NetWare for Macintosh 3.12 from IBM 200 User Dual
    o   74G1806  NetWare for SAA 1.3B from IBM 16 Session CD/3.5"
    o   74G1811  NetWare for SAA 1.3B from IBM 64 Session CD/3.5"
    o   74G1815  NetWare for SAA 1.3B from IBM 128 Session CD/3.5"
    o   74G1819  NetWare for SAA 1.3B from IBM 254 Session CD/3.5"

NetWare 3.12 from IBM, an updated version of Novell's popular network operating
system, contains maintenance updates and enhancements to the NetWare 3.11
product such as:

    o   NetWare for Macintosh 5-user
    o   MHS Basic services
    o   E-Mail applications: First Mail for DOS and First Mail for
        Macintosh
    o   New VLM client architecture
    o   New client tools to better support MS Windows
    o   Support for CD-ROM installation and CD-ROM read-only volumes

NetWare for SAA 1.3B from IBM is an update to the NetWare for SAA 1.3 from IBM
NetWare gateway product.  The update incorporates maintenance changes and a
NetWare for SAA Runtime for both 3.12 and 4.01.

A new NetWare for Macintosh 3.12 from IBM product supports the NetWare 3.12
server environment, allowing up to 200 Macintosh users to log onto a NetWare
3.12 server.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   NetWare 3.12 from IBM replaces NetWare 3.11 and includes
        Macintosh support and several other enhancements and maintenance
        fixes.
    o   NetWare for SAA 1.3B from IBM replaces NetWare for SAA 1.3 and
        adds support for the NetWare 3.12 server environment
    o   NetWare for Macintosh 3.12 from IBM replaces NetWare for
        Macintosh v3.011 and allows up to 200 simultaneous Macintosh
        users in a NetWare 3.12 server environment.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of
Novell, Inc. ** Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. **
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corp.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 221. IBM DIAL IN ACCESS TO LANS CLIENT FOR OS/2, DOS, AND WINDOWS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The ability to access data processing services from any remote location with
dial-up service is now available.  The IBM Dial In Access to LANs (DIALs
Client) works with the IBM 8235 server to provide remote PC users access to
applications that they normally access from workstations directly attached to a
token ring or Ethernet LAN.  With multiple communications protocols supported,
a single dial-up connection can bring the user to the variety of applications
accessible in today's multiprotocol environments.

The DIALs Client supports PCs or PS/2s (R) operating with DOS, Windows (1), or
OS/2 (R).  Use of special filter/compression techniques optimizes performance
for the remote user.  The DIALs Client will support most popular modems
available today and will support asynchronous transmission at up to 57.6Kbs.
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (1)
Registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Offers remote dial-in support for the IBM 8235
    o   Provides MultiProtocol
    o   Is simple to install
    o   Works with DOS, Windows, and OS/2 (March 1994)
    o   Offers password/callback security features.

Field agents, sales representative, travelling employees, and off-site
employees now have the ability to utilize their data processing services from
any remote location with dial-up service. Using standard dial networks, remote
customers with PCs and modems can gain access and work with their LAN resources
and applications the same way they would if working at a locally-attached LAN
workstation.

The DIALs Client and the IBM 8235 Server allow easy access to applications that
would normally be run by the employee from a workstation connected to the LAN.
With support for multiple protocols, and with high performance
filtering/compression techniques, excellent performance can be achieved when
addressing a variety of applications remotely.

The DIALs Client provides the ability to remotely access LAN-accessible
databases anywhere dial-up phone service is available. With access to real-time
data concerning inventory, price, or rate, a sales representative or agent at a
client's location can determine availability and cost to the client for
specific offerings.  The representative or agent can then order them with a
real-time update to inventory databases and customer files.  Good and timely
information can be the key to closing a sale and maintaining customer
satisfaction, particularly when the competition cannot provide the same kind of
service.  For service providers, the DIALs Client can be used to allow
customers to access LAN-based applications maintained by the service provider's
LAN-based services in real time.  The service provider would not have to be
directly involved in the process, freeing up the provider's resources to
address other opportunities.

The DIALs Client offers customers desiring a wiring closet or desktop solution
an easily installed, configured, and maintained product with solid state
reliability, tuned performance, and a competitive cost/port for multiprotocol
remote dial-in requirements.  Users with applications on NetWare servers, OS/2
or DOS servers, or 3270 or TCP/IP host applications can access these
applications in a single dial-up session with standard telephone service and
modems.  The IBM 8235 is suited for the customer with eight or more high usage
dial-in remote PC users and/or the customer with several hundred occasional
dial-in PC users.  The IBM 8235 is well suited to the structured wiring
environment and can easily be scaled by using multiple units that can be
managed as one, by either a local or remote manager using the 8235 SNMP MIBs or
the 8235 Management Facility.

IBM intends to provide the function of the 8235, remote dial-in access to LANs,
as a feature on the IBM 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub.  The 8250 feature
will be compatible with the stand-alone IBM 8235 being announced today.  This
will allow IBM customers to plan for the following:

    o   Support in the 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub for remote
        access dial-in applications requiring Netbios, 802.2 LLC, IPX, or
        IP transport protocols
    o   Integration, wiring, and management for the remote access dial-in
        function within the 8250
    o   Common support for the remote dial-in clients when the dial-in is
        to either the stand-alone 8235 or the 8250 feature.

The announcement and availability of the above function will be based on IBM's
business and technical judgement.

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS:  Any PC or PS/2 with a 286 or higher processor.

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS:  The DIALs Client requires DOS Version 3 Release 3 or
Windows Version 3 Release 1 Operating System at general availability, or OS/2
Version 2 or higher on March 25, 1994.

COMPATIBILITY:  The DIALs Client works with the IBM 8235.

LIMITATIONS:  The DIALs Client is compatible with asynchronous analog modems
operating at speeds between 2400bps and 57.6Kbs.

The DIALs Client uses the security and auditability features of the IBM 8235.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection, and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures, and appropriate controls in
application systems and communication facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 222. IBM SAVEUTILITY/2 VERSION 1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM SaveUtility/2 is a local area network (LAN), full function application for
backup and recovery of workstations:

    o   Servers
    o   Gateways
    o   Bridges
    o   End users

Key customer requirements are satisfied including backup of all files in an
OS/2 or DOS environment including hidden files, long file names, and extended
attributes.  Microsoft** Windows** and Novell NetWare** environments are also
supported.

Each workstation on the LAN can perform automated, unattended backup of data
and operating system in full, incremental, or progressive mode.  Restore can be
a single file, multiple files, subdirectory, or an entire fixed disk.  IBM
SaveUtility/2 completely restores the entire system and data to the point of
last backup even if the fixed disk was replaced.  The user or LAN administrator
controls the backup and recovery process.  IBM SaveUtility/2 V1.1 includes
enhancements to Version 1.0, previously available as a PRPQ through PC Direct.

IBM SaveUtility/2 provides significant customer value which includes:

    o   Centralized Control Improvements:  Data from servers, bridges,
        gateways, end-users--any workstation on the LAN, is backed up to
        a single location, enabling better control and management of the
        decentralized environment. The need for additional hardware is
        reduced due to the single, centralized location of the backup
        server.
    o   Improved User Productivity: Productivity is enhanced due to the
        automatic operation of the program in either background mode, or
        after hours scheduling.  Significant time is saved by eliminating
        the need to re-create lost data or systems.
    o   Improved IS Operations Productivity: The IS operations staff no
        longer needs to manage tapes from numerous and different systems,
        move backup drives from one system to the other, or perform
        extensive manual reporting and tracking.  IBM SaveUtility/2
        manages the entire environment.
    o   Reliability:  Critical data, including operating systems, can be
        scheduled for a regular, automatic backup.  If extensive
        modifications to data or operating systems are performed, an
        interim on-demand backup can be initiated by the user, thereby
        insuring the most current level of information.

HIGHLIGHTS IBM SaveUtility/2 features:

    o   Provides extensive management and administration capabilities
    o   Supports:
        -   OS/2 and DOS systems
        -   Automatic or on-demand backup
        -   Full, incremental, or progressive file backup including
            operating system
        -   Single file, multiple file, or full disk restore including
            operating system
        -   Tape, Magnetic-Optical, or TCP/IP Host archive device
        -   Network products from IBM, Microsoft, and Novell
        -   NETBIOS and IPX/SPX protocols
        -   A maximum of 250 workstations per license

IBM SaveUtility/2 V1.1. Enhancements:

    o   Non-Redundant Backup: Eliminates backup of recurring data
    o   Archiver Pooling: Enables the sharing of archivers across all
        workstations
    o   Multiple Restorer: Allows concurrent restore to multiple users
    o   ACL (Access Control Lists) support provided for IBM LAN Server
        Version 3.0
    o   Supports Novell IPX/SPX protocol for data transport
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **Microsoft is a Registered trademark of Microsoft
Corporation **Windows is a Trademark of Microsoft Corporation **Novell NetWare
is a Registered trademark of Novell, Inc. **Styos Plus is a Registered
Trademark of Sytron Corporation **NovaBack is a Registered Trademark of
NovaStor Corporation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 223. LAN DISTANCE FAMILY OF PRODUCTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    Order Type     Part            Program
    Number         Number          Name                         Media
    5871-AAA       96F8596         IBM LAN Distance           3.5-inch
                                   Remote for OS/2
    5871-AAA       96F8594         IBM LAN Distance           3.5-inch
                                   Connection Server
                                   (8-Port)
    5871-AAA       96F8626         IBM LAN Distance           3.5-inch
                                   Connection Server

The IBM LAN Distance* family of products provides the capability of extending
the "Office LAN" to remote users.  Using dial connections (asynchronous,
synchronous, ISDN, or X.25), remote users can access LAN (Ethernet or
token-ring) resources, as if they were physically connected to the LAN.

LAN Distance consists of two components: The IBM LAN Distance Connection Server
for OS/2* product provides the security and routing capabilities that allow
remote PCs to access LAN resources.  The Connection Server requires OS/2
Version 2.0 (or higher) and can coexist on the same PC with other applications
such as IBM LAN Server, IBM Communications Manager/2 or IBM Database Manager/2.

The IBM LAN Distance Remote for OS/2 product provides the support for a remote
PC to dial either the Connection Server or another remote PC and establish a
LAN session.  The LAN Distance Remote product requires OS/2 Version 2.0 (or
higher).  An additional feature allows the LAN Distance Remote workstation to
be shuttled between being LAN connected while in the office and being remotely
connected while traveling.

The IBM LAN Distance product extends your office LAN environment to home and
traveling users.  LAN Distance is a network bridge product and is compatible
with most Network Operating Systems such as IBM LAN Server, Novell Netware,
Artisoft LANTastic, Banyon Vines and Microsoft LAN Manager.  In addition, the
IBM LAN Distance product supports transparent remote LAN access for most client
server applications such as Lotus Notes, Lotus CC Mail, and IBM Time and
Place/2.  Host attach products such as IBM Communications Manager/2, IBM
Personal Communications 3270 or AS/400* PC Support allow concurrent remote host
access with LAN based applications.

The LAN Distance product is appropriate for both large enterprises and smaller
companies.  The LAN Distance Connection Server product can utilize a dedicated
PC and provide a very cost effective solution for installations of all sizes.
In addition, because the Connection Server, for smaller configurations,  does
not require a dedicated PC remote LAN access capability can be even more cost
effective.  LAN Distance's advanced security features, wide range of
connectivity, and remote management capabilities make it appropriate for
customers and networks of all sizes.

The IBM LAN Distance Remote product support is appropriate for home and
traveling users that wish to use the OS/2 operating system.  Because LAN
Distance uses Remote Node technology, logically extending the LAN cable to
remote users, the new graphical client/server applications can now be extended
to remote environments.  The application and user interface reside on the
remote workstation and only need to access the LAN environment for shared data.
In addition, because the IBM LAN Distance Remote product supports Remote to
Remote connectivity, simple peer networking between two workstations or a
remote workstation and a small LAN can now be provided without requiring the
installation of a Connection Server.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Enhances customer's productivity by extending the office to
        traveling, branch office, and home users.
    o   Supports two remote access environments: remote workstation to
        LAN-attached workstation, and remote workstation to remote
        workstation.
    o   Connects remote users to LAN services over switched Wide Area
        Network (WAN) connections using remote node technology.
    o   Supports OS/2 Version 2.0 and higher.
    o   Protects the customer's investment in existing LAN-based
        applications, such as Lotus Notes, LAN Requester, NetWare,
        FTTERM, IBM Time and Place/2, and IBM Communications Manager/2,
        which run without change over a WAN.
    o   Enables multiple applications to run remotely over a single WAN
        connection.
    o   Supports a range of cost versus performance switched and non-
        switched WAN connections from asynchronous to synchronous to
        ISDN.
    o   Offers X.25 network access with X.25 PAD support.
    o   Supports token-ring and Ethernet LANs.
    o   Provides security functions to protect against unauthorized WAN
        access to the LAN, as well as other security features.
    o   Provides administration and systems management functions to help
        monitor and manage many simultaneous connections from multiple
        remote workstations.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **3Com is a trademark of 3Com Corporation. **EtherCard
PLUS is a trademark of the Standard Microsystems Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 224. IBM PLANT FLOOR SERIES DATA COLLECTION EDITION - APPLICATIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The new IBM PLANT FLOOR SERIES* Data Collection Edition applications consist of
five applications designed to improve productivity by reporting data obtained
by automatic data collection.  The applications are:

    o   5696-144 Shipping/2
    o   5696-145 Receiving/2
    o   5696-146 Lot Tracking/2
    o   5696-147 Defect Reporting/2
    o   5696-148 Work In Process/2

The IBM Data Collection Applications provide a generic export and import
capability which formats application data and inserts the data into a file and
reads the data previously formatted in an existing file.  This allows creating
interfaces to other host systems and applications so that any host system can
be driven using the IBM Data Collection Applications. Installation of these
applications in non-MAPICS accounts and even non-IBM accounts requires only
relatively small amount of custom interface work. Designed to be
full-functional, these applications enable customers, either directly or
through the services of a third party, to customize the function and appearance
of these applications to meet the individual needs of their business.
Therefore, the operation of business does not need to conform to these
applications but the applications can be customized to conform to the
customer's business procedures.

These products collect data by using IBM Data Collection Control/2 (5756-144)
to collect people and production status through IBM 7526 and 7527 Data
Collection terminals.

This announcement consists of five additional data collection applications
which are built on the services of Data Collection Control/2 (DCC/2) running on
OS/2 Extended Edition or Extended Services.  The Data Collection Control/2
product provides strategic data collection Application Programming Interfaces
(APIs) which are used by these applications and will be utilized by other CIM
data collection applications.

Distributed Application Environment is a collection of licensed programs.
Distributed Application Environment is a system enabler in the CIM Architecture
and can be optionally used by DCC/2 when Distributed Application Environment is
installed.  Distributed Application Environment can be used to transport the
import/export files to other systems on the Distributed Application Environment
Network.  In addition, the Distributed Application Environment SQL interface
can be used to access application data after the applications have stored the
data in the OS/2 Database Manager.

These products can be acquired, installed and used in any combination on a
single computer.  They provide an export and import capability which can write
formatted application data into a file and read data from a file.  This allows
creating interfaces to host systems and applications so that any host system
can be driven using the Data Collection Edition applications.  The
export/import capability allows installation of the Data Collection Edition
applications with MAPICS systems, CIM Advantage Product Planning Series
(CIMAPPS), COPICS and non-IBM systems with a small amount of custom interface
work required.  In addition, since the application data is stored in OS/2
Database Manager files, the data is available to any other applications running
on OS/2 with access to the Database Manager.

These products are designed to be full function applications but with
modification in mind.  This allows customers, either directly or through the
services of a third party, to modify the function and appearance of these
applications to meet the individual needs of their business.  They need not
modify the operation of their business to conform to these applications but can
modify the applications to conform to their business procedures.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Data collection business solutions are enhanced by information
        decision tools at the plant floor where they can best be applied
        to the minute-by-minute decision making required in today's
        dynamic manufacturing environments.
    o   These programs significantly lower the cost of implementing
        plant floor, decision-based solutions by providing pre-written,
        pre-tested data collection applications.
    o   Applications take full advantage of the functions and features
        of OS/2* Release 2 and Data Collection Control/2 (DCC/2), and
        eliminate the need for extensive application design and
        development effort, and their associated costs, in both time and
        money.
    o   The Data Collection Edition applications provide the flexibility
        to run on a single system or to be installed and used on a Local
        Area Network (LAN) by using the LAN capabilities of OS/2
        Release 2.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 225. IBM COMMUNICATIONS MANAGER/2 VERSION 1.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

   o   P/N 79G0258 Communications Manager/2, 3.5-inch diskettes
   o   P/N 79G0257 Communications Manager/2, CD-ROM

Communications Manager/2 Version 1.1 provides expanded communications services
for IBM Operating System/2* (OS/2*).  This program represents the further
enhancement of the Communications Manager/2 Version 1.0 product that was
announced and made available earlier this year.  The enhancements include
improved 3270 and 5250 terminal emulation, additional APPC functions, Data
Compression, Distributed Feature Workstation, National Language Translations
and DBCS support.

Communications Manager/2 Version 1.1 is intended to run on OS/2 Version 1.30.1
(with CSD 5050) or later, and OS/2 Version 2.0 or later. Communications
Manager/2 Version 1.1 supports personal computers which run the OS/2 operating
system, including most IBM PS/1, IBM PS/2*, PS/ValuePoint*, PS/55 systems, and
non-IBM systems.

Communications Manager/2 Version 1.1 is IBM's premier communications manager
for OS/2 workstations.  It contains the communications functions from Extended
Services for OS/2 and Communications Manager/2 Version 1.0, and includes major
enhancements over these products including:  conversion to Presentation
Manager, configuration and installation aids, improved 3270 emulation,
conversion of 5250 emulation to Presentation Manager interface, improved
problem determination functions, and the addition of ISDN communication
services.

Communications Manager/2 Version 1.1 provides IBM's flagship solution for
communications management for OS/2.  It provides a broad set of communications
capabilities.  These include functions such as:  SNA gateway capability; 3270
and 5250 terminal emulation; a wide range of API support including, EHLLAPI and
CPI-C; APPN end node and network node support; SNA Common Services and
Management Services; LUA (LU0,1,2,3); the new remote installation and
configuration and improved problem determination functions.

Users of OS/2 requiring communications with their SNA hosts will find
Communications Manager/2 Version 1.1 an outstanding solution.  Communications
Manager/2 Version 1.1 complements and provides migration from PCom3270 for DOS
users.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   3270/5250 Emulator Enhancements
    o   Additional APPC Function
    o   Data Compression
    o   Distributed Feature Capability for Communication Services
    o   PCMCIA 3270 Adapter Support
    o   CD-ROM Ordering Option
    o   IDLC for ISDN Support
    o   National Language Translations
    o   DBCS Support
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 226. VISUALAGE FOR OS/2 VERSION 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   P/N 87G7044) VisualAge
    o   P/N 87G7049) VisualAge Team
    o   P/N 87G7054) VisualAge COBOL Component
    o   P/N 87G7059) VisualAge Multi-Database Component
    o   P/N 87G7064) VisualAge Communications/Transaction Component
    o   P/N 87G7069) VisualAge Multimedia Component

VisualAge is an integrated, application development environment designed
especially for client-server, mission-critical, line of business applications
through visual programming and construction-from- components technologies. It
provides a series of high productivity, OS/2* based power tools for the
development of applications targeting OS/2 execution systems.

There are two base products in the VisualAge family:

    o   VisualAge for the individual user, and
    o   VisualAge Team for team development.

VisualAge Team provides all the functionality of VisualAge plus support for
team programming.

Using popular relational databases, VisualAge enables customers to develop
client-server database applications.  In a server-based development environment
it can produce complete on-line transaction processing (OLTP) client-server
applications for OS/2.  This functionality enables the customer to build
workstation applications that access remote transaction programs through a
variety of network protocols and access data in remote and local relational
databases.

VisualAge provides the following functionality:

    o   Visual programming (construction-from-components) which enables
        the development of complete applications from pre-existing or
        custom-built components with little or no knowledge of the
        underlying language
    o   Support for team programming enabling multi-users complete access
        to the development environment and suite of productivity tools
    o   Library services including versioning and release control that
        provide complete library code management so that large complex
        development efforts can be successful
    o   Support for reusing programs developed in C, COBOL or any
        language which creates DLLs.  This capability promotes the reuse
        of existing code, reducing development cycle time and future
        maintenance requirements.  C support is included in the base
        VisualAge and VisualAge Team products. COBOL support may be
        ordered separately.
    o   Advanced graphical user interface (GUI) capability, including
        support to implement CUA '91 user interface controls
    o   Communications and transaction processing components which
        provides a diverse menu of protocols with a simplified common
        access, including TCP/IP, APPC, and CICS OS/2 ECI
    o   Database components for interfacing with both IBM and non-IBM
        databases which provides a menu of databases with a simplified
        common access, including DB2/2, Oracle, Microsoft SQL Server.
        DB2/2 support is provided in the base VisualAge and VisualAge
        Team products.  The additional database support may be ordered
        separately.
    o   Access to other applications such as IMS Client Server/2,
        allowing the development of applications for open distributed
        environments
    o   Visual SQL query builder capability
    o   Multimedia capability which provides a library of predefined,
        reusable and extensible components to build multimedia
        applications without manual coding
    o   Performance tuning and packaging tools
    o   A complete application development environment which integrates Smalltalk
        editors, browsers, debuggers, inspectors, performance profiler and
        Dynamic Link Library builder

VisualAge's open architecture enables the developers of GUI tools, database and
communications support products and class libraries to write to published APIs.

VisualAge is an application development environment and suite of power tools
which introduce technologies that unlock the complex world of application
development in a client/server environment.  These technologies are based on a
visual construction-from-components architecture and enable the development of
the client portion of client/server applications with very complex GUIs.

Developers are confronted by ever changing user requirements and a growing user
base.  This combination necessitates an integrated development environment with
a robust suite of tools so that applications can be developed rapidly.  Within
its object-oriented development environment, VisualAge provides visual
programming.  This technology enables the developer to work with the end user
in an iterative manner to develop user interfaces and accurately capture
changing user requirements.

The reuse of proven designs and stable code is one element of object-oriented
programming that puts real power into the user's hands and VisualAge provides
many opportunities for reuse.  VisualAge was developed using VisualAge itself.
This assures that the design and code supplied with VisualAge have been tested
and optimized.  The ability to reuse existing code reduces development cycle
time and, because many of the components can be reused without change,
drastically reduces errors.

Object-oriented technology is emerging as the most promising avenue to solve
the rightsizing and client-server challenges of the future.  VisualAge utilizes
this technology to simplify the development of applications for OS/2 in a
graphical environment using construction from components.  Additionally, more
experienced developers have the benefit of the underlying Smalltalk language
including an integrated suite of productivity tools (editors, browsers,
debuggers, inspectors).  VisualAge Team adds team programming capabilities to
the environment, multiplying the value derived from the technologies.  These
two products will enable developers of various skill and experience levels to
create mission critical client/server applications. VisualAge opens the door to
these technologies and, over time, IBM plans to address additional development
environments and expand its communications and database access capabilities.

VisualAge is a product set of object-oriented application development power
tools for dealing with today's complex, mission critical, GUI, client/server
workstation applications.  VisualAge introduces the
construction-from-components paradigm which eases the migration to object
oriented technology.  It offers ready-built components enabling developer
productivity without OO skills, yet offers extensibility for those who are
building OO skills.

VisualAge can also be used to develop database applications for DB/2, DB2/2,
Oracle, Sybase and SQL Server.

VisualAge Team and IBM's Envy**/400* product are complementary, with Envy/400
targeted at customers who need complete integration with AS/400 data and
services.

VisualAge is positioned with IBM's Cross System Product (CSP), as a
complementary application development power tool.  CSP is a procedural 4GL tool
for building the client/server portions of applications.

VisualAge is also positioned with Highpoint as a complementary application
development tool.  Highpoint is a workstation-based procedural 4GL tool for
COBOL audiences and customers moving from host-based application development to
workgroups.  Highpoint targets customers whose objective is to build on
existing skills, who prefer a single product for developing both the client and
server portions of applications or who intend to use their current 370 host
platform as a powerful server.

VisualAge's object-oriented technology provides visual GUI development
capabilities so that complex CUA-compliant screens can be built quickly and
easily.  VisualAge's open architecture enables these GUI front-ends to run with
both new and existing applications.

VisualAge provides an open architecture via published interfaces.  This
approach encourages others to create GUI development tools and support tools
(communications, database access, legacy code access and class libraries) which
will work in the VisualAge environment and provide additional value to our
customers.

The integrated VisualAge environment includes visual programming, database and
legacy code access, communications access, multimedia support and the Smalltalk
language.

IBM continues to actively work with the industry to build a set of standards
for Smalltalk development.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Visual construction-from-components
    o   Visual GUI design capability
    o   Client-server application development
    o   Open extensible architecture
    o   Extensive code reuse
    o   Access to a range of communication protocols, databases and
        legacy code reuse
    o   Multimedia support
    o   Team programming

Benefits include:

    o   Improved responsiveness to end users
    o   Increased developer productivity
    o   Increased application usability
    o   Reduced maintenance
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **ENVY is a registered trademark of Object Technology
International


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 227. IBM C SET ++ FOR OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   5875-XXX  82G3732 IBM C Set ++ V2.1 (3.5")
    o   5875-XXX  82G3735 IBM C Set ++ V2.1 (CD-ROM)
    o   5875-XXX  82G3736 IBM C Set ++ V2.1 (CD-ROM Pak)
    o   5875-XXX  82G3733 IBM C/C++ Tools Version 2.01 (3.5)
    o   5875-XXX  82G3734 IBM WorkFrame/2 Version 2.1 (3.5)
    o   5875-XXX  61G1400 IBM C Set ++ Class Libraries

IBM introduces IBM C Set ++ for OS/2 - Version 2.1, (IBM C Set ++ Version 2.1)
the latest release of IBM C Set ++ Version 2.0 -- -- The Object Oriented
Development Tools for OS/2. This is a complete C/C++ application development
solution for OS/2 2.0 and higher in a convenient single package.  This package,
available in both diskette and CD-ROM formats, now contains the following:

    o   KASE: Set - a powerful new visual OS/2 graphical interface
        design tool, designed and developed by KASEWORKS
    o   The new IBM C/C++ Tools Version 2.01:
        1.  The IBM C/C++ compiler that generates 32-bit code for IBM
            OS/2 2.0 and higher, and that includes:
            -   Standard Class Library
            -   User Interface Class Library
                --  now containing object-oriented drag/drop
            -   Collection Class Library.
        2.  The fully interactive, full function, source level IBM C/C++
            debugger
        3.  The IBM C++ browser
        4.  The IBM C/C++ execution trace analyzer.
    o   IBM WorkFrame/2 Version 1.1 - IBM's highly configurable, project-
        oriented application development environment, designed for C and
        C++ users, usable on OS/2 2.0 and 2.1.
    o   IBM WorkFrame/2 Version 2.1 - A new version of the IBM
        WorkFrame/2 specifically designed to take full advantage of the
        features of OS/2 2.1.
    o   IBM Developer's Toolkit for OS/2 2.1 - The latest release of the
        OS/2 Toolkit.
        Users of the above IBM C/C++ Tools product must use this Toolkit
        (supplied as part of the IBM C Set ++ Version 2.1 package).

Two of the above C++ class libraries, the User Interface Class Library and the
Collection Class Library, are now also available in source code format as a
single program package - IBM C Set ++ Class Libraries Source Version 2.1.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Maximizes productivity using latest release of IBM's new C/C++
        compiler and its associated tools - now also featuring the KASE:
        Set visual design and code generation development tool - designed
        for developing on both OS/2 2.0 and 2.1.
    o   Generates high-performance business solutions using our well-
        known state-of-the-art code optimization in the C and C++
        environments, to exploit the power of OS/2 Version 2 running on
        80386-, 80486- and Pentium* processor-based computers.
    o   Capitalizes on IBM's powerful, flexible C/C++ development
        environment - including three class libraries (now also available
        in optional source code format) - to promote broad 32-bit OS/2
        application development and protect and grow your investment.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 228. IBM C SET ++ FIRSTSTEP VERSION 2.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   5875-XXX  82G3744  IBM C Set ++ FirstStep V2.1  (3.5")
    o   5875-XXX  82G3746  IBM C Set ++ FirstStep V2.1  (CD-ROM)
    o   5875-XXX  82G3747  IBM C Set ++ FirstStep V2.1  (CD-ROM Pak)
    o   5875-XXX  82G3745  IBM C/C++ FirstStep Tools V 2.01 (3.5")
    o   5876-XXX  82G3755  IBM C Set ++ FirstStep V2.1 Library - Group 1
    o   5876-XXX  82G3756  IBM C Set ++ FirstStep V2.1 Library - Group 2

IBM C Set ++ FirstStep for OS/2 - Version 2.1 (IBM C Set ++ FirstStep Version
2.1) is a complete C/C++ application development package designed for those new
to OS/2* 2.0 and 2.1 application development, and for those developing
applications on a more casual or non-professional basis.  Although Program
Service is not provided for this product, users can find tips and information
on the CompuServe* network.

The IBM C Set ++ FirstStep Version 2.1 package contains the following:

    1.  The new IBM C/C++ FirstStep Tools Version 2.01:
        o   The IBM C/C++ compiler that generates 32-bit code for IBM
            OS/2 Version 2 and higher, and that includes:
            -   Standard Class Library
            -   Collection Class Library.
            -   Application Support Class Library.
        o   The fully interactive, full function, source level IBM C/C++
            Debugger
    2.  The IBM WorkFrame/2 Version 1.1 - IBM's highly configurable
        project-oriented application development environment.
    3.  The Developer's Toolkit for OS/2 2.1 - the latest release of the
        OS/2 Toolkit.
        This Toolkit is a prerequisite for the new C/C++ FirstStep Tools.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Introduce yourself to the OS/2 2.X development environment
        economically, using our C and C++ compiler and its associated
        tools.
    o   Generate 32-bit OS/2 applications in the C and C++
        environments; exploit the power of IBM OS/2 V2.0 running on
        80386-, 80486- and Pentium* processor-based computers.
    o   Capitalize on IBM's powerful, flexible C/C++ development
        environment - including class libraries.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 229. IBM PERSONAL DICTATION SYSTEM SERIES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Personal Dictation System Series programs represent large vocabulary,
isolated voice-to-text applications on IBM OS/2 (R) Version 2.1 for stand-alone
PS/2 (R), ValuePoint (TM) and PC-compatible systems.  These speech programs
decode speech into text with high accuracy and provide functions for users to
enter dictation, control the US English OS/2 2.1 Workplace Shell (TM) and
applications by voice.  The text created can be saved to a file or formatted,
edited and integrated with other applications.

The 20,000-word vocabulary, with a general office use language model, supports
speech dictation for general business correspondence and documents.  Users can
also add up to 2,000 words of their own when creating documents with dictation.
Additional vocabularies, which include their own industry-specific language
models, are also available (Medical Radiology, Emergency Medicine and
Journalism).

This program can be used with OS/2 2.1 or higher on a 486SX-25 MHz or higher
personal computer with the appropriate IBM Personal Dictation Adapter.

    o   Helps increase the productivity of a wide range of general
        business users by saving time and effort in the document creation
        process.  By decoding spoken words directly into electronic text,
        this system can eliminate the need for transcribing and enables
        direct author control over the quality and accuracy of dictation.
    o   Provides enhanced productivity for specific professions
        (Journalism and Medical) through the use of optional language
        vocabularies that supplement the base general office program.
        Depending upon the industry vocabulary chosen, professionals can
        achieve a wide variety of benefits.
    o   Provides enhanced business solutions through the use of speech
        enabled applications that provide speech navigation of menus and
        special speech control functions.
    o   Provides investment protection by enabling the use of voice input
        with existing applications.
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. TM)
Trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 230. IBM DATAGLANCE NETWORK ANALYZER FOR ETHERNET AND TOKEN-RING/2 PROGRAMS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   5871-AAA P/N 87G6638 DGNA for Ethernet and Token-Ring V 1.0
    o   5871-AAA P/N 87G6639 DGNA for Ethernet V 1.0
    o   5871-AAA P/N 87G6640 DGNA for Token-Ring V 1.0

The DatagLANce* Network Analyzer (DGNA) programs for Ethernet and Token-Ring
provide network managers and support personnel the ability to fine-tune and
trouble-shoot an Ethernet or Token-Ring Network.  The DatagLANce Analyzer
displays real-time statistics about the network as well as providing frame
capture and 7-layer protocol decode functions.  It uses an OS/2 graphical user
interface to present information with complete full on-line help and references
.  This information is a useful aid for debugging application software,
capacity planning, network reconfigurations, as well as trouble-shooting
inter-networking protocols.

DatagLANce software has a graphical CUA compliant end-user interface and
conforms to SystemView Integration Level 1.

The three DGNA products being announced are:

    o   DatagLANce Network Analyzer for Ethernet and Token-Ring/2 V1.0,
        Part# 87G6638
    o   DatagLANce Network Analyzer for Ethernet/2 V1.0, Part# 87G6639
    o   DatagLANce Network Analyzer for Token-Ring/2 V1.0, Part# 87G6640

To take full advantage of the DatagLANce Analyzer performance and features for
Token-Ring, you should have one of the following DatagLANce Token-Ring Adapter
cards installed on the PC system where the DatagLANce Software is executing.

    o   DatagLANce Token-Ring 16/4 ISA Adapter, #8308, P/N 73G8308
    o   DatagLANce Token-Ring 16/4 MC  Adapter, #8309, P/N 73G8309
    o   DatagLANce Token-Ring 16/4 CC  Adapter, #8310, P/N 73G8310

Given the large install base of Ethernet, CSMA/CD, and Token-Ring networks, the
DatagLANce Network Analyzer programs provide the much needed analysis functions
for network load, bandwidth utilization, and LAN protocols.

Using this software in conjunction with a corresponding supported Ethernet
and/or Token-Ring adapter, the customer can utilize the DatagLANce Analyzer's
statistical gathering capability and frame capture and decoding functions to
perform various LAN analysis functions including: monitoring network load and
bandwidth utilization; monitoring events which adversely affect network
performance; and troubleshooting problems involved with the various protocols
found on today's LANs.

With the information gathered by the DatagLANce Analyzer, the operator can make
judgements such as whether to move to a higher bandwidth network type, to
reconfigure the network, to redistribute stations on the network, or when using
the frame capture and decoding functions, determine the cause of one or more
protocol-related network problems.

HIGHLIGHTS DatagLANce Network Analyzer programs for Ethernet and Token-Ring
provide:

    o   Enhanced system management of Ethernet and Token-Ring Networks.
    o   Network utilization data.
    o   Dual use of a machine with the DatagLANce Analyzer installed as a
        standard work-station as well.
    o   Improved productivity due to easy-to-use graphical interface.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **ProTools and Foundation Manager are trademarks of
ProTools Inc. **Network General and Sniffer Network Analyzer are registered
trademarks of Network General Corporation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 231. IBM ANYNET/2 SOCKETS OVER SNA GATEWAY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

AnyNet*/2 Sockets over SNA Gateway (AnyNet/2 Sockets Gateway) is part of a
family of products that provides flexibility in planning and implementing
multiprotocol network solutions.  It improves communications and access to
application data by connecting TCP/IP and SNA networks.  Applications
traditionally associated with TCP/IP networks, such as FTP, X-Windows and NFS,
can now interact with like applications on SNA networks.

AnyNet/2 Sockets Gateway provides great flexibility in designing networks. As
customers implement sockets applications, two key network protocols (TCP/IP and
SNA) will transport the application information with no change required to the
applications.  The applications communicate through the gateway which connects
the transport networks.

In addition, AnyNet/2 Sockets Gateway can be used to connect isolated TCP/IP
networks across an SNA network.  In cases where an SNA network already exists,
this capability may be more cost effective than adding communication lines
between the TCP/IP networks.

AnyNet/2 Sockets Gateway works in conjunction with AnyNet/2 V1 Sockets over SNA
and AnyNet/MVS Feature of VTAM.

AnyNet/2 Sockets Gateway offers customers flexibility in planning and
implementing multiprotocol network solutions.  Customers with a need to connect
TCP/IP and SNA networks should consider the AnyNet/2 Sockets Gateway. It
provides an easy, quick, and low cost solution for using sockets applications
such as FTP, X-Windows, and NFS across both TCP/IP and SNA networks.
Additionally, AnyNet/2 Sockets Gateways can be used to connect isolated TCP/IP
networks across an SNA network.

AnyNet/2 Sockets Gateway does not require any additional hardware.  SNA users
can keep their existing networks in place and add support for TCP/IP
applications.  AnyNet solutions are distinct from similar solutions provided by
routers because AnyNet allows a single transport network to support multiple
applications written to different network interfaces.  Each transport network
has a clear boundary within the gateway to help simplify network management.
To improve performance, AnyNet implements the Networking Blueprint's CTS layer
instead of encapsulating network protocols.

The AnyNet family of products is shown below:

    ----------------------------------------------------------
    |           |                             | Programming  |
    | Platform  | Product                     | Announcement |
    |-----------+-----------------------------+--------------|
    | OS/2      | AnyNet/2 Sockets over SNA   |  293-415     |
    |           | AnyNet/2 APPC over TCP/IP   |  293-415     |
    |           | AnyNet NetBIOS over SNA     |  293-415 *   |
    |           | DCE for OS/2, MPTS -        |              |
    |           |   Sockets over NetBIOS      |  293-428     |
    |           | AnyNet/2 Sockets over SNA   |              |
    |           |   Gateway                   | RFA 22082    |
    |-----------+-----------------------------+--------------|
    | AIX/6000  | AnyNet Sockets over SNA     | RFA 22082*   |
    |           | AnyNet APPC over TCP/IP     | RFA 22082*   |
    |-----------+-----------------------------+--------------|
    | AS/400    | AnyNet Sockets over SNA     |  293-433 *   |
    |           | AnyNet APPC over TCP/IP     |  293-433 *   |
    |-----------+-----------------------------+--------------|
    | MVS/ESA   | AnyNet/MVS Sockets over SNA |  293-114     |
    |           | AnyNet/MVS APPC over TCP/IP |  293-114     |
    |--------------------------------------------------------|
    |                                                        |
    | Note: "*" indicates a statement of direction           |
    ----------------------------------------------------------

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Connects TCP/IP and SNA networks
    o   Provides communication without change between sockets
        applications on existing TCP/IP systems and sockets applications
        on SNA networks
    o   Allows organizations to communicate with vendors, suppliers and
        subsidiaries without changing network protocols
    o   Allows users on TCP/IP workstations to communicate with hosts on
        SNA networks
    o   Allows TCP/IP applications to make use of SNA network resources
    o   Reduces costs by eliminating duplicate network hardware, software
        and communication lines
    o   Requires no changes in applications
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 232. IBM INTELLIGENT HUB MANAGEMENT PROGRAM/DOS ENTRY VERSION 1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM announces a new entry level program, Intelligent Hub Management Program/DOS
Entry V1.0.  The intent is to announce a full function program, IBM Intelligent
Hub Management Program/DOS V1.0, in the near future.

Intelligent Hub Management Program/DOS Entry V1.0 (IHMP/DOS Entry V1.0),
facilitates and expands the management of local area networks (LANs) with IBM
8250 multiprotocol intelligent hubs.  This program operates on a PS/2* with
DOS/Windows operating system and so, will Intelligent Hub Management
Program/DOS V1.

Intelligent Hub Management Program/DOS Entry V1.0 (IHMP/DOS Entry V1.0)
provides an easy-to-use graphical Management tool and a very attractive
solution for managing a small LAN network of 8250 hubs from a PS/2 connected to
this network.

The management functions provided by this program include:

    o   Graphic hub display for configuration with point and click operations at
        the port level
    o   Display of alarms and events
    o   TELNET command from the application
    o   Hub microcode downloading from the station
    o   Online dynamic help facility

Intelligent Hub Management Program/DOS V1.0 will have the same capabilities.

In addition, by including a LAN network Management platform application,
Intelligent Hub Management Program/DOS V1.0 product, compared to the entry
product, will provide additional functions such as statistics display, events
logging, network topology display MIB compilation and MIB variables statistics
display.

Both Intelligent Hub Management Program/DOS V1.0 (IHMP/DOS V1.0) and
Intelligent Hub Management Program/DOS Entry (IHMP/DOS Entry V1.0) (IHMP/DOS
Entry V1.0) packages include the TCP/IP and SNMP stacks with some utilities.

These products are part of the IBM line of products for Management of IBM 8250
multiprotocol intelligent hubs.  With IHMP/6000, IHMP/6000 Entry, IHMP/DOS V1.0
and IHMP/DOS (IHMP/DOS Entry V1.0), IBM covers all the price ranges for hub
Management stations: high, medium and low.

This product line also covers different needs for the hardware equipment (RISC
or PS) and operating systems (UNIX and non-UNIX).

HIGHLIGHTS Common to IHMP/DOS (IHMP/DOS Entry V1.0) product and the future
IHMP/DOS V1.0:

    o   IHMP/DOS (IHMP/DOS Entry V1.0) provide a realistic expanded view
        of the hub with color coded status and so will IHMP/DOS V1.0.
    o   Graphic resolution is customized depending on the resolution of
        the terminal display.
    o   Point and click operations with the mouse
    o   Display of events and alarms in a circular queue
    o   Online dynamic help facility
    o   TELNET command accessible from the application
    o   FTP, PING and ECHO commands and microcode downloading application
        accessible from the station

Additional functions will come with IHMP/DOS V1.0

    o   Network topology display (hubs and links)
    o   Display of statistics
    o   Launching of Management applications are possible from the
        network Management platform.
    o   MIB compilation is possible from the station too.
    o   Capability to support add-on third party applications.
    o   Enhanced support for capture of traps alarms and events sent by
        IBM 8250 hubs.
    o   MIB variables statistics display
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **ChameleonNFS is a Registered trademark of NetManage
Company


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 233. IBM PERSON TO PERSON FOR WINDOWS VERSION 1.0 (P2P) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM Person to Person for Windows** provides real time collaboration capability
for people who need to work together but are not necessarily in the same place.
IBM Person to Person for Windows merges the functions of video conferencing,
teleconferencing and workstations to provide a powerful way to narrow the
communications gap between people using Personal Computers and workstations.
People wishing to work together could be in different offices, locations,
enterprises or at home.

IBM Person to Person for Windows provides:

    o   A shared chalkboard to enable users to draw on an electronic work
        space and share the contents of other application windows.
    o   A facility that enables Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) between users.
    o   A clip function that enables copy made by one user to be pasted
        by all the callers.
    o   A talk (chat line) facility to enable simple messages to be
        exchanged via the keyboard.
    o   A file transfer facility so that documents, images, files, can
        be exchanged by participants before, during or after their
        collaborative work session.
    o   A video application so that users can see each other or show
        each other objects.
    o   A stills capture application

Person to Person* (P2P*) is a family of products that enables the
cross-platform interoperation of these basic functions.

As well as this Windows product, P2P is available for the OS/2* operating
system.

IBM Person to Person for Windows provides collaborative working for multiple
users of workstations connected either locally or remotely, and enables the
establishment, administration and termination of remote meetings.

Multiple communications media and protocols are supported, including the
following:

    o   NetBIOS
    o   SNA
    o   ISDN
    o   TCP/IP
    o   ASYNC

The product includes basic desktop conferencing utilities which allow
collaborative workers to share and annotate the information in a window on the
workstation. Under user control, a copy of any screen may be seen by all other
participants. All users see the same window content, which may be discussed
using office telephones.  With optional hardware and software, the users can
also see one another or other real time images in a video window on their
screens.

IBM Person to Person for Windows is a new cross-industry personal productivity
tool for users on Windows attached workstations. It is part of a family of
products that enable interoperability on different platforms.

HIGHLIGHTS Provides Person to Person family capabilities to run on a Personal
Computer workstation running Microsoft Windows.

    o   Use workstations for collaborative working between people in
        different locations.
        The IBM Person to Person family of products has cross-platform
        interoperability between OS/2 and Windows, providing the
        potential for:
        -   Increased decision making accuracy and/or speed.
        -   Increased employee productivity.
        -   Reduced inter-office movement and travel requirements.
        -   Making more effective use of skilled resources.
        -   Saving time.
        -   Saving money.
        -   Providing cross-platform interoperability.
    o   Easy to install on existing workstations
        -   Software installed in 30 minutes.
        -   Uses existing Token ring, Ethernet, ISDN or Asynchronous
            communications.
    o   The customer's day-to-day business may be conducted by holding
        meetings between participants working from their desk top
        computers with all their information readily at hand.
    o   IBM Person to Person allows the real time sharing and
        modification of data at the desktop, thus improving the accuracy
        and/or speed of decision making and enhancing the customer's
        competitive advantage.
    o   Used effectively, IBM Person to Person can help reduce travel
        costs often incurred when meetings are held between participants
        in remote offices.
    o   By providing an important tool for home workers, IBM Person to
        Person could lead to reduced requirements for office space.
    o   The IBM Person to Person family provides cross-platform
        interoperability that will enable operations to be conducted
        across various computer platforms, thus improving communications
        and business effectiveness.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation **SCii
is a trademark of SCii Telecom **Ultrasmart is a trademark of Hayes Corporation
**Courier is a trademark of US Robotics **ActionMedia is a trademark of Intel
Corporation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 234. OS/2 2.1 SPECIAL EDITION FOR USE WITH WINDOWS VERSION 3.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OS/2 2.1 Special Edition for use with Windows Version 3.1 is the retail package
for current users of Microsoft Windows Version 3.1. It allows the user to take
advantage of full OS/2, DOS and Windows application support when installed on
an existing Windows Version 3.1 system.  OS/2 for Windows exploits and runs PC
applications simultaneously.

OS/2 2.1 Special Edition for use with Windows Version 3.1 contains IBM's
256-color virtual video driver for the S3 graphics accelerator from S3 Corp.

OS/2 2.1 Special Edition for use with Windows Version 3.1 completes the OS/2
2.1 offerings previously announced as follows:

    o   OS/2 2.1 Standard Edition: Targeted for the new user and/or
        users without an operating system installed on their system
    o   OS/2 2.1 Upgrade Edition: Targeted for customers with DOS or a
        previous Version of OS/2 on their system
    o   OS/2 2.1 Special Edition for Windows 3.1: Targeted for customers
        with Windows Version 3.1 installed on their system
    o   OS/2 Special Edition: A special bid only offering, provides
        support for OS/2 and DOS applications

PRODUCT POSITIONING

    o   OS/2 2.1 Special Edition for use with Windows Version 3.1 is the
        competitive retail package for current users of Windows Version
        3.1.
    o   OS/2 2.1 Special Edition for use with Windows Version 3.1 is
        offered to PCMs who currently are preinstalling DOS 5.x or 6.x
        and Windows Version 3.1, providing the opportunity to install
        OS/2 for Windows.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Allows the end user to take advantage of all of the function of
        OS/2 2.1 at a reduced price when installed over Windows Version
        3.1.

The OS/2 2.1 Special Edition for use with Windows Version 3.1 is the
competitive retail package of choice for current users of Microsoft Windows
Version 3.1.  The OS/2 for Windows provides all the benefits of OS/2 2.1 --
industry-standard device support, compliance with industry standards, enhanced
standing as a premier client, and enhanced support for OS/2, DOS, and Windows
programs.  All these features are delivered on top of a stable, mature platform
that has been "fit and finished" over time.  In addition, the OS/2 2.1 Special
Edition is an extremely attractive offering for Personal Computer Manufacturers
who currently are preinstalling DOS 5.x or higher and Windows Version 3.1.

This OS/2 for Windows requires Windows 3.1 to be previously installed on the
hard disk. This OS/2 for Windows does contain the necessary programs to enable
the previously installed Windows product to run under OS/2 2.1. During the
installation of OS/2 2.1 for use with Windows Version 3.1 the user need only
choose the Windows selection from the install panel. This will enable Windows
programs to run under OS/2 2.1. All customizations previously made for Windows
3.1 are preserved.

As with the OS/2 2.1 product, the OS/2 2.1 Special Edition runs DOS programs in
DOS sessions under OS/2.  The multiple and dual boot capabilities are unchanged
from the OS/2 2.1 product, and DOS programs requiring a specific Version of DOS
can still be run under native DOS.  IBM, Microsoft, or DR DOS 5.x or higher are
required on the target system only for the installation of Windows Version 3.1.
DOS disk utilities are subject to the same limitations as under the OS/2 2.1
product.

DASD requirements are the same as for OS/2 2.1.  (An additional 2 MB of disk
space is needed for installation of Windows Version 3.1 under DOS).  Memory and
CPU requirements are the same as for OS/2 2.1.  The OS/2 printer and video
drivers are identical to those included in the OS/2 2.1 product.

IBM's recently-announced 256-color video driver for the S3 chip set from S3
Corporation is compatible and will be included in the package as a separate
diskette.  The S3 chipset is used on a variety of leading display adapters
including Actix, Diamond, Orchid Fahrenheit, Metheus, and Video 7. The S3 video
driver is designed to provide OS/2 users with seamless support for accelerated
video graphics and advanced color resolution in a proven and reliable operating
environment.

OS/2 2.1 protects the customers investment in existing DOS and Windows
applications by providing the capability for them to run simultaneously and
seamlessly with OS/2 16 and 32-bit applications on the same display. The
customer can continue to run his existing applications while having the ability
to use advanced 32-bit OS/2 applications.

OS/2 2.1 has been enhanced to support Mobile computers, Pen based systems and
multimedia applications, the latest industry directions.

The minimum hardware configuration for OS/2 2.1 is as follows:  IBM PS/2* IBM
Industrial Computer, IBM PS/1*, IBM PS/ValuePoint* or selected non-IBM personal
computer with a 386-SX or compatible or higher processor, 4 MB system memory
and a hard disk with 20 to 40 MB free space available to the operating system
depending upon installation options selected. IBM recommends 6 MB or greater
system memory and an 80 MB or greater hard disk for many application scenarios.

In addition OS/2 2.1 supports a broad range of hard disks, diskette drives,
adapter and display combinations, pointing devices, printers, CD-ROM drives,
optical drives and portable computers.

Additional information:

    o   DASD requirements are the same as for OS/2 2.1 (with an
        additional 2 MB of disk space needed for DOS).
    o   Memory requirements are the same as for OS/2 2.1.
    o   CPU requirements are the same as for OS/2 2.1.
    o   OS/2 printer and video drivers are the same as those included in
        OS/2 2.1.
    o   IBM's recently-announced S3 256-color video driver is compatible.

Windows Version 3.1 must be previously installed on the system in order for
Windows applications to run under OS/2 2.1 Special Edition for use with Windows
Version 3.1.

OS/2 2.1 Special Edition for use with Windows Version 3.1 supports only the
following national language Versions of Windows 3.1:  Canadian French, Danish,
Dutch, Finnish, French, German, Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish,
Swedish, U.K. English, United States and Universal English.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection, and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures, and appropriate controls in
application systems and communication facilities.

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection, and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures, and appropriate controls in
application systems and communication facilities. *Signifies a trademark or
registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 235. ULTIMEDIA VIDEO IN/2 VERSION 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The primary purpose of the Ultimedia Video IN/2 Version 1.0 is to provide
support for capturing and editing digital motion video.  The Ultimedia Video IN
supports a number of different digital motion compression/decompression
algorithms. The video objects created with the Ultimedia Video IN can be played
back using OS/2* 2.1. Compression algorithms supported in Version 1.0 are Indeo
and Ultimotion using the Audio/Video Interleaved (AVI) file format. This video
can then be played back using the software-only digital motion video player
delivered with the enhanced multimedia functions provided in OS/2 Version 2.1.

Ultimedia Video IN/2 provides the capture capability and new MMPM/2 APIs for
developing nonlinear editors. Video IN allows developers and end-users to take
advantage of the conducive multimedia environment that comes with OS/2 2.1.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides a framework for software motion video compression,
        recording, and playback, and includes standard video compression
        technologies
    o   Supports device drivers for prevalent capture cards Note:  Refer
        to the Video Capture Cards Matrix section for further details.
    o   Supplies a Software Motion Video recorder/editor application
    o   Includes a utility program for viewing and manipulating AVI files
    o   Member of IBM Ultimedia Tools Series (1-800-887-7771)
    o   Complements Ultimedia Builder/2, Perfect Image/2 and Workplace/2
    o   Pluggable codec architecture for the easy addition of new video
       compression standards as they become available
    o   Pre-sale support via IBM Ultimedia Tools Series 1-800-887-7711
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **Sound Blaster is a trademark of Creative Labs, Inc.
**Pro AudioSpectrum 16 is a trademark of Media Vision **Jovian SuperVIA is a
trademark of Jovian Logic Corp. **Video Blaster is a trademark of Creative
Labs, Inc. **WinMovie is a trademark of Sigma Designs Corp. **QuickVIA is a
trademark of Creative Labs, Inc. **Video Magic is a trademark of Samsung Corp.
**Super Video Windows is a trademark of New Media Graphics Corp.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 236. IBM LAN SERVER ULTIMEDIA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM LAN Server Ultimedia* Version 1.0 product extends the already
considerable distributed multimedia capabilities of IBM OS/2* LAN Server* 3.0
-- Advanced, by setting up a controlled environment to ensure "uncompromised"
playout of audio/video application components even when there would otherwise
be congestion on the LAN.  The provision of the requisite quality of service
needed for uncompromised playout of sound, voice and video is what
distinguishes this support from most other products of its kind.

The multimedia support can be added to existing Token-Ring* or Ethernet LANs
with data applications in a non-disruptive manner, so that those applications
can continue without modification. The design also allows simultaneous use of
both data and multimedia applications.

The support takes advantage of the Token-Ring LAN Priority Architecture to
reserve bandwidth in the network, which, in conjunction with resource
reservations in the file system and disks, automatically provides the required
quality of service for multimedia even when data applications are running.
Ethernet users can reap many of the benefits of the support; but the
differences in the architecture mean that the user has to be more careful to
ensure that adequate capacity exists in the network resources. It is
recommended that the Ethernet LAN be dedicated to multimedia when multimedia
applications are being run, since simultaneous use of data applications can
produce unpredictable results.

Other features of the product include:

    o   Multimedia Application Independence: all applications can run.
        As examples, applications based on Ultimotion*, DVI**, INDEO**,
        RIFF-WAV,
        and SoundBlaster** Voice have all been tested successfully.
    o   Runs stand-alone applications using MMPM/2* or AVK.
    o   Clients may be OS/2*, DOS, or Windows**.
    o   Up to 40 video sessions (+ data applications) from a single
        server
    o   Tuning facilities to optimize performance

By providing a very high level of multimedia playback support, users will be
encouraged to engage in applications such as: "news-on-demand", kiosk, new
personnel training, enhanced mail and spreadsheet, computer-assisted education,
and many more. Multimedia is generally considered to be a significant assist to
personal communications, leading to enhanced human performance on almost every
front.

IBM LAN Server Ultimedia Version 1.0 is a separate program product; another in
IBM's range of multimedia enabling packages. Its announcement is consistent
with IBM's declared intent to provide support for all major platforms -- in
this case the IBM OS/2 LAN Server -- so that all users may have the opportunity
to benefit from the enormous potential of multimedia impact.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Brings the power of multimedia to the OS/2 LAN Server environment
    o   Controls the environment rather than having to adapt to it
    o   Application-independent -- all applications whose characteristics
        are known can be configured to run
    o   Consistent with IBM's stated intent to bring distributed
        multimedia to all major platforms
    o   Transparent to the end user
    o   Install and tuning aids available to the Network Administrator
    o   Up to 40 Video Sessions (+ Data applications) from a single LAN
        Server
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **DVI and INDEO are trademarks of Intel Corporation
**Windows is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation **SoundBlaster is a
trademark of Creative Labs Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 237. IBM NETFINITY MANAGER AND IBM NETFINITY SERVICES V1.1 FOR OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NetFinity is a highly flexible, low-cost tool to help users with hardware and
general systems management functions.  It is designed to manage systems based
on Intel Architecture for 386SX equivalent, or higher, personal computers, the
NetFinity product set complements LMU/2 and LAN NetView*.  NetFinity is CID
(Configuration/Installation/Distribution) enabled permitting remote
installation.

NetFinity is comprised of two products:

    o   NetFinity Services
    o   Netfinity Manager (Includes NetFinity Services - one license and
        documentation)

The NetFinity Services provides the local user and the NetFinity Manager the
following services:

    o   Hardware and software configuration details
    o   Resource monitoring and alerting
    o   Security management
    o   Customizable system profile
    o   System partition access (PS/2* systems only) for systems with
        partitions
    o   ECC configuration (PS/2 with ECC memory Systems)

NetFinity Manager installed with NetFinity Services provides the following
additional services for the NetFinity Manager:

    o   Bi-directional file transfer
    o   Remote screen view (snap shots)
    o   Remote session
    o   System heart-beat Monitoring
    o   Remote system restart
    o   Pass-thru system management
    o   Supports multiple protocols (NETBIOS, TCP/IP & IPX)
    o   Auto discovery of remote systems

The object oriented design of NetFinity allows new services and protocol
support to be added without any impact to the base product.

NetFinity can operate in the absence of any requestor or server software. Only
one or more of the supported protocols is required.

NetFinity is positioned as a low cost, highly flexible, hardware management
program with general system management functions. NetFinity on its own provides
a full set of easy-to-use hardware management services.  Its management
services make it attractive to a broad range of LAN environments. NetFinity is
primarily an attended solution to support LAN administrators to view, initiate
and exploit management services.

NetFinity Product set complements and enhances both LAN NetView and LMU/2.
NetFinity can be used with LAN NetView to augment its applications with
advanced hardware management functions.  In addition, NetFinity can be used in
conjuction with LMU/2 as a complementary product that provides hardware
management services in addition to features and functions of LMU/2.

The product will have the following National Language support:

    o   English
    o   French
    o   Spanish
    o   Japanese
    o   German
    o   Dutch

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides easy installation of NetFinity Services and Manager
    o   CID Enabled
    o   Requires low system resource (file, memory)
    o   Offers User friendly graphical user interfaces
    o   Delivers broad range of system management services
    o   Reduces service costs
    o   Promotes efficient hardware resource allocation
        System Considerations:
    o   386SX equivalent, or higher, processor (Intel architecture)
    o   Operates under OS/2 version 2.x or higher (2.0 with CSD
        # XR06100)
    o   Supports Popular Network Protocols
        -   NETBIOS
        -   TCP/IP
        -   IPX
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 238. MERVA/2 VERSION 3 PRODUCTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    o   5622-122 MERVA/2 Version 3
    o   5622-127 MERVA PREMIUM Support/2 Version 3
    o   5622-128 MERVA Branch/2 Version 3

MERVA/2 offers a Finance application platform on a PS/2* for message handling
and funds transfers on various networks.

The product consists of SWIFT and Telex Links and MERVA to MERVA Connection. It
provides the server facility in an OS/2* local area network LAN but can also be
used as a PS/2 stand-alone solution. It consists of the following elements:

    o   MERVA Base - provides common services and functions for the
        other components and an API.
    o   Message Processing - allows distributed message processing for
        SWIFT and Telex Messages.
    o   SWIFT Link provides the SWIFT network link with the SWIFT II
        network and controlling the external link to the SWIFT network.
    o   Telex Link - provides the link to the public Telex network.
    o   MERVA to MERVA Connection allows connections between MERVA
        systems (MERVA/2 Version 2 or 3 and/or MERVA/ESA Version 3
        and/or MERVA/370 Version 2 (VSE/CICS or MVS/CICS)).

MERVA/2 Version 3 provides the following new functions:

    o   SWIFT User Security Enhancements (USE) including Secure Login
        Select (SLS) and Bilateral Key Exchange (BKE)
    o   Flexible access to Correspondents File
    o   Integrated User Authorization
    o   Support of User Messages
    o   MERVA Connection/400 (priced feature)
    o   MERVA Connection/6000 (priced feature)

As separate products the following will be made available:

    o   MERVA Branch/2 Version 3
    o   MERVA PREMIUM Support/2 Version 3

For these products the priced features of MERVA/2 Version 3 are also available.

The S.W.I.F.T. implementation of an X.25 user interface announced to be an
alternative to and eventually a replacement of their current BSC protocol is
planned to be supported.

S.W.I.F.T. required changes will not be applied to Version 2 after September
1994, nor will the support of the S.W.I.F.T. User Security Enhancements (USE)
be made available for Version 2. Only Version 3 will be updated after 1994.

MERVA/2 Version 3 is the successor of MERVA/2 Version 2. It is IBM's offering
for PS/2s to process, send, and receive SWIFT messages via the SWIFT network
and Telex messages via the Telex network. It also connects to other MERVA
installations in the PS/2 and System/390* environment.

MERVA/2 Version 3 offers competitive advantages in the area of functionality,
integration into PS/2 installations and price in comparison to the main
competitors that are able to handle a comparable message load.

The MERVA Connection/400 feature now allows full integration of MERVA/2 Version
3 into institutions with an AS/400 environment, so does the MERVA
Connection/6000 for the RS/6000 environment.

HIGHLIGHTS MERVA/2 Version 3 provides the following new functions:

    o   SWIFT USE including Secure Login Select (SLS) and Bilateral Key
        Exchange (BKE)
    o   Flexible access to Correspondents File
    o   Integrated User Authorization
    o   Improved support of User Messages
    o   MERVA Connection/400 (priced feature)
    o   MERVA Connection/6000 (priced feature)
    and - as separate products:
    o   MERVA PREMIUM Support/2 Version 3
    o   MERVA Branch/2 Version 3
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 239. IBM CALLPATH CALLCOORDINATOR FOR WINDOWS VERSION 1.0 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CallPath (R) CallCoordinator for Windows, a licensed Windows (1) application,
can help to increase the productivity of call centers, help desks, and service
centers.  Key features of this call management application, via the CallPath
CallCoordinator/2 Server, include:

    o   Telephone control from a LAN-attached Windows workstation that
        provides inbound and outbound call functions (for example,
        intelligent answering, dial, conference, consult, transfer,
        etc.).
    o   Ability to transfer both data and voice between workstations.
    o   Ability to access applications in multiple operating
        environments.
    o   Ability to access several telephone systems, provided the vendor
        supports the computer to telephone system link, via CallPath
        SwitchServer/2 (TM).  (Refer to IBM Software Announcement
        293-512, IBM CallPath Product Family Overview, dated
        September 21, 1993.)
    o   Ability to connect to DirectTalk (TM) voice processing systems,
        via IBM CallPath CallCoordinator/2 product.  (Refer to IBM
        Software Announcement 293-735, dated December 21, 1993.)
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation (1)
Registered trademark of Windows, Inc. (TM) Trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation (2) Registered trademark of Wall Data Incorporated (3)
Registered trademark of Novell, Incorporated

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Provides a Windows application for controlling the telephone for
        inbound and outboud call functions
    o   Offers the ability for the caller's customer data to appear on
        the agent's display screen, simultaneous with the agent answering
        the telephone, thus eliminating set-up time for the transaction
    o   Transfers customer data and voice between agents' workstations
    o   Shares data between applications via Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
    o   Accesses hosts via the emulation programs, IBM Personal
        Communications/3270 Version 3.1, or Rumba (2) for AS/400 (R), or
        Rumba for the Mainframe by Wall Data Incorporated
    o   Provides a tool for developing Host Application Transaction (HAT)
        files.  These files allow automation of interactions between the
        CallCoordinator for Windows workstation and a host computer
    o   Connects to server-based systems, such as Novell (3) NetWare
    o   Supports industry-standard protocols, such as Netbios and IPX/SPX
    o   Provides a user application that when installed, results in a
        working system capable of receiving inbound calls or making
        outbound calls; and it provides assistance for integrating
        telephony functions into existing business applications
        -   Provides a graphical user interface familiar to the Windows
            environment
        -   Provides call and note logging functions
        -   Provides electronic directory functions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 240. IBM NETVIEW DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT AGENT/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NetView* Distribution Management Agent/2 (NetView DMA/2) is a Licensed Program
Product that runs in OS/2* workstations and acts as a Change Control Client (CC
Client) in a TCP/IP network controlled by NetView DM/6000, running on AIX/6000*
and acting as Change Control Server (CC Server).

In a Client/Server relationship with NetView DM/6000, NetView DMA/2 provides
support for the installation and maintenance of the OS/2 Operating System, of
the other sub_systems and of Vendor and customer RYO application software
running in its host machine.

NetView DMA/2 accepts NetView DM/6000 Administrator's scheduled "push"
installation requests for the software used in its host WS and reports the
results of the performed functions to update the centralized NetView DM/6000
database which keeps track of what software Packages are installed in each WS
installed within the NetView DM/6000 domain (CC domain).

As an alternative to the "pull" approach, depending on the authorization
provided by the NetView DM/6000 Administrator, a CC Client user can be enabled
to install and maintain his WS software at his own pace ('pull' CC Client).

Additionally, NetView DMA/2 provides its user with the capability to
distribute/collect data files to/from other CC Client WSs installed either
within its NetView DM/6000 CC domain or outside it.

The NetView DM/6000 domain, where the NetView DMA/2 operates as a CC Client,
can be homogeneous (composed by only OS/2 workstations using NetView DMA/2) or
heterogeneous (also including AIX/6000 workstations with NetView DMA/6000
acting as CC Client).

NetView DMA/2 in conjunction with NetView DM/6000 can also be part of a NetView
DM/MVS controlled network.

NetView DM/6000, acting as a CC Server and NetView DMA/6000 acting as a CC
Client are announced as separately orderable Licensed Program Products.

Related Licensed Program Products Announcement Letters:

    o   NetView DMA/6000 (5765-214) Announcement Letter 294-YYYY,
        January 11, 1994;
    o   NetView DM/6000 (5765-196) Announcement Letter 294-YYYY,
        January 11, 1994;
    o   NetView DM/MVS Release 5 (5685-016) Announcement Letter 294-YYYY,
        January 11, 1994.

NetView DMA/2 is part of the NetView DM/6000 Client/Server solution for data
and software Distribution and Change Control.

Therefore, the Product Positioning of NetView DMA/2, which provides the Change
Control Client functions for OS/2 machines, can only be described in relation
to NetView DM/6000, which provides the required Change Control Server
functions.

For this reason, the NetView DM/6000 Product Positioning is re-stated here as
follows:

NetView DM/6000 is IBM's key product providing a scalable data and software
Distribution and Change Management solution for AIX/6000 driven distributed
networks composed of homogeneous or heterogeneous TCP/IP connected AIX/6000 and
OS/2 Client WSs.

It supports a variety of customer environments ranging between independent
groups of users, multiple interconnected groups of users, and multiple groups
of users interconnected among themselves and to an MVS system where NetView
DM/MVS is installed.

NetView DM/6000 and NetView DM/MVS are part of a family of Licensed Program
Products which also include NetView DM/2.

NetView DM/2 is IBM's key product providing a scalable data and software
distribution and Change Management solution for OS/2 driven distributed
networks composed of NetBIOS LANs including OS/2, DOS and DOS/WINDOWS Client
workstations.

NetView DM/2 as well as NetView DM/6000 support a variety of customer
environments ranging between independent groups of users, multiple
interconnected groups of users, and multiple groups of users interconnected
among themselves and to an MVS system where NetView DM/MVS is installed.

While NetView DM/6000 should be used by customers who intend to manage data and
software distribution and Change Control in homogeneous/heterogeneous TCP/IP
networks from a RISC System/6000 machine, NetView DM/2 should be used by
customers who intend to manage data and software distribution and Change
Control in OS/2 driven NetBIOS LANs.

In addition, while NetView DM/6000 supports TCP/IP networks composed of
AIX/6000's, OS/2's and future IBM and non_IBM platforms as described by the
Statement Of Direction on CC Clients, NetView DM/2 supports NetBIOS LANs and
can include OS/2, DOS and DOS/WINDOWS Client workstations.

NetView DM/6000 can also be installed as a Change Control Single Node (no
Client/Server functions) in AIX/6000 workstations directly connected to NetView
DM/MVS through SNA LU6.2 networks.

AIX/6000 workstations directly connected to NetView DM/MVS are also supported
by the NetView Distribution Manager feature of the IBM AIX NetView Host
Commands and Distribution Facility/6000 Licensed Program Product.  However, the
connectivity of NetView DM/MVS to the IBM AIX NetView Host Commands and
Distribution Facility/6000 is based on a LU0 protocol and the software
installation process at the target workstations is controlled by AIX shell
scripts, rather than by a built_in agent, as in the NetView DM/6000 product. In
addition, reporting of the results of the installations to NetView DM/MVS and
the related tracking of the software levels installed at the target
workstations, are not performed when the IBM AIX NetView Host Command and
Distribution Facility/6000 is used.  On the basis of the above, the NetView
DM/6000 Change Control Single Node configuration should be marketed to
customers who intend to manage data and software Distribution and Change
Control on RISC System/6000's directly connected to MVS using a solution much
more robust than the one based on the IBM AIX NetView Host Command and
Distribution Facility/6000 and requiring level tracking of the software
installed in each target workstation at the MVS central site.

Finally, NetView DM/6000 supersedes the AIX SoftDist/6000 PRPQ 1P 91100
(5799-PYH) which will, then, be no longer marketed after June 30, 1994.
Customers using the AIX SoftDist/6000 PRPQ P91100 (5799-PYH) have the option to
upgrade to NetView DM/6000 at no additional charges.  They are allowed to order
from IBM, at no additional charges, a number of NetView DM/6000 (Change Control
Server) and NetView DMA/6000 (Change Control Client) Licensed Program Products
equal to and with the same configuration of the installed AIX SoftDist/6000
PRPQ P91100 (5799-PYH), if used to replace AIX SoftDist/6000. This offering
applies to both AIX SoftDist Basic and DSLO licenses and it is valid until
December 31, 1994.

HIGHLGHTS NetView DMA/2, in conjunction with NetView DM/6000, provides:

    o   Electronic software and data distribution in a variety of
        customer network environments.
    o   Distribution Time Windows and Schedules
    o   Preparation of packages to be installed on remote WSs, under
        control of NetView DMA/2
    o   Management of software installation, maintenance, level control
        and status tracking (Change Control) in a variety of customer
        network environments:
        -   Centrally initiated Change Control functions (push)
        -   Client user initiated Change Control function (pull)
        -   CID installation method
        -   Generic Installation method
        -   Roll back to previous level
        -   De-installation of software packages (Uninstall)
        -   Use of the NetView DM/6000 database to view packages
            installed at the Workstation
        -   Change Control Time Windowing and Scheduling
        -   Management of hardware and software pre/co-requisites
            (including disk space checking ) prior to installation.
        -   Automatic installation tailoring at the target WSs
        -   Forcing re-installation of packages
        -   Support for registering CC Client WSs pre-installed software
            to NetView DM/6000
        -   Software packages distributed through physical media rather
            than electronically
    o   Initiate command files
    o   Logging and tracking of Distribution and Change Control requests
        and of related results
    o   User exits for notifications
    o   Presentation Manager SystemView Integration Level 1 conformant
        GUI and CLI for itself
    o   Presentation Manager SystemView Integration Level 1 conformant
        GUI, to remotely administer NetView DM/6000
    o   Synergy with NetView/6000 and NetView
* Signifies a trademark of registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.